summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/macros/latex/contrib/exam
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900
committerNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900
commite0c6872cf40896c7be36b11dcc744620f10adf1d (patch)
tree60335e10d2f4354b0674ec22d7b53f0f8abee672 /macros/latex/contrib/exam
Initial commit
Diffstat (limited to 'macros/latex/contrib/exam')
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/exam/README50
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/exam/exam.cls8306
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/exam/exam.md53
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/exam/examdoc.pdfbin0 -> 481243 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/exam/examdoc.tex8770
5 files changed, 17129 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/exam/README b/macros/latex/contrib/exam/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..01b54c4184
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/exam/README
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+This is version 2.603 of the exam document class, dated December 17,
+2017.
+
+The exam document class, together with its user's guide examdoc.tex,
+attempts to make it easy for even a LaTeX novice to prepare exams.
+Simple commands are provided to:
+
+1. Create questions, parts of questions, subparts of parts, and
+subsubparts of subparts, all with optional point values.
+
+2. Create a grading table, indexed either by question number (listing
+each question and the total possible points for that question) or by
+page number (listing each page with points and the total possible
+points for that page). A grading table can cover the entire exam or
+just a part of the exam. Grading tables can have multiple rows or
+multiple columns.
+
+3. Create headers and footers that are each specified in three parts:
+One part to be left justified, one part to be centered, and one part
+to be right justified.
+
+4. Have headers and/or footers that are different on the first page of
+the exam, different on the last page of the exam, and that vary
+depending on whether the page number is odd or even, or on whether the
+current page continues a question from a previous page, or on whether
+the last question on the current page continues onto the following
+page.
+
+5. Have multiple line headers and/or footers, and to increase the part
+of the page devoted to headers and/or footers to allow for this.
+
+6. Include solutions and have these solutions either printed or
+ignored (or replaced automatically by space in which the students can
+write their answers) depending on a single command.
+
+7. Leave blank space, or space in a box, or lined space, or dotted
+lined space, or space filled with a grid.
+
+8. Change the words that are inserted by the document class (for,
+e.g., point values, or table headings), so that they can be adapted to
+personal taste and/or languages other than English.
+
+The user's guide examdoc.tex attempts to explain all of the
+possibilities in a readable way, with many examples.
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license
+or (at your option) any later version.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/exam/exam.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/exam/exam.cls
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cc587b3d65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/exam/exam.cls
@@ -0,0 +1,8306 @@
+% exam.cls
+%
+% A LaTeX2e document class for preparing exams.
+
+%% exam.cls
+%% Copyright (c) 1994, 1997, 2000, 2004, 2008, 2011,
+%% 2015, 2017 Philip S. Hirschhorn
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
+%
+% This work consists of the files exam.cls and examdoc.tex.
+
+
+% The user's guide for exam.cls is in the file examdoc.tex.
+
+
+%%% Philip Hirschhorn
+%%% Department of Mathematics
+%%% Wellesley College
+%%% Wellesley, MA 02481
+%%% psh@math.mit.edu
+
+% The newest version of this documentclass should always be available
+% from my web page: http://www-math.mit.edu/~psh/
+
+
+\def\fileversion{2.603}
+\def\filedate{2017/12/17}
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% If there's some feature that you'd like that this file doesn't
+% provide, tell me about it.
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% Thanks to:
+%
+% Piet van Oostrum, from whose excellent ``fancyheadings.sty'' we
+% shamelessly stole most of the code for setting the headers and
+% footers.
+%
+% Mate Wierdl <mw@wierdlmpc.msci.memphis.edu>, who contributed the
+% code so that if the number of points is ``1'', then the default
+% value of \pointname will print ``1 point'' instead of ``1 points''.
+%
+% Tom Brikowski <brikowi@utdallas.edu>, who contributed the code for
+% making the number of points and number of questions available as
+% macros (as well as the idea of putting the number of points in a
+% box, instead of in parentheses). (I changed his code to make this
+% all optional, so if there are errors there, it's my fault and not
+% his.)
+%
+% Ottmar Beucher <beucher@fh-karlsruhe.de>, Dan Drake
+% <drake@math.umn.edu>, and Justus Piater <Justus.Piater@ULg.ac.be> who
+% contributed ideas and code for the \pointsofquestion and \gradetable
+% commands for printing a Grading Table. (I changed all the code to
+% make this compatible with hyperref.sty, so if there are errors there,
+% it's my fault and not theirs.)
+%
+% Justus Piater <Justus.Piater@ULg.ac.be>, who contributed the code for
+% the solution environment. (I changed his code to allow page breaks
+% inside solutions so, once again, if it's buggy, it's my fault.)
+%
+% Donald Arseneau <asnd@triumf.ca>, who created the excellent
+% ``framed.sty'' and generously allowed me to include basically the
+% whole thing in exam.cls, making the few changes needed for it to
+% work well with question environments:
+% framed.sty v 0.8a 21-Jul-2003
+% Copyright (C) 1992-2003 by Donald Arseneau
+% These macros may be freely transmitted, reproduced, or modified
+% provided that this notice is left intact.
+%
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Changelog since version 2.4:
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.603, 2017/12/15
+
+% No longer betatest.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.602$\beta$, 2017/12/15
+
+% We changed the code for multicolumn grade and point tables to remove
+% the incompatibility with colortbl.sty and other packages that load
+% colortbl.sty (e.g., xcolor.sty with the "table" option).
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.601$\beta$, 2017/09/22
+
+% We changed command and environment names in the code from framed.sty
+% that's included (slightly modified) in exam.cls so that the user can
+% say \usepackage{framed} without creating conflicts. This also allows
+% the user to use packages, such as minted.sty, that load framed.sty
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.6, 2017/09/19
+
+% No longer betatest.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.510$\beta$, 2016/10/11
+
+% Bugfix: We changed \@setheadheight and \@setfootheight to fix a bug
+% that was introduced by the bugfix in version 2.306beta, 2009/03/28:
+% If the second page has a different \textheight (because of a change
+% in either headheight or footheight between pages 1 and 2), then page
+% 2 would use the \textheight of page 1. Pages 3 and beyond would get
+% the correct \textheight. The original version of this set \@colroom
+% and \vsize to the new \textheight, but that had a bug in that if a
+% float appeared at the top of a page, there would be no notice taken
+% of the space lost to the float, and so the text would overrun the
+% bottom of the page. The bugfix in version 2.306beta eliminated the
+% changes to \@colht and \vsize. In this bugfix, we adjust \@colroom,
+% \@colht, and \vsize in the same way that we adjust \textheight.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.509$\beta$, 2016/09/12
+
+% Multicolumn grade and point tables, and a new syntax for multirow
+% grade and point tables (which were introduced in version
+% 2.508beta).
+
+% Multicolumn tables are vertically oriented, while multirow tables
+% are horizontally oriented, and so they do not take the optional
+% argument choosing between horizontal and vertical. They all take
+% one required argument specifying the number of columns (for
+% multicolumn) or the number of rows (for multirow).
+
+% The tables can be:
+
+% grade tables or point tables,
+
+% plain, bonus, or combined,
+
+% indexed by questions or by pages,
+
+% complete or partial.
+
+% As usual, if you omit the optional argument that chooses between
+% questions and pages, you get questions.
+
+% The new commands are:
+
+% \def\multirowgradetable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowpointtable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowbonusgradetable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowbonuspointtable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowcombinedgradetable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowcombinedpointtable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+
+% \def\multirowpartialgradetable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowpartialpointtable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowpartialbonusgradetable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowpartialbonuspointtable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowpartialcombinedgradetable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowpartialcombinedpointtable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+
+% \def\multicolumngradetable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnpointtable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnbonusgradetable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnbonuspointtable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumncombinedgradetable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumncombinedpointtable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+
+% \def\multicolumnpartialgradetable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnpartialpointtable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnpartialbonusgradetable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnpartialbonuspointtable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnpartialcombinedgradetable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnpartialcombinedpointtable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+
+% The older grade and point table commands can still be used. For
+% example, the commands
+
+% \gradetable[h][questions]
+% \multirowgradetable{1}[questions]
+
+% are equivalent.
+
+% The distance between the rows of a multirow table and between the
+% columns of a multicolumn table is \doublerulesep, the default value
+% of which is 2.0pt. You can change that using a \setlength command,
+% as in
+
+% \setlength{\doublerulesep}{0.5in}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.508$\beta$, 2016/08/06
+
+% New commands: Multirow grade and point tables.
+
+% These are all horizontally oriented tables, and so do not take the
+% optional argument choosing between horizontal and vertical. They all
+% take one required argument specifying the number of columns, which is
+% the number of columns used for the point values (including the total),
+% but not counting the column of row headings.
+
+% Note: The syntax was changed in version 2.509beta, so that you now
+% specify the number of *rows* rather than the number of *columns*! For
+% example, the first command below should now be
+
+% \multirowgradetable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+
+% The tables can be:
+
+% grade tables or point tables,
+
+% plain, bonus, or combined,
+
+% indexed by questions or by pages,
+
+% complete or partial.
+
+% The new commands are:
+
+
+% \multirowgradetable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \multirowpointtable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \multirowbonusgradetable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \multirowbonuspointtable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \multirowcombinedgradetable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \multirowcombinedpointtable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+
+% \multirowpartialgradetable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \multirowpartialpointtable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \multirowpartialbonusgradetable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \multirowpartialbonuspointtable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \multirowpartialcombinedgradetable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \multirowpartialcombinedpointtable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.507$\beta$, 2016/07/14
+
+% New commands:
+
+% \pointstwosided
+% \pointstwosidedreversed
+
+% The first causes points to be in the right margin on odd numbered
+% pages and in the left margin on even numbered pages.
+
+% The second causes points to be in the left margin on odd numbered
+% pages and in the right margin on even numbered pages.
+
+% Also: Some minor edits (e.g., deleting the unused \thebonuspoints).
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.506$\beta$, 2016/05/12
+
+% Fixed an obscure bug that arose only when \CorrectChoiceEmphasis
+% used color and a \CorrectChoice (in a choices or checkboxes
+% environment) followed a \choice whose text completely filled its
+% last line, and which was not separated from the \CorrectChoice by a
+% blank line, in which case an extra (blank) line was inserted by that
+% \choice. We fixed this by adding an improvised "\leavehmode"
+% (styled after \leavevmode) to the \CorrectChoice command in both the
+% choices and checkboxes environments, which caused the text of the
+% previous \choice to be broken into lines *before* the \special
+% inserted by the \color command was added.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.505$\beta$, 2016/05/10
+
+% We fixed a bug in the choices and checkboxes environments that arose
+% only when \CorrectChoiceEmphasis used color. If it did, and if the
+% text of a correct choice exactly filled a line, and if there was no
+% blank line in the latex file separating this correct choice from the
+% following choice, there would be an extra blank line inserted after
+% the correct choice. We did this by inserting \color@begingroup and
+% \color@endgroup as needed. (We're pretty sure the actual fix was
+% the \endgraf in the expansion of \color@endgroup.)
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.504$\beta$, 2016/05/09
+
+% We fixed a bug in the solutionbox environment that caused enumerate,
+% itemize, or description environments to have their text stick into
+% the right margin. We did this by resetting \@totalleftmargin and
+% \linewidth in the box containing the solution.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.503$\beta$, 2016/03/25
+
+% New commands:
+
+% \colorfillwithlines
+% \colorfillwithdottedlines
+
+% The first causes the lines drawn by the \fillwithlines command to be
+% drawn in color. The default color is set by the command
+
+% \definecolor{FillWithLinesColor}{gray}{0.8}
+
+% and the color can be changed by giving a new \definecolor command.
+% You can return to black lines by giving the command
+
+% \nocolorfillwithlines
+
+% \colorfillwithdottedlines causes the lines drawn by the
+% \fillwithdottedlines command to be drawn in color. The default
+% color is set by the command
+
+% \definecolor{FillWithDottedLinesColor}{gray}{0.8}
+
+% and the color can be changed by giving a new \definecolor command.
+% You can return to black dotted lines by giving the command
+
+% \nocolorfillwithdottedlines
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.502$\beta$, 2016/03/23
+
+% The command
+
+% \colorsolutionboxes
+
+% that was created in version 2.501beta now affects not only the boxes
+% created by \solutionbox, but also by \makeemptybox, \solutionorbox,
+% and all of the boxes printed by all of the various solution
+% environments when solutions are being printed surrounded by a box.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.501$\beta$, 2016/02/08
+
+% Changed the \solutionbox environment so that it works correctly
+% inside a tabular.
+
+% Also: The \solutionbox frame can now be printed in color, as long as
+% you load color.sty in the preamble.
+%
+% Usage: Say
+%
+% \usepackage{color}
+%
+% in the preamble, and then give the command
+%
+% \colorsolutionboxes
+%
+% to have the frame around a solutionbox in color. The default color
+% was created by the command
+%
+% \definecolor{SolutionBoxColor}{gray}{0.8}
+%
+% and you can change the color by giving a new \definecolor command
+% (which must be done *after* the \colorsolutionboxes command).
+%
+% To cancel color solutionbox frames and return to black, give the
+% command
+%
+% \nocolorsolutionboxes
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.5 2015/05/07
+
+% No longer betatest.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.408$\beta$ 2013/11/17
+
+% New commands:
+%
+% \firstqinrange{whatever}
+% \lastqinrange{whatever}
+% \numqinrange{whatever}
+%
+% where ``whatever'' is the name of a grading range.
+%
+% \firstqinrange{whatever} prints the number of the first question in
+% the range.
+%
+% \lastqinrange{whatever} prints the number of the last question in the
+% range.
+%
+% \numqinrange{whatever} prints the number of questions in the range.
+%
+% We changed a couple of internal command name related to grading
+% ranges. If the user defines the range `myrange', then we now use
+
+% \range@myrange@firstp
+% \range@myrange@lastp
+% \range@myrange@firstq
+% \range@myrange@lastq
+%
+% where we used to use
+%
+% \tbl@myrange@firstp
+% \tbl@myrange@lastp
+% \tbl@myrange@firstq
+% \tbl@myrange@lastq
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.407$\beta$ 2012/12/19
+
+% New environment:
+%
+% solutionbox
+%
+% The solutionbox environment is different from the other solution
+% environments (solution, solutionorbox, solutionorlines,
+% solutionordottedlines, and solutionorgrid), in that
+%
+% (1) The box is always printed, whether answers are being printed
+% or not.
+%
+% (2) The argument giving the size of the box is a required
+% argument, not an optional argument, and so it should be enclosed
+% in braces, not in brackets. It can be either a length or
+% \stretch{number}.
+%
+% (3) We make no use of the TheSolution environment; the solutionbox
+% environment is completely freestanding.
+%
+% If answers are not being printed then only the box is printed, with
+% nothing in it. If answers are being printed, then the solution is
+% printed inside of the box.
+%
+% Note: It's the user's responsibility to be sure that the box is
+% large enough to hold the solution! If the solution takes up too
+% much vertical space, then it will spill out of the bottom of the
+% box, overwriting whatever follows the box.
+%
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.406$\beta$, 2012/12/16
+%
+% New command:
+%
+% \noquestionsonthispage
+%
+% This command tells the \ifcontinuation and \ifincomplete commands
+% to assume that no part of any question is on this page. This is
+% similar to the job done by the \nomorequestions command for the
+% pages that follow the end of all of the questions.
+%
+%
+% If you give the command \noquestionsonthispage on a page, then
+%
+% (1) \ifcontinuation on that page will expand to its second
+% argument,
+% (2) \ifincomplete on that page will expand to its second
+% argument, and
+% (3) an \ifincomplete on an earlier page will not assume that a
+% question from that earlier page continues onto this page.
+%
+% The way that this command affects the \ifincomplete command on
+% earlier pages is as follows: If there is a page with no questions or
+% parts or subparts or subsubparts, then the last page before that
+% with a question (or part, etc.) would normally be deemed incomplete;
+% if, however, the page with no questions (or parts, etc.) (along with
+% all adjacent pages with no questions or parts etc.) has a
+% \noquestionsonthispage command, then that last page with a question
+% (or part, etc.) will not be deemed incomplete.
+%
+% Note that if you're tempted to use this command on a page that follows
+% the end of all of the questions, then you should probably use the
+% command \nomorequestions instead.
+%
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.405$\beta$, 2012/10/21
+%
+% It is now possible to use a parts, subparts, or subsubparts
+% environment inside one of the solution environments (solution,
+% solutionorbox, solutionorlines, solutionordottedlines, or
+% solutionorgrid) without getting problems from multiply defined
+% labels or having its points (if any) counted as being actual points
+% on the exam.
+%
+% Any \part, \subpart, or \subsubpart command inside one of the
+% solution environments now writes a \PgInfo command in the .aux file
+% of the form question2@object3, but no labels and no other \PgInfo
+% commands. In addition, if there are points assigned to any of these
+% commands inside any of the solution environments, those points are
+% not added to the points of the question or the points on the page,
+% and do not affect any gradetables or pointtables.
+%
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.404$\beta$, 2012/09/03
+%
+% New command:
+%
+% \fillwithgrid{length}
+%
+% New environment:
+%
+% solutionorgrid
+%
+% These are similar to the \fillwithlines command and the
+% solutionorlines environment.
+%
+% By default, the created grids are in black. However, if you give the
+% commands
+%
+% \usepackage{color}
+% \colorgrids
+%
+% then the grids will be in color, by default a light gray. That
+% default color was defined by the command
+%
+% \definecolor{GridColor}{gray}{0.8}
+%
+% You can change the color by redefining the color GridColor, and you
+% can return to using black grids by giving the command
+%
+% \nocolorgrids
+%
+% The default grid size and grid line thickness were set by the
+% commands
+%
+% \setlength{\gridsize}{5mm}
+% \setlength{\gridlinewidth}{0.1pt}
+%
+% You can change either or both of those by giving new \setlength
+% commands. The period of the grid is \gridsize (both horizontally
+% and vertically). That is, the horizontal distance from the left
+% edge of one vertical line to the left edge of the next vertical line
+% is \gridsize, as is the vertical distance from the top edge of one
+% horizontal line to the top edge of the next horizontal line. Thus,
+% each square has outer side length equal to \gridsize+\gridlinewidth.
+%
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.403$\beta$, 2012/08/29:
+%
+% We changed the code for the command \fillin (which had been modified
+% in version 2.402beta) so that if only one optional argument is used,
+% a space following that optional argument will not be ignored. We
+% did this in such a way that the second optional argument will be
+% recognized even when spaces appear in between the optional
+% arguments.
+%
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.402$\beta$, 2012/08/21:
+%
+% We modified the command \fillin that we had created in version
+% 2.401beta. \fillin now takes two optional arguments (and no required
+% arguments).
+%
+% \fillin can take two optional arguments, as in
+%
+% \fillin[Answer][Length]
+%
+% The first optional argument is the answer to be printed above the line
+% when \printanswers is in effect; the default value is empty. That
+% line is printed a distance of \answerclearance below the baseline.
+%
+% The second optional argument is the length of the line that we print;
+% the default value is \fillinlinelength. The value of
+% \fillinlinelength is set with the command
+%
+% \setlength\fillinlinelength{1in}
+%
+% and can be changed by giving a new \setlength command.
+%
+% When answers are being printed, the first optional argument is
+% printed subject to the declarations in the argument of the last
+% \CorrectChoiceEmphasis command. It is centered on the line unless
+% it is too long, in which case it extends to the right of the line.
+%
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Version 2.401$\beta$, 2012/08/20:
+%
+%
+% New command:
+%
+% \fillin[CorrectAnswer]{width}
+%
+% This is for use in fill in the blank questions. This command inserts
+% a blank line of width ``width''. If answers are being printed and if
+% the optional argument ``CorrectAnswer'' appears, then the optional
+% argument is printed subject to the declarations in the argument of the
+% last \CorrectChoiceEmphasis command, and it is printed a distance of
+% \answerclearance above the line. It is centered on the line unless it
+% is too long, in which case it extends to the right of the line.
+%
+% Note: We changed this command in version 2.401beta.
+%
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+
+\ProvidesClass{exam}[\filedate\space Version \fileversion\space by
+ Philip Hirschhorn]
+
+\RequirePackage{ifthen}
+
+\newif\ifprintanswers
+\printanswersfalse
+\DeclareOption{answers}{\printanswerstrue}
+\DeclareOption{noanswers}{\printanswersfalse}
+
+\newif\ifcancelspace
+\cancelspacefalse
+\DeclareOption{cancelspace}{\cancelspacetrue}
+\DeclareOption{nocancelspace}{\cancelspacefalse}
+
+% The following keeps track of whether the user has requested that we
+% add up the points on the exam. We make the default false so that
+% users who put other than numbers into the points argument of a
+% question (or part, or subpart) won't get error messages.
+% We use \if@printtotalpoints as a flag to signal that we are counting
+% points, so that we will know to print the total on the screen (and
+% in the log file). We use this separate flag so that the user can
+% use both \addpoints and \noaddpoints to count some points and not
+% others, but still have the total printed when we finish the file no
+% matter what the state of \if@addpoints.
+\newif\if@addpoints
+\newif\if@printtotalpoints
+\def\addpoints{\global\@addpointstrue\global\@printtotalpointstrue}
+\def\noaddpoints{\global\@addpointsfalse}
+\@addpointsfalse
+\@printtotalpointsfalse
+\DeclareOption{addpoints}{\addpoints}
+
+
+\DeclareOption*{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
+}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+\LoadClass{article}
+
+
+
+
+% *****************
+% ** PAGE LAYOUT **
+% *****************
+
+
+% We set the parameters in terms of \paperwidth and \paperheight
+% so that the options
+
+% a4paper
+% a5paper
+% b5paper
+% letterpaper
+% legalpaper
+% executivepaper
+% landscape
+
+% will all work:
+
+\setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}
+\addtolength{\textwidth}{-2in}
+\setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0pt}
+\setlength{\evensidemargin}{0pt}
+
+\setlength{\headheight}{15pt}
+\setlength{\headsep}{15pt}
+\setlength{\topmargin}{0in}
+\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
+\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
+\setlength{\footskip}{29pt}
+\setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}
+\addtolength{\textheight}{-2.2in}
+
+\setlength{\marginparwidth}{.5in}
+\setlength{\marginparsep}{5pt}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+% ****************
+% ** EXTRAWIDTH **
+% ****************
+
+\newlength\@extrawidth
+
+% \@rightmargin is needed for \pointsinrightmargin and
+% \pointsdroppedatright, so that we can right justify the points:
+\newlength\@rightmargin
+\setlength{\@rightmargin}{1in}
+
+% We put the argument of \extrawidth into a length so that it will
+% work correctly even if it's negative:
+
+\def\extrawidth#1{%
+ \@extrawidth=#1
+ \advance \textwidth by \@extrawidth
+ \divide\@extrawidth by 2
+ \advance\oddsidemargin by -\@extrawidth
+ \advance\evensidemargin by -\@extrawidth
+ % Bug fix, 13 April 2004:
+ %\advance\@rightmargin by \@extrawidth
+ \advance\@rightmargin by -\@extrawidth
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Making room for large headers and footers
+
+% The following are used to save the effect of any changes to
+% \topmargin and \textheight caused by \extraheadheight or
+% \extrafootheight commands. They hold the values currently in effect.
+% We put them into lengths so that it will work correctly even if the
+% argument is negative:
+
+\newlength\@extrahead
+\newlength\@extrafoot
+\setlength{\@extrahead}{0in}
+\setlength{\@extrafoot}{0in}
+
+% The following are used to hold the requested values for extrahead and
+% extrafoot, first page and all pages after the first, and then the
+% similar things requested for the cover pages:
+\newlength\run@exhd
+\newlength\fp@exhd
+\newlength\run@exft
+\newlength\fp@exft
+\newlength\covrun@exhd
+\newlength\covfp@exhd
+\newlength\covrun@exft
+\newlength\covfp@exft
+
+\setlength{\run@exhd}{0in}
+\setlength{\fp@exhd}{0in}
+\setlength{\run@exft}{0in}
+\setlength{\fp@exft}{0in}
+\setlength{\covrun@exhd}{0in}
+\setlength{\covfp@exhd}{0in}
+\setlength{\covrun@exft}{0in}
+\setlength{\covfp@exft}{0in}
+
+\newcommand*\adj@hdht@ftht{%
+ \if@coverpages
+ \ifnum\value{page}=1\relax
+ \@setheadheight{\covfp@exhd}%
+ \@setfootheight{\covfp@exft}%
+ \else
+ \@setheadheight{\covrun@exhd}%
+ \@setfootheight{\covrun@exft}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum\value{page}=1\relax
+ \@setheadheight{\fp@exhd}%
+ \@setfootheight{\fp@exft}%
+ \else
+ \@setheadheight{\run@exhd}%
+ \@setfootheight{\run@exft}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand*\extraheadheight{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@xtrahd}{\@ytrahd}%
+}
+
+\def\@xtrahd[#1]#2{%
+ \setlength{\fp@exhd}{#1}%
+ \setlength{\run@exhd}{#2}%
+ \adj@hdht@ftht
+}
+
+\def\@ytrahd#1{%
+ \setlength{\fp@exhd}{#1}%
+ \setlength{\run@exhd}{#1}%
+ \adj@hdht@ftht
+}
+
+\newcommand*\extrafootheight{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@xtraft}{\@ytraft}%
+}
+
+\def\@xtraft[#1]#2{%
+ \setlength{\fp@exft}{#1}%
+ \setlength{\run@exft}{#2}%
+ \adj@hdht@ftht
+}
+
+\def\@ytraft#1{%
+ \setlength{\fp@exft}{#1}%
+ \setlength{\run@exft}{#1}%
+ \adj@hdht@ftht
+}
+
+\newcommand*\coverextraheadheight{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\cov@xtrahd}{\cov@ytrahd}%
+}
+
+\def\cov@xtrahd[#1]#2{%
+ \setlength{\covfp@exhd}{#1}%
+ \setlength{\covrun@exhd}{#2}%
+ \adj@hdht@ftht
+}
+
+\def\cov@ytrahd#1{%
+ \setlength{\covfp@exhd}{#1}%
+ \setlength{\covrun@exhd}{#1}%
+ \adj@hdht@ftht
+}
+
+\newcommand*\coverextrafootheight{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\cov@xtraft}{\cov@ytraft}%
+}
+
+\def\cov@xtraft[#1]#2{%
+ \setlength{\covfp@exft}{#1}%
+ \setlength{\covrun@exft}{#2}%
+ \adj@hdht@ftht
+}
+
+\def\cov@ytraft#1{%
+ \setlength{\covfp@exft}{#1}%
+ \setlength{\covrun@exft}{#1}%
+ \adj@hdht@ftht
+}
+
+\def\@appendoutput#1{%
+ \output=\expandafter{\the\output #1}%
+}
+
+\@appendoutput{\adj@hdht@ftht}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \@setheadheight and \@setfootheight:
+
+\def\@setheadheight#1{%
+ \begingroup % Avoid trouble from using \@temp and \@spaces
+ % Reset the effect of the most recent change:
+ \global\advance\topmargin by -\@extrahead
+ \global\advance\textheight by \@extrahead
+ % Bugfix, Version 2.510beta, 2016/10/11:
+ \global\advance\@colroom by \@extrahead
+ \global\advance\@colht by \@extrahead
+ \global\advance\vsize by \@extrahead
+ %
+ % Save the newly set value:
+ \def\@temp{#1}
+ \def\@spaces{ }
+ \ifx\@temp\@empty
+ \global\@extrahead=0in
+ \else
+ \ifx\@temp\@spaces
+ \global\@extrahead=0in
+ \else
+ \global\@extrahead=#1
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ % Set the new values:
+ \global\advance\topmargin by \@extrahead
+ \global\advance\textheight by -\@extrahead
+ % Bugfix, Version 2.510beta, 2016/10/11:
+ \global\advance\@colroom by -\@extrahead
+ \global\advance\@colht by -\@extrahead
+ \global\advance\vsize by -\@extrahead
+ %
+ % Bugfix, Version 2.510beta, 2016/10/11:
+ % We're fixing a bug that was introduced by the bugfix in version
+ % 2.306beta, 2009/03/28: If the second page has a different
+ % \textheight (because of a change in either headheight or
+ % footheight between pages 1 and 2), then page 2 would use the
+ % \textheight of page 1. Pages 3 and beyond would get the correct
+ % \textheight.
+ % The original version of this set \@colroom and \vsize to the new
+ % \textheight, but that had a bug in that if a float appeared at
+ % the top of a page, there would be no notice taken of the space
+ % lost to the float, and so the text would overrun the bottom of
+ % the page.
+ % In this bugfix, we adjust \@colroom, \@colht, and \vsize in the
+ % same way that we adjust \textheight.
+ %
+ % Make it take effect RIGHT NOW!:
+ % (The following stuff isn't necessary if \@setheadheight is
+ % executed only in the preamble or as we return from the output
+ % routine, but we're leaving it in so that this will still work if
+ % we use this at some random point in the middle of composing a
+ % page).
+ % Bugfix, Version 2.306beta, 2009/03/28:
+ % We don't do this!!
+ % If the user had a figure environment that floated to the
+ % top of a page, then this would cause that page to run
+ % over the footer and off the bottom of the page, because
+ % this somehow caused a full page's worth of stuff to be
+ % placed after the figure, as if the figure wasn't taking
+ % up space on the page.
+ % We *do* need to put \@colht at the correct new value, though,
+ % apparently because \@colht is set near the end of the
+ % output routine.
+% \global\@colht=\textheight
+%
+% \global\@colroom=\textheight
+% \global\vsize=\textheight
+% \global\pagegoal=\textheight
+ \endgroup
+}% @setheadheight
+
+\def\@setfootheight#1{%
+ \begingroup % Avoid trouble from using \@temp and \@spaces
+ % Reset the effect of the most recent change:
+ \global\advance\textheight by \@extrafoot
+ % Bugfix, Version 2.510beta, 2016/10/11:
+ \global\advance\@colroom by \@extrafoot
+ \global\advance\@colht by \@extrafoot
+ \global\advance\vsize by \@extrafoot
+ %
+ % Save the newly set value:
+ \def\@temp{#1}
+ \def\@spaces{ }
+ \ifx\@temp\@empty
+ \global\@extrafoot=0in
+ \else
+ \ifx\@temp\@spaces
+ \global\@extrafoot=0in
+ \else
+ \global\@extrafoot=#1
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ % Set the new values:
+ \global\advance\textheight by -\@extrafoot
+ % Bugfix, Version 2.510beta, 2016/10/11:
+ \global\advance\@colroom by -\@extrafoot
+ \global\advance\@colht by -\@extrafoot
+ \global\advance\vsize by -\@extrafoot
+ %
+ % Bugfix, Version 2.510beta, 2016/10/11:
+ % We're fixing a bug that was introduced by the bugfix in version
+ % 2.306beta, 2009/03/28: If the second page has a different
+ % \textheight (because of a change in either headheight or
+ % footheight between pages 1 and 2), then page 2 would use the
+ % \textheight of page 1. Pages 3 and beyond would get the correct
+ % \textheight.
+ % The original version of this set \@colroom and \vsize to the new
+ % \textheight, but that had a bug in that if a float appeared at
+ % the top of a page, there would be no notice taken of the space
+ % lost to the float, and so the text would overrun the bottom of
+ % the page.
+ % In this bugfix, we adjust \@colroom, \@colht, and \vsize in the
+ % same way that we adjust \textheight.
+ %
+ % Make it take effect RIGHT NOW!:
+ % (The following stuff isn't necessary if \@setfootheight is
+ % executed only in the preamble or as we return from the output
+ % routine, but we're leaving it in so that this will still work if
+ % we use this at some random point in the middle of composing a
+ % page).
+ % Bugfix, Version 2.306beta, 2009/03/28:
+ % We don't do this!!
+ % If the user had a figure environment that floated to the
+ % top of a page, then this would cause that page to run
+ % over the footer and off the bottom of the page, because
+ % this somehow caused a full page's worth of stuff to be
+ % placed after the figure, as if the figure wasn't taking
+ % up space on the page.
+ % We *do* need to put \@colht at the correct new value, though,
+ % apparently because \@colht is set near the end of the
+ % output routine.
+% \global\@colht=\textheight
+%
+% \global\@colroom=\textheight
+% \global\vsize=\textheight
+% \global\pagegoal=\textheight
+ \endgroup
+}% @setfootheight
+
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% *************************
+% ** HEADERS AND FOOTERS **
+% *************************
+%
+% The pagestyles available are head, foot, headandfoot, and empty.
+% \pagestyle{head} prints the head, and gives an empty foot.
+% \pagestyle{foot} prints the foot, and gives an empty head.
+% \pagestyle{headandfoot} prints both the head and the foot.
+% \pagestyle{empty} gives an empty head and an empty foot.
+%
+
+% Pagestyles:
+
+\newcommand*\ps@head{%
+ \@dohead
+ \@nofoot
+}
+
+\newcommand*\ps@headandfoot{%
+ \@dohead
+ \@dofoot
+}
+
+\newcommand*\ps@foot{%
+ \@nohead
+ \@dofoot
+}
+
+% \ps@empty is already defined by article.cls, so we'll
+% say \def instead of \newcommand*:
+\def\ps@empty{%
+ \@nohead
+ \@nofoot
+}
+
+\newif\if@coverpages
+\@coverpagesfalse
+
+\newcounter{num@coverpages}
+% We'll set this to zero in case there is no coverpages environment:
+\setcounter{num@coverpages}{0}
+
+\newenvironment{coverpages}{%
+ \ifnum \value{numquestions}>0\relax
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ Coverpages cannot be used after questions have begun.\MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ All question, part, subpart, and subsubpart environments
+ \MessageBreak
+ must begin after the cover pages are complete.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \@coverpagestrue
+ \pagenumbering{roman}%
+ \adj@hdht@ftht
+ }{%
+ \clearpage
+ \setcounter{num@coverpages}{\value{page}}%
+ \addtocounter{num@coverpages}{-1}%
+ \pagenumbering{arabic}%
+ % Bugfix, Version 2.307\beta, 2009/06/11:
+ % We have to say \@coverpagesfalse before \adj@hdht@ftht
+ % because we're still inside the group created by the
+ % coverpages environment and we want to set the
+ % extraheadheight and extrafootheight to the values correct
+ % for the first non-cover page:
+ \@coverpagesfalse
+ \adj@hdht@ftht
+}
+
+\newcommand*\cover@question@error{%
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ No questions are allowed in the cover pages.\MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ All question, part, subpart, and subsubpart environments
+ \MessageBreak
+ must begin after the cover pages are complete.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+}
+
+\newcommand*\@dohead{%
+ \def\@oddhead{%
+ \if@coverpages
+ \ifnum\value{page}=1\relax
+ \cov@fullhead
+ \else
+ \covrun@fullhead
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum\value{page}=1\relax
+ \@fullhead
+ \else
+ \run@fullhead
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }% @oddhead
+ \let\@evenhead=\@oddhead
+}
+
+\newcommand*\@dofoot{%
+ \def\@oddfoot{%
+ \if@coverpages
+ \ifnum\value{page}=1\relax
+ \cov@fullfoot
+ \else
+ \covrun@fullfoot
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum\value{page}=1\relax
+ \@fullfoot
+ \else
+ \run@fullfoot
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }% @oddfoot
+ \let\@evenfoot=\@oddfoot
+}
+
+\newcommand*\@nohead{%
+ \def\@oddhead{}%
+ \let\@evenhead=\@oddhead
+}
+
+\newcommand*\@nofoot{%
+ \def\@oddfoot{}%
+ \let\@evenfoot=\@oddfoot
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \@fullhead, \run@fullhead, \@fullfoot, and \run@fullfoot:
+
+\newcommand*\@fullhead{%
+ \vbox to \headheight{%
+ \vss
+ \hbox to \textwidth{%
+ \normalfont\rlap{\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\raggedright\@lhead\strut}}%
+ \hss\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\centering\@chead\strut}\hss
+ \llap{\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\raggedleft\@rhead\strut}}%
+ }% hbox
+ \if@headrule
+ \hrule
+ \else
+ % an invisible hrule, to keep positioning constant:
+ \hrule width 0pt
+ \fi
+ }% vbox
+}
+
+\newcommand*\run@fullhead{%
+ \vbox to \headheight{%
+ \vss
+ \hbox to \textwidth{%
+ \normalfont\rlap{\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\raggedright\run@lhead\strut}}%
+ \hss\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\centering\run@chead\strut}\hss
+ \llap{\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\raggedleft\run@rhead\strut}}%
+ }% hbox
+ \ifrun@headrule
+ \hrule
+ \else
+ % an invisible hrule, to keep positioning constant:
+ \hrule width 0pt
+ \fi
+ }% vbox
+}
+
+% We arrange it so that the very top of first line of text in the
+% foot is at a fixed position on the page, whether or not there's
+% a footrule:
+
+\newcommand*\@fullfoot{%
+ \vbox to 0pt{%
+ \if@footrule
+ \hrule
+ \else
+ % an invisible hrule, to keep positioning constant:
+ \hrule width 0pt
+ \fi
+ \vskip 3pt
+ \hbox to \textwidth{%
+ \normalfont\rlap{\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\raggedright\@lfoot}}%
+ \hss\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\centering\@cfoot}\hss
+ \llap{\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\raggedleft\@rfoot}}%
+ }% hbox
+ \vss
+ }% vbox
+}
+
+\newcommand*\run@fullfoot{%
+ \vbox to 0pt{%
+ \ifrun@footrule
+ \hrule
+ \else
+ % an invisible hrule, to keep positioning constant:
+ \hrule width 0pt
+ \fi
+ \vskip 3pt
+ \hbox to \textwidth{%
+ \normalfont\rlap{\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\raggedright\run@lfoot}}%
+ \hss\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\centering\run@cfoot}\hss
+ \llap{\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\raggedleft\run@rfoot}}%
+ }% hbox
+ \vss
+ }% vbox
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \cov@fullhead, \covrun@fullhead, \cov@fullfoot, and
+% \covrun@fullfoot:
+
+\newcommand*\cov@fullhead{%
+ \vbox to \headheight{%
+ \vss
+ \hbox to \textwidth{%
+ \normalfont\rlap{\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\raggedright\cov@lhead\strut}}%
+ \hss\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\centering\cov@chead\strut}\hss
+ \llap{\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\raggedleft\cov@rhead\strut}}%
+ }% hbox
+ \ifcov@headrule
+ \hrule
+ \else
+ % an invisible hrule, to keep positioning constant:
+ \hrule width 0pt
+ \fi
+ }% vbox
+}
+
+\newcommand*\covrun@fullhead{%
+ \vbox to \headheight{%
+ \vss
+ \hbox to \textwidth{%
+ \normalfont\rlap{\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\raggedright\covrun@lhead\strut}}%
+ \hss\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\centering\covrun@chead\strut}\hss
+ \llap{\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\raggedleft\covrun@rhead\strut}}%
+ }% hbox
+ \ifcovrun@headrule
+ \hrule
+ \else
+ % an invisible hrule, to keep positioning constant:
+ \hrule width 0pt
+ \fi
+ }% vbox
+}
+
+% We arrange it so that the very top of first line of text in the
+% foot is at a fixed position on the page, whether or not there's
+% a footrule:
+
+\newcommand*\cov@fullfoot{%
+ \vbox to 0pt{%
+ \ifcov@footrule
+ \hrule
+ \else
+ % an invisible hrule, to keep positioning constant:
+ \hrule width 0pt
+ \fi
+ \vskip 3pt
+ \hbox to \textwidth{%
+ \normalfont\rlap{\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\raggedright\cov@lfoot}}%
+ \hss\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\centering\cov@cfoot}\hss
+ \llap{\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\raggedleft\cov@rfoot}}%
+ }% hbox
+ \vss
+ }% vbox
+}
+
+\newcommand*\covrun@fullfoot{%
+ \vbox to 0pt{%
+ \ifcovrun@footrule
+ \hrule
+ \else
+ % an invisible hrule, to keep positioning constant:
+ \hrule width 0pt
+ \fi
+ \vskip 3pt
+ \hbox to \textwidth{%
+ \normalfont\rlap{\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\raggedright\covrun@lfoot}}%
+ \hss\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\centering\covrun@cfoot}\hss
+ \llap{\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\raggedleft\covrun@rfoot}}%
+ }% hbox
+ \vss
+ }% vbox
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% ********************************************
+% ** COMMANDS TO DEFINE HEADERS AND FOOTERS **
+% ********************************************
+%
+% \lhead[#1]{#2} sets the first page left head to #1, and the
+% running left head to #2
+%
+% \lhead{#1} sets both the first page left head and the running
+% left head to #1
+%
+% \chead, \rhead, \lfoot, \cfoot, and \rfoot work similarly.
+%
+%
+% \@lhead is the left head for Page 1
+% \run@lhead is the running left head
+% (i.e., for all pages other than the first)
+%
+% \@chead is the center head for Page 1
+% \run@chead is the running center head
+% (i.e., for all pages other than the first)
+%
+% etc.
+%
+% Alternative commands are:
+% \firstpageheader{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% \runningheader{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% or
+% \header{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% which is equivalent to the two commands
+% \firstpageheader{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% \runningheader{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+%
+% Alternative commands are:
+% \firstpagefooter{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% \runningfoother{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% or
+% \footer{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% which is equivalent to the two commands
+% \firstpagefooter{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% \runningfoother{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+
+\def\firstpageheader#1#2#3{%
+ \def\@lhead{#1}%
+ \def\@chead{#2}%
+ \def\@rhead{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\runningheader#1#2#3{%
+ \def\run@lhead{#1}%
+ \def\run@chead{#2}%
+ \def\run@rhead{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\header#1#2#3{%
+ \firstpageheader{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \runningheader{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\firstpagefooter#1#2#3{%
+ \def\@lfoot{#1}%
+ \def\@cfoot{#2}%
+ \def\@rfoot{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\runningfooter#1#2#3{%
+ \def\run@lfoot{#1}%
+ \def\run@cfoot{#2}%
+ \def\run@rfoot{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\footer#1#2#3{%
+ \firstpagefooter{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \runningfooter{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\lhead{\@ifnextchar[{\@xlhead}{\@ylhead}}
+\def\@xlhead[#1]#2{\def\@lhead{#1}\def\run@lhead{#2}}
+\def\@ylhead#1{\def\run@lhead{#1}\def\@lhead{#1}}
+
+\def\chead{\@ifnextchar[{\@xchead}{\@ychead}}
+\def\@xchead[#1]#2{\def\@chead{#1}\def\run@chead{#2}}
+\def\@ychead#1{\def\run@chead{#1}\def\@chead{#1}}
+
+\def\rhead{\@ifnextchar[{\@xrhead}{\@yrhead}}
+\def\@xrhead[#1]#2{\def\@rhead{#1}\def\run@rhead{#2}}
+\def\@yrhead#1{\def\run@rhead{#1}\def\@rhead{#1}}
+
+\def\lfoot{\@ifnextchar[{\@xlfoot}{\@ylfoot}}
+\def\@xlfoot[#1]#2{\def\@lfoot{#1}\def\run@lfoot{#2}}
+\def\@ylfoot#1{\def\run@lfoot{#1}\def\@lfoot{#1}}
+
+\def\cfoot{\@ifnextchar[{\@xcfoot}{\@ycfoot}}
+\def\@xcfoot[#1]#2{\def\@cfoot{#1}\def\run@cfoot{#2}}
+\def\@ycfoot#1{\def\run@cfoot{#1}\def\@cfoot{#1}}
+
+\def\rfoot{\@ifnextchar[{\@xrfoot}{\@yrfoot}}
+\def\@xrfoot[#1]#2{\def\@rfoot{#1}\def\run@rfoot{#2}}
+\def\@yrfoot#1{\def\run@rfoot{#1}\def\@rfoot{#1}}
+
+
+% Initialize head and foot:
+
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+
+\lhead{}
+\chead{}
+\rhead{}
+\lfoot{}
+\cfoot[]{Page \thepage}
+\rfoot{}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Coverpage headers and footers
+%
+% \coverlhead[#1]{#2} sets the first cover page left head to #1, and the
+% running cover left head to #2
+%
+% \coverlhead{#1} sets both the first cover page left head and the running
+% cover left head to #1
+%
+% \coverchead, \coverrhead, \coverlfoot, \covercfoot, and \coverrfoot
+% work similarly.
+%
+%
+% \cov@lhead is the left head for Page 1
+% \covrun@lhead is the running left head
+% (i.e., for all pages other than the first)
+%
+% \cov@chead is the center head for Page 1
+% \covrun@chead is the running center head
+% (i.e., for all pages other than the first)
+%
+% etc.
+%
+% Alternative commands are:
+% \coverfirstpageheader{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% \coverrunningheader{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% or
+% \coverheader{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% which is equivalent to the two commands
+% \coverfirstpageheader{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% \coverrunningheader{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+%
+% Alternative commands are:
+% \coverfirstpagefooter{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% \coverrunningfoother{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% or
+% \coverfooter{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% which is equivalent to the two commands
+% \coverfirstpagefooter{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+% \coverrunningfoother{LEFT}{CENTER}{RIGHT}
+
+\def\coverfirstpageheader#1#2#3{%
+ \def\cov@lhead{#1}%
+ \def\cov@chead{#2}%
+ \def\cov@rhead{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\coverrunningheader#1#2#3{%
+ \def\covrun@lhead{#1}%
+ \def\covrun@chead{#2}%
+ \def\covrun@rhead{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\coverheader#1#2#3{%
+ \coverfirstpageheader{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \coverrunningheader{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\coverfirstpagefooter#1#2#3{%
+ \def\cov@lfoot{#1}%
+ \def\cov@cfoot{#2}%
+ \def\cov@rfoot{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\coverrunningfooter#1#2#3{%
+ \def\covrun@lfoot{#1}%
+ \def\covrun@cfoot{#2}%
+ \def\covrun@rfoot{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\coverfooter#1#2#3{%
+ \coverfirstpagefooter{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \coverrunningfooter{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\coverlhead{\@ifnextchar[{\cov@xlhead}{\cov@ylhead}}
+\def\cov@xlhead[#1]#2{\def\cov@lhead{#1}\def\covrun@lhead{#2}}
+\def\cov@ylhead#1{\def\covrun@lhead{#1}\def\cov@lhead{#1}}
+
+\def\coverchead{\@ifnextchar[{\cov@xchead}{\cov@ychead}}
+\def\cov@xchead[#1]#2{\def\cov@chead{#1}\def\covrun@chead{#2}}
+\def\cov@ychead#1{\def\covrun@chead{#1}\def\cov@chead{#1}}
+
+\def\coverrhead{\@ifnextchar[{\cov@xrhead}{\cov@yrhead}}
+\def\cov@xrhead[#1]#2{\def\cov@rhead{#1}\def\covrun@rhead{#2}}
+\def\cov@yrhead#1{\def\covrun@rhead{#1}\def\cov@rhead{#1}}
+
+\def\coverlfoot{\@ifnextchar[{\cov@xlfoot}{\cov@ylfoot}}
+\def\cov@xlfoot[#1]#2{\def\cov@lfoot{#1}\def\covrun@lfoot{#2}}
+\def\cov@ylfoot#1{\def\covrun@lfoot{#1}\def\cov@lfoot{#1}}
+
+\def\covercfoot{\@ifnextchar[{\cov@xcfoot}{\cov@ycfoot}}
+\def\cov@xcfoot[#1]#2{\def\cov@cfoot{#1}\def\covrun@cfoot{#2}}
+\def\cov@ycfoot#1{\def\covrun@cfoot{#1}\def\cov@cfoot{#1}}
+
+\def\coverrfoot{\@ifnextchar[{\cov@xrfoot}{\cov@yrfoot}}
+\def\cov@xrfoot[#1]#2{\def\cov@rfoot{#1}\def\covrun@rfoot{#2}}
+\def\cov@yrfoot#1{\def\covrun@rfoot{#1}\def\cov@rfoot{#1}}
+
+
+% Initialize coverpage head and foot:
+
+\coverlhead{}
+\coverchead{}
+\coverrhead{}
+\coverlfoot{}
+\covercfoot{}
+\coverrfoot{}
+
+
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+% Headrules and footrules:
+
+\newif\if@headrule
+\newif\ifrun@headrule
+
+\def\firstpageheadrule{\@headruletrue}
+\def\nofirstpageheadrule{\@headrulefalse}
+
+\def\runningheadrule{\run@headruletrue}
+\def\norunningheadrule{\run@headrulefalse}
+
+\def\headrule{\@headruletrue\run@headruletrue}
+\def\noheadrule{\@headrulefalse\run@headrulefalse}
+
+\newif\if@footrule
+\newif\ifrun@footrule
+
+\def\firstpagefootrule{\@footruletrue}
+\def\nofirstpagefootrule{\@footrulefalse}
+
+\def\runningfootrule{\run@footruletrue}
+\def\norunningfootrule{\run@footrulefalse}
+
+\def\footrule{\@footruletrue\run@footruletrue}
+\def\nofootrule{\@footrulefalse\run@footrulefalse}
+
+% Initialize:
+
+\noheadrule
+\nofootrule
+
+% Cover page headrules and footrules:
+
+\newif\ifcov@headrule
+\newif\ifcovrun@headrule
+
+\def\coverfirstpageheadrule{\cov@headruletrue}
+\def\nocoverfirstpageheadrule{\cov@headrulefalse}
+
+\def\coverrunningheadrule{\covrun@headruletrue}
+\def\nocoverrunningheadrule{\covrun@headrulefalse}
+
+\def\coverheadrule{\cov@headruletrue\covrun@headruletrue}
+\def\nocoverheadrule{\cov@headrulefalse\covrun@headrulefalse}
+
+\newif\ifcov@footrule
+\newif\ifcovrun@footrule
+
+\def\coverfirstpagefootrule{\cov@footruletrue}
+\def\nocoverfirstpagefootrule{\cov@footrulefalse}
+
+\def\coverrunningfootrule{\covrun@footruletrue}
+\def\nocoverrunningfootrule{\covrun@footrulefalse}
+
+\def\coverfootrule{\cov@footruletrue\covrun@footruletrue}
+\def\nocoverfootrule{\cov@footrulefalse\covrun@footrulefalse}
+
+% Initialize:
+
+\nocoverheadrule
+\nocoverfootrule
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+% \numpages, \iflastpage, and \oddeven
+% Also: \numpoints, \numquestions, \numparts, and \numsubparts
+% Also also: \pointsofquestion
+% Also: \numcoverpages and \totalnumpages
+
+% Make the number of pages available as the macro \numpages,
+% the number of points as \numpoints,
+% the number of questions as \numquestions,
+% the number of parts as \numparts, and
+% the number of subparts as \numsubparts
+
+% This was previously done with \pageref commands. When I stopped
+% using \pageref for this (in order to make this compatible with
+% hyperref.sty), this stuff was created:
+
+% \gdef commands for exam@lastpage, exam@numpoints,
+% exam@numbonuspoints, exam@numquestions, exam@numparts,
+% exam@numsubparts and exam@numsubsubparts are written to the .aux
+% file via \AtEndDocument.
+
+% \gdef commands for pointsofq@i, pointsofq@ii, etc. and
+% bonuspointsofq@i, bonuspointsofq@ii, etc. are written to the .aux
+% file as each question is completed (see the definition of the
+% questions environment).
+
+% \gdef commands for pointsonpage@i, pointsonpage@ii, etc. and
+% bonuspointsonpage@i, bonuspointsonpage@ii, etc. are written to the
+% .aux file as we encounter points defined for a later page, and for
+% the last such page with AtEndDocument.
+
+\def\numpages{\@ifundefined{exam@lastpage}%
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ \exam@lastpage
+}% numpages
+
+% Change 2011/04/01: We added a ``0'' in front of the
+% mbox when \exam@lastcoverpage isn't defined. This is
+% so that the construction \romannumeral\numcoverpages
+% won't generate an error on the first run of latex.
+\def\numcoverpages{\@ifundefined{exam@lastcoverpage}%
+ {0\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ \exam@lastcoverpage
+}% numpages
+
+\def\totalnumpages{\@ifundefined{exam@totalpages}%
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ \exam@totalpages
+}% numpages
+
+\def\numpoints{\@ifundefined{exam@numpoints}%
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ \exam@numpoints
+}% numpoints
+\def\numbonuspoints{\@ifundefined{exam@numbonuspoints}%
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ \exam@numbonuspoints
+}% numbonuspoints
+
+\def\numquestions{\@ifundefined{exam@numquestions}%
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ \exam@numquestions
+}% numquestions
+
+\def\numparts{\@ifundefined{exam@numparts}%
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ \exam@numparts
+}% numparts
+
+\def\numsubparts{\@ifundefined{exam@numsubparts}%
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ \exam@numsubparts
+}% numsubparts
+
+\def\numsubsubparts{\@ifundefined{exam@numsubsubparts}%
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ \exam@numsubsubparts
+}% numsubsubparts
+
+\def\pointsofquestion#1{\@ifundefined{pointsofq@\romannumeral #1}%
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ {\csname pointsofq@\romannumeral #1\endcsname}%
+}% pointsofquestion
+\def\bonuspointsofquestion#1{\@ifundefined{bonuspointsofq@\romannumeral #1}%
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ {\csname bonuspointsofq@\romannumeral #1\endcsname}%
+}% bonuspointsofquestion
+
+% For use in \combinedgradetable and \combinedpointtable, we're
+% changing the defintions of \pointsonpage and \bonuspointsonpage
+% so that when, e.g., pointsonpage@ii is undefined, we just produce
+% 0. This comes up because the final page of the exam may have either
+% points with no bonus point or bonus points with no points, in which
+% case the combined table will try to list both points and bonus points
+% for that last page, and one of those will be undefined.
+%
+% \def\pointsonpage#1{\@ifundefined{pointsonpage@\romannumeral #1}%
+% {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+% {\csname pointsonpage@\romannumeral #1\endcsname}%
+% }% pointsonpage
+% \def\bonuspointsonpage#1{\@ifundefined{bonuspointsonpage@\romannumeral #1}%
+% {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+% {\csname bonuspointsonpage@\romannumeral #1\endcsname}%
+% }% bonuspointsonpage
+%
+% spanish.ldf redefines \@roman, so we'll avoid using \roman:
+\def\pointsonpage#1{\@ifundefined{pointsonpage@\romannumeral #1}%
+ {0}%
+ {\csname pointsonpage@\romannumeral #1\endcsname}%
+}% pointsonpage
+\def\bonuspointsonpage#1{\@ifundefined{bonuspointsonpage@\romannumeral #1}%
+ {0}%
+ {\csname bonuspointsonpage@\romannumeral #1\endcsname}%
+}% bonuspointsonpage
+
+
+\newif\if@pointschanged
+\@pointschangedfalse
+
+\newcommand*{\CheckIfChanged@hlf}[2]{%
+ % The first argument is the name of a half counter.
+ % The second argument expands to the name (without the escape
+ % character, and not assumed to be defined) of the control sequence
+ % holding the previous value.
+ \@ifundefined{#2}%
+ {\global\@pointschangedtrue}%
+ {%
+ % OK; it's defined. See if it's changed:
+ \begingroup
+ \set@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\csname #2\endcsname}%
+ \edef\othpt@check{\prtaux@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}}%
+ \edef\pt@check{\prtaux@hlfcntr{#1}}%
+ \ifx \pt@check \othpt@check
+ % Do nothing
+ \else
+ \global\@pointschangedtrue
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+}% CheckIfChanged@hlf
+
+
+%%%\let\@realenddocument=\enddocument
+%%%\def\enddocument{\clearpage
+%%% \if@filesw
+%%% {\advance\c@page-1 \immediate\write\@mainaux
+%%% {\string\newlabel{@lastpage}{{}{\arabic{page}}}}%
+%%% }
+%%% \fi
+%%% \@realenddocument
+%%%}
+
+\AtEndDocument{%
+ \clearpage
+ \if@filesw
+ \advance\c@page-1
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\exam@lastpage{\arabic{page}}}%
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\exam@lastcoverpage{\arabic{num@coverpages}}}%
+ % We can now trash the value of num@coverpages:
+ \addtocounter{num@coverpages}{\value{page}}%
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\exam@totalpages{\arabic{num@coverpages}}}%
+ \advance\c@page+1 % In case some other package looks at \c@page
+ %
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\exam@numpoints{%
+ \prtaux@hlfcntr{numpoints}}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \CheckIfChanged@hlf{numpoints}{exam@numpoints}%
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\exam@numbonuspoints{%
+ \prtaux@hlfcntr{numbonuspoints}}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \CheckIfChanged@hlf{numbonuspoints}{exam@numbonuspoints}%
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\exam@numquestions{\thenumquestions}}%
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\exam@numparts{\thenumparts}}%
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\exam@numsubparts{\thenumsubparts}}%
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\exam@numsubsubparts{\thenumsubsubparts}}%
+ \ifnum \thepageof@pagepoints > 0\relax
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\pointsonpage@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@pageof@pagepoints\endcsname
+ {\prtaux@hlfcntr{@pagepoints}}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \CheckIfChanged@hlf{@pagepoints}{pointsonpage@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@pageof@pagepoints\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \thepageof@pagebonuspoints > 0\relax
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\bonuspointsonpage@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@pageof@pagebonuspoints\endcsname
+ {\prtaux@hlfcntr{@pagebonuspoints}}}%
+ \CheckIfChanged@hlf{@pagebonuspoints}{bonuspointsonpage@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@pageof@pagebonuspoints\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\lastpage@withpoints{\page@withpoints}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \@ifundefined{lastpage@withpoints}%
+ {\global\@pointschangedtrue}%
+ {%
+ % OK; it's defined. See if it's changed:
+ \begingroup
+ \edef\othpt@check{\page@withpoints}%
+ \edef\pt@check{\lastpage@withpoints}%
+ \ifx \pt@check \othpt@check
+ % Do nothing
+ \else
+ \global\@pointschangedtrue
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\lastpage@withbonuspoints{\page@withbonuspoints}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \@ifundefined{lastpage@withbonuspoints}%
+ {\global\@pointschangedtrue}%
+ {%
+ % OK; it's defined. See if it's changed:
+ \begingroup
+ \edef\othpt@check{\page@withbonuspoints}%
+ \edef\pt@check{\lastpage@withbonuspoints}%
+ \ifx \pt@check \othpt@check
+ % Do nothing
+ \else
+ \global\@pointschangedtrue
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+ \fi
+ % Echo numbers of questions, parts, and subparts:
+ \typeout{This exam contains \thenumquestions\space questions
+ with \thenumparts\space parts, \thenumsubparts\space subparts,
+ and \thenumsubsubparts\space subsubparts.}
+ % If counting points, echo total points:
+ \if@printtotalpoints
+ \begingroup
+ \def\typ@expnd{%
+ \thenumpoints
+ \ifnumpoints@half
+ \space and a half%
+ \fi
+ }
+ \typeout{This exam has a total of \typ@expnd\space points.}
+ \def\typ@expnd{%
+ \thenumbonuspoints
+ \ifnumbonuspoints@half
+ \space and a half%
+ \fi
+ }
+ \typeout{This exam has a total of \typ@expnd\space bonus points.}
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \if@pointschanged
+ \ClassWarningNoLine{exam}{Point totals have changed.
+ Rerun to get point totals right}%
+ \fi
+}% AtEndDocument
+
+
+% We define \iflastpage so that it can safely be used
+% in headers and footers:
+\def\iflastpage#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{exam@lastpage}{\def\@@lastpage{-1}}%
+ {\edef\@@lastpage{\exam@lastpage}}%
+ \ifnum\value{page}=\@@lastpage\relax
+ #1%
+ \else
+ #2%
+ \fi
+}% iflastpage
+
+
+% The macro \oddeven takes two arguments. If the page number is odd,
+% then you get the first argument; otherwise, you get the second
+% argument.
+\def\oddeven#1#2{%
+ \ifodd\value{page}%
+ #1%
+ \else
+ #2%
+ \fi
+}% oddeven
+
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \ifcontinuation, \ContinuedQuestion,
+% \ifincomplete, and \IncompleteQuestion
+
+% The commands \ifcontinuation, \ContinuedQuestion, \ifincomplete, and
+% \IncompleteQuestion assume that there is only one questions
+% environment in the entire document. (Actually, \ContinuedQuestion
+% should work even if there are multiple questions environments, but
+% none of the other three will work in general.)
+
+
+
+% \PgInfo@write, \PgInfo and \PgInfo@get are our replacements
+% for \label, \newlabel, and \pageref. (We're avoiding using
+% \label, \newlabel, and \pageref so that we will be compatible
+% with hyperref.sty, which redefines those commands.)
+
+% We use \PgInfo, \PgInfo@write, and \PgInfo@get to know on which page
+% each question, part, subpart, subsubpart, and choice appears.
+
+% We use \PgInfo@write to write \PgInfo commands to the .aux file. The
+% \PgInfo command takes two arguments: A question (or part, or subpart,
+% or subsubpart) label, and the number of the page on which it appears.
+
+% The label for a question is of the form `question@2' (if it's question
+% 2).
+
+% The label for a part is of the form `part@2@1' (if it's part a of
+% question 2).
+
+% The label for a subpart is of the form `subpart@2@1@3' (if it's
+% subpart iii of part a of question 2).
+
+% The label for a subsubpart is of the form `subsubpart@2@1@3@4' (if
+% it's subsubpart $\delta$ of subpart iii of part a of question 2).
+
+% Each question, part, subpart, subsubpart, and choice also gets a
+% \PgInfo@write command using a label of the form question2@object3 (if
+% it's the third object of the second question).
+
+% Inside one of the solution environments (solution, solutionorbox,
+% etc.) each part, subpart, subsubpart, and choice get only the
+% \PgInfo@write command using a label of the form question2@object3
+% (if it's the third object of the second question).
+
+% When read in from the .aux file, the \PgInfo command defines a
+% control sequence of the form `Pg@label' that expands to the page
+% number for the corresponding question. For example,
+% \PgInfo{subsubpart@2@1@3@4}{7} defines \csname
+% Pg@subsubpart@2@1@3@4\endcsname to expand to 7.
+
+% The \PgInfo@get{label} command returns the value of the macro Pg@label,
+% but it *doesn't* check whether that macro is defined. Thus, it's
+% important to check that the macro Pg@label is defined before giving the
+% command \PgInfo@get{label}.
+
+
+
+% The token list to a \write command isn't expanded until
+% it's shipped out. Since the argument to PgInfo@write
+% generally contains macros, we want to expand those macros
+% now, rather than waiting until this is shipped out, at which
+% point the macros may have different values. Thus, we use
+% \edef to force expansion of the argument, and we put
+% a \noexpand in front of \thepage so that the \thepage
+% will not be expanded now. (This may not get shipped out
+% until a later page, and so we want the \thepage to be expanded
+% only when it's shipped out.)
+% We use the \begingroup \endgroup pair so that our use
+% of \reserved@a won't affect its use anywhere else.
+\def\PgInfo@write#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \edef\reserved@a{\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\PgInfo{#1}{\noexpand\thepage}}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+%\PgInfo commands are written to the .aux file by the \PgInfo@write
+%command; that's the only place that \PgInfo commands appear.
+\def\PgInfo#1#2{\expandafter\gdef\csname Pg@#1\endcsname{#2}}
+
+% Note: PgInfo@get assumes that the control sequence being
+% constructed is already defined; you have to make sure of this
+% *before* calling \Pginfo@get
+\def\PgInfo@get#1{\csname Pg@#1\endcsname}
+
+% \set@counter@to@pageof takes two arguments: The first is the name of a
+% counter, and the second (expands to) the label of a question, part,
+% subpart, subsubpart, or choice. If that label exists, then we set the
+% counter equal to the page on which the question (or part, etc.)
+% appears. If that label doesn't exist, we set the counter equal to -1.
+% (No labels exist on the first run of LaTeX on the file, and if a new
+% question (or part, etc.) was created by editing the file, then the
+% label will not exist until the run of LaTeX after that.)
+\def\set@counter@to@pageof#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{Pg@#2}%
+ {\setcounter{#1}{-1}}%
+ {\setcounter{#1}{\csname Pg@#2\endcsname}}%
+}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+% \ifcontinuation#1#2 expands to #2 if either:
+% (1) The command \noquestionsonthispage has been given on this page,
+% or
+% (2) The current page is before the page containing question number
+% 1, or
+% (3) A question begins on this page before any part, subpart,
+% subsubpart, or choice begins, or
+% (4) The current page is later than a page with the \nomorequestions
+% command.
+% Otherwise, it expands to #1.
+%
+% Thus, for example, if there are no questions, parts, subparts,
+% subsubparts, or choices on this page, and no \noquestionsonthispage
+% command, and we're not before question 1, and not after a
+% \nomorequestions command, then \ifcontinuation will expand to #1.
+
+
+\def\ifcontinuation#1#2{%
+ % If there's a \noquestionsonthispage command on this page, then
+ % we assume that we're not continuing anything:
+ \@ifundefined{No@Questions@Pg@\thepage}%
+ {\chk@contin{#1}{#2}}%
+ {#2}%
+}% \ifcontinuation
+
+\def\chk@contin#1#2{%
+ % We check whether we're on a page *before* the page on which the
+ % first question appears. If we don't yet know which page has
+ % question number 1, then we must be doing an early run of LaTeX,
+ % and we'll assume we're not a continuation.
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname Pg@question@1\endcsname\relax
+ % No page info yet; assume not a continuation
+ #2%
+ \else
+ % Note: The ``\relax'' at the end of the following \ifnum
+ % serves an entirely different purpose from the one at the
+ % end of the above \expandafter\ifx. That one (above)
+ % is one of the things being compared, whereas the
+ % one we're about to use is just to clearly mark the
+ % end of the second number being compared by the \ifnum
+ % (since it's conceivable that the ``#2'' would begin
+ % with a digit).
+ \ifnum \thepage < \csname Pg@question@1\endcsname\relax
+ % We're before the page with question 1:
+ #2%
+ \else
+ % The current page begins a new question if Contin@\thepage
+ % has been defined as a macro that expands to \relax (Note
+ % that this is different from if Contin@\thepage has never
+ % been defined at all, in which case it will be let equal to
+ % \relax (temporarily) by the \csname command.)
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname Contin@\thepage\endcsname\ref@relax
+ #2%
+ \else
+ % See if we're after a \nomorequestions command:
+ \@ifundefined{Pg@@endquestions}%
+ {#1}%
+ {\ifnum \thepage > \PgInfo@get{@endquestions}\relax
+ % We're after a \nomorequestions:
+ #2%
+ \else
+ % We actually are incomplete:
+ #1%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}% chk@contin
+
+\def\nomorequestions{%
+ \PgInfo@write{@endquestions}%
+}% nomorequestions
+
+\def\noquestionsonthispage{%
+ \write\@mainaux{\string\expandafter\string\gdef
+ \string\csname\space No@Questions@Pg@\thepage\string\endcsname
+ {No questions here}}%
+}% noquestionsonthispage
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \ContinuedQuestion is for use in headers and footers, where we can
+% assume that \thepage is the number of the page on which we'll
+% actually appear.
+
+% \ContinuedQuestion expands to the number of the question that
+% continues onto this page, or to -1 if this page begins with a new
+% question.
+
+% ACTUALLY: \ContinuedQuestion expands to a positive number if either
+% (1) this page doesn't contain the beginning of any question, part,
+% subpart, subsubpart, or choice, or (2) this page has a part, subpart,
+% subsubpart, or choice that appears before any question. That means
+% that if the current page actually begins with space for a continuation
+% of the previous question (but doesn't begin any part, subpart,
+% subsubpart, or choice of that question) and then has a question, then
+% we'll be asserting that this page begins with a new question, but the
+% actual top of the page will begin with some blank space that's
+% intended for the previous question.
+
+% \ContinuedQuestion works by examining the value of the macro
+% Contin@\thepage. If this page starts with a question (i.e., if no
+% question continues onto this page), then the macro Contin@\thepage
+% will be defined, and will expand to `\relax' (and so an \ifx between
+% \csname Contin@\thepage\endcsname and \ref@relax will be true).
+
+% If Contin@\thepage is undefined, then when it is used in an \ifx
+% command it will be temporarily set equal to \relax (which is
+% *different* from being a macro that expands to \relax); in this case,
+% there is no question, part, subpart, subsubpart, or choice that begins
+% on this page, and so \ContinuedQuestion will be set equal to the last
+% question that was begun on a page before this one.
+
+% The last possibility is that this page begins with either a part,
+% subpart, subsubpart, or choice. In this case, Contin@\thepage is
+% defined, and it expands to the number of the question that is
+% continued onto this page.
+
+
+\def\ref@relax{\relax}
+
+\def\ContinuedQuestion{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname Contin@\thepage\endcsname\relax
+ % We get here if there's no question, part, subpart,
+ % subsubpart, or choice on this page, and so Contin@\thepage has
+ % never been defined at all. In that case, this page
+ % continues whichever question was last begun on or
+ % before this page.
+ \find@latestques
+ \thelatest@ques
+ \else
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname Contin@\thepage\endcsname\ref@relax
+ % We get here if this page begins with a new question,
+ % which is why Contin@\thepage has been defined to be
+ % a macro that expands to \relax.
+ % ACTUALLY: We get here if this page has a question that
+ % appears before any part, subpart, subsubpart, or choice. That
+ % means that if the current page actually begins with space
+ % for a continuation of the previous question but doesn't begin
+ % any part, subpart, subsubpart, or choice of that question, then
+ % we'll be asserting that this page begins with a new question,
+ % but the actual top of the page will begin with some space
+ % that's intended for the previous question.
+ -1\relax
+ \else
+ % We get here if we didn't get anywhere above. This happens
+ % if Contin@\thepage has been defined to be a macro that expands
+ % to something other than \relax, in which case it has been
+ % defined to be a macro that expands to the number of the
+ % question that continues onto this page.
+ \csname Contin@\thepage\endcsname
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \find@latestques is for use in headers and footers, where we can
+% assume that \thepage actually equals the page on which we'll appear.
+% We find the last question that was started on or before the current
+% page.
+
+\newcounter{latest@ques}
+
+\newcommand\find@latestques{%
+ % \find@latestques is for use in headers and footers.
+ % \find@latestques will set the counter latest@ques
+ % to the number of the last question
+ % that was begun on the exam from page 1 through the current
+ % page. This may well be the value of the question counter,
+ % but it may be less than that if the page following this one
+ % begins a new question and that question beginning was
+ % typeset before the present page was shipped out.
+ % Note: This macro is called both by \ContinuedQuestion and by
+ % \find@quesend, which is why it has to find the last question
+ % begun on or before the current page, rather than just before
+ % the current page.
+ \ifnum 1 > \value{question}\relax
+ % Oops; probably because we're before the first question
+ % Just set latest@ques to -1:
+ \setcounter{latest@ques}{-1}%
+ \else
+ % If question latest@ques actually begins on this page (rather
+ % than on the next page, but early enough on the next page
+ % that the counter was advanced before we ran off into the
+ % output routine to output the page and set the header and
+ % footer), then that's the correct question number.
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname Pg@question@\arabic{question}\endcsname\relax
+ % We don't know what page that question is on;
+ % this must be an early run, before the aux file
+ % is helpful. Just set it equal to -1 and wait until the next
+ % run to get it right.
+ \setcounter{latest@ques}{-1}%
+ \else
+ % We now know that \PgInfo@get can tell us the page number
+ % of \arabic{question} and of all earlier questions.
+ % Set latest@ques equal to the current question number, and
+ % then call \decr@latest@ques to recursively decrement
+ % latest@ques as needed to find a question that begins on
+ % or before the current page:
+ \setcounter{latest@ques}{\value{question}}%
+ \decr@latest@ques
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+
+\def\decr@latest@ques{%
+ % If we get here, then we've already checked that the reference
+ % Pg@question@\thelatest@ques is defined at least for a value of
+ % \thelatest@ques greater than or equal to it's present value,
+ % so we assume it's defined for all lesser values as well:
+ \ifnum \thepage < \PgInfo@get{question@\thelatest@ques}\relax
+ % Nope; latest@ques starts on a later page
+ % Decrement latest@ques and see if that one's right:
+ \addtocounter{latest@ques}{-1}%
+ \ifnum \thelatest@ques < 1\relax
+ \setcounter{latest@ques}{-1}%
+ \let\next@dlq=\relax
+ \else
+ \let\next@dlq=\decr@latest@ques
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % latest@ques starts on this page or earlier, so
+ % that's the correct question number! Exit:
+ \let\next@dlq=\relax
+ \fi
+ \next@dlq
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\newcounter{ques@end}
+\newcounter{last@object}
+
+\def\find@quesend{%
+ % We find the last question started on or before the current page
+ % and then find the page containing the last part (or subpart, or
+ % subsubpart, or choice) of that question, and set the counter
+ % ques@end to that page number.
+ % Set latest@ques equal to the correct question number:
+ \find@latestques
+ \ifnum \value{latest@ques} < 0\relax
+ % This must be an early run of LaTeX, before we have
+ % \PgInfo commands in the .aux file:
+ \setcounter{ques@end}{-1}%
+ \else
+ % We now know that this question has at least one object (since
+ % we know that latest@ques isn't negative).
+ % We'll find its highest numbered object by setting last@object
+ % equal to 2 and then calling \find@lastobject to recursively
+ % test whether that object number exists and, if so, incrementing
+ % last@object to test for a higher numbered one:
+ \setcounter{last@object}{2}%
+ \find@lastobject
+ \setcounter{ques@end}{\PgInfo@get{question\thelatest@ques
+ @object\thelast@object}}%
+ \fi
+}% find@quesend
+
+\def\find@lastobject{%
+ % We check whether this question has an object numbered last@object
+ % and recursively increment last@object to find the highest
+ % numbered value for which the object exists:
+ \@ifundefined{Pg@question\thelatest@ques @object\thelast@object}%
+ {\addtocounter{last@object}{-1}%
+ \let\nextfind@lastobject=\relax
+ }%
+ {\addtocounter{last@object}{1}%
+ \let\nextfind@lastobject=\find@lastobject
+ }%
+ \nextfind@lastobject
+}% find@lastobject
+
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\newcounter{incmp@ques}
+
+\def\IncompleteQuestion{%
+ \Find@Incmp@ques
+ % If there's no incomplete question, the counter incmp@ques will be
+ % set to -1:
+ \theincmp@ques
+}
+
+\def\Find@Incmp@ques{%
+ % If we're on the last page, then there's no incomplete question:
+ \iflastpage{\setcounter{incmp@ques}{-1}}{\chk@incomp}%
+}% Find@Incmp@ques
+\newcounter{next@ques}
+\newcounter{next@page}
+
+\def\chk@incomp{%
+ % If we get here, we're not on the last page.
+ % \find@quesend calls \find@latestques to set the counter
+ % latest@ques equal to the number of the last question begun on or
+ % before the current page, and then it sets the counter ques@end to
+ % the page containing the last ques@object of that question:
+ \find@quesend
+ \ifnum \theques@end > \thepage\relax
+ % This question has a part (or sub...) starting on a later page
+ \setcounter{incmp@ques}{\value{latest@ques}}%
+ \else
+ \chk@incompi
+ \fi
+}% chk@incomp
+
+\def\chk@incompi{%
+ % If there are any pages after the current one and before the next
+ % question (if there is a next question) that lack a
+ % \noquestionsonthispage and that aren't following the page of a
+ % \nomorequestions command, then question latest@ques is incomplete.
+ % Otherwise, there is no incomplete question:
+ \setcounter{next@ques}{\thelatest@ques}%
+ \addtocounter{next@ques}{1}%
+ % We use next@page as a scratch counter. We start by setting it
+ % to the last page we want to check for a \noquestionsonthispage
+ % command:
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname Pg@question@\thenext@ques \endcsname\relax
+ % This isn't the last page but there is no next question:
+%
+ \@ifundefined{exam@lastpage}%
+ {\setcounter{next@page}{-1}}%
+ {\setcounter{next@page}{\exam@lastpage}}%
+%
+% \setcounter{next@page}{\exam@lastpage}%
+ \else
+ \setcounter{next@page}{\PgInfo@get{question@\thenext@ques}}%
+ \addtocounter{next@page}{-1}%
+ \fi
+ % See if that's after a \nomorequestions command:
+ \@ifundefined{Pg@@endquestions}%
+ {}%
+ {\ifnum \PgInfo@get{@endquestions} < \value{next@page}\relax
+ \setcounter{next@page}{\PgInfo@get{@endquestions}}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ % OK, the counter next@page now contains the last page to check.
+ \chk@incompii
+}% chk@incompi
+
+\def\chk@incompii{%
+ \ifnum \value{next@page} > \value{page}\relax
+ % We need to check the page next@page:
+ \@ifundefined{No@Questions@Pg@\arabic{next@page}}%
+ {\setcounter{incmp@ques}{\value{latest@ques}}%
+ \let\next@incompii=\relax
+ }%
+ {\addtocounter{next@page}{-1}%
+ \let\next@incompii = \chk@incompii
+ }%
+ \else
+ % There's no incomplete question:
+ \setcounter{incmp@ques}{-1}%
+ \let\next@incompii=\relax
+ \fi
+ \next@incompii
+}% chk@incompii
+
+\def\ifincomplete#1#2{%
+ % We need to pass the arguments to \chk@ifincomp; we save them in
+ % macros so they won't be messed up by the call to \Find@Incmp@ques:
+ \def\incomp@first{#1}%
+ \def\incomp@second{#2}%
+ % If there's a \noquestionsonthispage command on this page, then
+ % we assume nothing from this page is incomplete:
+ \@ifundefined{No@Questions@Pg@\thepage}%
+ {\chk@ifincomp}%
+ {\incomp@second}%
+}% ifincomplete
+
+\def\chk@ifincomp{%
+ \Find@Incmp@ques
+ % If there's no incomplete question, \Find@Incmp@ques sets the
+ % counter incmp@ques to -1:
+ \ifnum \theincmp@ques < 0\relax
+ \incomp@second
+ \else
+ % Are we after a page with \nomorequestions?
+ \@ifundefined{Pg@@endquestions}%
+ {\incomp@first}%
+ {\ifnum \thepage < \PgInfo@get{@endquestions}\relax
+ \incomp@first
+ \else
+ \incomp@second
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+}% chk@ifincomp
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% These are the commands for dealing with hlfcntr's, i.e., the things
+% used to count points.
+%
+% A point value is a nonnegative integer with an optional half integer.
+% A hlfcntr consists of a regular counter together with an \if: If the
+% regular counter is called ``counter'', then the \if is called
+% ``\ifcounter@half''; it's set true by ``\counter@halftrue'' and set
+% false by ``\counter@halffalse''.
+%
+% The commands:
+%
+% \new@hlfcntr{countername}
+% \set@hlfcntr{countername}{value}
+% \copy@hlfcntr{tocounter}{fromcounter}
+% \addto@hlfcntr{countername}{value}
+% \add@hlfcntrtohlfcntr{getsaddedto}{whatsadded}
+% \ifhlfcntr@pos{countername}
+% \prtaux@hlfcntr{countername}
+% \prt@hlfcntr{countername}
+%
+% ``value'' can be either a (nonnegative) integer, an integer followed by
+% ``\half'', or just plain ``\half''. (Actually, ``value'' can be empty
+% (although the braces must be present), in which case it's interpreted
+% as ``0''.)
+%
+% Examples of valid values:
+% 0
+% 0\half
+% 1
+% 1\half
+% 2
+% 2\half
+% etc.
+
+% Note on using ``\global'': LaTeX's \setcounter and \addtocounter
+% commands are already \global (i.e., you don't have to say
+% ``\global''), but \somethingtrue and \somethingfalse (used to set
+% \ifsomething) aren't. Thus, we need to say ``\global'' when setting
+% these things.
+
+% To create a hlfcntr:
+\newcommand*\new@hlfcntr[1]{%
+ \newcounter{#1}%
+ \expandafter\newif\csname if#1@half\endcsname
+}% new@hlfcntr
+
+
+% A scratch hlfcntr:
+\new@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}
+
+\newcommand*\horiz@half{$\frac{1}{2}$}
+\newcommand*\slanted@half{%
+ $\raise0.6ex\hbox{$\scriptstyle 1$}\kern -.2em/\kern -.2em
+ \raise-0.5ex\hbox{$\scriptstyle 2$}$%
+}% slanted@half
+\newcommand*\useslantedhalf{\global\let\half\slanted@half}
+\newcommand*\usehorizontalhalf{\global\let\half\horiz@half}
+\newcommand*\half{\slanted@half}
+
+
+\newcommand*\set@hlfcntr[2]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \global\csname #1@halffalse\endcsname
+ % If there as a `\half' present, it will be executed
+ % right after the assignment of the digit part of #2
+ % to the counter #1.
+ \def\half{%
+ \global\csname #1@halftrue\endcsname
+ }%
+ % We insert a `0' in case there are no digits present:
+ % We avoid using \setcounter, because calc.sty redefines
+ % \setcounter in a way that conflicts with the \half trick
+ % we're using:
+ % \setcounter{#1}{0#2}\relax
+ \global\csname c@#1\endcsname 0#2\relax
+ \endgroup
+}% set@hlfcntr
+
+\newcommand*\copy@hlfcntr[2]{%
+ % We set #1 to the value of #2
+ \setcounter{#1}{\value{#2}}%
+ \csname if#2@half\endcsname
+ \global\csname #1@halftrue\endcsname
+ \else
+ \global\csname #1@halffalse\endcsname
+ \fi
+}% copy@hlfcntr
+
+\newcommand*\addto@hlfcntr[2]{%
+ % We add the valueandhalf #2 to hlfcntr #1
+ \begingroup
+ \def\half{\add@half{#1}}%
+ % We insert a `0' in case there are no digits present:
+ % We avoid using \addtocounter, because calc.sty redefines
+ % \addtocounter in a way that conflicts with the \half trick
+ % we're using:
+ % \addtocounter{#1}{0#2}\relax
+ \global\advance\csname c@#1\endcsname 0#2\relax
+ \endgroup
+}% addto@hlfcntr
+
+\newcommand*\add@hlfcntrtohlfcntr[2]{%
+ % We add the hlfcntr #2 to the hlfcntr #1
+ \addtocounter{#1}{\value{#2}}%
+ \csname if#2@half\endcsname
+ \add@half{#1}%
+ \fi
+}% add@hlfcntrtohlfcntr
+
+\newcommand*\add@half[1]{%
+ % We add one half to hlfcntr #1:
+ \csname if#1@half\endcsname
+ \addtocounter{#1}{1}%
+ \global\csname #1@halffalse\endcsname
+ \else
+ \global\csname #1@halftrue\endcsname
+ \fi
+}% add@half
+
+% Important reminder about \ifhlfcntr@pos: Do not use it inside
+% another conditional! The construction
+% \ifhlfcntr@pos{somecounter}
+% do some stuff...
+% \fi
+% is perfectly fine as long as it's expanded, but: If it's inside
+% another conditional, and the condition is not satisfied, then it's
+% read through without expansion. In that case, TeX sees the
+% \ifhlfcntr@pos but does *not* recognize it as being part of a
+% conditional, but when it sees the concluding \fi it does recognize
+% that, and so TeX completes the outer conditional at that \fi, which
+% causes an error.
+\newcounter{ifpos@cntr}
+\def\ifhlfcntr@pos#1{%
+ % The argument must be a hlfcntr (which, of course,
+ % can never be negative); we'll be true if and only if
+ % that halfcntr is positive:
+ \setcounter{ifpos@cntr}{\value{#1}}%
+ \csname if#1@half\endcsname
+ \addtocounter{ifpos@cntr}{1}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \value{ifpos@cntr} > 0\relax
+}% ifhlfnctr@pos
+
+% \prtaux@hlfcntr is used inside the argument of a \write command for
+% writing to the .aux file:
+\newcommand*\prtaux@hlfcntr[1]{%
+ % We don't want a \relax after the 0 in the following
+ % line, because it would sometimes appear in the aux file:
+ \ifnum \value{#1} = 0
+ % We have to make the following a macro, because if we
+ % don't do this part, the \fi will cause confusion, since
+ % there's no \if visible until the \csname is expanded:
+ \prtaux@halforzero{#1}%
+ \else
+ \arabic{#1}%
+ % We have to make the following a macro, because if we
+ % don't do this part, the \fi will cause confusion, since
+ % there's no \if visible until the \csname is expanded:
+ \prtaux@halforblank{#1}%
+ \fi
+}% prtaux@hlfcntr
+\newcommand*\prtaux@halforzero[1]{%
+ \csname if#1@half\endcsname
+ \string\half
+ \else
+ 0%
+ \fi
+}% prtaux@hlforzero
+\newcommand*\prtaux@halforblank[1]{%
+ \csname if#1@half\endcsname
+ \string\half
+ \fi
+}% prtaux@halforblank
+
+\newcommand*\prt@hlfcntr[1]{%
+ % We don't want a \relax after the 0 in the following
+ % line, because it would sometimes appear in the aux file:
+ \ifnum \value{#1} = 0
+ % We have to make the following a macro, because if we
+ % don't do this part, the \fi will cause confusion, since
+ % there's no \if visible until the \csname is expanded:
+ \prt@halforzero{#1}%
+ \else
+ \arabic{#1}%
+ % We have to make the following a macro, because if we
+ % don't do this part, the \fi will cause confusion, since
+ % there's no \if visible until the \csname is expanded:
+ \prt@halforblank{#1}%
+ \fi
+}% prt@hlfcntr
+\newcommand*\prt@halforzero[1]{%
+ \csname if#1@half\endcsname
+ \half
+ \else
+ 0%
+ \fi
+}% prt@hlforzero
+\newcommand*\prt@halforblank[1]{%
+ \csname if#1@half\endcsname
+ \half
+ \fi
+}% prt@halforblank
+
+% End of the commands for dealing with hlfcntr's
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% ***************************
+% ** QUESTION ENVIRONMENTS **
+% ***************************
+%
+%
+%
+
+% We define the command \part only inside of a parts environment, so
+% that we don't interfere with the meaning of the standard article
+% documentclass command \part if that is used inside of a questions
+% environment. The commands \question, \subpart, and \subsubpart are
+% defined everywhere inside of a questions environment. If the user
+% accidentally gives a \subpart command outside of a subparts
+% environment, then an error will be created.
+
+
+
+
+% We use the counter name `partno' for the parts environment so that
+% we will not interfere with the counter `part' used by the article
+% document class.
+
+\newcounter{question}
+\newcounter{partno}
+\newcounter{subpart}
+\newcounter{subsubpart}
+\newcounter{choice}
+\new@hlfcntr{numpoints}
+\set@hlfcntr{numpoints}{0}
+\new@hlfcntr{numbonuspoints}
+\set@hlfcntr{numbonuspoints}{0}
+\new@hlfcntr{pointsof@thisquestion}
+\set@hlfcntr{pointsof@thisquestion}{0}
+\new@hlfcntr{bonuspointsof@thisquestion}
+\set@hlfcntr{bonuspointsof@thisquestion}{0}
+\newcounter{numquestions}
+\newcounter{numparts}
+\newcounter{numsubparts}
+\newcounter{numsubsubparts}
+\newcounter{Curr@Page}
+
+% @pagepoints accumulates the points on a single page:
+\new@hlfcntr{@pagepoints}
+\set@hlfcntr{@pagepoints}{0}
+\new@hlfcntr{@pagebonuspoints}
+\set@hlfcntr{@pagebonuspoints}{0}
+\newcounter{pageof@pagepoints}
+\setcounter{pageof@pagepoints}{0}
+\newcounter{pageof@pagebonuspoints}
+\setcounter{pageof@pagebonuspoints}{0}
+
+% latest@points is a holding area for points until we know
+% whether they'll land on the same page as the points
+% currently counted in @pagepoints:
+\new@hlfcntr{latest@points}
+\set@hlfcntr{latest@points}{0}
+\new@hlfcntr{latest@bonuspoints}
+\set@hlfcntr{latest@bonuspoints}{0}
+
+% Whenever we meet a new page on which points are defined, we'll
+% redefine \page@withpoints to expand to that page. At the end of the
+% document, it will hold the last page that has points, and we'll write
+% a \gdef\lastpage@withpoints command to the .aux file.
+% We initialize \page@withpoints here:
+\def\page@withpoints{0}%
+\def\page@withbonuspoints{0}%
+
+% \pageinfo@commands is used by each question, part, subpart, and
+% subsubpart to insert into everypar the \PgInfo@write command to put
+% its page number into the .aux file, the \PgInfo@get command to read
+% the page number into the counter Curr@Page, and to test and set
+% \Contin@\theCurr@Page. \temp@toks is used by part, subpart, and
+% subsubpart to append all that to \pageinfo@commands, rather than
+% deleting whatever may have been put into \pageinfo@commands by the
+% current question and/or part and/or subpart.
+\newtoks\pageinfo@commands
+\newtoks\temp@toks
+
+% \pagepoint@commands holds the commands to manage the counting of the
+% number of points defined on each page.
+\newtoks\pagepoint@commands
+
+% \point@toks holds the commands to print the points at the proper
+% location on the page (except that it's not used by the \qformat
+% option).
+\newtoks\point@toks
+
+% We'll use \greeknum to number subsubparts
+\def\greeknum#1{\expandafter\lc@greek\csname c@#1\endcsname}
+\def\lc@greek#1{%
+ \ifcase #1\or $\alpha$\or $\beta$\or $\gamma$\or $\delta$\or
+ $\epsilon$\or $\zeta$\or $\eta$\or $\theta$\or $\iota$\or
+ $\kappa$\or $\lambda$\or $\mu$\or $\nu$\or $\xi$\or o\or $\pi$\or
+ $\rho$\or $\sigma$\or $\tau$\or $\upsilon$\or $\phi$\or $\chi$\or
+ $\psi$\or $\omega$\else \@ctrerr
+ \fi
+}% lc@greek
+
+
+% The following macros are a variation on a trick from Victor
+% Eijkhout's ``TeX by Topic'', page 142:
+% Both \prepend@toklist and \append@toklist take two arguments,
+% both of which should be token lists.
+% \prepend@toklist prepends #2 to #1
+% \append@toklist appends #2 to #1
+
+\def\prepend@toklist#1#2{%
+ \edef\do@it{\noexpand#1={\the#2\the#1}}%
+ \do@it
+}% prepend@toklist
+
+\def\append@toklist#1#2{%
+ \edef\do@it{\noexpand#1={\the#1\the#2}}%
+ \do@it
+}% append@toklist
+
+
+% The command \qformat is provided for the user who wants to
+% design a nonstandard question line. If this command is used,
+% then the usual line containing the question number and the beginning
+% of the question will be replaced by the line specified by the
+% \qformat command, and the question will begin on the following
+% line.
+% Within the argument of the \qformat command:
+% \thequestion will be replaced by the question number, and
+% \thepoints will be replaced by ``\@points \@pointname'' if the
+% number of points has been specified for this question, and otherwise
+% it inserts nothing at all. (The conditional @placepoints is used to
+% determine if there were points specified for this question.)
+% The argument to the \qformat command *must* contain some
+% stretch, i.e., at least one \hfil or \dotfill or ...
+%
+% The command \noqformat cancels the effect of \qformat and returns us
+% to the default situation.
+%
+% The commands \bonusqformat and \nobonusformat are analogous.
+\newif\if@qformat
+\@qformatfalse
+\newif\if@bonusqformat
+\@bonusqformatfalse
+
+\def\qformat#1{%
+ \global\@qformattrue
+ \gdef\@questionformat{#1}%
+}% qformat
+\def\bonusqformat#1{%
+ \global\@bonusqformattrue
+ \gdef\@bonusquestionformat{#1}%
+}% bonusqformat
+
+\newcommand\noqformat{%
+ \global\@qformatfalse
+}% noqformat
+\newcommand\nobonusqformat{%
+ \global\@bonusqformatfalse
+}% nobonusqformat
+
+
+% \thepoints is for use in either a \qformat command
+% or a \pointformat command (or a \bonusqformat command).
+% It needs to have the
+% \if@placepoints so that if it's used in a \qformat command
+% it won't print anything if there are no points:
+\newcommand\thepoints{%
+ \if@placepoints
+ \if@bonus
+ \@points \@bonuspointname
+ \else
+ \@points \@pointname
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}% thepoints
+
+% \themarginpoints is for use only in a \pointformat command,
+% and so it doesn't need the \if@placepoints bit in \thepoints:
+\newcommand\themarginpoints{%
+ \if@bonus
+ \@points \@marginbonuspointname
+ \else
+ \@points \@marginpointname
+ \fi
+}% themarginpoints
+
+% We define the \subpart and \subsubpart commands when we enter a
+% questions environment (rather than waiting until we enter a subparts
+% of subsubparts environment) so that we can signal an error if a
+% \subpart or \subsubpart command appears outside of the corresponding
+% environment. (We don't do this for the \part command so that the user
+% can use the standard sectioning \part command outside of a parts
+% environment.)
+
+% The counter ques@object will count the items in each question, where
+% an item is defined as either the question itself, or a part, or a
+% subpart, or a subsubpart, or a choice. This will be used by
+% \find@quesend to find the last page occupied by the last question
+% begun on or before the current page:
+\newcounter{ques@object}
+
+% \first@questionobject will be used by the \question command.
+% That is, it will be used only once, but we want to keep its
+% definition here, near the definitions of \addquestionobject and
+% \questionobject@pluspagecheck.
+\newcommand{\first@questionobject}{%
+ \setcounter{ques@object}{1}%
+ % \PgInfo@write expands it's argument, so we don't need edef:
+% \edef\q@object@label{%
+% question\arabic{question}@object\arabic{ques@object}}%
+% \PgInfo@write{\q@object@label}%
+ \PgInfo@write{question\arabic{question}@object\arabic{ques@object}}%
+}% first@questionobject
+
+% \addquestionobject will be used by each part, subpart, and
+% subsubpart, and can also be used by the user to mark the end of a
+% question that spills over onto the next page without any part,
+% subpart, etc. starting on that page:
+\newcommand{\addquestionobject}{%
+ \addtocounter{ques@object}{1}%
+ % \PgInfo@write expands it's argument, so we don't need edef:
+% \edef\q@object@label{%
+% question\arabic{question}@object\arabic{ques@object}}%
+% \PgInfo@write{\q@object@label}%
+ \PgInfo@write{question\arabic{question}@object\arabic{ques@object}}%
+}% addquestionobject
+
+% \questionobject@pluspagecheck will be used by each choice, as well
+% as by any \part, \subpart, or \subsubpart that's inside of a
+% solution. It uses the questionobject to check if we're the first
+% one on the current page, since choices (and questions etc. inside of
+% solution environments) don't have labels the way that questions,
+% parts, subparts, and subsubparts do (those things use the label to
+% check if they're the first thing on the page).
+\newcommand{\questionobject@pluspagecheck}{%
+ % We don't want to do any of this if we're both inside a solution
+ % environment and not printing answers (because we want to avoid
+ % incrementing ques@object):
+ \if@insolution
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \doqobj@ppchk
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \doqobj@ppchk
+ \fi
+}% questionobject@pluspagecheck
+\newcommand{\doqobj@ppchk}{%
+ \addtocounter{ques@object}{1}%
+ % We need the edef because we check the page of \q@object@label:
+ \edef\q@object@label{%
+ question\arabic{question}@object\arabic{ques@object}}%
+ \PgInfo@write{\q@object@label}%
+ \set@counter@to@pageof{Curr@Page}{\q@object@label}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname Contin@\theCurr@Page\endcsname\relax
+ % We're the first \question, \part, \subpart, \subsubpart,
+ % or choice on this page:
+ \global\expandafter\edef\csname
+ Contin@\theCurr@Page\endcsname{\arabic{question}}%
+ \fi
+}% doqobj@ppchk
+
+
+
+% if@bonus will be true when we're doing a bonusquestion or bonuspart
+% or etc., and it will also be used also to distinguish between
+% \gradetable and \bonusgradetable (and between \pointtable and
+% \bonuspointtable, etc.), and also to distinguish between
+% \pointsinrange and \bonuspointsinrange:
+\newif\if@bonus
+\@bonusfalse
+
+% The following are for advanced users who want to customize the list
+% parameters (\topsep, \partopsep, \itemsep, \parsep, etc.) for the
+% lists that these environments create. They are all defined to be
+% empty, but the user can change them using \renewcommand.
+\newcommand\questionshook{}
+\newcommand\partshook{}
+\newcommand\subpartshook{}
+\newcommand\subsubpartshook{}
+\newcommand\choiceshook{}
+\newcommand\checkboxeshook{}
+
+
+\newenvironment{questions}{%
+ % \@queslevel is used for two purposes:
+ % (1) We check that every \question, \part, \subpart, and
+ % \subsubpart command appears inside the appropriate environment,
+ % and generate an error if one appears in the wrong place.
+ % (2) If a \qformat is being used and if \@queslevel tells us
+ % that we're currently processing a question, then we set
+ % \global \point@toks={} to avoid setting the points for a
+ % question other than via the qformat command.
+ \def\@queslevel{question}%
+ \def\titledquestion##1{%
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \def\thequestiontitle{##1}%
+ \process@question
+ }%
+ \def\bonustitledquestion##1{%
+ \@bonustrue
+ \def\thequestiontitle{##1}%
+ \process@question
+ }%
+ \def\question{%
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \def\thequestiontitle{\csname p@question\endcsname
+ \csname thequestion\endcsname}%
+ \process@question
+ }%
+ \def\bonusquestion{%
+ \@bonustrue
+ \def\thequestiontitle{\csname p@question\endcsname
+ \csname thequestion\endcsname}%
+ \process@question
+ }%
+ \def\process@question{%
+ \if@coverpages
+ \cover@question@error
+ \fi
+ \@checkqueslevel{question}%
+ \addtocounter{numquestions}{1}%
+ % Write the sum of points of the previous question (if any)
+ % to the .aux file. (At this point, the question counter
+ % has not yet been incremented, so \value{question} is the
+ % number of the question that was just completed.)
+ \if@filesw
+ \ifnum \value{question} > 0\relax
+ % First do regular points:
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\pointsofq@
+ \romannumeral \csname c@question\endcsname
+ {\prtaux@hlfcntr{pointsof@thisquestion}}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \CheckIfChanged@hlf{pointsof@thisquestion}{pointsofq@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@question\endcsname}%
+ % Now do bonus points:
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\bonuspointsofq@
+ \romannumeral \csname c@question\endcsname
+ {\prtaux@hlfcntr{bonuspointsof@thisquestion}}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \CheckIfChanged@hlf{bonuspointsof@thisquestion}%
+ {bonuspointsofq@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@question\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \set@hlfcntr{pointsof@thisquestion}{0}%
+ \set@hlfcntr{bonuspointsof@thisquestion}{0}%
+ % If there was a question with points immediately preceding
+ % this question (i.e., there were no parts in the previous
+ % question), then @placepoints will still be true, and we need to
+ % cancel it. (We used to do this inside of the \thepoints macro,
+ % but that allowed for an error if the user specified points for a
+ % question but had a \qformat that didn't mention \thepoints.) We
+ % also set @placepoints to be false when entering a parts
+ % environment.
+ \global \@placepointsfalse
+ % point@toks will normally be empty at this point, but it might be
+ % nonempty if there were points somewhere in the previous question
+ % that never made it onto the page because we never entered
+ % horizontal mode (perhaps because the user was weird and let the
+ % text of a question (or part, etc.) consist entirely of an
+ % enumerate environment, or description environment, or etc.).
+ \global \point@toks={}%
+ % Important: Don't leave any blank lines inside of
+ % \pageinfo@commands!! This token list will be dumped into
+ % horizontal mode by \everypar, and so any blank lines will
+ % cause paragraph breaks.
+ \pageinfo@commands={%
+ \edef\@queslabel{question@\arabic{question}}%
+ \PgInfo@write{\@queslabel}%
+ \first@questionobject
+ % In addition to the \PgInfo@write we use an actual \label
+ % command. We do this in order to make the question numbers in
+ % the grade tables into \ref's, so that if the user says
+ % \usepackage{hyperref}, those question numbers will be clickable.
+ %
+ % A further purpose of these labels (which we actually do for all
+ % questions, parts, subparts, and subsubparts) is that if a
+ % question (or part, etc.) is, e.g., moved from one page to
+ % another, LaTeX will notice this and warn the user that LaTeX
+ % must be run one more time to be sure everything is correct.
+ %
+ % We need to do this even though we've already included code to
+ % check when point totals change because questions (and parts,
+ % etc.) know what page they're on from reading the info written to
+ % the .aux file on the previous run. Thus, if a question (or
+ % part, etc.) is moved to a different page, then the pointsonpage
+ % totals won't notice until the *second* subsequent run of LaTeX,
+ % and so there'll be no warning to the user on the *first* run.
+ % Including these labels gives the user a warning on that first
+ % run.
+ %
+ % Further futzing required: Since this is being put into the
+ % token list \pageinfo@commands, the contents of which won't
+ % actually be executed until we enter horizontal mode (which
+ % may well be in the first part of a parts environment), we need
+ % to make sure that \@currentlabel is the number of the
+ % question:
+ \begingroup % to confine the change to \@currentlabel
+% \def\@currentlabel{\csname p@question\endcsname
+% \csname thequestion\endcsname}%
+ \def\@currentlabel{\thequestiontitle}%
+ \label{\@queslabel}%
+ \endgroup
+ \set@counter@to@pageof{Curr@Page}{\@queslabel}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname Contin@\theCurr@Page\endcsname\relax
+ % We're the first \question, \part, \subpart, \subsubpart,
+ % or choice on this page:
+ \global\expandafter\edef
+ \csname Contin@\theCurr@Page\endcsname{\relax}%
+ \fi
+ \the\pagepoint@commands
+ \global \pageinfo@commands={}%
+ }% pageinfo@commands
+ \ifhmode
+ % Remove any skips at the end of the previous paragraph
+ % that might cause a blank line, and then end that paragraph:
+ \unskip\unskip \par
+ \fi
+ \@doitem
+ }% process@question
+ \def\subpart{%
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \process@subpart
+ }%
+ \def\bonussubpart{%
+ \@bonustrue
+ \process@subpart
+ }%
+ \def\process@subpart{%
+ \if@coverpages
+ \cover@question@error
+ \fi
+ \@checkqueslevel{subpart}%
+ \if@insolution
+ % We don't count this subpart, so no addtocounter{numsubparts}.
+ \temp@toks={%
+ \questionobject@pluspagecheck
+ \global \pageinfo@commands={}%
+ % We omit the pagepoint@commands
+ }% temp@toks
+ \else
+ \addtocounter{numsubparts}{1}%
+ % Important: Don't leave any blank lines inside of
+ % \pageinfo@commands!! This token list will be dumped into
+ % horizontal mode by \everypar, and so any blank lines will
+ % cause paragraph breaks.
+ \temp@toks={%
+ \edef\@subpartlabel{subpart@\arabic{question}%
+ @\arabic{partno}@\arabic{subpart}}%
+ \PgInfo@write{\@subpartlabel}%
+ \addquestionobject
+ % In addition to the \PgInfo@write we use an actual \label
+ % command. We do this in order to make the question numbers in
+ % the grade tables into \ref's, so that if the user says
+ % \usepackage{hyperref}, those question numbers will be clickable.
+ %
+ % A further purpose of these labels (which we actually do for all
+ % questions, parts, subparts, and subsubparts) is that if a
+ % question (or part, etc.) is, e.g., moved from one page to
+ % another, LaTeX will notice this and warn the user that LaTeX
+ % must be run one more time to be sure everything is correct.
+ %
+ % We need to do this even though we've already included code to
+ % check when point totals change because questions (and parts,
+ % etc.) know what page they're on from reading the info written to
+ % the .aux file on the previous run. Thus, if a question (or
+ % part, etc.) is moved to a different page, then the pointsonpage
+ % totals won't notice until the *second* subsequent run of LaTeX,
+ % and so there'll be no warning to the user on the *first* run.
+ % Including these labels gives the user a warning on that first
+ % run.
+ \label{\@subpartlabel}%
+ \set@counter@to@pageof{Curr@Page}{\@subpartlabel}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname Contin@\theCurr@Page\endcsname\relax
+ % We're the first \question, \part, \subpart, \subsubpart,
+ % or choice on this page:
+ \global\expandafter\edef\csname
+ Contin@\theCurr@Page\endcsname{\arabic{question}}%
+ \fi
+ \the\pagepoint@commands
+ \global \pageinfo@commands={}%
+ }% temp@toks
+ \fi
+ \append@toklist \pageinfo@commands \temp@toks
+ \ifhmode
+ % Remove any skips at the end of the previous paragraph
+ % that might cause a blank line, and then end that paragraph:
+ \unskip\unskip \par
+ \fi
+ \@doitem
+ }% process@subpart
+ \def\subsubpart{%
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \process@subsubpart
+ }%
+ \def\bonussubsubpart{%
+ \@bonustrue
+ \process@subsubpart
+ }%
+ \def\process@subsubpart{%
+ \if@coverpages
+ \cover@question@error
+ \fi
+ \@checkqueslevel{subsubpart}%
+ \if@insolution
+ % We don't count this subsubpart, so no addtocounter{numsubsubparts}.
+ \temp@toks={%
+ \questionobject@pluspagecheck
+ \global \pageinfo@commands={}%
+ % We omit the pagepoint@commands
+ }% temp@toks
+ \else
+ \addtocounter{numsubsubparts}{1}%
+ % Important: Don't leave any blank lines inside of
+ % \pageinfo@commands!! This token list will be dumped into
+ % horizontal mode by \everypar, and so any blank lines will
+ % cause paragraph breaks.
+ \temp@toks={%
+ \edef\@subsubpartlabel{subsubpart@\arabic{question}%
+ @\arabic{partno}@\arabic{subpart}@\arabic{subsubpart}}%
+ \PgInfo@write{\@subsubpartlabel}%
+ \addquestionobject
+ % In addition to the \PgInfo@write we use an actual \label
+ % command. We do this in order to make the question numbers in
+ % the grade tables into \ref's, so that if the user says
+ % \usepackage{hyperref}, those question numbers will be clickable.
+ %
+ % A further purpose of these labels (which we actually do for all
+ % questions, parts, subparts, and subsubparts) is that if a
+ % question (or part, etc.) is, e.g., moved from one page to
+ % another, LaTeX will notice this and warn the user that LaTeX
+ % must be run one more time to be sure everything is correct.
+ %
+ % We need to do this even though we've already included code to
+ % check when point totals change because questions (and parts,
+ % etc.) know what page they're on from reading the info written to
+ % the .aux file on the previous run. Thus, if a question (or
+ % part, etc.) is moved to a different page, then the pointsonpage
+ % totals won't notice until the *second* subsequent run of LaTeX,
+ % and so there'll be no warning to the user on the *first* run.
+ % Including these labels gives the user a warning on that first
+ % run.
+ \label{\@subsubpartlabel}%
+ \set@counter@to@pageof{Curr@Page}{\@subsubpartlabel}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname Contin@\theCurr@Page\endcsname\relax
+ % We're the first \question, \part, \subpart, \subsubpart,
+ % or choice on this page:
+ \global\expandafter\edef\csname
+ Contin@\theCurr@Page\endcsname{\arabic{question}}%
+ \fi
+ \the\pagepoint@commands
+ \global \pageinfo@commands={}%
+ }% temp@toks
+ \fi
+ \append@toklist \pageinfo@commands \temp@toks
+ \ifhmode
+ % Remove any skips at the end of the previous paragraph
+ % that might cause a blank line, and then end that paragraph:
+ \unskip\unskip \par
+ \fi
+ \@doitem
+ }% process@subsubpart
+ \list{\question@number}%
+ {\usecounter{question}%
+ % We use the default definition of \makelabel
+ % so as not to interfere with \qformat commands.
+ % \def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}%
+ \settowidth{\leftmargin}{10.\hskip\labelsep}%
+ \labelwidth\leftmargin\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+ \partopsep=0pt
+ \questionshook
+ }%
+ }% End of the first argument of \newenvironment{questions}
+ {%
+ \endlist
+ % Write the number of points of the final question
+ % to the .aux file:
+ \if@filesw
+ \ifnum \value{question} > 0\relax
+ % First do the regular points:
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\pointsofq@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@question\endcsname
+ {\prtaux@hlfcntr{pointsof@thisquestion}}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \CheckIfChanged@hlf{pointsof@thisquestion}%
+ {pointsofq@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@question\endcsname}%
+ % Now do the bonus points:
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\bonuspointsofq@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@question\endcsname
+ {\prtaux@hlfcntr{bonuspointsof@thisquestion}}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \CheckIfChanged@hlf{bonuspointsof@thisquestion}%
+ {bonuspointsofq@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@question\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }% End of the second argument of \newenvironment{questions}
+
+% \question@number is used as the label in the question list (instead
+% of \questionlabel) so that if the user uses a \qformat command,
+% we'll use the \@questionformat specified by the \qformat command:
+
+\def\question@number{%
+ \if@bonus
+ \if@bonusqformat
+ \makebox[\hsize][s]{\@bonusquestionformat}\hskip-\labelsep
+ \else
+ \questionlabel
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \if@qformat
+ \makebox[\hsize][s]{\@questionformat}\hskip-\labelsep
+ \else
+ \questionlabel
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\newcommand\questionlabel{\thequestion.}
+
+% We want the \part command to be defined *only* inside of a parts
+% environment, so that the user can use the standard sectioning \part
+% command inside of a questions environment (as long as it's outside of
+% a parts environment).
+
+\newenvironment{parts}{%
+ \def\@queslevel{part}%
+ % If the question numbers are being inserted via a \qformat,
+ % and if a question is beginning with a parts environment, then
+ % we need to enter horizonal mode to get the qformat printed
+ % on the page, rather than saving up the question label (and
+ % possible points) to be combined with the label of the first
+ % part. (\if@inlabel tells us if we are still waiting to enter
+ % horizontal mode after seeing a \question command.)
+ \if@bonus
+ \if@bonusqformat
+ \if@inlabel
+ \leavevmode
+ \@inlabelfalse
+ \fi
+ % The following is just in case the question had points,
+ % in which case @placepoints will still be true.
+ % (We used to do this inside of the \thepoints macro,
+ % but that allowed for an error if the user specified points for
+ % a question but had a \qformat that didn't mention \thepoints.)
+ % We also set @placepoints to be false in the \question command,
+ % in case one queation follows a previous one that had no parts.
+ \global \@placepointsfalse
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \if@qformat
+ \if@inlabel
+ \leavevmode
+ \@inlabelfalse
+ \fi
+ % The following is just in case the question had points,
+ % in which case @placepoints will still be true.
+ % (We used to do this inside of the \thepoints macro,
+ % but that allowed for an error if the user specified points for
+ % a question but had a \qformat that didn't mention \thepoints.)
+ % We also set @placepoints to be false in the \question command,
+ % in case one queation follows a previous one that had no parts.
+ \global \@placepointsfalse
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \def\part{%
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \process@part
+ }%
+ \def\bonuspart{%
+ \@bonustrue
+ \process@part
+ }%
+ \def\process@part{%
+ \if@coverpages
+ \cover@question@error
+ \fi
+ \@checkqueslevel{part}%
+ \if@insolution
+ % We don't count this part, so no addtocounter{numparts}.
+ \temp@toks={%
+ \questionobject@pluspagecheck
+ \global \pageinfo@commands={}%
+ % We omit the pagepoint@commands
+ }% temp@toks
+ \else
+ \addtocounter{numparts}{1}%
+ % Important: Don't leave any blank lines inside of
+ % \pageinfo@commands!! This token list will be dumped into
+ % horizontal mode by \everypar, and so any blank lines will
+ % cause paragraph breaks.
+ \temp@toks={%
+ \edef\@partlabel{part@\arabic{question}@\arabic{partno}}%
+ \PgInfo@write{\@partlabel}%
+ \addquestionobject
+ % In addition to the \PgInfo@write we use an actual \label
+ % command. We do this in order to make the question numbers in
+ % the grade tables into \ref's, so that if the user says
+ % \usepackage{hyperref}, those question numbers will be clickable.
+ %
+ % A further purpose of these labels (which we actually do for all
+ % questions, parts, subparts, and subsubparts) is that if a
+ % question (or part, etc.) is, e.g., moved from one page to
+ % another, LaTeX will notice this and warn the user that LaTeX
+ % must be run one more time to be sure everything is correct.
+ %
+ % We need to do this even though we've already included code to
+ % check when point totals change because questions (and parts,
+ % etc.) know what page they're on from reading the info written to
+ % the .aux file on the previous run. Thus, if a question (or
+ % part, etc.) is moved to a different page, then the pointsonpage
+ % totals won't notice until the *second* subsequent run of LaTeX,
+ % and so there'll be no warning to the user on the *first* run.
+ % Including these labels gives the user a warning on that first
+ % run.
+ \label{\@partlabel}%
+ \set@counter@to@pageof{Curr@Page}{\@partlabel}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname Contin@\theCurr@Page\endcsname\relax
+ \global\expandafter\edef\csname
+ Contin@\theCurr@Page\endcsname{\arabic{question}}%
+ \fi
+ \the\pagepoint@commands
+ \global \pageinfo@commands={}%
+ }% temp@toks
+ \fi
+ \append@toklist \pageinfo@commands \temp@toks
+ \ifhmode
+ % Remove any skips at the end of the previous paragraph
+ % that might cause a blank line, and then end that paragraph:
+ \unskip\unskip \par
+ \fi
+ \@doitem
+ }% process@part
+ \list{\partlabel}%
+ {%
+ \usecounter{partno}\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}%
+ \settowidth{\leftmargin}{(m)\hskip\labelsep}%
+ \labelwidth\leftmargin\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+ \topsep=0pt
+ \partopsep=0pt
+ \partshook
+ }%
+ }% newenvironment{parts}
+ {\endlist}
+\newcommand\partlabel{(\thepartno)}
+\def\thepartno{\alph{partno}}
+
+\newenvironment{subparts}{%
+ \def\@queslevel{subpart}%
+ \list{\subpartlabel}%
+ {%
+ \usecounter{subpart}\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}%
+ \settowidth{\leftmargin}{vii.\hskip\labelsep}%
+ \labelwidth\leftmargin\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+ \topsep=0pt
+ \partopsep=0pt
+ \subpartshook
+ }%
+ }%
+ {\endlist}
+\newcommand\subpartlabel{\thesubpart.}
+\def\thesubpart{\roman{subpart}}
+
+\newenvironment{subsubparts}{%
+ \def\@queslevel{subsubpart}%
+ \list{\subsubpartlabel}%
+ {%
+ \usecounter{subsubpart}\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}%
+ \settowidth{\leftmargin}{($\psi$)\hskip\labelsep}%
+ \labelwidth\leftmargin\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+ \topsep=0pt
+ \partopsep=0pt
+ \subsubpartshook
+ }%
+ }%
+ {\endlist}
+\newcommand\subsubpartlabel{\thesubsubpart)}
+\def\thesubsubpart{\greeknum{subsubpart}}
+
+
+
+
+\pagepoint@commands={%
+ \ifhlfcntr@pos{latest@points}%
+ % We're putting a question (or part, etc.)
+ % with points onto this page:
+ \ifnum \theCurr@Page > \thepageof@pagepoints\relax
+ % These points go on a later page than
+ % the points currently counted in @pagepoints:
+ \ifnum \thepageof@pagepoints = 0\relax
+ % Do nothing...
+ \else
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\pointsonpage@
+ \romannumeral \csname c@pageof@pagepoints\endcsname
+ {\prtaux@hlfcntr{@pagepoints}}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \CheckIfChanged@hlf{@pagepoints}{pointsonpage@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@pageof@pagepoints\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ % The following is a macro because \theCurr@Page and
+ % \thepageof@pagepoints might differ by more than 1:
+ \increment@pageof@pagepoints
+ % The following label is so that we can make the page
+ % numbers in a grade table indexed by page into \pageref's
+ % so that \usepackage{hyperref} and pdflatex will
+ % make them clickable:
+ \label{firstpoints@onpage@\arabic{Curr@Page}}%
+ \else
+ % These points go on the same page as the points
+ % currently counted in @pagepoints:
+ \add@hlfcntrtohlfcntr{@pagepoints}{latest@points}%
+ \set@hlfcntr{latest@points}{0}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifhlfcntr@pos{latest@bonuspoints}%
+ % We're putting a question (or part, etc.)
+ % with bonus points onto this page:
+ \ifnum \theCurr@Page > \thepageof@pagebonuspoints\relax
+ % These bonus points go on a later page than
+ % the points currently counted in @pagebonuspoints:
+ \ifnum \thepageof@pagebonuspoints = 0\relax
+ % Do nothing...
+ \else
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\bonuspointsonpage@
+ \romannumeral \csname c@pageof@pagebonuspoints\endcsname
+ {\prtaux@hlfcntr{@pagebonuspoints}}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \CheckIfChanged@hlf{@pagebonuspoints}%
+ {bonuspointsonpage@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@pageof@pagebonuspoints\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ % The following is a macro because \theCurr@Page and
+ % \thepageof@pagebonuspoints might differ by more than 1:
+ \increment@pageof@pagebonuspoints
+ % The following label is so that we can make the page
+ % numbers in a bonus grade table indexed by page into \pageref's
+ % so that \usepackage{hyperref} and pdflatex will
+ % make them clickable:
+ \label{firstbonuspoints@onpage@\arabic{Curr@Page}}%
+ \else
+ % These points go on the same page as the points
+ % currently counted in @pagebonuspoints:
+ \add@hlfcntrtohlfcntr{@pagebonuspoints}{latest@bonuspoints}%
+ \set@hlfcntr{latest@bonuspoints}{0}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}% pagepoint@commands
+\def\increment@pageof@pagepoints{%
+ \addtocounter{pageof@pagepoints}{1}%
+ \ifnum \theCurr@Page > \thepageof@pagepoints\relax
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\pointsonpage@
+ \romannumeral \csname c@pageof@pagepoints\endcsname{0}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \@ifundefined{pointsonpage@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@pageof@pagepoints\endcsname}
+ {\global\@pointschangedtrue}%
+ {%
+ % OK; it's defined. See if it's changed:
+ \begingroup
+ \set@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\csname pointsonpage@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@pageof@pagepoints\endcsname\endcsname}%
+ \edef\othpt@check{\prtaux@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}}%
+ \def\pt@check{0}%
+ \ifx \pt@check \othpt@check
+ % Do nothing
+ \else
+ \global\@pointschangedtrue
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+ \let\next@incr@pageof = \increment@pageof@pagepoints
+ \else
+ \copy@hlfcntr{@pagepoints}{latest@points}%
+ \set@hlfcntr{latest@points}{0}%
+ % \page@withpoints will be used to find the last
+ % page that has points, which will be written to
+ % the .aux file via \AtEndDocument:
+ \global\edef\page@withpoints{\thepageof@pagepoints}%
+ \let\next@incr@pageof = \relax
+ \fi
+ \next@incr@pageof
+}% increment@pageof@pagepoints
+\def\increment@pageof@pagebonuspoints{%
+ \addtocounter{pageof@pagebonuspoints}{1}%
+ \ifnum \theCurr@Page > \thepageof@pagebonuspoints\relax
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\gdef\string\bonuspointsonpage@
+ \romannumeral \csname c@pageof@pagebonuspoints\endcsname{0}}%
+ % See if this has changed from the last run of LaTeX:
+ \@ifundefined{bonuspointsonpage@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@pageof@pagebonuspoints\endcsname}
+ {\global\@pointschangedtrue}%
+ {%
+ % OK; it's defined. See if it's changed:
+ \begingroup
+ \set@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\csname bonuspointsonpage@\romannumeral
+ \csname c@pageof@pagebonuspoints\endcsname\endcsname}%
+ \edef\othpt@check{\prtaux@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}}%
+ \def\pt@check{0}%
+ \ifx \pt@check \othpt@check
+ % Do nothing
+ \else
+ \global\@pointschangedtrue
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+ \let\next@incr@pageof = \increment@pageof@pagebonuspoints
+ \else
+ \copy@hlfcntr{@pagebonuspoints}{latest@bonuspoints}%
+ \set@hlfcntr{latest@bonuspoints}{0}%
+ % \page@withbonuspoints will be used to find the last
+ % page that has bonus points, which will be written to
+ % the .aux file via \AtEndDocument:
+ \global\edef\page@withbonuspoints{\thepageof@pagebonuspoints}%
+ \let\next@incr@pageof = \relax
+ \fi
+ \next@incr@pageof
+}% increment@pageof@pagebonuspoints
+
+
+
+
+
+
+\def\@checkqueslevel#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\exam@temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\exam@temp\@queslevel
+ % Everything's fine; do nothing.
+ \else
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ I found a #1 where I expected to find a
+ \@queslevel\MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ Both #1 and \@queslevel \space can be used only inside the
+ correct \MessageBreak \space \space
+ environment and outside of any smaller environment
+ \MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\@doitem{\@ifnextchar[{\@readpoints}%
+ {\item@points@pageinfo}%
+}
+
+\def\@readpoints[#1]{%
+% We use \def for \@points instead of \edef because we don't want
+% \half (if present) to be expanded yet, so that the command \points
+% can figure out how to deal with it:
+ \def\@points{#1}%
+ \global \@placepointstrue
+ \if@addpoints
+ \if@bonus
+ \addto@hlfcntr{numbonuspoints}{\@points}%
+ \addto@hlfcntr{bonuspointsof@thisquestion}{\@points}%
+ % latest@bonuspoints is a holding area for bonus points to be
+ % added to @pagepoints after we check whether they're
+ % on the same page as the points currently counted
+ % by @pagepoints:
+ \addto@hlfcntr{latest@bonuspoints}{\@points}%
+ \else
+ \addto@hlfcntr{numpoints}{\@points}%
+ \addto@hlfcntr{pointsof@thisquestion}{\@points}%
+ % latest@points is a holding area for points to be
+ % added to @pagepoints after we check whether they're
+ % on the same page as the points currently counted
+ % by @pagepoints:
+ \addto@hlfcntr{latest@points}{\@points}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \item@points@pageinfo
+}
+
+
+
+
+% Bug fix, 5 April 2004: \item@points@pageinfo
+% Appending \point@toks and \pageinfo@commands to \everypar:
+% Instead of appending the contents of \point@toks and
+% \pageinfo@commands to \everypar using \append@toklist,
+% we instead want to append only the two tokens
+% \the\point@toks
+% and the two tokens
+% \the\pageinfo@commands
+% to \everypar. We need to do this because if a questions environment
+% immediately follows a \section command, then @nobreak will be true,
+% and so the \if@nobreak inside of \everypar will *not* execute the
+% \everypar={} that we had been counting on to keep the points from
+% being inserted a second time in the second paragraph of a question.
+% Since we've put the command \global \point@toks={} inside of
+% \point@toks and the command \pageinfo@commands={} inside of
+% \pageinfo@commands, when the contents of \point@toks and of
+% \pageinfo@commands are executed (when we enter horizontal mode and
+% \everypar is dumped in), the contents of \point@toks and
+% \pageinfo@commands will be made empty, and so if
+% the second paragraph also gets \the\point@toks and
+% \the\pageinfo@commands, it won't matter.
+
+\def\item@points@pageinfo{%
+ \item
+ % Also: We need to do this here, *after* the \item command, rather
+ % than inside the macro \@readpoints, because the \item command
+ % puts the result of the \qformat command into an \hbox (with the
+ % command ``\sbox\@tempboxa{\makelabel{#1}}%''), expanding the
+ % argument of \qformat as it does so. Thus, @placepoints will be
+ % true when the argument of \qformat is expanded, and so if the
+ % user put a \thepoints command inside that argument it will
+ % correctly expand to the number of points. (When @placepoints is
+ % false, \thepoints expands to nothing at all).
+ %
+ % We also want to define \padded@point@block when @placepoints is
+ % true even if qformat and bonusqformat are true just in case the
+ % user, for some deranged reason, says \droppoints immediately
+ % following a \question.
+ %
+ \if@placepoints
+ % Since we want the user to be able to say \thepoints in the
+ % argument to a \pointformat command, we need \@placepointstrue
+ % when \point@block is expanded so that \thepoints will actually
+ % print something. (After setting up \point@toks, we do
+ % \@placepointsfalse, but \point@block isn't actually expanded
+ % until we enter horizontal mode.) Thus, we define
+ % \padded@point@block, and use that instead of \point@block. We
+ % put \begingroup and \endgroup around this to confine the
+ % effect of \@placepointstrue and also to confine the effect of
+ % any declarations like, e.g., \bfseries that the user might put
+ % in the argument of a \pointformat command.
+ %
+ % Note: We first tried using an \edef to expand \point@block right
+ % here, while @placepoints is true, but that causes problems if
+ % the user puts a \boldmath declaration in the argument of a
+ % \pointformat command. Apparently, expanding \boldmath (without
+ % executing anything) gives you bunches of undefined control
+ % sequence errors.
+ \if@bonus
+ \def\padded@point@block{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@placepointstrue
+ \bonuspoint@block
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+ \else
+ \def\padded@point@block{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@placepointstrue
+ \point@block
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+ \fi
+ % \setup@point@toks puts commands into \point@toks to place
+ % \padded@point@block at the correct spot. It doesn't append
+ % anything to \everypar (we do that in this macro, below).
+ %
+ % If @qformat is true, and if we're currently doing a question (or
+ % if @bonusqformat is true and we're doing a bonusquestion)
+ % (rather than a part, subpart, or subsubpart), then we don't want
+ % to set the points (if any), since the points of a question will
+ % appear only if the user chooses to cause that by putting a
+ % \thepoints in the argument of the \qformat command.
+ \if@pointsdropped
+ % Do nothing!
+ \else
+ \if@bonus
+ \if@bonusqformat
+ \ifx\ques@ref\@queslevel
+ % Do nothing
+ \else
+ \setup@point@toks
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \setup@point@toks
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \if@qformat
+ \ifx\ques@ref\@queslevel
+ % Do nothing
+ \else
+ \setup@point@toks
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \setup@point@toks
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \global \@placepointsfalse
+ \fi
+ % We *don't* use \append@toklist; see the Bug fixnote above
+ % (Bug fix, 5 April 2004).
+ % We can append the tokens ``\the\point@toks'' whether or not we're
+ % setting any points because if we're not setting them, \point@toks
+ % will be empty.
+ % Also: It's important to do this *after* the \item command above,
+ % since the \item command discards the previous contents of
+ % \everypar.
+ % Version 2.218$\beta$, 2007/10/31 changes:
+ % Instead of appending
+ % \the \pageinfo@commands \the \point@toks
+ % to \everypar, we insert them into the box \@labels. This corrects
+ % the problem that arose when a question (or part, etc.) begins with
+ % a list environment (including verbatim, flushleft, center,
+ % flushright, and possibly others that are implemented as trivlist
+ % environments). The \item command in those environments throws
+ % away the previous contents of \everypar, and so the tokens \the
+ % \pageinfo@commands \the \point@toks didn't get inserted where we
+ % expected. List environments *do* preserve the contents of the box
+ % \@labels, though.
+ \global\setbox\@labels\hbox{\unhbox\@labels
+ \the \pageinfo@commands
+ \the \point@toks}%
+ % \edef\append@everypar{\noexpand\everypar={\the\everypar
+ % \noexpand\the \noexpand\pageinfo@commands
+ % \noexpand\the \noexpand\point@toks}}%
+ % \append@everypar
+}
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+% Initialize \@points:
+% (The only reason I think this is necessary is in case the user uses
+% a \qformat command, puts \themarginpoints into the format (which is
+% *not* the intended use of \themarginpoints), and then doesn't have
+% any points for the first question.)
+\def\@points{0}
+
+
+\def\setup@point@toks{%
+% We set the token list \point@toks equal to the sequence of commands
+% needed to put \padded@point@block at the correct location, followed
+% by the tokens ``\global \point@toks={}''. The \question, \part,
+% \subpart, or \subsubpart command then adds the two tokens
+% ``\the\point@toks'' to \everypar.
+%
+% Note: It is not the *contents* of \point@toks that is added to
+% \everypar; just the two tokens ``\the\point@toks''. This difference
+% is the bug fix of 2 April 2004, described above (the bug was that in
+% earlier versions, we used to append the contents).
+%
+% The result of this is that whenever we finally enter horizontal mode
+% (because we finally encountered the text of a question, part,
+% subpart, or subsubpart) the contents of \point@toks will be dumped
+% into horizontal mode and executed, and so the points will be placed
+% and the token list \point@toks will be set to empty. Thus, in the
+% occasional circumstances in which \everypar is *not* set to empty
+% after being added to the first paragraph (which occurs when a
+% questions environment immediately follows a \section command), and
+% so \everypar will still contain ``\the\point@toks'' when it
+% encounters a possible second paragraph of the first question, the
+% tokens ``\the\point@toks'' will insert an *empty* token list, which
+% will do no harm.
+%
+ \if@pointstwosided
+ % Set \csname \q@label \endcsname equal to the thing
+ % that expands to the page number of the current (question or
+ % part or subpart or subsubpar; whatever it is), but do it
+ % carefully because, if we don't yet have page info, then it won't
+ % be defined:
+ \ifx\@queslevel\ques@ref
+ \def\q@label{Pg@question@\arabic{question}}
+ \else
+ \ifx\@queslevel\part@ref
+ \def\q@label{Pg@part@\arabic{question}@\arabic{partno}}
+ \else
+ \ifx\@queslevel\subpart@ref
+ \def\q@label{Pg@subpart@\arabic{question}%
+ @\arabic{partno}@\arabic{subpart}}
+ \else
+ \ifx\@queslevel\subsubpart@ref
+ \def\q@label{Pg@subsubpart@\arabic{question}%
+ @\arabic{partno}@\arabic{subpart}@\arabic{subsubpart}}
+ \else
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ This can't happen in function \protect\setup@point@toks
+ \MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ An unexplained error occurred in exam.cls;\MessageBreak
+ please inform the package maintainer, and send along
+ \MessageBreak
+ the LaTeX file that shows the error.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ %
+ \expandafter\ifx \csname \q@label \endcsname\relax
+ % No page info yet; put it into the right margin
+ \@pointsinrightmargintrue
+ \@pointsinleftmarginfalse
+ \else
+ \ifodd \csname \q@label \endcsname\relax
+ \if@pointsinoutsidemargin
+ \@pointsinrightmargintrue
+ \@pointsinleftmarginfalse
+ \else
+ \@pointsinrightmarginfalse
+ \@pointsinleftmargintrue
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \if@pointsinoutsidemargin
+ \@pointsinrightmarginfalse
+ \@pointsinleftmargintrue
+ \else
+ \@pointsinrightmargintrue
+ \@pointsinleftmarginfalse
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ % That ends the \if@pointstwosided.
+ % Now we actually setup \point@toks:
+ \if@pointsinleftmargin
+ \point@toks={%
+ \llap{\padded@point@block
+ \hskip\@totalleftmargin
+ \hskip\marginpointssep
+ }%
+ \global \point@toks={}%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \if@pointsinrightmargin
+ \point@toks={%
+ \rlap{\hskip-\@totalleftmargin
+ \hskip\textwidth
+ \hskip\@rightmargin
+ \hskip-\rightpointsmargin
+ \llap{\padded@point@block}%
+ }%
+ \global \point@toks={}%
+ }%
+ \else
+ % The points just go after the question number:
+ \point@toks={%
+ \padded@point@block
+ \enspace
+ \global \point@toks={}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}% setup@point@toks
+
+\def\droppoints{%
+ \leavevmode\unskip\nobreak\hfill
+ \rlap{\hskip\rightmargin % Defined by the list environment
+ \hskip\@rightmargin % Defined by exam.cls
+ \hskip-\rightpointsmargin
+ \llap{\padded@point@block}%
+ }% rlap
+ \par
+}
+
+\def\droptotalpoints{%
+ \leavevmode\unskip\nobreak\hfill
+ \rlap{\hskip\rightmargin % Defined by the list environment
+ \hskip\@rightmargin % Defined by exam.cls
+ \hskip-\rightpointsmargin
+ \llap{\total@block}%
+ }% rlap
+ \par
+}% droptotalpoints
+\def\droptotalbonuspoints{%
+ \leavevmode\unskip\nobreak\hfill
+ \rlap{\hskip\rightmargin % Defined by the list environment
+ \hskip\@rightmargin % Defined by exam.cls
+ \hskip-\rightpointsmargin
+ \llap{\bonustotal@block}%
+ }% rlap
+ \par
+}% droptotalbonuspoints
+
+% The following is the default definition;
+% it can be changed by a \totalformat command.
+\def\total@block{%
+ Total for Question \thequestion: \totalpoints\@marginpointname
+}% total@block
+\def\bonustotal@block{%
+ Total for Question \thequestion: \totalbonuspoints\@marginbonuspointname
+}% bonustotal@block
+
+\def\totalformat#1{%
+ \gdef\total@block{\begingroup #1\endgroup}%
+}% totalformat
+\def\bonustotalformat#1{%
+ \gdef\bonustotal@block{\begingroup #1\endgroup}%
+}% bonustotalformat
+% The following is for use in the argument to a \totalformat command:
+\def\totalpoints{\pointsofquestion{\arabic{question}}}
+\def\totalbonuspoints{\bonuspointsofquestion{\arabic{question}}}
+
+
+
+% @placepoints is set true when we encounter a question (or part, etc.)
+% that has points. It is set to false (1) when we set \point@toks equal
+% to the sequence of commands required to put the properly formatted
+% points onto the page (this happens only if @qformat is false or if
+% @qformat is true but we're not doing a question), or (2) by a
+% \question command or entering a parts environment (since if we're
+% doing a question and @qformat is true, we need to leave @placepoints
+% true so that the \thepoints command can tell if it should expand to
+% points or to nothing, and encountering a \question command or parts
+% environment tells us that we no longer have to deal with a possible
+% \thepoints, since we won't be expanding a qformat).
+\newif\if@placepoints
+\@placepointsfalse
+
+
+% \marginpointssep will be used if the user says
+% \pointsinleftmargin. It will be the distance from whatever encloses
+% the points (parentheses, brackets, or a box) to the left margin:
+\newlength\marginpointssep
+\setlength{\marginpointssep}{5pt}
+
+% \rightpointsmargin will be used if the user says \pointsinrightmargin.
+% It will be the distance from whatever encloses the point (parentheses,
+% brackets, or a box) to the right edge of the paper:
+\newlength\rightpointsmargin
+\setlength{\rightpointsmargin}{1cm}
+
+
+\newif\if@pointsdropped
+\newif\if@pointsinleftmargin
+\newif\if@pointsinrightmargin
+\newif\if@pointstwosided
+\newif\if@pointsinoutsidemargin
+
+% If we have \@pointstwosidedtrue and \@pointsinoutsidemarginfalse,
+% then the points will be printed on the inside margin (left on odd
+% numbered pages, right on even numbered pages). If we have
+% \@pointstwosidedfalse, then \if@pointsinoutsidemargin is ignored.
+
+% If we have \@pointstwosidedtrue, then both \@pointsinleftmargin and
+% \@pointsinrightmargin will be flipped back and forth, as needed, in
+% \setup@point@toks.
+
+\def\pointsinleftmargin{\global\@pointsinleftmargintrue
+ \global\@pointsinrightmarginfalse
+ \global\@pointsdroppedfalse
+ \global\@pointstwosidedfalse
+ \gdef\pt@name{\@marginpointname}%
+ \gdef\bnspt@name{\@marginbonuspointname}}
+\def\pointsinrightmargin{\global\@pointsinrightmargintrue
+ \global\@pointsinleftmarginfalse
+ \global\@pointsdroppedfalse
+ \global\@pointstwosidedfalse
+ \gdef\pt@name{\@marginpointname}%
+ \gdef\bnspt@name{\@marginbonuspointname}}
+\def\nopointsinmargin{\global\@pointsinleftmarginfalse
+ \global\@pointsinrightmarginfalse
+ \global\@pointsdroppedfalse
+ \global\@pointstwosidedfalse
+ \gdef\pt@name{\@pointname}%
+ \gdef\bnspt@name{\@bonuspointname}}
+\def\pointsdroppedatright{\global\@pointsdroppedtrue
+ \global\@pointsinleftmarginfalse
+ \global\@pointsinrightmarginfalse
+ \global\@pointstwosidedfalse
+ \gdef\pt@name{\@marginpointname}%
+ \gdef\bnspt@name{\@marginbonuspointname}}
+\def\pointstwosided{\global\@pointstwosidedtrue
+ \global\@pointsinoutsidemargintrue
+ \global\@pointsdroppedfalse
+ \gdef\pt@name{\@marginpointname}%
+ \gdef\bnspt@name{\@marginbonuspointname}}
+\def\pointstwosidedreversed{\global\@pointstwosidedtrue
+ \global\@pointsinoutsidemarginfalse
+ \global\@pointsdroppedfalse
+ \gdef\pt@name{\@marginpointname}%
+ \gdef\bnspt@name{\@marginbonuspointname}}
+\let\pointsinmargin=\pointsinleftmargin
+\let\nopointsinrightmargin=\nopointsinmargin
+\let\nopointsinleftmargin=\nopointsinmargin
+
+\nopointsinmargin
+
+
+% Will the points be displayed inside parentheses (the default), or
+% will they be boxed or bracketed, or customized using pointformat:
+\def\boxedpoints{%
+ \gdef\point@block{\fbox{\@points\pt@name}}%
+ \gdef\bonuspoint@block{\fbox{\@points\bnspt@name}}%
+}
+\def\noboxedpoints{%
+ \gdef\point@block{(\@points\pt@name)}%
+ \gdef\bonuspoint@block{(\@points\bnspt@name)}%
+}
+\def\bracketedpoints{%
+ \gdef\point@block{[\@points\pt@name]}%
+ \gdef\bonuspoint@block{[\@points\bnspt@name]}%
+}
+\let\nobracketedpoints=\noboxedpoints
+
+\def\pointformat#1{%
+ % We don't have to worry about the user putting things
+ % like \bfseries, etc. into \point@block, because
+ % \padded@point@block encloses \point@block in a group,
+ % which confines the effects of anything here:
+ \gdef\point@block{#1}%
+}
+
+\def\bonuspointformat#1{%
+ % We don't have to worry about the user putting things
+ % like \bfseries, etc. into \point@block, because
+ % \padded@point@block encloses \point@block in a group,
+ % which confines the effects of anything here:
+ \gdef\bonuspoint@block{#1}%
+}
+
+%Initialize:
+\noboxedpoints
+
+
+
+
+\def\pointname#1{\gdef\@pointname{#1}}
+\def\bonuspointname#1{\gdef\@bonuspointname{#1}}
+% Initialize to leave a space, and then the word `points':
+%%\pointname{ points}
+% The following improvement was contributed by
+% Mate Wierdl <mw@wierdlmpc.msci.memphis.edu>
+% If the number of points is ``1'', then the default value of
+% \pointname will print `` point'' instead of `` points'' (and this
+% version of the command doesn't generate an error message if the
+% points entry is something other than a number):
+% Note the space before the \points in the following; it's
+% intentional!)
+\pointname{ \points}
+\bonuspointname{ \bonuspoints}
+\newcommand\point@sing{point}
+\newcommand\point@plur{points}
+\newcommand\pointpoints[2]{%
+ \renewcommand\point@sing{#1}%
+ \renewcommand\point@plur{#2}%
+}
+%\newcommand\bonuspoint@sing{bonus point}
+%\newcommand\bonuspoint@plur{bonus points}
+\newcommand\bonuspoint@sing{point (bonus)}
+\newcommand\bonuspoint@plur{points (bonus)}
+\newcommand\bonuspointpoints[2]{%
+ \renewcommand\bonuspoint@sing{#1}%
+ \renewcommand\bonuspoint@plur{#2}%
+}
+
+
+
+% The command \points:
+% We use \ifthenelse and \equal so that if the user types something
+% other than a legit point value, there still won't be any error
+% messages. We rig it so that if the point value looks like it's
+% intended to be One or one or ONE, or some strange way of attempting
+% one half, then it will expand to the singular value. Alas, this is
+% only useful for English, but I'm hoping few or no users will try doing
+% this anyway.
+
+% 0 points, one half point, 1 point, 1 and a half points, etc.:
+\newcommand\points{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\half=\relax
+ \edef\pt@string{\@points}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\pt@string}{1} \or \equal{\pt@string}{\half}}
+ {\point@sing}{\point@plur}%
+ \endgroup
+}% \points
+\newcommand\bonuspoints{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\half=\relax
+ \edef\pt@string{\@points}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\pt@string}{1} \or \equal{\pt@string}{\half}}
+ {\bonuspoint@sing}{\bonuspoint@plur}%
+ \endgroup
+}% \bonuspoints
+%\newcommand\points{%
+% \begingroup
+% \let\half=\relax
+% \edef\pt@string{\@points}%
+% \ifthenelse{\equal{\pt@string}{1} \or \equal{\pt@string}{\half} \or
+% \equal{\pt@string}{0\half} \or \equal{\pt@string}{0 \half}
+% \equal{\pt@string}{one} \or \equal{\pt@string}{One} \or
+% \equal{\pt@string}{ONE}}
+% {\point@sing}{\point@plur}%
+% \endgroup
+%}
+
+%\newcommand\points{\ifthenelse{\equal{\@points}{1}}{\point@sing}{\point@plur}}
+% If we used the following line instead, then you'd get an error
+% message if the point value contained something other than a valid
+% integer:
+%\pointname{ \ifthenelse{\@points = 1}{point}{points}}
+
+% We used to define a command named \marks that works like \points,
+% except that it expands to either ``mark'' or ``marks'', but that
+% conflicts with some package or other. Thus, we'll implement
+% \marksnotpoints using the \pointpoints command instead:
+\newcommand\marksnotpoints{%
+ \pointpoints{mark}{marks}%
+ \bonuspointpoints{mark (bonus)}{marks (bonus)}%
+}% \marksnotpoints
+
+
+% \@marginpointname is used in place of \@pointname if any of
+% \@pointsinmargin, \@pointsinrightmargin, and \@pointsdropped are
+% true:
+\def\marginpointname#1{\gdef\@marginpointname{#1}}
+\marginpointname{}
+\def\marginbonuspointname#1{\gdef\@marginbonuspointname{#1}}
+\marginbonuspointname{ (bonus)}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% choices (for multiple choice) and checkboxes
+
+
+\renewcommand\thechoice{\Alph{choice}}
+\newcommand\choicelabel{\thechoice.}
+
+% We will have \@correctchoicetrue when we're printing solutions
+% and we're printing the correct choice of a choices or
+% oneparchoices environment.
+% We'll say \begingroup before saying \@correctchoicetrue
+% and we'll say \endgroup at either the next \choice or \correctchoice
+% or the end of the choices or oneparchoices environment.
+% Thus, we'll never again need to say \@correctchoicefalse
+\newif\if@correctchoice
+\@correctchoicefalse
+
+\newcommand\CorrectChoiceEmphasis[1]{%
+ \def\CorrectChoice@Emphasis{#1}%
+}
+\CorrectChoiceEmphasis{\bfseries}
+\let\correctchoiceemphasis\CorrectChoiceEmphasis
+
+% Note: \do@choice@pageinfo is used in both the choices and
+% the checkboxes environments.
+\newtoks\choice@toks
+\def\do@choice@pageinfo{%
+ \choice@toks={%
+ \questionobject@pluspagecheck
+ \choice@toks={}%
+ }%
+ % Version 2.217-beta changes:
+ % Instead of appending stuff to \everypar, we insert
+ % \the \pageinfo@commands and \the \point@toks
+ % into the box \@labels:
+ \global\setbox\@labels\hbox{\unhbox\@labels
+ \the \choice@toks}%
+ % \edef\append@everypar{\noexpand\everypar={\the\everypar
+ % \noexpand\the \noexpand\choice@toks}}%
+ % \append@everypar
+}% do@choice@pageinfo
+
+
+
+% Added 22 April 2004: Increased the \leftmargin by 2.5em,
+% so the choices will be visibly indented.
+\newenvironment{choices}%
+ {\list{\choicelabel}%
+ {\usecounter{choice}\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}%
+ \settowidth{\leftmargin}{W.\hskip\labelsep\hskip 2.5em}%
+ \def\choice{%
+ \if@correctchoice
+ \color@endgroup
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \item
+ \do@choice@pageinfo
+ } % choice
+ \def\CorrectChoice{%
+ \if@correctchoice
+ \color@endgroup
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \ifprintanswers
+ % We can't say \choice here, because that would
+ % insert an \endgroup:
+ % 2016/05/10: We say \color@begingroup in addition to
+ % \begingroup in case \CorrectChoiceEmphasis involves color
+ % and the text exactly fills the line (which would
+ % otherwise create a blank line after this choice):
+ % 2016/05/11: We leave hmode if we're in it,
+ % i.e., if there's no blank line preceding this
+ % \CorrectChoice command. (Without this, the
+ % \special created by a \color{whatever} command that might
+ % be inserted by \CorrectChoice@Emphasis would be appended
+ % to the previous \choice, which could cause an extra
+ % (blank) line to be inserted before this \CorrectChoice.)
+ % Since \par and \endgraf seem to cancel \@totalleftmargin
+ % (for reasons I don't understand), we'll do the following:
+ % Motivated by the def of \leavevmode,
+ % \def\leavevmode{\unhbox\voidb@x}
+ % we will now leave hmode (if we're in hmode):
+ \ifhmode \unskip\unskip\unvbox\voidb@x \fi
+ \begingroup \color@begingroup \@correctchoicetrue
+ \CorrectChoice@Emphasis
+ \fi
+ \item
+ \do@choice@pageinfo
+ } % CorrectChoice
+ \let\correctchoice\CorrectChoice
+ \labelwidth\leftmargin\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+ \topsep=0pt
+ \partopsep=0pt
+ \choiceshook
+ }%
+ }%
+ {\if@correctchoice \color@endgroup \endgroup \fi \endlist}
+
+\newenvironment{oneparchoices}%
+ {%
+ \setcounter{choice}{0}%
+ \def\choice{%
+ \if@correctchoice \endgroup \fi
+ \refstepcounter{choice}%
+ \ifnum\value{choice}>1\relax
+ \penalty -50\hskip 1em plus 1em\relax
+ \fi
+ \choicelabel
+ % No need to put the following into a token string; we just put
+ % the choicelabel onto the page, so we're at the spot whose page
+ % number we want to record:
+ \questionobject@pluspagecheck
+ \nobreak\enskip
+ }% choice
+ \def\CorrectChoice{%
+ \if@correctchoice \endgroup \fi
+ \refstepcounter{choice}%
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \begingroup \@correctchoicetrue
+ \CorrectChoice@Emphasis
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\value{choice}>1\relax
+ \penalty -50\hskip 1em plus 1em\relax
+ \fi
+ \choicelabel
+ % No need to put the following into a token string; we just put
+ % the choicelabel onto the page, so we're at the spot whose page
+ % number we want to record:
+ \questionobject@pluspagecheck
+ \nobreak\enskip
+ }% CorrectChoice
+ \let\correctchoice\CorrectChoice
+ \let\par\@empty
+ % If we're continuing the paragraph containing the question,
+ % then leave a bit of space before the first choice:
+ \ifvmode\else\enskip\fi
+ \ignorespaces
+ }%
+ {\if@correctchoice \endgroup \fi}
+
+\newcommand{\checkboxchar}[1]{\def\checkbox@char{#1}}
+\newcommand{\checkedchar}[1]{\def\checked@char{#1}}
+\checkboxchar{$\bigcirc$}
+\checkedchar{$\surd$}
+
+\newenvironment{checkboxes}%
+ {\list{\checkbox@char}%
+ {%
+ \settowidth{\leftmargin}{W.\hskip\labelsep\hskip 2.5em}%
+ \def\choice{%
+ \if@correctchoice
+ \color@endgroup \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \item
+ \do@choice@pageinfo
+ } % choice
+ \def\CorrectChoice{%
+ \if@correctchoice
+ \color@endgroup \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \ifprintanswers
+ % We can't say \choice here, because that would
+ % insert an \endgroup.
+ % 2016/05/10: We say \color@begingroup in addition to
+ % \begingroup in case \CorrectChoiceEmphasis involves color
+ % and the text exactly fills the line (which would
+ % otherwise create a blank line after this choice):
+ % 2016/05/11: We leave hmode if we're in it,
+ % i.e., if there's no blank line preceding this
+ % \CorrectChoice command. (Without this, the
+ % \special created by a \color{whatever} command that might
+ % be inserted by \CorrectChoice@Emphasis would be appended
+ % to the previous \choice, which could cause an extra
+ % (blank) line to be inserted before this \CorrectChoice.)
+ % Since \par and \endgraf seem to cancel \@totalleftmargin
+ % (for reasons I don't understand), we'll do the following:
+ % Motivated by the def of \leavevmode,
+ % \def\leavevmode{\unhbox\voidb@x}
+ % we will now leave hmode (if we're in hmode):
+ \ifhmode \unskip\unskip\unvbox\voidb@x \fi
+ \begingroup \color@begingroup \@correctchoicetrue
+ \CorrectChoice@Emphasis
+ \item[\checked@char]
+ \else
+ \item
+ \fi
+ \do@choice@pageinfo
+ } % CorrectChoice
+ \let\correctchoice\CorrectChoice
+ \labelwidth\leftmargin\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+ \topsep=0pt
+ \partopsep=0pt
+ \checkboxeshook
+ }%
+ }%
+ {\if@correctchoice \color@endgroup \endgroup \fi \endlist}
+
+\newenvironment{oneparcheckboxes}%
+ {%
+ % Although we're not printing numbers for the choices, we use the
+ % choice counter to keep track of whether a choice is the first
+ % one (in which case we don't leave any additional space) or a
+ % later one (in which case we do leave additional space):
+ \setcounter{choice}{0}%
+ \def\choice{%
+ \if@correctchoice \endgroup \fi
+ \stepcounter{choice}%
+ \ifnum\value{choice}>1\relax
+ \penalty -50\hskip 1em plus 1em\relax
+ \fi
+ \checkbox@char
+ % No need to put the following into a token string; we just put
+ % \checkbox@char onto the page, so we're at the spot whose page
+ % number we want to record:
+ \questionobject@pluspagecheck
+ \nobreak\enskip
+ }% choice
+ \def\CorrectChoice{%
+ \if@correctchoice \endgroup \fi
+ \stepcounter{choice}%
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \begingroup \@correctchoicetrue
+ \CorrectChoice@Emphasis
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\value{choice}>1\relax
+ \penalty -50\hskip 1em plus 1em\relax
+ \fi
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \checked@char
+ \else
+ \checkbox@char
+ \fi
+ % No need to put the following into a token string; we just put
+ % the choicelabel onto the page, so we're at the spot whose page
+ % number we want to record:
+ \questionobject@pluspagecheck
+ \nobreak\enskip
+ }% CorrectChoice
+ \let\correctchoice\CorrectChoice
+ \let\par\@empty
+ % If we're continuing the paragraph containing the question,
+ % then leave a bit of space before the first choice:
+ \ifvmode\else\enskip\fi
+ \ignorespaces
+ }%
+ {\if@correctchoice \endgroup \fi}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Answer Lines (for short answer questions)
+
+% Note: \ques@ref is also used in \item@points@pageinfo, and all four
+% of the following are used in \setup@point@toks
+
+\def\ques@ref{question}
+\def\part@ref{part}
+\def\subpart@ref{subpart}
+\def\subsubpart@ref{subsubpart}
+
+% Note: \answerclearance is also used by \fillin
+
+\newlength\answerlinelength
+\newlength\answerskip
+\newlength\answerclearance
+\setlength\answerlinelength{1in}
+\setlength\answerskip{2ex}
+\setlength\answerclearance{0.2ex}
+
+\newcommand\answerline[1][{}]{%
+ % One optional argument, the default value of which is empty.
+ \ifx\@queslevel\ques@ref
+ \let\ans@l=\questionlabel
+ \else
+ \ifx\@queslevel\part@ref
+ \let\ans@l=\partlabel
+ \else
+ \ifx\@queslevel\subpart@ref
+ \let\ans@l=\subpartlabel
+ \else
+ \ifx\@queslevel\subsubpart@ref
+ \let\ans@l=\subsubpartlabel
+ \else
+ % Oops; no question level defined.
+ % We must be outide of the questions environment.
+ % Just leave out the label, I guess:
+ \def\ans@l{}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \par \nobreak \vskip \answerskip
+ \hfill
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \ans@l~\hbox to 0pt{\hbox to \answerlinelength{\hrulefill}\hss}%
+ \raise \answerclearance\hbox to \answerlinelength{%
+ % 2016/05/10: Added \color@begingroup and \color@endgroup:
+ \color@begingroup
+ \CorrectChoice@Emphasis \hfil #1\hss
+ \color@endgroup}%
+ \else
+ \ans@l~\hbox to \answerlinelength{\hrulefill}%
+ \fi
+ \par
+}% answerline
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \fillin, for fill-in-the-blank questions
+
+\newlength\fillinlinelength
+\setlength\fillinlinelength{1in}
+
+% \fillin can take two optional arguments.
+%
+% The first optional argument is the answer to be printed above the line
+% when \printanswers is in effect; the default value is empty. That
+% line is printed a distance of \answerclearance below the baseline.
+%
+% The second optional argument is the length of the line that we print;
+% the default value is \fillinlinelength. The value of
+% \fillinlinelength is set with the command
+%
+% \setlength\fillinlinelength{1in}
+%
+% and can be changed by giving a new \setlength command.
+%
+% When answers are being printed, the optional argument is printed
+% subject to the declarations in the argument of the last
+% \CorrectChoiceEmphasis command. It is centered on the line unless it
+% is too long, in which case it extends to the right of the line.
+%
+% \fillin eats (and ignores) space characters appearing before the
+% first optional argument. It also eats (and ignores) space
+% characters appearing after the first optional argument and before
+% the second optional argument. However, if exactly one optional
+% argument appears, and if there are one or more space characters
+% following that one optional argument, then those spaces are replaced
+% by a single space character, but not eaten.
+
+\newcommand\fillin[1][{}]{%
+ \def\fillin@ans{#1}%
+ \fillin@relay
+}% fillin
+
+\newcommand\fillin@relay{%
+ % We use \exam@ifnextchar, a variation on \@ifnextchar.
+ % If \exam@ifnextchar encounters one or more space characters
+ % followed by a [, then those spaces are ignored (just as they would
+ % be by \@ifnextchar). However, if one or more space characters are
+ % followed by a non-space character other than [, then
+ % \exam@ifnextchar inserts a space following the
+ % {\@fillin@relay[\fillinlinelength]} that is the third argument to
+ % \exam@ifnextchar.
+ \exam@ifnextchar[{\@fillin@relay}
+ {\@fillin@relay[\fillinlinelength]}%
+}% fillin@relay
+
+\def\@fillin@relay[#1]{%
+ % The first argument is in \fillin@ans, the second is #1.
+ \leavevmode
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \rlap{\raise -\answerclearance \hbox to #1{\hrulefill}}%
+ \begingroup
+ \setbox0 \hbox{\color@begingroup
+ \CorrectChoice@Emphasis \fillin@ans \color@endgroup}%
+ \ifdim\wd0 > #1\relax
+ \hbox{\color@begingroup\CorrectChoice@Emphasis \fillin@ans
+ \color@endgroup}%
+ \else
+ \hbox to #1{\color@begingroup\CorrectChoice@Emphasis
+ \hfil \fillin@ans \hfil\color@endgroup}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \raise -\answerclearance \hbox to #1{\hrulefill}%
+ \fi
+}% @fillin@relay
+
+% \exam@ifnextchar is used by \fillin.
+% \exam@ifnextchar is a variation of \@ifnextchar that does not always
+% ignore space tokens. If \exam@ifnextchar encounters one or more
+% space tokens, it makes note of that (with the command
+% \@tempswatrue). If the first non-space character encountered
+% matches argument #1, then any spaces that had been encountered are
+% ignored. However, if one or more spaces are encountered and the
+% first non-space character found does not match argument #1, then
+% \exam@ifnextchar produces argument #3 followed by a space character.
+% (This differs from the behavior of \new@ifnextchar in amsgen.sty,
+% which does lookahead for any character, including a space.) This
+% code (as well as the idea for it) is due to Dan Luecking and Ulrich
+% Diez.
+\long\def\exam@ifnextchar#1#2#3{%
+ \let\reserved@d=#1%
+ \def\reserved@a{#2}%
+ \def\reserved@b{#3}%
+ % The following says we haven't yet seen any spaces:
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \futurelet\@let@token\exam@ifnch
+}% exam@ifnextchar
+
+\def\exam@ifnch{%
+ \ifx\@let@token\@sptoken
+ % Signal that we've found a space:
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \let\reserved@c\exam@xifnch % this gobbles the space
+ \else
+ \ifx\@let@token\reserved@d
+ \let\reserved@c\reserved@a
+ \else
+ \if@tempswa
+ \def\reserved@c{\expandafter\reserved@b\space}%
+ \else
+ \let\reserved@c\reserved@b
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \reserved@c
+}% exam@ifnch
+
+% The following defines \exam@xifnch so that it will eat a space
+% following it and then call \exam@ifnch:
+{% keep redefinition of \: local
+ \def\:{\exam@xifnch}
+ \expandafter\gdef\: {\futurelet\@let@token\exam@ifnch}
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \fillwithlines
+
+
+% \fillwithlines takes one argument, which is either a length or \fill
+% or \stretch{number}, and it fills that much vertical space with
+% horizontal lines that run the length of the current line. That is,
+% they extend from the current left margin (which depends on whether
+% we're in a question, part, subpart, or subsubpart) to the right
+% margin.
+%
+% The distance between the lines is \linefillheight, whose default value
+% is set with the command
+%
+% \setlength\linefillheight{.25in}
+%
+% This value can be changed by giving a new \setlength command.
+%
+% The thickness of the lines is \linefillthickness, whose default value
+% is set with the command
+%
+% \setlength\linefillthickness{.1pt}
+%
+% This value can be changed by giving a new \setlength command.
+%
+% As of version 2.503, 2016/03/25, the lines drawn by the
+% \fillwithlines command will be drawn in color if the user has given
+% the command
+%
+% \colorfillwithlines.
+%
+% The actual drawing of the lines is now done by the command
+% \do@fillwithlines, after the \fillwithlines command decides whether
+% they will be in color. The default color is set by the command
+%
+% \definecolor{FillWithLinesColor}{gray}{0.8}
+%
+% and the color can be changed by giving a new \definecolor command.
+% You can return to black lines by giving the command
+%
+% \nocolorfillwithlines
+
+\newlength\linefillheight
+\newlength\linefillthickness
+\setlength\linefillheight{.25in}
+\setlength\linefillthickness{0.1pt}
+
+
+
+
+\newif\if@colorfillwithlines
+\@colorfillwithlinesfalse
+\def\colorfillwithlines{%
+ \@ifundefined{definecolor}
+ {%
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ You must load the color package with the command\MessageBreak
+ \space\space\protect\usepackage{color}\MessageBreak
+ in order to use the command \protect\colorfillwithlines
+ \MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ This command makes use of the package color.sty,\MessageBreak
+ and so you have to load color.sty before your\MessageBreak
+ \protect\begin{document} command.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \definecolor{FillWithLinesColor}{gray}{0.8}
+ \@colorfillwithlinestrue
+ }%
+}% \colorfillwithlines
+\def\nocolorfillwithlines{\@colorfillwithlinesfalse}
+
+\newcommand\fillwithlines[1]{%
+ \if@colorfillwithlines
+ \color@begingroup
+ \color{FillWithLinesColor}%
+ \do@fillwithlines{#1}%
+ \color@endgroup
+ \else
+ \do@fillwithlines{#1}%
+ \fi
+}% \fillwithlines
+
+\newcommand\linefill{\leavevmode
+ \leaders\hrule height \linefillthickness \hfill\kern\z@}
+
+% \do@fillwithlines is called only by \fillwithlines
+\def\do@fillwithlines#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \ifhmode
+ \par
+ \fi
+ \hrule height \z@
+ \nobreak
+ \setbox0=\hbox to \hsize{\hskip \@totalleftmargin
+ \vrule height \linefillheight depth \z@ width \z@
+ \linefill}%
+ % We use \cleaders (rather than \leaders) so that a given
+ % vertical space will always produce the same number of lines
+ % no matter where on the page it happens to start:
+ \cleaders \copy0 \vskip #1 \hbox{}%
+ \endgroup
+}% \do@fillwithlines
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \fillwithdottedlines
+
+
+% \fillwithdottedlines is similar to \fillwithlines, except that it
+% fills the space with dotted lines (created by \dotfill) rather than
+% with solid lines.
+
+% \fillwithdottedlines takes one argument, which is either a length or
+% \fill or \stretch{number}, and it fills that much vertical space
+% with dotted lines that run the length of the current line. That is,
+% they extend from the current left margin (which depends on whether
+% we're in a question, part, subpart, or subsubpart) to the right
+% margin.
+%
+% The distance between the lines is \dottedlinefillheight, whose
+% default value is set with the command
+%
+% \setlength\dottedlinefillheight{.25in}
+%
+% This value can be changed by giving a new \setlength command.
+
+% As of version 2.503, 2016/03/25, the dotted lines drawn by the
+% \fillwithdottedlines command will be drawn in color if the user has
+% given the command
+%
+% \colorfillwithdottedlines.
+%
+% The actual drawing of the lines is now done by the command
+% \do@fillwithdottedlines, after the \fillwithdottedlines command
+% decides whether they will be in color. The default color is set by
+% the command
+%
+% \definecolor{FillWithDottedLinesColor}{gray}{0.8}
+%
+% and the color can be changed by giving a new \definecolor command.
+% You can return to black lines by giving the command
+%
+% \nocolorfillwithdottedlines
+
+
+\newlength\dottedlinefillheight
+\setlength\dottedlinefillheight{.25in}
+
+\newif\if@colorfillwithdottedlines
+\@colorfillwithdottedlinesfalse
+\def\colorfillwithdottedlines{%
+ \@ifundefined{definecolor}
+ {%
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ You must load the color package with the command\MessageBreak
+ \space\space\protect\usepackage{color}\MessageBreak
+ in order to use the command \protect\colorfillwithdottedlines
+ \MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ This command makes use of the package color.sty,\MessageBreak
+ and so you have to load color.sty before your\MessageBreak
+ \protect\begin{document} command.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \definecolor{FillWithDottedLinesColor}{gray}{0.8}
+ \@colorfillwithdottedlinestrue
+ }%
+}% \colorfillwithdottedlines
+\def\nocolorfillwithdottedlines{\@colorfillwithdottedlinesfalse}
+
+\newcommand\fillwithdottedlines[1]{%
+ \if@colorfillwithdottedlines
+ \color@begingroup
+ \color{FillWithDottedLinesColor}%
+ \do@fillwithdottedlines{#1}%
+ \color@endgroup
+ \else
+ \do@fillwithdottedlines{#1}%
+ \fi
+}% \fillwithdottedlines
+
+% \do@fillwithdottedlines is called only by \fillwithdottedlines
+\def\do@fillwithdottedlines#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \ifhmode
+ \par
+ \fi
+ \hrule height \z@
+ \nobreak
+ \setbox0=\hbox to \hsize{\hskip \@totalleftmargin
+ \vrule height \dottedlinefillheight depth \z@ width \z@
+ \dotfill}%
+ % We use \cleaders (rather than \leaders) so that a given
+ % vertical space will always produce the same number of lines
+ % no matter where on the page it happens to start:
+ \cleaders \copy0 \vskip #1 \hbox{}%
+ \endgroup
+}% \do@fillwithdottedlines
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \fillwithgrid
+
+
+% \fillwithgrid is similar to \fillwithlines, except that it
+% fills the space with a grid.
+
+% \fillwithgrid takes one argument, which is either a length or \fill
+% or \stretch{number}, and it fills that much vertical space with a
+% grid that runs the length of the current line. That is, it extends
+% from the current left margin (which depends on whether we're in a
+% question, part, subpart, or subsubpart) to the right margin.
+%
+% The default grid size and grid line thickness were set by the
+% commands
+%
+% \setlength{\gridsize}{5mm}
+% \setlength{\gridlinewidth}{0.1pt}
+%
+% You can change either or both of those by giving new \setlength
+% commands. The period of the grid is \gridsize (both horizontally
+% and vertically). That is, the horizontal distance from the left
+% edge of one vertical line to the left edge of the next vertical line
+% is \gridsize, as is the vertical distance from the top edge of one
+% horizontal line to the top edge of the next horizontal line. Thus,
+% each square has outer side length equal to \gridsize+\gridlinewidth.
+
+% By default, the created grids are in black. However, if you give the
+% commands
+%
+% \usepackage{color}
+% \colorgrids
+%
+% then the grids will be in color, by default a light gray. That
+% default color was defined by the command
+%
+% \definecolor{GridColor}{gray}{0.8}
+%
+% You can change the color by redefining the color GridColor by giving
+% a new \definecolor command.
+
+\newif\if@colorgrids
+\newcommand\colorgrids{%
+ \@ifundefined{definecolor}
+ {%
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ You must load the color package with the command\MessageBreak
+ \space\space\protect\usepackage{color}\MessageBreak
+ in order to use the command \protect\colorgrids
+ }{%
+ This command makes use of the package color.sty,\MessageBreak
+ and so you have to load color.sty before your\MessageBreak
+ \protect\begin{document} command.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \definecolor{GridColor}{gray}{0.8}
+ \@colorgridstrue
+ }%
+}% \colorgrids
+\newcommand\nocolorgrids{\@colorgridsfalse}
+\nocolorgrids
+
+\newlength\gridsize
+\newlength\gridlinewidth
+\setlength{\gridsize}{5mm}
+\setlength{\gridlinewidth}{0.1pt}
+
+\def\fillwithgrid#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \ifhmode
+ \par
+ \fi
+ \hrule height \z@
+ \nobreak
+
+ % We first set box0 equal to an \hbox which, when printed, is a
+ % square with width and height equal to \gridsize+\gridlinewidth,
+ % but which has
+ % width equal to \gridsize,
+ % height equal to \gridsize, and
+ % depth equal to 0pt.
+ % When we put multiple copies of it together using \leaders or
+ % \cleaders, the right edge will coincide with the left edge of the
+ % next box and the bottom edge will coincide with the top edge of
+ % the box below it.
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\gridsize}
+ \addtolength{\@tempdima}{\gridlinewidth}
+ \setlength{\@tempdimb}{\gridsize}
+ \addtolength{\@tempdimb}{-\gridlinewidth}
+ \setbox0=\hbox{%
+ \rlap{\vrule height \gridsize depth \gridlinewidth width \gridlinewidth}%
+ \rlap{\vrule height \gridsize depth -\@tempdimb width \@tempdima}%
+ \vrule height 0pt depth \gridlinewidth width \@tempdima
+ \llap{\vrule height \gridsize depth \gridlinewidth width \gridlinewidth}%
+ }%
+ \wd0=\gridsize
+ \dp0=0pt
+ % Now we set box1 equal to an \hbox containing a single line of
+ % copies of box0. We use \leaders (instead of \cleaders) so that
+ % if we use it twice on a page, once with a question and once
+ % with a part, the boxes will line up vertically. We add a kern of
+ % \gridlinewidth at the right because the rightmost vertical line
+ % appears to the right of where the \leaders command thinks that it
+ % appears.
+ \setbox1=\hbox to \textwidth{%
+ \color@begingroup
+ \if@colorgrids
+ \color{GridColor}%
+ \fi
+ \hskip \@totalleftmargin \leaders\copy0\hfil \kern\gridlinewidth
+ \color@endgroup
+ }%
+ % Finally: We create the grid, using \cleaders: We use \cleaders
+ % (rather than \leaders) so that a given vertical space will always
+ % produce the same number of lines no matter where on the page it
+ % happens to start. We add a kern of \gridlinewidth because the
+ % bottommost horizontal line appears below where the \cleaders
+ % command thinks that it appears.
+ \cleaders \copy1 \vskip #1 \kern \gridlinewidth \hbox{}%
+ \endgroup
+}% fillwithgrid
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \makeemptybox
+
+% \makeemptybox takes one argument, which is a length, and it creates
+% an empty box of width the length of the current line and of height
+% equal to the argument. That is, the box extends from the current
+% left margin (which depends on whether we're in a question, part,
+% subpart, or subsubpart) to the right margin.
+
+% As of version 2.304, the argument of \makeemptybox can be either
+% a length, or \fill, or \stretch{number}.
+
+% \newcommand\makeemptybox[1]{
+% \par
+% \begingroup
+% \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}%
+% \framebox[\linewidth]{%
+% \vrule height 0pt depth #1 width 0pt
+% }%
+% \endgroup
+% }
+
+\newlength\minboxheight
+\setlength\minboxheight{.1in}
+
+
+% As of version 2.502, 2016/03/23, the frame drawn by the
+% \makeemptybox command will be drawn in color if the user has given
+% the command \colorsolutionboxes. The actual drawing of the box is
+% now done by the command \do@emptybox, after the \makeemptybox
+% command decides whether it will be in color.
+
+\newcommand\makeemptybox[1]{%
+ \if@colorsolutionboxes
+ \color@begingroup
+ \color{SolutionBoxColor}%
+ \do@emptybox{#1}%
+ \color@endgroup
+ \else
+ \do@emptybox{#1}%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% The command \do@emptybox is called only by \makeemptybox.
+\newcommand\do@emptybox[1]{%
+ \par
+ \hbox to \hsize{\hskip\@totalleftmargin \leaders\hrule\hfill}%
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \begingroup
+ \setbox0=\hbox to \hsize{\hskip\@totalleftmargin
+ \vrule height\minboxheight \hfill \vrule}%
+ % The vertical size desired may not be an exact multiple of
+ % \minboxheight, and so \cleaders might leave a gap between the
+ % vertical lines and the horizontal lines above and below it.
+ % Thus, we put a single copy of \box0 immediately below the
+ % horizontal line above and we'll also put a single copy of \box0
+ % immediately above the horizontal line below.
+ \copy0
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip -\minboxheight
+ \cleaders \copy0 \vskip #1
+ \vskip -\minboxheight
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \copy0
+ \endgroup
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \hbox to \hsize{\hskip\@totalleftmargin \leaders\hrule\hfill}%
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \uplevel and \fullwidth
+% and the EnvUplevel and EnvFullwidth environments:
+
+% \uplevel is used to print text at the indentation level of the
+% enclosing environment. For example, to precede a question with
+% directions about how that question should be answered, you would
+% say \uplevel{Answer this question correctly.}
+%
+% \fullwidth is similar, but uses the full page of text on the page.
+
+% The EnvUplevel environment is similar to the \uplevel command, but it
+% has the advantage that you can include verbatim material (using, e.g.,
+% the \verb command) in the environment. (You can't include verbatim
+% material in the argument of an \uplevel command.)
+
+% The EnvFullwidth environment is similar to the \fullwidth command, but
+% it has the advantage that you can include verbatim material (using,
+% e.g., the \verb command) in the environment. (You can't include
+% verbatim material in the argument of an \fullwidth command.)
+
+
+\long\def\uplevel#1{%
+ \par\bigskip
+ \vbox{%
+ % We entered internal vertical mode, and so we get \parshape=0.
+ % We set \leftskip to provide the correct left margin for whatever
+ % is in the argument of the \uplevel command:
+ \leftskip=\@totalleftmargin
+ \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin
+ % We adjust \@totalleftmargin and linewidth in case there's a
+ % solution environment inside of the argument to the \uplevel:
+ \advance\@totalleftmargin-\leftmargin
+ \advance\linewidth\leftmargin
+ #1%
+ }% vbox
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+\newenvironment{EnvUplevel}
+ {\par\bigskip\vbox\bgroup
+ % We set \leftskip to provide the correct left margin for whatever
+ % is inside of the environment:
+ \leftskip=\@totalleftmargin
+ \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin
+ % We adjust \@totalleftmargin (and linewidth?) in case there's a
+ % solution environment inside of the environment:
+ \advance\@totalleftmargin-\leftmargin
+ \advance\linewidth\leftmargin
+ }
+ {\egroup\nobreak}
+
+
+\long\def\fullwidth#1{%
+ \par\bigskip
+ \vbox{%
+ % We entered internal vertical mode, and so we get \parshape=0.
+ \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt
+ \advance\linewidth\@totalleftmargin
+ \@totalleftmargin=0pt
+ #1%
+ }% vbox
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+\newenvironment{EnvFullwidth}
+ {\par\bigskip\vbox\bgroup
+ % We entered internal vertical mode, and so we get \parshape=0.
+ \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt
+ % We adjust \@totalleftmargin (and linewidth?) in case there's a
+ % solution environment inside of the environment:
+ \advance\linewidth\@totalleftmargin
+ \@totalleftmargin=0pt
+ }
+ {\egroup\nobreak}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% ********************
+% ** GRADING TABLES **
+% ********************
+
+
+
+\newcounter{@iterator}
+\newlength\@cellwidth
+
+\def\cellwidth#1{\@cellwidth=#1}
+\def\gradetablestretch#1{\def\@gtblstretch{#1}}
+
+% \settabletotalpoints allows the user to specify a total
+% number of points to appear in a table that may be different
+% from the sum of the points in the table:
+\newcommand\prt@tablepoints{\prt@hlfcntr{tbl@points}}
+\newcommand\settabletotalpoints[1]{%
+ \def\prt@tablepoints{#1}%
+}% \settabletotalpoints
+
+% \settabletotalbonuspoints is similar to \settabletotalpoints:
+\newcommand\prt@tablebonuspoints{\prt@hlfcntr{tbl@bonuspoints}}
+\newcommand\settabletotalbonuspoints[1]{%
+ \def\prt@tablebonuspoints{#1}%
+}% \settabletotalbonuspoints
+
+% All of the following that begin with `h' are for horizontal tables,
+% and all of them that begin with `v' are for vertical tables:
+\def\hqword#1{\def\@hqword{#1}}
+\def\hpword#1{\def\@hpword{#1}}
+\def\hsword#1{\def\@hsword{#1}}
+\def\htword#1{\def\@htword{#1}}
+\def\hpgword#1{\def\@hpgword{#1}}
+
+\def\vqword#1{\def\@vqword{#1}}
+\def\vpword#1{\def\@vpword{#1}}
+\def\vsword#1{\def\@vsword{#1}}
+\def\vtword#1{\def\@vtword{#1}}
+\def\vpgword#1{\def\@vpgword{#1}}
+
+
+% The following are the versions for bonusgradetable:
+\def\bhqword#1{\def\@bhqword{#1}}
+\def\bhpword#1{\def\@bhpword{#1}}
+\def\bhsword#1{\def\@bhsword{#1}}
+\def\bhtword#1{\def\@bhtword{#1}}
+\def\bhpgword#1{\def\@bhpgword{#1}}
+
+\def\bvqword#1{\def\@bvqword{#1}}
+\def\bvpword#1{\def\@bvpword{#1}}
+\def\bvsword#1{\def\@bvsword{#1}}
+\def\bvtword#1{\def\@bvtword{#1}}
+\def\bvpgword#1{\def\@bvpgword{#1}}
+
+% The following are the versions for combinedgradetable:
+\def\chqword#1{\def\@chqword{#1}}
+\def\chpword#1{\def\@chpword{#1}}
+\def\chbpword#1{\def\@chbpword{#1}}
+\def\chsword#1{\def\@chsword{#1}}
+\def\chtword#1{\def\@chtword{#1}}
+\def\chpgword#1{\def\@chpgword{#1}}
+
+\def\cvqword#1{\def\@cvqword{#1}}
+\def\cvpword#1{\def\@cvpword{#1}}
+\def\cvbpword#1{\def\@cvbpword{#1}}
+\def\cvsword#1{\def\@cvsword{#1}}
+\def\cvtword#1{\def\@cvtword{#1}}
+\def\cvpgword#1{\def\@cvpgword{#1}}
+
+
+
+% Initialize:
+\cellwidth{2em}
+\gradetablestretch{1.5}
+
+\hqword{Question:}
+\hpgword{Page:}
+\hpword{Points:}
+\hsword{Score:}
+\htword{Total}
+\vpword{Points}
+\vsword{Score}
+\vtword{Total:}
+\vqword{Question}
+\vpgword{Page}
+
+\bhqword{Question:}
+\bhpgword{Page:}
+\bhpword{Bonus Points:}
+\bhsword{Score:}
+\bhtword{Total}
+\bvqword{Question}
+\bvpgword{Page}
+\bvpword{Bonus Points}
+\bvsword{Score}
+\bvtword{Total:}
+
+\chqword{Question:}
+\chpgword{Page:}
+\chpword{Points:}
+\chbpword{Bonus Points:}
+\chsword{Score:}
+\chtword{Total}
+\cvqword{Question}
+\cvpgword{Page}
+\cvpword{Points}
+\cvbpword{Bonus Points}
+\cvsword{Score}
+\cvtword{Total:}
+
+% Before we created multirow and multicolumn tables, he only commands
+% here accessible to the user were \gradetable, \bonusgradetable,
+% \combinedgradetable, \pointtable, \bonuspointtable,
+% \combinedpointtable, \partialgradetable,
+% \partialbonusgradetable, \partialcombinedtable, \partialpointtable,
+% \partialbonuspointtable, \partialcombinedpointtable,
+% \begingradingrange, \endgradingrange, \pointsinrange,
+% \bonuspointsinrange, \firstqinrange, \lastqinrange, and
+% \numqinrange. The new user commands are
+%
+% \def\multirowgradetable
+% \def\multirowpointtable
+% \def\multirowbonusgradetable
+% \def\multirowbonuspointtable
+% \def\multirowcombinedgradetable
+% \def\multirowcombinedpointtable
+%
+% \def\multirowpartialgradetable
+% \def\multirowpartialpointtable
+% \def\multirowpartialbonusgradetable
+% \def\multirowpartialbonuspointtable
+% \def\multirowpartialcombinedgradetable
+% \def\multirowpartialcombinedpointtable
+%
+% \def\multicolumngradetable
+% \def\multicolumnpointtable
+% \def\multicolumnbonusgradetable
+% \def\multicolumnbonuspointtable
+% \def\multicolumncombinedgradetable
+% \def\multicolumncombinedpointtable
+%
+% \def\multicolumnpartialgradetable
+% \def\multicolumnpartialpointtable
+% \def\multicolumnpartialbonusgradetable
+% \def\multicolumnpartialbonuspointtable
+% \def\multicolumnpartialcombinedgradetable
+% \def\multicolumnpartialcombinedpointtable
+
+
+% The possibilities are
+
+% \gradetable[v][questions]
+% \gradetable[v][pages]
+% \gradetable[h][questions]
+% \gradetable[h][pages]
+
+% \bonusgradetable[v][questions]
+% \bonusgradetable[v][pages]
+% \bonusgradetable[h][questions]
+% \bonusgradetable[h][pages]
+
+% \combinedgradetable[v][questions]
+% \combinedgradetable[v][pages]
+% \combinedgradetable[h][questions]
+% \combinedgradetable[h][pages]
+
+% \pointtable[v][questions]
+% \pointtable[v][pages]
+% \pointtable[h][questions]
+% \pointtable[h][pages]
+
+% \bonuspointtable[v][questions]
+% \bonuspointtable[v][pages]
+% \bonuspointtable[h][questions]
+% \bonuspointtable[h][pages]
+
+% \combinedpointtable[v][questions]
+% \combinedpointtable[v][pages]
+% \combinedpointtable[h][questions]
+% \combinedpointtable[h][pages]
+
+% \partialgradetable{whatever}[v][questions]
+% \partialgradetable{whatever}[v][pages]
+% \partialgradetable{whatever}[h][questions]
+% \partialgradetable{whatever}[h][pages]
+
+% \partialbonusgradetable{whatever}[v][questions]
+% \partialbonusgradetable{whatever}[v][pages]
+% \partialbonusgradetable{whatever}[h][questions]
+% \partialbonusgradetable{whatever}[h][pages]
+
+% \partialcombinedgradetable{whatever}[v][questions]
+% \partialcombinedgradetable{whatever}[v][pages]
+% \partialcombinedgradetable{whatever}[h][questions]
+% \partialcombinedgradetable{whatever}[h][pages]
+
+% \partialpointtable{whatever}[v][questions]
+% \partialpointtable{whatever}[v][pages]
+% \partialpointtable{whatever}[h][questions]
+% \partialpointtable{whatever}[h][pages]
+
+% \partialbonuspointtable{whatever}[v][questions]
+% \partialbonuspointtable{whatever}[v][pages]
+% \partialbonuspointtable{whatever}[h][questions]
+% \partialbonuspointtable{whatever}[h][pages]
+
+% \partialcombinedpointtable{whatever}[v][questions]
+% \partialcombinedpointtable{whatever}[v][pages]
+% \partialcombinedpointtable{whatever}[h][questions]
+% \partialcombinedpointtable{whatever}[h][pages]
+
+% \begingradingrange{whatever}
+% \endgradingrange{whatever}
+%
+% \pointsinrange{whatever}
+% \bonuspointsinrange{whatever}
+%
+% \firstqinrange{whatever}
+% \lastqinrange{whatever}
+% \numqinrange{whatever}
+%
+% where ``whatever'' is a label chosen by the user.
+%
+% \def\multirowgradetable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowpointtable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowbonusgradetable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowbonuspointtable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowcombinedgradetable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowcombinedpointtable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+%
+% \def\multirowpartialgradetable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowpartialpointtable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowpartialbonusgradetable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowpartialbonuspointtable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowpartialcombinedgradetable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multirowpartialcombinedpointtable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+%
+% \def\multicolumngradetable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnpointtable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnbonusgradetable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnbonuspointtable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumncombinedgradetable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumncombinedpointtable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+
+% \def\multicolumnpartialgradetable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnpartialpointtable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnpartialbonusgradetable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnpartialbonuspointtable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnpartialcombinedgradetable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+% \def\multicolumnpartialcombinedpointtable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+
+
+% If one or both optional arguments are omitted, the defaults are
+% `[v]' and `[questions]'.
+
+% \@scorestrue means we're doing \gradetable
+% \@scoresfalse mans we're doing \pointtable
+\newif\if@scores
+
+% \@partialtrue means we're doing \partialgradetable,
+% \partialbonusgradetable, \partialcombinedgradetable,
+% \partialpointtable, \partialbonuspointtable, or
+% \partialcombinedpointtable:
+\newif\if@partial
+
+% \@combinedtrue means we're doing \combinedgradetable,
+% \combinedpointtable, \partialcombinedgradetable, or
+% \partialcombinedpointtable:
+\newif\if@combined
+
+% It's OK to use the counter num@cols as a scratch counter
+% in \begingradingrange and \endgradingrange because
+% it's only used in typesetting tables:
+\def\begingradingrange#1{%
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{\value{question}}%
+ \addtocounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\expandafter\string\gdef
+ \string\csname\space range@#1@firstq\string\endcsname
+ {\arabic{num@cols}}}%
+ \write\@mainaux
+ {\string\expandafter\string\gdef
+ \string\csname\space range@#1@firstp\string\endcsname
+ {\thepage}}%
+}% begingradingrange
+
+\def\endgradingrange#1{%
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{\value{question}}%
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux
+ {\string\expandafter\string\gdef
+ \string\csname\space range@#1@lastq\string\endcsname
+ {\arabic{num@cols}}}%
+ \write\@mainaux
+ {\string\expandafter\string\gdef
+ \string\csname\space range@#1@lastp\string\endcsname
+ {\thepage}}%
+}% endgradingrange
+
+
+% Now that grading tables may be for only part of the exam,
+% we need the counter tbl@points to add up the total points
+% for the questions (or pages) that appear on the table:
+\new@hlfcntr{tbl@points}
+
+% We'll use the counter tbl@bonuspoints to add up the total bonus
+% points for the questions (or pages) that appear on the table:
+\new@hlfcntr{tbl@bonuspoints}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% multirow tables, non-partial:
+
+\def\multirowgradetable#1{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[h]%
+}
+
+\def\multirowpointtable#1{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[h]%
+}
+
+\def\multirowbonusgradetable#1{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonustrue
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[h]%
+}
+
+\def\multirowbonuspointtable#1{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonustrue
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[h]%
+}
+
+\def\multirowcombinedgradetable#1{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedtrue
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[h]%
+}
+
+\def\multirowcombinedpointtable#1{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedtrue
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[h]%
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% multirow tables, partial:
+
+\def\multirowpartialgradetable#1#2{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#2}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[h]%
+}
+
+\def\multirowpartialpointtable#1#2{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#2}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[h]%
+}
+
+\def\multirowpartialbonusgradetable#1#2{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonustrue
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#2}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[h]%
+}
+
+\def\multirowpartialbonuspointtable#1#2{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonustrue
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#2}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[h]%
+}
+
+\def\multirowpartialcombinedgradetable#1#2{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedtrue
+ \def\tbl@range{#2}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[h]%
+}
+
+\def\multirowpartialcombinedpointtable#1#2{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedtrue
+ \def\tbl@range{#2}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[h]%
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% multicolumn tables, non-partial:
+
+\def\multicolumngradetable#1{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[v]%
+}
+
+\def\multicolumnpointtable#1{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[v]%
+}
+
+\def\multicolumnbonusgradetable#1{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonustrue
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[v]%
+}
+
+\def\multicolumnbonuspointtable#1{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonustrue
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[v]%
+}
+
+\def\multicolumncombinedgradetable#1{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedtrue
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[v]%
+}
+
+\def\multicolumncombinedpointtable#1{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedtrue
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[v]%
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% multicolumn tables, partial:
+
+\def\multicolumnpartialgradetable#1#2{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#2}%
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[v]%
+}
+
+\def\multicolumnpartialpointtable#1#2{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#2}%
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[v]%
+}
+
+\def\multicolumnpartialbonusgradetable#1#2{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonustrue
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#2}%
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[v]%
+}
+
+\def\multicolumnpartialbonuspointtable#1#2{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonustrue
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#2}%
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[v]%
+}
+
+\def\multicolumnpartialcombinedgradetable#1#2{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedtrue
+ \def\tbl@range{#2}%
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[v]%
+}
+
+\def\multicolumnpartialcombinedpointtable#1#2{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedtrue
+ \def\tbl@range{#2}%
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{#1}%
+ \i@gtable[v]%
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% partial single row (and column) tables:
+
+\def\partialgradetable#1{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#1}%
+ % We don't yet know if the table is vertical or horizontal, and so
+ % we don't know if we need to set num@cols or num@rows. We'll set
+ % them both, and we'll later on just ignore the value of the one
+ % that we didn't need to set here:
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ % If the user doesn't include the optional argument
+ % choosing between vertical and horizontal,
+ % we give them vertical:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\i@gtable}{\i@gtable[v]}%
+}% partialgradetable
+
+\def\partialbonusgradetable#1{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonustrue
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#1}%
+ % We don't yet know if the table is vertical or horizontal, and so
+ % we don't know if we need to set num@cols or num@rows. We'll set
+ % them both, and we'll later on just ignore the value of the one
+ % that we didn't need to set here:
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ % If the user doesn't include the optional argument
+ % choosing between vertical and horizontal,
+ % we give them vertical:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\i@gtable}{\i@gtable[v]}%
+}% partialbonusgradetable
+
+\def\partialcombinedgradetable#1{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedtrue
+ \def\tbl@range{#1}%
+ % We don't yet know if the table is vertical or horizontal, and so
+ % we don't know if we need to set num@cols or num@rows. We'll set
+ % them both, and we'll later on just ignore the value of the one
+ % that we didn't need to set here:
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ % If the user doesn't include the optional argument
+ % choosing between vertical and horizontal,
+ % we give them vertical:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\i@gtable}{\i@gtable[v]}%
+}% partialcombinedgradetable
+
+\def\partialpointtable#1{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#1}%
+ % We don't yet know if the table is vertical or horizontal, and so
+ % we don't know if we need to set num@cols or num@rows. We'll set
+ % them both, and we'll later on just ignore the value of the one
+ % that we didn't need to set here:
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ % If the user doesn't include the optional argument
+ % choosing between vertical and horizontal,
+ % we give them vertical:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\i@gtable}{\i@gtable[v]}%
+}% partialpointtable
+
+\def\partialbonuspointtable#1{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonustrue
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#1}%
+ % We don't yet know if the table is vertical or horizontal, and so
+ % we don't know if we need to set num@cols or num@rows. We'll set
+ % them both, and we'll later on just ignore the value of the one
+ % that we didn't need to set here:
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ % If the user doesn't include the optional argument
+ % choosing between vertical and horizontal,
+ % we give them vertical:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\i@gtable}{\i@gtable[v]}%
+}% partialbonuspointtable
+
+\def\partialcombinedpointtable#1{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialtrue
+ \@combinedtrue
+ \def\tbl@range{#1}%
+ % We don't yet know if the table is vertical or horizontal, and so
+ % we don't know if we need to set num@cols or num@rows. We'll set
+ % them both, and we'll later on just ignore the value of the one
+ % that we didn't need to set here:
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ % If the user doesn't include the optional argument
+ % choosing between vertical and horizontal,
+ % we give them vertical:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\i@gtable}{\i@gtable[v]}%
+}% partialcombinedpointtable
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% single row (and column) tables, non-partial:
+
+\def\gradetable{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedfalse
+ % We don't yet know if the table is vertical or horizontal, and so
+ % we don't know if we need to set num@cols or num@rows. We'll set
+ % them both, and we'll later on just ignore the value of the one
+ % that we didn't need to set here:
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ % If the user doesn't include the optional argument
+ % choosing between vertical and horizontal,
+ % we give them vertical:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\i@gtable}{\i@gtable[v]}%
+}% gradetable
+
+\def\bonusgradetable{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonustrue
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedfalse
+ % We don't yet know if the table is vertical or horizontal, and so
+ % we don't know if we need to set num@cols or num@rows. We'll set
+ % them both, and we'll later on just ignore the value of the one
+ % that we didn't need to set here:
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ % If the user doesn't include the optional argument
+ % choosing between vertical and horizontal,
+ % we give them vertical:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\i@gtable}{\i@gtable[v]}%
+}% bonusgradetable
+
+\def\combinedgradetable{%
+ \@scorestrue
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedtrue
+ % We don't yet know if the table is vertical or horizontal, and so
+ % we don't know if we need to set num@cols or num@rows. We'll set
+ % them both, and we'll later on just ignore the value of the one
+ % that we didn't need to set here:
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ % If the user doesn't include the optional argument
+ % choosing between vertical and horizontal,
+ % we give them vertical:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\i@gtable}{\i@gtable[v]}%
+}% bonusgradetable
+
+\def\pointtable{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedfalse
+ % We don't yet know if the table is vertical or horizontal, and so
+ % we don't know if we need to set num@cols or num@rows. We'll set
+ % them both, and we'll later on just ignore the value of the one
+ % that we didn't need to set here:
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ % If the user doesn't include the optional argument
+ % choosing between vertical and horizontal,
+ % we give them vertical:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\i@gtable}{\i@gtable[v]}%
+}% pointtable
+
+\def\bonuspointtable{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonustrue
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedfalse
+ % We don't yet know if the table is vertical or horizontal, and so
+ % we don't know if we need to set num@cols or num@rows. We'll set
+ % them both, and we'll later on just ignore the value of the one
+ % that we didn't need to set here:
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ % If the user doesn't include the optional argument
+ % choosing between vertical and horizontal,
+ % we give them vertical:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\i@gtable}{\i@gtable[v]}%
+}% bonuspointtable
+
+\def\combinedpointtable{%
+ \@scoresfalse
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \@partialfalse
+ \@combinedtrue
+ % We don't yet know if the table is vertical or horizontal, and so
+ % we don't know if we need to set num@cols or num@rows. We'll set
+ % them both, and we'll later on just ignore the value of the one
+ % that we didn't need to set here:
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ % If the user doesn't include the optional argument
+ % choosing between vertical and horizontal,
+ % we give them vertical:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\i@gtable}{\i@gtable[v]}%
+}% bonuspointtable
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+% \i@gtable and \ii@gtable insert any missing optional arguments
+% (the defaults being [v] and [questions]) and then make sure
+% that the user said \addpoints and that this isn't the
+% first run of LaTeX.
+% \find@p@or@q@range then branches, depending on whether the user
+% selected [questions] or [pages].
+
+\def\i@gtable[#1]{%
+ % If the user doesn't include the second optional argument,
+ % which chooses between questions and pages,
+ % we give them questions:
+ \@ifnextchar[{\ii@gtable{#1}}{\ii@gtable{#1}[questions]}%
+}
+\def\ii@gtable#1[#2]{%
+ % We get here from \i@gtable.
+ % We make sure the user said \addpoints, and then make sure
+ % that this isn't the first run of LaTeX (by checking that
+ % \exam@numpoints is defined). If both of those are OK,
+ % we go to \find@p@or@q@range to see whether we're doing a table
+ % indexed by questions or by pages.
+ \if@addpoints
+ \@ifundefined{exam@numpoints}%
+ {\ClassWarning{exam}%
+ {%
+ You must run LaTeX again to produce the
+ table.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \fbox{Run \LaTeX{} again to produce the table}%
+ }%
+ {\find@p@or@q@range{#1}{#2}}%
+ \else
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ You must give the command \protect\addpoints\MessageBreak
+ \space\space in order to create a grade table.\MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ If you don't give the command \protect\addpoints\MessageBreak
+ \space\space then we're not keeping track of point values.
+ \MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \fi
+}% ii@gtable
+
+\def\@questionsref{questions}
+\def\@pagesref{pages}
+\def\find@p@or@q@range#1#2{%
+ % We get here from \ii@gtable.
+ % The first argument should be ``v'' or ``h'';
+ % the second argument should be ``questions'' or ``pages''.
+ % See whether we're doing a table indexed by
+ % questions (in which case we go to \find@qrange) or by pages (in
+ % which case we go to \find@prange):
+ \begingroup
+ % We've begun a group that will contain the construction of the
+ % table, to confine the effect of any \def's that we use.
+ \def\exam@temp{#2}%
+ \ifx\exam@temp\@questionsref
+ \tbl@pgsfalse
+ \find@qrange{#1}%
+ \else
+ \ifx\exam@temp\@pagesref
+ \tbl@pgstrue
+ \find@prange{#1}%
+ \else
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ Grade and point tables can be indexed\MessageBreak
+ \space\space by either `questions' or `pages',\MessageBreak
+ \space\space but not by `#2'.\MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ Grade tables and point tables can be indexed by questions or
+ pages;\MessageBreak
+ \space\space for others, you're on your own.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \fbox{\textbf{Error:} grade or point table: Invalid argument
+ `#2' must be `questions' or `pages'.}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}% find@p@or@q@range
+
+% \range@undefined can be called from either \find@qrange or
+% \find@prange
+\def\range@undefined{%
+ \fbox{Warning: grading range `\tbl@range ' not defined;
+ run \LaTeX{} again.}%
+ \ClassWarning{exam}{%
+ Grading range `\tbl@range' not defined.\MessageBreak
+ \space\space Run LaTeX again to produce the table.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+}% range@undefined
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Grade and point tables indexed by question numbers:
+
+% When we get to \find@qrange, we know we're doing a table indexed by
+% question numbers and that this is not the first run of latex. The
+% argument is either ``v'' or ``h''. If we're not doing a partial
+% table, then \find@qrange sets \tbl@firstq and \first@pq@index to 1
+% and \tbl@lastq and \last@pq@index to \numquestions. Otherwise,
+% \find@qrange makes sure the grading range is defined and that its
+% last question isn't before its first question. \find@qrange then
+% calls \tbl@v@or@h, passing along the argument that is either ``v''
+% or ``h''.
+
+\def\find@qrange#1{%
+ % We get here from \find@p@or@q@range.
+ % We're doing a table indexed by question numbers.
+ \if@partial
+ \@ifundefined{range@\tbl@range @firstq}%
+ {%
+ \range@undefined
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@ifundefined{range@\tbl@range @lastq}%
+ {%
+ \range@undefined
+ }%
+ {%
+ \edef\tbl@firstq{\csname range@\tbl@range @firstq\endcsname}%
+ \edef\tbl@lastq{\csname range@\tbl@range @lastq\endcsname}%
+ \let\first@pq@index=\tbl@firstq
+ \let\last@pq@index=\tbl@lastq
+ % Check that firstq precedes or equals lastq:
+ \ifnum \tbl@firstq > \tbl@lastq\relax
+ \fbox{\textbf{Error:} Grading Range `\tbl@range':
+ Last question precedes first question.}%
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ In grading range `\tbl@range',
+ the last question\MessageBreak
+ \space\space comes before the first question.\MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ \string\begingradingrange \space must precede
+ \string\endgradingrange \space by at
+ least one question.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \else
+ \tbl@v@or@h{#1}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \def\tbl@firstq{1}%
+ \let\first@pq@index=\tbl@firstq
+ % \numquestions is always defined, even if this is the first
+ % run of LaTeX and \exam@numquestions isn't defined.
+ % If it's the first run of LaTeX, then its value isn't useful,
+ % but it's never used until a later run (when its value is useful).
+ \def\tbl@lastq{\numquestions}%
+ \let\last@pq@index=\tbl@lastq
+ \tbl@v@or@h{#1}%
+ \fi
+}% find@qrange
+
+\def\@vref{v}
+\def\@href{h}
+\def\tbl@v@or@h#1{%
+ % \first@pq@index=\tbl@firstq or \tbl@firstp and
+ % \last@pq@index=\tbl@lastq or \tbl@lastp have already been set.
+ % The argument should be either `v' or `h', and we branch
+ % accordingly.
+ \def\exam@temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\exam@temp\@vref
+ \check@num@cols@v
+ \else
+ \ifx\exam@temp\@href
+ \check@num@rows@h
+ \else
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ Grade or point table: the argument `#1'\MessageBreak
+ \space\space must be `v' or `h'.
+ \MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ Grade tables and point tables can be either vertical or
+ horizontal;\MessageBreak
+ \space\space no diagonals allowed.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \fbox{\textbf{Error:} grade or point table: Invalid argument
+ `#1' must be `v' or `h'.}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}% tbl@v@or@h
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Grade and point tables indexed by page numbers:
+
+
+% The only pages listed are those on which there are a nonzero number
+% of points. We check pages \tbl@firstp through \tbl@lastp
+% Once we've checked that, e.g., \lastpage@withpoints and
+% \pointsonpage@\romannumeral{\lastpage@withpoints} are defined, we
+% can safely (we think) check \pointsonpage@\romannumeral{n} for all n
+% between \tbl@firstp and \tbl@lastp without generating errors.
+%
+% Actually: Since we added the notion of half points and half counters
+% (a long time ago), there won't be any errors even if
+% \pointsonpage@\romannumeral{n} isn't defined, since it's tested by the
+% lines:
+% \set@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\csname pointsonpage@\romannumeral
+% \csname c@@iterator\endcsname\endcsname}%
+% \ifhlfcntr@pos{tmp@hlfcntr}%
+% and if
+% \csname pointsonpage@\romannumeral
+% \csname c@@iterator\endcsname\endcsname
+% isn't defined, tmp@hlfcntr gets the value zero (because of the way
+% that \set@hlfcntr is written).
+
+% \find@prange makes sure the grading range is defined and that its
+% last page isn't before its first page (if it's a partial table). In
+% any case, it then sets \tbl@firstp and \tbl@lastp, and calls
+% \check@secondrun.
+
+\def\find@prange#1{%
+ % We get here from \find@p@or@q@range.
+ % We're doing a table indexed by pages.
+ % The argument is either ``v'' or ``h''.
+ % We first determine the first and last page of the range, storing
+ % those in \first@pq@index=\tbl@firstp and
+ % \last@pq@index=\tbl@lastp. If not a partial table, we set
+ % \first@pq@index=\tbl@firstp to 1 and \last@pq@index=\tbl@lastp to
+ % the last page with the appropriate points (and so if it's a
+ % combined table, it's the last page to have either bonus or
+ % non-bonus points).
+ % We then call \check@secondrun, passing it the argument that we
+ % received (i.e., we say \check@secondrun{#1}) to make sure
+ % we've done at least two runs of latex (so that we'll have the
+ % information we need about which pages have points on them).
+ \if@partial
+ \@ifundefined{range@\tbl@range @firstp}%
+ {%
+ \range@undefined
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@ifundefined{range@\tbl@range @lastp}%
+ {%
+ \range@undefined
+ }%
+ {%
+ \edef\tbl@firstp{\csname range@\tbl@range @firstp\endcsname}%
+ \edef\tbl@lastp{\csname range@\tbl@range @lastp\endcsname}%
+ \let\first@pq@index=\tbl@firstp
+ \let\last@pq@index=\tbl@lastp
+ % Check that firstp precedes or equals lastp:
+ \ifnum \tbl@firstp > \tbl@lastp\relax
+ \fbox{\textbf{Error:} Grading Range `\tbl@range ':
+ Last page precedes first page.}%
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ In grading range `\tbl@range', the last page\MessageBreak
+ \space\space comes before the first page.\MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ \string\begingradingrange \space must precede
+ \string\endgradingrange.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \else
+ \check@secondrun{#1}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ \else
+ % It's not a partial table:
+ \def\tbl@firstp{1}%
+ \let\first@pq@index=\tbl@firstp
+ % We never get here on the first run of LaTeX, and
+ % \lastpage@withbonuspoints is defined on the second and later runs.
+ \def\tbl@lastp{\lastpage@withpoints}%
+ \let\last@pq@index=\tbl@lastp
+ \if@bonus
+ \def\tbl@lastp{\lastpage@withbonuspoints}%
+ \let\last@pq@index=\tbl@lastp
+ \fi
+ \if@combined
+ \ifnum \lastpage@withbonuspoints > \lastpage@withpoints\relax
+ \def\tbl@lastp{\lastpage@withbonuspoints}%
+ \let\last@pq@index=\tbl@lastp
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \check@secondrun{#1}%
+ \fi
+}% find@prange
+
+\def\check@secondrun#1{%
+ % The function \ii@gtable already made sure that this isn't the
+ % first run of latex. To do a table indexed by pages, though, we
+ % have to also make sure it's not the second run of latex.
+ % We get here from \find@prange; the argument is either ``v'' or
+ % ``h''.
+ % Check that there's enough info from the .aux file to do a page
+ % indexed grade table. If so, call \tbl@v@or@h{#1}:
+ \@ifundefined{pointsonpage@\romannumeral
+ \csname lastpage@withpoints\endcsname}%
+ {\@ifundefined{bonuspointsonpage@\romannumeral
+ \csname lastpage@withbonuspoints\endcsname}%
+ {\ClassWarning{exam}{%
+ You must run LaTeX again to produce the table.\MessageBreak}%
+ \fbox{Run \LaTeX{} again to produce the table}%
+ }%
+ {\tbl@v@or@h{#1}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ {\tbl@v@or@h{#1}%
+ }%
+}% check@secondrun
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Indexed by pages:
+
+% For a table indexed by pages, we need to know how many pages there
+% are with points on them. The argument to \count@pgswpts should be
+% the name of a counter; we set that counter equal to the number of
+% pages with the appropriate kind of points.
+
+\def\count@pgswpts#1{%
+ % Set the counter #1 equal to the number of pages in the range with
+ % the appropriate type of points.
+ % We're called by \@computenumcols@h and \@computenumrows@v.
+ \setcounter{#1}{0}%
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\tbl@firstp}%
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{-1}%
+ \if@bonus
+ \docount@pgswbpts{#1}%
+ \else
+ \if@combined
+ \docount@pgswcpts{#1}%
+ \else
+ \docount@pgswpts{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}% count@pgswpts
+
+\def\docount@pgswcpts#1{%
+ % Called by \count@pgswpts
+ % Count the number of pages in range with any kind of point (bonus
+ % or non-bonus):
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{1}%
+ \set@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\pointsonpage{\the@iterator}}%
+ \ifhlfcntr@pos{tmp@hlfcntr}%
+ \addtocounter{#1}{1}%
+ \else
+ \check@bnsptpage{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \the@iterator < \tbl@lastp\relax
+ \def\nextdocount@pgswcpts{\docount@pgswcpts{#1}}%
+ \else
+ \let\nextdocount@pgswcpts=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdocount@pgswcpts
+}% docount@pgswcpts
+\def\check@bnsptpage#1{%
+ % We need to hide this inside of a macro because if \ifhlfcntr@pos
+ % isn't expanded (because this stuff is being skipped in the outer
+ % conditional), then TeX doesn't see the \ifnum hidden inside the
+ % \ifhlfcntr@pos, but it does see the \fi, and so it get confused.
+ \set@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\bonuspointsonpage{\the@iterator}}%
+ \ifhlfcntr@pos{tmp@hlfcntr}%
+ \addtocounter{#1}{1}%
+ \fi
+}% check@bnsptpage
+
+\def\docount@pgswpts#1{%
+ % Called by \count@pgswpts.
+ % Count the number of pages in range with regular points.
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{1}%
+ \set@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\pointsonpage{\the@iterator}}%
+ \ifhlfcntr@pos{tmp@hlfcntr}%
+ \addtocounter{#1}{1}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \the@iterator < \tbl@lastp\relax
+ \def\nextdocount@pgswpts{\docount@pgswpts{#1}}%
+ \else
+ \let\nextdocount@pgswpts=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdocount@pgswpts
+}% docount@pgswpts
+
+\def\docount@pgswbpts#1{%
+ % Called by \count@pgswpts
+ % Count the number of pages in range with bonus points.
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{1}%
+ \set@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\bonuspointsonpage{\the@iterator}}%
+ \ifhlfcntr@pos{tmp@hlfcntr}%
+ \addtocounter{#1}{1}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \the@iterator < \tbl@lastp\relax
+ \def\nextdocount@pgswbpts{\docount@pgswbpts{#1}}%
+ \else
+ \let\nextdocount@pgswbpts=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdocount@pgswbpts
+}% docount@pgswbpts
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Multirow horizontal tables, indexed by question numbers:
+
+\newcounter{pq@index}% In tables indexed by page numbers, it holds a
+% page number. In tables indexed by question numbers, it holds a
+% question number.
+
+\newcounter{pq@index@pts}% In horizontal tables, this holds either the
+% current page number or the current question number as we put the
+% point values for that page or question number into the table. In
+% vertical tables, this holds the index for the first column of the
+% current row.
+
+\newcounter{pq@index@bpts}% used to set bonus point values in
+% horizontal tables. Often used as scratch elsewhere.
+
+\def\hidden@ampersand{&}% Needed because an ampersand can't appear in
+% the replacement text of a conditional.
+
+\newif\iftbl@pgs
+% \tbl@pgstrue means a table indexed by page numbers
+% \tbl@pgsfalse means a table indexed by question numbers
+
+\newcounter{num@cols}
+\newcounter{num@rows}
+\newcounter{current@row}
+\newcounter{cols@done}% Holds the number of columns done in the
+% current row.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Stuff to unify tables indexed by questions and tables indexed by
+% pages:
+
+% \first@pq@index and \last@pq@index will hold either \tbl@firstq and
+% \tbl@lastq or \tbl@firstp and \tbl@lastp.
+
+\def\increment@index#1{%
+ % If we're doing a table indexed by question numbers, we increment
+ % the counter #1.
+ % If we're doing a table indexed by page numbers,
+ % we increase the counter #1 by at least 1 to either the number of the
+ % next page containing the appropriate kind of points, or to
+ % something greater than \tbl@lastp.
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \find@nextpagewithpoints{#1}%
+ \else
+ \addtocounter{#1}{1}%
+ \fi
+}% increment@index
+
+\def\nextcolumn@index@v#1{%
+ % Used only for multicolumn tables.
+ % If we're doing a table indexed by question numbers, we increase
+ % the counter #1 by num@cols.
+ % If we're doing a table indexed by page numbers,
+ % we use \find@nextcolumnpage@v to increment the counter #1 to either
+ % the (num@rows)'th page number after #1 that contains the
+ % appropriate kind of points or to a value greater than \tbl@lastp.
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \find@nextcolumnpage@v{#1}%
+ \else
+ \addtocounter{#1}{\value{num@rows}}%
+ \fi
+}% nextcolumn@index@v
+
+\def\pointsof@index#1{%
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \pointsonpage{\arabic{#1}}%
+ \else
+ \pointsofquestion{\arabic{#1}}%
+ \fi
+}% pointsof@index
+
+\def\bonuspointsof@index#1{%
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \bonuspointsonpage{\arabic{#1}}%
+ \else
+ \bonuspointsofquestion{\arabic{#1}}%
+ \fi
+}% bonuspointsof@index
+
+\def\refto@index#1{%
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \if@combined
+ % Need to hide this inside of a macro:
+ \refto@comb@index{#1}%
+ \else
+ \if@bonus
+ \pageref{firstbonuspoints@onpage@\arabic{#1}}%
+ \else
+ \pageref{firstpoints@onpage@\arabic{#1}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ref{question@\arabic{#1}}%
+ \fi
+}% refto@index
+
+\def\refto@comb@index#1{%
+ % We're called only by \refto@index.
+ % We can't have the \ifhlfcntr@pos...\fi inside of another
+ % conditional, so we're hiding it in this macro.
+ \set@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\pointsonpage{\arabic{#1}}}%
+ \ifhlfcntr@pos{tmp@hlfcntr}%
+ \pageref{firstpoints@onpage@\arabic{#1}}%
+ \else
+ % In theory, there *must* be bonus points on this page, because
+ % there aren't any plain points, but there are allegedly *some*
+ % points. We're being brave and assuming that's correct, and not
+ % checking (which we'd have to hide inside a macro, because it
+ % would use \ifhlfcntr@pos):
+ \pageref{firstbonuspoints@onpage@\arabic{#1}}%
+ \fi
+}% refto@comb@index
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Multirow tables:
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Check that the number of rows is OK, and compute the number of
+% columns:
+
+\def\check@num@rows@h{%
+ % We get here from \tbl@v@or@h.
+ % We make sure the number of rows is a positive integer. If it
+ % is, we go on to \@computenumcols@h
+ \ifnum \value{num@rows} < 1\relax
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ The number of rows in a table must be positive.\MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ The number of rows must be a positive integer.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \fbox{\textbf{Error:} Multirow table with no rows!}%
+ \else
+ \@computenumcols@h
+ \fi
+}% check@num@rows@h
+
+\def\@computenumcols@h{%
+ % We get here from \check@num@rows@h.
+ % Compute the number of columns.
+ % First: set num@cols to one more than either (the number of pages
+ % with the appropriate type of points) or (the number of questions),
+ % to have slots for the total along with the questions:
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \count@pgswpts{num@cols}%
+ \addtocounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \else
+ \setcounter{num@cols}{\tbl@lastq}%
+ \addtocounter{num@cols}{-\tbl@firstq}%
+ \addtocounter{num@cols}{2}%
+ \fi
+ % Save the number of slots needed in pq@index (used for scratch), to
+ % check for truncation:
+ \setcounter{pq@index}{\value{num@cols}}%
+ % Divide the number of slots needed by num@rows:
+ \divide \csname c@num@cols\endcsname by
+ \csname c@num@rows\endcsname
+ % Division truncates: See if there was truncation.
+ % Use @iterator as a scratch counter.
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\value{num@cols}}%
+ \multiply \csname c@@iterator\endcsname by
+ \csname c@num@rows\endcsname
+ \ifnum \value{@iterator} < \value{pq@index}\relax
+ % There was truncation; add a column to num@cols:
+ \addtocounter{num@cols}{1}%
+ \fi
+ \@multirowtable
+}% @computenumcols@h
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Construct the actual table:
+
+\def\@multirowtable{%
+ % We get here from \@computenumcols@h.
+ % All multirow tables!
+ \renewcommand\arraystretch{\@gtblstretch}%
+ \set@hlfcntr{tbl@points}{0}%
+ \set@hlfcntr{tbl@bonuspoints}{0}%
+ \setcounter{pq@index}{\first@pq@index}%
+ \addtocounter{pq@index}{-1}%
+ \setcounter{pq@index@pts}{\value{pq@index}}%
+ \setcounter{pq@index@bpts}{\value{pq@index}}%
+ \setcounter{current@row}{0}%
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|*{\value{num@cols}}{c|}}
+ \hline
+ \if@combined
+ \do@comblines@h
+ \else
+ \do@lines@h
+ \fi
+}% @multirowtable
+
+
+\def\do@lines@h{%
+ % Called only by \@multirowtable.
+ % It's either bonus or regular, but not combined:
+ \addtocounter{current@row}{1}% Set to the number of the current row
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \if@bonus
+ \@bhpgword
+ \else
+ \@hpgword
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \if@bonus
+ \@bhqword
+ \else
+ \@hqword
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \setcounter{cols@done}{0}%
+ \do@pq@indexloop@h
+ % When we finish \do@pq@indexloop@h, either we've finished a
+ % complete row of page numbers (or questions), or we've done all
+ % the page numbers (or questions) through \last@pq@index, or both:
+ \ifnum \value{cols@done} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ % We've inserted all the page or question numbers, and there's
+ % room remaining on the current line for \@htword (or \@bhtword):
+ \ifnum \value{current@row} = \value{num@rows}\relax
+ % This is the last row; put in the total:
+ \do@htword@h
+ \else
+ % This isn't the last row. We insert (\value{num@cols} -
+ % \value{cols@done}) ampersands.
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\value{num@cols}}%
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{-\value{cols@done}}%
+ \do@emptycols@h
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \\
+ \hline
+ % Point values go here!
+ \setcounter{cols@done}{0}%
+ \if@bonus
+ \@bhpword
+ \do@bptloop@h
+ \else
+ \@hpword
+ \do@ptloop@h
+ \fi
+ % When we finish \do@ptloop@h or \do@bptloop@h, either
+ % we've finished a complete row of point values, or we've done all
+ % the question (or page) numbers through \last@pq@index, or both:
+ \ifnum \value{cols@done} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ % We've inserted all the point values, and there's room
+ % remaining on the current line for Total Points:
+ \ifnum \value{current@row} = \value{num@rows}\relax
+ % This is the last row; put in the total:
+ \if@bonus
+ \do@totalbpts@h
+ \else
+ \do@totalpts@h
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % This isn't the last row. We insert (\value{num@cols} -
+ % \value{cols@done}) ampersands.
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\value{num@cols}}%
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{-\value{cols@done}}%
+ \do@emptycols@h
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ % We hold off on putting in the "\\ \hline" because we may want to
+ % immediately follow it with either an "\end{tabular}" or another
+ % "\hline".
+ % Scores?
+ \if@scores
+ \\
+ \hline
+ \if@bonus
+ \@bhsword \hidden@ampersand
+ \else
+ \@hsword \hidden@ampersand
+ \fi
+ \setcounter{cols@done}{0}%
+ \do@sloop@h
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \value{current@row} = \value{num@rows}\relax
+ % This is the last line! End the tabular:
+ \\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \else
+ % Don't end the tabular:
+ \\
+ \hline\hline
+ \fi
+ % Check if we should repeat:
+ \ifnum \value{current@row} < \value{num@rows}\relax
+ \let\nextdo@lines@h=\do@lines@h
+ \else
+ \let\nextdo@lines@h=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdo@lines@h
+}% do@lines@h
+
+\def\do@comblines@h{%
+ % Called only by \@multirowtable.
+ % Combined tables.
+ \addtocounter{current@row}{1}% Set to the number of the current row
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \@chpgword
+ \else
+ \@chqword
+ \fi
+ \setcounter{cols@done}{0}%
+ \do@pq@indexloop@h
+ % When we finish \do@pq@indexloop@h, either we've finished a
+ % complete row of page (or question) numbers, or we've done all
+ % the page (or question) numbers through \last@pq@index, or both:
+ \ifnum \value{cols@done} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ % We've inserted all the question (or page) numbers, and there's
+ % room remaining on the current line for \@chtword:
+ \ifnum \value{current@row} = \value{num@rows}\relax
+ % This is the last row; put in the total:
+ \do@htword@h
+ \else
+ % This isn't the last row. We insert (\value{num@cols} -
+ % \value{cols@done}) ampersands.
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\value{num@cols}}%
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{-\value{cols@done}}%
+ \do@emptycols@h
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \\
+ \hline
+ % Point values go here!
+ \@chpword
+ \setcounter{cols@done}{0}%
+ \do@ptloop@h
+ % When we finish \do@ptloop@h, either we've finished a complete
+ % row of point values, or we've done all the question (or page)
+ % numbers through \last@pq@index, or both:
+ \ifnum \value{cols@done} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ % We've inserted all the point values, and there's room
+ % remaining on the current line for Total Points:
+ \ifnum \value{current@row} = \value{num@rows}\relax
+ % This is the last row; put in the total:
+ \do@totalpts@h
+ \else
+ % This isn't the last row. We insert (\value{num@cols} -
+ % \value{cols@done}) ampersands.
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\value{num@cols}}%
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{-\value{cols@done}}%
+ \do@emptycols@h
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \\
+ \hline
+ % Bonus point values go here!
+ \@chbpword
+ \setcounter{cols@done}{0}%
+ \do@bptloop@h
+ % When we finish \do@bptloop@h, either
+ % we've finished a complete row of point values, or we've done all
+ % the question (or page) numbers through \last@pq@index, or both:
+ \ifnum \value{cols@done} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ % We've inserted all the point values, and there's room
+ % remaining on the current line for Total Points:
+ \ifnum \value{current@row} = \value{num@rows}\relax
+ % This is the last row; put in the total:
+ \do@totalbpts@h
+ \else
+ % This isn't the last row. We insert (\value{num@cols} -
+ % \value{cols@done}) ampersands.
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\value{num@cols}}%
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{-\value{cols@done}}%
+ \do@emptycols@h
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ % We hold off on putting in the "\\ \hline" because we may want to
+ % immediately follow it with either an "\end{tabular}" or another
+ % "\hline".
+ % Scores?
+ \if@scores
+ \\
+ \hline
+ \@chsword \hidden@ampersand
+ \setcounter{cols@done}{0}%
+ \do@sloop@h
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \value{current@row} = \value{num@rows}\relax
+ % This is the last line! End the tabular:
+ \\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \else
+ % Don't end the tabular:
+ \\
+ \hline\hline
+ \fi
+ % Check if we should repeat:
+ \ifnum \value{current@row} < \value{num@rows}\relax
+ \let\nextdo@comblines@h=\do@comblines@h
+ \else
+ \let\nextdo@comblines@h=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdo@comblines@h
+}% do@comblines@h
+
+\def\do@pq@indexloop@h{%
+ % Called by both \do@lines@h and \do@comblines@h.
+ % We insert at most one row of pq@index:
+ \increment@index{pq@index}%
+ \ifnum \value{pq@index} > \last@pq@index\relax
+ % Do nothing!
+ \else
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \refto@index{pq@index}%
+ \addtocounter{cols@done}{1}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \value{pq@index} < \last@pq@index\relax
+ \ifnum \value{cols@done} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ \let\nextdo@pq@indexloop@h=\do@pq@indexloop@h
+ \else
+ \let\nextdo@pq@indexloop@h=\relax
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \let\nextdo@pq@indexloop@h=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdo@pq@indexloop@h
+}% do@pq@indexloop@h
+
+\def\do@ptloop@h{%
+ % Called by both \do@lines@h and \do@comblines@h.
+ % We insert at most one row of non-bonus point values:
+ \increment@index{pq@index@pts}%
+ \ifnum \value{pq@index@pts} > \last@pq@index\relax
+ % Do nothing!
+ \else
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \addtocounter{cols@done}{1}%
+ \pointsof@index{pq@index@pts}%
+ \addto@hlfcntr{tbl@points}{\pointsof@index{pq@index@pts}}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \value{pq@index@pts} < \last@pq@index\relax
+ \ifnum \value{cols@done} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ \let\nextdo@ptloop@h=\do@ptloop@h
+ \else
+ \let\nextdo@ptloop@h=\relax
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \let\nextdo@ptloop@h=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdo@ptloop@h
+}% do@ptloop@h
+
+\def\do@bptloop@h{%
+ % Called by both \do@lines@h and \do@comblines@h.
+ % We insert at most one row of bonus point values:
+ \increment@index{pq@index@bpts}%
+ \ifnum \value{pq@index@bpts} > \last@pq@index\relax
+ % Do nothing!
+ \else
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \addtocounter{cols@done}{1}%
+ \bonuspointsof@index{pq@index@bpts}%
+ \addto@hlfcntr{tbl@bonuspoints}{\bonuspointsof@index{pq@index@bpts}}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \value{pq@index@bpts} < \last@pq@index\relax
+ \ifnum \value{cols@done} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ \let\nextdo@bptloop@h=\do@bptloop@h
+ \else
+ \let\nextdo@bptloop@h=\relax
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \let\nextdo@bptloop@h=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdo@bptloop@h
+}% do@bptloop@h
+
+\def\do@htword@h{%
+ % Called by both \do@lines@h and \do@comblines@h.
+ % We insert (\value{num@cols} - \value{cols@done}) ampersands,
+ % and then either \@htword or \@bhtword or \@chtword:
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\value{num@cols}}%
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{-\value{cols@done}}%
+ \do@emptycols@h
+ \if@combined
+ \@chtword
+ \else
+ \if@bonus
+ \@bhtword
+ \else
+ \@htword
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}% do@htword@h
+
+\def\do@totalpts@h{%
+ % Called by both \do@lines@h and \do@comblines@h.
+ % We insert (\value{num@cols} - \value{cols@done}) ampersands
+ % and then the total points:
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\value{num@cols}}%
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{-\value{cols@done}}%
+ \do@emptycols@h
+ \prt@tablepoints
+}% do@totalpts@h
+
+\def\do@totalbpts@h{%
+ % Called by both \do@lines@h and \do@comblines@h.
+ % We insert (\value{num@cols} - \value{cols@done}) ampersands,
+ % and then the total bonus points:
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\value{num@cols}}%
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{-\value{cols@done}}%
+ \do@emptycols@h
+ \prt@tablebonuspoints
+}% do@totalbpts@h
+
+\def\do@emptycols@h{%
+ % Called by \do@lines@h, \do@comblines@h, \do@htword@h,
+ % \do@totalpts@h, and \do@totalbpts@h.
+ % We insert \value{@iterator} ampersands:
+ \ifnum \value{@iterator} > 0\relax
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{-1}%
+ \let\nextdo@emptycols@h=\do@emptycols@h
+ \else
+ \let\nextdo@emptycols@h=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdo@emptycols@h
+}% do@emptycols@h
+
+\def\do@sloop@h{%
+ % Called by both \do@lines@h and \do@comblines@h.
+ % We assume that cols@done has been set to zero.
+ % We insert num@cols \hbox to \@cellwidth,
+ % separated by ampersands.
+ \addtocounter{cols@done}{1}%
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \ifnum \value{cols@done} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \let\nextdo@sloop@h=\do@sloop@h
+ \else
+ \let\nextdo@sloop@h=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdo@sloop@h
+}% do@sloop@h
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Multicolumn tables
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Here's an example of a multicolumn grade table indexed by questions.
+
+% Every line of \cline's is followed by a
+% \noalign{\vskip\arrayrulewidth} to cancel the
+% \noalign{\vskip-\arrayrulewidth} that ends the definition of
+% \cline.
+
+% \begin{tabular}{*2{|c|c|c|c}}
+% \cline{1-3} \cline{5-7}
+% \noalign{\vskip\arrayrulewidth}
+% Question%
+% & Points%
+% & Score%
+% & \hspace*{-\arrayrulewidth}\hspace*{\doublerulesep}%
+% & Question%
+% & Points%
+% & Score%
+% \\
+% \cline{1-3} \cline{5-7}
+% \noalign{\vskip\arrayrulewidth}
+% 1%
+% & 5%
+% & \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+% & \hspace*{-\arrayrulewidth}\hspace*{\doublerulesep}%
+% & 4%
+% & 20%
+% & \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+% \\
+% \cline{1-3} \cline{5-7}
+% \noalign{\vskip\arrayrulewidth}
+% 2%
+% & 10%
+% & \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+% & \hspace*{-\arrayrulewidth}\hspace*{\doublerulesep}%
+% & 5%
+% & 25%
+% & \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+% \\
+% \cline{1-3} \cline{5-7}
+% \noalign{\vskip\arrayrulewidth}
+% 3%
+% & 15%
+% & \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+% & \hspace*{-\arrayrulewidth}\hspace*{\doublerulesep}%
+% & Total:%
+% & 75%
+% & \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+% \\
+% \cline{1-3} \cline{5-7}
+% \noalign{\vskip\arrayrulewidth}
+% \end{tabular}
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Check that the number of cols is OK, and compute the number of rows:
+
+\def\check@num@cols@v{%
+ % We get here from \tbl@v@or@h.
+ % We make sure the number of cols is between 1 and 10 (since we
+ % can't handle more than 10 cols in a multicolumn table).
+ % If it is, we go on to \@computenumrows@v
+ \ifnum \value{num@cols} < 1\relax
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ The number of columns in a table must be positive.\MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ The number of columns must be a positive integer.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \fbox{\textbf{Error:} Multicolumn table with no columns!}%
+ \else
+ \ifnum \value{num@cols} > 10\relax
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ Multicolumn tables can have at most 10 columns.\MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ Multicolumn tables can have at most 10 columns.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \fbox{\textbf{Error:} Multicolumn table with more than 10 columns!}%
+ \else
+ \@computenumrows@v
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}% check@num@cols@v
+
+\def\@computenumrows@v{%
+ % We get here from \check@num@cols@v.
+ % Compute the number of rows.
+ % First: set num@rows to one more than the number of either
+ % (questions) or (pages with the appropriate type of points), to
+ % have slots for the total along with the questions or page numbers:
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \count@pgswpts{num@rows}%
+ \addtocounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ \else
+ \setcounter{num@rows}{\last@pq@index}%
+ \addtocounter{num@rows}{-\first@pq@index}%
+ \addtocounter{num@rows}{2}%
+ \fi
+ % Save the number of slots needed, using pq@index@bpts as a scratch
+ % counter, to check for truncation on division:
+ \setcounter{pq@index@bpts}{\value{num@rows}}%
+ % Divide the number of slots needed by num@cols:
+ \divide \csname c@num@rows\endcsname by
+ \csname c@num@cols\endcsname
+ % Division truncates: See if there was truncation.
+ % Use the counter @iterator as a scratch counter:
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\value{num@rows}}%
+ \multiply \csname c@@iterator\endcsname by
+ \csname c@num@cols\endcsname
+ \ifnum \value{@iterator} < \value{pq@index@bpts}\relax
+ % There was truncation; add one to num@rows:
+ \addtocounter{num@rows}{1}%
+ \fi
+ \@multicolumntable
+}% @computenumrows@v
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Construct the actual table:
+
+\def\@multicolumntable{%
+ % We get here from \@computenumrows@v.
+ % Set \cline@stuff@v equal to the line of \cline's:
+ \create@cline@stuff@v
+ \renewcommand\arraystretch{\@gtblstretch}%
+ \set@hlfcntr{tbl@points}{0}%
+ \set@hlfcntr{tbl@bonuspoints}{0}%
+ \if@combined
+ \if@scores
+ % combinedgradetable, possibly partial.
+ % Note: We'll never use the final "c" in the format of the
+ % tabular, but there's no harm in that.
+ \begin{tabular}{*{\value{num@cols}}{|c|c|c|c|c}}
+ % We need to make sure that the \cline@stuff@v commands come
+ % *immediately* following the \\ or \begin{tabular} (with no
+ % conditionals evaluated, even if those conditionals expand to
+ % the empty string)!
+ % Put in the row of column headings, with \cline@stuff@v above and
+ % below:
+ \cline@stuff@v
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{0}%
+ \docolumn@heads@comb@v
+ \\
+ \cline@stuff@v
+ \else
+ % combinedpointtable, possibly partial.
+ % Note: We'll never use the final "c" in the format of the
+ % tabular, but there's no harm in that.
+ \begin{tabular}{*{\value{num@cols}}{|c|c|c|c}}
+ % We need to make sure that the \cline@stuff@v commands come
+ % *immediately* following the \\ or \begin{tabular} (with no
+ % conditionals evaluated, even if those conditionals expand to
+ % the empty string)!
+ % Put in the row of column headings, with \cline@stuff@v above and
+ % below:
+ \cline@stuff@v
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{0}%
+ \docolumn@heads@comb@noscores@v
+ \\
+ \cline@stuff@v
+ \fi
+ % pq@index@pts will hold the question number (or page number) in
+ % the first column of the row.
+ \setcounter{pq@index@pts}{\first@pq@index}%
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ % If we're indexed by pages, we need to make sure there are
+ % points of the appropriate type on the first page listed:
+ \addtocounter{pq@index@pts}{-1}%
+ \find@nextpagewithpoints{pq@index@pts}%
+ \fi
+ \setcounter{current@row}{0}%
+ \do@lines@v
+ \else
+ % It's not combined:
+ \if@scores
+ % Note: We'll never use the final "c" in the format of the
+ % tabular, but there's no harm in that.
+ \begin{tabular}{*{\value{num@cols}}{|c|c|c|c}}
+ % We need to make sure that the \cline@stuff@v commands come
+ % *immediately* following the \\ or \begin{tabular} (with no
+ % conditionals evaluated, even if those conditionals expand to
+ % the empty string)!
+ % Put in the row of column headings, with \cline@stuff@v above and
+ % below:
+ \cline@stuff@v
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{0}%
+ \docolumn@heads@v
+ \\
+ \cline@stuff@v
+ \else
+ % Note: We'll never use the final "c" in the format of the
+ % tabular, but there's no harm in that.
+ \begin{tabular}{*{\value{num@cols}}{|c|c|c}}
+ % We need to make sure that the \cline@stuff@v commands come
+ % *immediately* following the \\ or \begin{tabular} (with no
+ % conditionals evaluated, even if those conditionals expand to
+ % the empty string)!
+ % Put in the row of column headings, with \cline@stuff@v above and
+ % below:
+ \cline@stuff@v
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{0}%
+ \docolumn@heads@noscores@v
+ \\
+ \cline@stuff@v
+ \fi
+ % pq@index@pts will hold the question number (or page number) in
+ % the first column of the row.
+ \setcounter{pq@index@pts}{\first@pq@index}%
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ % If we're indexed by pages, we need to make sure there are
+ % points of the appropriate type on the first page listed:
+ \addtocounter{pq@index@pts}{-1}%
+ \find@nextpagewithpoints{pq@index@pts}%
+ \fi
+ \setcounter{current@row}{0}%
+ \do@lines@v
+ \fi
+}% @multicolumntable
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \create@cline@stuff@v
+
+% The function \create@cline@stuff@v defines \cline@stuff@v to be whatever's
+% appropriate given the values of num@cols, \if@bonus, \if@combined, and
+% \if@scores.
+
+% We wimped out of generating \cline@stuff@v on the fly because we didn't
+% see how to get the correct expansions/nonexpansions without using a
+% primitive of e-TeX.
+
+% \clines@ii@whatever is for tables in which a logical column consists
+% of two columns; it's used for pointtable and bonuspointtable.
+
+\def\clines@ii@i{\cline{1-2}}
+\def\clines@ii@ii{\cline{1-2} \cline{4-5}}
+\def\clines@ii@iii{\cline{1-2} \cline{4-5} \cline{7-8}}
+\def\clines@ii@iv{\cline{1-2} \cline{4-5} \cline{7-8} \cline{10-11}}
+\def\clines@ii@v{\cline{1-2} \cline{4-5} \cline{7-8} \cline{10-11}
+ \cline{13-14}}
+\def\clines@ii@vi{\cline{1-2} \cline{4-5} \cline{7-8} \cline{10-11}
+ \cline{13-14} \cline{16-17}}
+\def\clines@ii@vii{\cline{1-2} \cline{4-5} \cline{7-8} \cline{10-11}
+ \cline{13-14} \cline{16-17} \cline{19-20}}
+\def\clines@ii@viii{\cline{1-2} \cline{4-5} \cline{7-8} \cline{10-11}
+ \cline{13-14} \cline{16-17} \cline{19-20} \cline{22-23}}
+\def\clines@ii@vix{\cline{1-2} \cline{4-5} \cline{7-8} \cline{10-11}
+ \cline{13-14} \cline{16-17} \cline{19-20} \cline{22-23}
+ \cline{25-26}}
+\def\clines@ii@x{\cline{1-2} \cline{4-5} \cline{7-8} \cline{10-11}
+ \cline{13-14} \cline{16-17} \cline{19-20} \cline{22-23}
+ \cline{25-26} \cline{28-29}}
+
+% \clines@iii@whatever is for tables in which a logical column consists
+% of three columns; it's are used for gradetable, bonusgradetable, and
+% combinedpointtable:
+
+\def\clines@iii@i{\cline{1-3}}
+\def\clines@iii@ii{\cline{1-3} \cline{5-7}}
+\def\clines@iii@iii{\cline{1-3} \cline{5-7} \cline{9-11}}
+\def\clines@iii@iv{\cline{1-3} \cline{5-7} \cline{9-11} \cline{13-15}}
+\def\clines@iii@v{\cline{1-3} \cline{5-7} \cline{9-11} \cline{13-15}
+ \cline{17-19}}
+\def\clines@iii@vi{\cline{1-3} \cline{5-7} \cline{9-11} \cline{13-15}
+ \cline{17-19} \cline{21-23}}
+\def\clines@iii@vii{\cline{1-3} \cline{5-7} \cline{9-11} \cline{13-15}
+ \cline{17-19} \cline{21-23} \cline{25-27}}
+\def\clines@iii@viii{\cline{1-3} \cline{5-7} \cline{9-11} \cline{13-15}
+ \cline{17-19} \cline{21-23} \cline{25-27} \cline{29-31}}
+\def\clines@iii@ix{\cline{1-3} \cline{5-7} \cline{9-11} \cline{13-15}
+ \cline{17-19} \cline{21-23} \cline{25-27} \cline{29-31}
+ \cline{33-35}}
+\def\clines@iii@x{\cline{1-3} \cline{5-7} \cline{9-11} \cline{13-15}
+ \cline{17-19} \cline{21-23} \cline{25-27} \cline{29-31}
+ \cline{33-35} \cline{37-39}}
+
+
+% \clines@iv@whatever is for tables in which a logical column
+% consists of four columns; it's used for combinedgradetable.
+
+\def\clines@iv@i{\cline{1-4}}
+\def\clines@iv@ii{\cline{1-4} \cline{6-9}}
+\def\clines@iv@iii{\cline{1-4} \cline{6-9} \cline{11-14}}
+\def\clines@iv@iv{\cline{1-4} \cline{6-9} \cline{11-14} \cline{16-19}}
+\def\clines@iv@v{\cline{1-4} \cline{6-9} \cline{11-14} \cline{16-19}
+ \cline{21-24}}
+\def\clines@iv@vi{\cline{1-4} \cline{6-9} \cline{11-14} \cline{16-19}
+ \cline{21-24} \cline{26-29}}
+\def\clines@iv@vii{\cline{1-4} \cline{6-9} \cline{11-14} \cline{16-19}
+ \cline{21-24} \cline{26-29} \cline{31-34}}
+\def\clines@iv@viii{\cline{1-4} \cline{6-9} \cline{11-14} \cline{16-19}
+ \cline{21-24} \cline{26-29} \cline{31-34} \cline{36-39}}
+\def\clines@iv@ix{\cline{1-4} \cline{6-9} \cline{11-14} \cline{16-19}
+ \cline{21-24} \cline{26-29} \cline{31-34} \cline{36-39}
+ \cline{41-44}}
+\def\clines@iv@x{\cline{1-4} \cline{6-9} \cline{11-14} \cline{16-19}
+ \cline{21-24} \cline{26-29} \cline{31-34} \cline{36-39}
+ \cline{41-44} \cline{46-49}}
+
+% The definition of \cline ends with \noalign{\vskip-\arrayrulewidth},
+% and so we want to throw in a \noalign{\vskip\arrayrulewidth} to
+% cancel that.
+\def\cline@correction{\noalign{\vskip\arrayrulewidth}}
+
+\def\create@cline@stuff@v{%
+ % Called by \@multicolumntable.
+ \if@combined
+ \if@scores
+ \edef\cline@stuff@v{\expandafter\noexpand\csname
+ clines@iv@\romannumeral \c@num@cols\endcsname
+ \noexpand\cline@correction}%
+ \else
+ \edef\cline@stuff@v{\expandafter\noexpand\csname
+ clines@iii@\romannumeral \c@num@cols\endcsname
+ \noexpand\cline@correction}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \if@scores
+ \edef\cline@stuff@v{\expandafter\noexpand\csname
+ clines@iii@\romannumeral \c@num@cols\endcsname
+ \noexpand\cline@correction}%
+ \else
+ \edef\cline@stuff@v{\expandafter\noexpand\csname
+ clines@ii@\romannumeral \c@num@cols\endcsname
+ \noexpand\cline@correction}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}% create@cline@stuff@v
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The various \docolumn@heads@something@v
+
+\def\docolumn@heads@v{%
+ % Called by \@multicolumntable.
+ % multicolumngradetable or multicolumnbonusgradetable, possibly
+ % partial.
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \if@bonus
+ \@bvpgword
+ \else
+ \@vpgword
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \if@bonus
+ \@bvqword
+ \else
+ \@vqword
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ & \if@bonus
+ \@bvpword
+ \else
+ \@vpword
+ \fi
+ & \if@bonus
+ \@bvsword
+ \else
+ \@vsword
+ \fi
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{1}%
+ \ifnum \value{@iterator} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hspace*{-\arrayrulewidth}\hspace*{\doublerulesep}%
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \let\nextdocolumn@heads@v=\docolumn@heads@v
+ \else
+ \let\nextdocolumn@heads@v=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdocolumn@heads@v
+}% docolumn@heads@v
+
+\def\docolumn@heads@noscores@v{%
+ % Called by \@multicolumntable.
+ % multicolumnpointtable or multicolumnbonuspointtable, possibly
+ % partial.
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \if@bonus
+ \@bvpgword
+ \else
+ \@vpgword
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \if@bonus
+ \@bvqword
+ \else
+ \@vqword
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ &
+ \if@bonus
+ \@bvpword
+ \else
+ \@vpword
+ \fi
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{1}%
+ \ifnum \value{@iterator} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hspace*{-\arrayrulewidth}\hspace*{\doublerulesep}%
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \let\nextdocolumn@heads@noscores@v=\docolumn@heads@noscores@v
+ \else
+ \let\nextdocolumn@heads@noscores@v=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdocolumn@heads@noscores@v
+}% docolumn@heads@noscores@v
+
+\def\docolumn@heads@comb@v{%
+ % Called by \@multicolumntable.
+ % multicolumncombinedgradetable, possibly partial.
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \@cvpgword
+ \else
+ \@cvqword
+ \fi
+ & \@cvpword
+ & \@cvbpword
+ & \@cvsword
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{1}%
+ \ifnum \value{@iterator} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hspace*{-\arrayrulewidth}\hspace*{\doublerulesep}%
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \let\nextdocolumn@heads@comb@v=\docolumn@heads@comb@v
+ \else
+ \let\nextdocolumn@heads@comb@v=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdocolumn@heads@comb@v
+}% docolumn@heads@comb@v
+
+\def\docolumn@heads@comb@noscores@v{%
+ % Called by \@multicolumntable.
+ % multicolumncombinedpointtable, possibly partial.
+ \iftbl@pgs
+ \@cvpgword
+ \else
+ \@cvqword
+ \fi
+ & \@vpword
+ & \@bvpword
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{1}%
+ \ifnum \value{@iterator} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hspace*{-\arrayrulewidth}\hspace*{\doublerulesep}%
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \let\nextdocolumn@heads@comb@noscores@v=\docolumn@heads@comb@noscores@v
+ \else
+ \let\nextdocolumn@heads@comb@noscores@v=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdocolumn@heads@comb@noscores@v
+}% docolumn@heads@comb@noscores@v
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \do@lines@v is used by *all* multicolumn tables.
+% It calls \do@oneline@v for all non-combined tables and
+% \do@oneline@comb@v for all combined tables.
+
+\def\do@lines@v{%
+ % We get here from \@multicolumntable.
+ % ALL MULTICOLUMN TABLES!!!!
+ % pq@index@pts holds the question number or page number in the first
+ % column of the current row.
+ \addtocounter{current@row}{1}%
+ \setcounter{pq@index}{\value{pq@index@pts}}%
+ \setcounter{cols@done}{0}% Number of columns done
+ % We're doing both grade tables and point tables!!
+ \if@combined
+ \do@oneline@comb@v
+ \else
+ \do@oneline@v
+ \fi
+ \increment@index{pq@index@pts}%
+ % We need the "\\ \cline@stuff@v" to *immediately* precede the
+ % \end{tabular} (i.e., with no \ifnum separating them), to avoid
+ % having crap after the \cline@stuff@v that
+ % causes there to be an extra row at the end of the table. We also
+ % need there to be nothing between \\ and \cline@stuff@v.
+ \ifnum \value{current@row} = \value{num@rows}\relax
+ \\
+ \cline@stuff@v
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \let\nextdo@lines@v=\relax
+ \else
+ \\
+ \cline@stuff@v
+ \let\nextdo@lines@v=\do@lines@v
+ \fi
+ \nextdo@lines@v
+}% do@lines@v
+
+\def\do@oneline@v{%
+ % Called by \do@lines@v.
+ % Used for all multicolumn non-combined tables.
+ % pq@index holds the question or page number we're about to do.
+ \ifnum \value{pq@index} > \last@pq@index\relax
+ % See if we're in the last column; use pq@index@bpts as a scratch
+ % counter:
+ \setcounter{pq@index@bpts}{\value{cols@done}}%
+ \addtocounter{pq@index@bpts}{1}%
+ \ifnum \value{pq@index@bpts} = \value{num@cols}\relax
+ % We're in the last column; are we in the last row?
+ \ifnum \value{current@row} = \value{num@rows}\relax
+ % We're in the last column, last row!
+ % Print the total:
+ \if@bonus
+ \@bvtword
+ \else
+ \@vtword
+ \fi
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \if@scores
+ \if@bonus
+ \prt@tablebonuspoints
+ \else
+ \prt@tablepoints
+ \fi
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \else
+ \hspace*{\fill}%
+ \if@bonus
+ \prt@tablebonuspoints
+ \else
+ \prt@tablepoints
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % Not last column last row; insert empty space:
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \if@scores
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \fi
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % Not last column; insert empty space:
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \if@scores
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \fi
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % We need to do question (or page) number pq@index:
+ \refto@index{pq@index}%
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \if@scores
+ \if@bonus
+ \bonuspointsof@index{pq@index}%
+ \addto@hlfcntr{tbl@bonuspoints}{\bonuspointsof@index{pq@index}}%
+ \else
+ \pointsof@index{pq@index}%
+ \addto@hlfcntr{tbl@points}{\pointsof@index{pq@index}}%
+ \fi
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \else
+ \if@bonus
+ \bonuspointsof@index{pq@index}%
+ \addto@hlfcntr{tbl@bonuspoints}{\bonuspointsof@index{pq@index}}%
+ \else
+ \pointsof@index{pq@index}%
+ \addto@hlfcntr{tbl@points}{\pointsof@index{pq@index}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \addtocounter{cols@done}{1}% Number of columns done
+ \ifnum \value{cols@done} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hspace*{-\arrayrulewidth}\hspace*{\doublerulesep}%
+ \nextcolumn@index@v{pq@index}%
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \let\nextdo@oneline@v=\do@oneline@v
+ \else
+ \let\nextdo@oneline@v=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdo@oneline@v
+}% do@oneline@v
+
+\def\do@oneline@comb@v{%
+ % Called by \do@lines@v.
+ % All combined multicolumn tables.
+ % pq@index holds the question (or page) we're about to do.
+ \ifnum \value{pq@index} > \last@pq@index\relax
+ % See if we're in the last column; use pq@index@bpts as a scratch
+ % counter:
+ \setcounter{pq@index@bpts}{\value{cols@done}}%
+ \addtocounter{pq@index@bpts}{1}%
+ \ifnum \value{pq@index@bpts} = \value{num@cols}\relax
+ % We're in the last column; are we in the last row?
+ \ifnum \value{current@row} = \value{num@rows}\relax
+ % We're in the last column, last row!
+ % Print the total:
+ \@cvtword
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \prt@tablepoints
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \if@scores
+ \prt@tablebonuspoints
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \else
+ \prt@tablebonuspoints
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % Last column, but not last row; insert empty space:
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \if@scores
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \fi
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % Not last column; insert empty space:
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \if@scores
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \fi
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % We need to do question number pq@index:
+ \refto@index{pq@index}%
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \pointsof@index{pq@index}%
+ \addto@hlfcntr{tbl@points}{\pointsof@index{pq@index}}%
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \if@scores
+ \bonuspointsof@index{pq@index}%
+ \addto@hlfcntr{tbl@bonuspoints}{\bonuspointsof@index{pq@index}}%
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hbox to \@cellwidth{\hfill}%
+ \else
+ \bonuspointsof@index{pq@index}%
+ \addto@hlfcntr{tbl@bonuspoints}{\bonuspointsof@index{pq@index}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \addtocounter{cols@done}{1}% Number of columns done
+ \ifnum \value{cols@done} < \value{num@cols}\relax
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \hspace*{-\arrayrulewidth}\hspace*{\doublerulesep}%
+ \nextcolumn@index@v{pq@index}%
+ \hidden@ampersand
+ \let\nextdo@oneline@comb@v=\do@oneline@comb@v
+ \else
+ \let\nextdo@oneline@comb@v=\relax
+ \fi
+ \nextdo@oneline@comb@v
+}% do@oneline@comb@v
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \find@nextpagewithpoints and \find@nextcolumnpage@v:
+
+\def\find@nextpagewithpoints#1{%
+ % Called by \dofind@nextcolumnpage@v, \increment@index, and
+ % \@multicolumntable.
+ % The argument #1 should be the name of a counter with a nonnegative
+ % value.
+ % We increase #1 by at least 1 to either the number of the
+ % next page containing the appropriate kind of points, or to something
+ % greater than \tbl@lastp.
+ \addtocounter{#1}{1}%
+ \if@combined
+ \set@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\pointsonpage{\value{#1}}}%
+ \addto@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\bonuspointsonpage{\value{#1}}}%
+ % The sum is positive when at least one of them is positive.
+ \else
+ \if@bonus
+ \set@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\bonuspointsonpage{\value{#1}}}%
+ \else
+ \set@hlfcntr{tmp@hlfcntr}{\pointsonpage{\value{#1}}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifhlfcntr@pos{tmp@hlfcntr}%
+ \let\nextfind@nextpagewithpoints=\relax
+ \else
+ \ifnum \value{#1} > \tbl@lastp\relax
+ \let\nextfind@nextpagewithpoints=\relax
+ \else
+ \def\nextfind@nextpagewithpoints{\find@nextpagewithpoints{#1}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \nextfind@nextpagewithpoints
+}% find@nextpagewithpoints
+
+\def\find@nextcolumnpage@v#1{%
+ % Called by \nextcolumn@index@v.
+ % This is used for all multicolumn tables that are indexed by
+ % pages.
+ % We use \find@nextpagewithpoints to increment #1 to either
+ % the (num@rows)'th page number after #1 that contains the
+ % appropriate kind of points or to a value greater than \tbl@lastp.
+ % We use pq@index@bpts as a scratch counter.
+ \setcounter{pq@index@bpts}{0}%
+ \dofind@nextcolumnpage@v{#1}%
+}% find@nextcolumnpage@v
+\def\dofind@nextcolumnpage@v#1{%
+ % Called only by \find@nextcolumnpage@v.
+ \addtocounter{pq@index@bpts}{1}%
+ \find@nextpagewithpoints{#1}%
+ \ifnum \value{pq@index@bpts} = \value{num@rows}\relax
+ \let\nextdofind@nextcolumnpage@v=\relax
+ \else
+ % The following test shouldn't be needed, in theory, because the
+ % computation of num@cols should prevent trouble, but we're being
+ % paranoid.
+ \ifnum \value{#1} > \tbl@lastp\relax
+ \let\nextdofind@nextcolumnpage@v=\relax
+ \else
+ % Note: this is a \def, and not a \let, because we need to put
+ % in the argument #1:
+ \def\nextdofind@nextcolumnpage@v{\dofind@nextcolumnpage@v{#1}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \nextdofind@nextcolumnpage@v
+}% dofind@nextcolumnpage@v
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \pointsinrange and \bonuspointsinrange, and then
+% \firstqinrange, \lastqinrange, and \numqinrange.
+
+
+% We say either \@bonusfalse or \@bonustrue, and then we check it only
+% in \do@countloop:
+\def\pointsinrange#1{%
+ \@bonusfalse
+ \def\tbl@range{#1}%
+ \@ifundefined{exam@numpoints}%
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ {\read@range}%
+}% pointsinrange
+
+\def\bonuspointsinrange#1{%
+ \@bonustrue
+ \def\tbl@range{#1}%
+ \@ifundefined{exam@numpoints}%
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ {\read@range}%
+}% bonuspointsinrange
+
+\def\bad@range{%
+ % Called by \read@range, \firstqinrange, \lastqinrange, and
+ % \numqinrange.
+ {\mbox{\normalfont\bfseries ??}}%
+ \ClassWarning{exam}{%
+ Grading range `\tbl@range' not defined.\MessageBreak
+ \space\space Run LaTeX again.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+}% bad@range
+
+\def\read@range{%
+ % Called by \pointsinrange and \bonuspointsinrange.
+ \@ifundefined{range@\tbl@range @firstq}%
+ {%
+ \bad@range
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@ifundefined{range@\tbl@range @lastq}%
+ {%
+ \bad@range
+ }%
+ {%
+ \edef\tbl@firstq{\csname range@\tbl@range @firstq\endcsname}%
+ \edef\tbl@lastq{\csname range@\tbl@range @lastq\endcsname}%
+ % Check that firstq precedes or equals lastq:
+ \ifnum \tbl@firstq > \tbl@lastq\relax
+ \fbox{\textbf{Error:} Grading Range `\tbl@range ':
+ Last question precedes first question.}%
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ In grading range `\tbl@range ',
+ the last question\MessageBreak
+ \space\space comes before the first question.\MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ \string\begingradingrange \space must precede
+ \string\endgradingrange \space by at
+ least one question.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ \else
+ \count@pointsinrange
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+}% read@range
+
+\def\count@pointsinrange{%
+ % Used for both \pointsinrange and \bonuspointsinrange:
+ \set@hlfcntr{tbl@points}{0}%
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\tbl@firstq}%
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{-1}\do@countloop
+ \prt@hlfcntr{tbl@points}%
+}% count@pointsinrange
+\def\do@countloop{%
+ % We check \if@bonus here when needed:
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{1}%
+ \if@bonus
+ \@ifundefined{bonuspointsofq@\romannumeral \c@@iterator}%
+ {}%
+ {\addto@hlfcntr{tbl@points}
+ {\csname bonuspointsofq@\romannumeral \c@@iterator\endcsname}}%
+ \else
+ \@ifundefined{pointsofq@\romannumeral \c@@iterator}%
+ {}%
+ {\addto@hlfcntr{tbl@points}
+ {\csname pointsofq@\romannumeral \c@@iterator\endcsname}}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \value{@iterator} < \tbl@lastq\relax
+ \let\next@countloop=\do@countloop
+ \else
+ \let\next@countloop=\relax
+ \fi
+ \next@countloop
+}% do@countloop
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \firstqinrange, \lastqinrange, and \numqinrange.
+
+\newcommand{\firstqinrange}[1]{%
+ \def\tbl@range{#1}%
+ \@ifundefined{range@\tbl@range @firstq}%
+ {\bad@range}%
+ {\csname range@#1@firstq\endcsname}%
+}% firstqinrange
+
+\newcommand{\lastqinrange}[1]{%
+ \def\tbl@range{#1}%
+ \@ifundefined{range@\tbl@range @lastq}%
+ {\bad@range}%
+ {\csname range@#1@lastq\endcsname}%
+}% lastqinrange
+
+\newcommand{\numqinrange}[1]{%
+ \def\tbl@range{#1}%
+ \@ifundefined{range@#1@firstq}%
+ {%
+ \bad@range
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@ifundefined{range@#1@lastq}%
+ {%
+ \bad@range
+ }%
+ {%
+ \setcounter{@iterator}{\csname range@#1@lastq\endcsname}%
+ \addtocounter{@iterator}{-\csname range@#1@firstq\endcsname}%
+ \stepcounter{@iterator}%
+ \arabic{@iterator}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}% numqinrange
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% ***************************
+% ** SOLUTION ENVIRONMENTS **
+% ***************************
+
+
+
+% If the documentclass options include ``answers'', then the command
+% \printanswerstrue is given at the beginning of the run.
+
+% If the documentclass options include ``noanswers'', then the command
+% \printanswersfalse is given at the beginning of the run.
+
+\def\printanswers{\printanswerstrue}
+\def\noprintanswers{\printanswersfalse}
+
+% If the documentclass options include ``cancelspace'', then the
+% command \cancelspacetrue is given at the beginning of the run.
+
+% If the documentclass options include ``nocancelspace'', then the
+% command \cancelspacefalse is given at the beginning of the run.
+
+\def\cancelspace{\cancelspacetrue}
+\def\nocancelspace{\cancelspacefalse}
+
+% \if@insolution will be true while we're inside of any of the
+% solution environments. This is used to supress \PgInfo@write and
+% \label commands generated if there's a parts (or subparts, or
+% subsubparts) environment inside of a solution. (It won't suppress
+% the labels for the question objects, since a question object is
+% never a label that's been used before.)
+\newif\if@insolution
+\@insolutionfalse
+
+\newcommand\SolutionEmphasis[1]{%
+ \def\Solution@Emphasis{#1}%
+}
+\SolutionEmphasis{}
+
+% If printanswers is true, we print the solution using a TheSolution
+% environment. If printanswers is false and cancelspace is false, we
+% insert blank vertical space equal to the optional argument (the
+% default value of which is 0pt).
+\newenvironment{solution}[1][0pt]%
+ {%
+ \@insolutiontrue % cancelled by the end of the environment
+ \@addpointsfalse % cancelled by the end of the environment
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \begingroup
+ \Solution@Emphasis
+ \begin{TheSolution}%
+ \else
+ \ifcancelspace
+ % Do nothing
+ \else
+ \par
+ \penalty 0
+ \vspace*{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+ \fi
+ }{%
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \end{TheSolution}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \egroup
+ \fi
+ }%
+
+% If printanswers is true, we print the solution using a TheSolution
+% environment. If printanswers is false and cancelspace is false,
+% we insert an empty box of width the current line width and of
+% height equal to the optional argument, which can be a length, or
+% \fill, or \stretch{number}. If the optional argument is omitted,
+% then the box is entirely omitted when printanswers is false.
+\newenvironment{solutionorbox}[1][-1pt]%
+ {%
+ \@insolutiontrue % cancelled by the end of the environment
+ \@addpointsfalse % cancelled by the end of the environment
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \begingroup
+ \Solution@Emphasis
+ \begin{TheSolution}%
+ \else
+ \ifcancelspace
+ % Do nothing
+ \else
+ \par
+ % Note: It's important that the following test be
+ % ``\ifdim 0pt > #1'' rather than ``\ifdim #1 < 0pt''
+ % That's because if the user says
+ % ``\begin{solutionorbox}{\stretch{1}}''
+ % (or \stretch{anythingelse}), then this will expand to
+ % ``\ifdim 0pt > \z@ plus 1fill\relax''.
+ % The \ifdim will be ``\ifdim 0pt > \z@'', and we'll have
+ % ``plus 1fill\relax'' left over. This is OK because if the
+ % \ifdim is false, that leftover stuff will be ignored,
+ % and it will only be true if the user omitted the optional
+ % argument, in which case there's no \stretch and thus no
+ % left over part.
+ % If we said ``\ifdim #1 < 0pt'', then we'd get an error
+ % when the user used \stretch, since the leftover stuff
+ % would appear when TeX was looking for <, =, or >.
+ \ifdim 0pt > #1
+ % do nothing
+ \else
+ \makeemptybox{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+ \fi
+ }{%
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \end{TheSolution}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \egroup
+ \fi
+ }%
+
+% If printanswers is true, we print the solution using a TheSolution
+% environment. If printanswers is false and cancelspace is false,
+% we insert lined vertical space equal to the optional argument (the
+% default value of which is 0pt).
+\newenvironment{solutionorlines}[1][0pt]%
+ {%
+ \@insolutiontrue % cancelled by the end of the environment
+ \@addpointsfalse % cancelled by the end of the environment
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \begingroup
+ \Solution@Emphasis
+ \begin{TheSolution}%
+ \else
+ \ifcancelspace
+ % Do nothing
+ \else
+ \par
+ \penalty 0
+ \fillwithlines{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+ \fi
+ }{%
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \end{TheSolution}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \egroup
+ \fi
+ }%
+
+% If printanswers is true, we print the solution using a TheSolution
+% environment. If printanswers is false and cancelspace is false,
+% we insert dotted lined vertical space equal to the optional
+% argument (the default value of which is 0pt).
+\newenvironment{solutionordottedlines}[1][0pt]%
+ {%
+ \@insolutiontrue % cancelled by the end of the environment
+ \@addpointsfalse % cancelled by the end of the environment
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \begingroup
+ \Solution@Emphasis
+ \begin{TheSolution}%
+ \else
+ \ifcancelspace
+ % Do nothing
+ \else
+ \par
+ \penalty 0
+ \fillwithdottedlines{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+ \fi
+ }{%
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \end{TheSolution}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \egroup
+ \fi
+ }%
+
+% If printanswers is true, we print the solution using a TheSolution
+% environment. If printanswers is false and cancelspace is false,
+% we insert a grid occupying vertically the optional argument (the
+% default value of which is 0pt).
+\newenvironment{solutionorgrid}[1][0pt]%
+ {%
+ \@insolutiontrue % cancelled by the end of the environment
+ \@addpointsfalse % cancelled by the end of the environment
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \begingroup
+ \Solution@Emphasis
+ \begin{TheSolution}%
+ \else
+ \ifcancelspace
+ % Do nothing
+ \else
+ \par
+ \penalty 0
+ \fillwithgrid{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+ \fi
+ }{%
+ \ifprintanswers
+ \end{TheSolution}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \egroup
+ \fi
+ }%
+
+
+% The environment TheSolution is called from the solution,
+% solutionorbox, solutionorlines, solutionordottedlines, and
+% solutionorgrid environments when printanswers is true. It uses
+% Donald Arseneau's framed.sty macros (included at the end of this
+% file) to allow the solution to be broken across pages and have each
+% piece enclosed in an fbox (or a colorbox, if the user has given the
+% command \shadedsolutions), (or no box at all, if the user has given
+% the command \unframedsolutions).
+
+% Of course, the user can change TheSolution with a \renewenvironment
+% command.
+\newcommand{\solutiontitle}{\noindent\textbf{Solution:}\enspace}
+\newenvironment{TheSolution}%
+ {%
+ \vspace{\parskip}%
+ % If we don't set \leftskip and \rightskip to 0pt, then if we
+ % appear inside of an \uplevel command we'd have indentation
+ % inside of the solution box:
+ \leftskip=0pt
+ \rightskip=0pt
+ % If the user said \unframedsolutions, then both
+ % \if@framedsolutions and \if@shadedsolutions are false:
+ \if@framedsolutions
+ % We'll use the default \exam@FrameCommand
+ \else
+ \if@shadedsolutions
+ \def\exam@FrameCommand{\colorbox{SolutionColor}}%
+ \else
+ % It's \unframedsolutions:
+ \def\exam@FrameCommand{}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \exam@MakeFramed{\advance\hsize-\exam@width}%
+ \solutiontitle
+ \ignorespaces
+ }%
+ {%
+ \unskip
+ \endexam@MakeFramed
+ }%
+
+\newif\if@framedsolutions
+\@framedsolutionstrue
+\newif\if@shadedsolutions
+\@shadedsolutionsfalse
+% If the user said \unframedsolutions, then both
+% \if@framedsolutions and \if@shadedsolutions are false.
+
+\def\framedsolutions{\@framedsolutionstrue\@shadedsolutionsfalse}
+\def\shadedsolutions{%
+ \@ifundefined{definecolor}
+ {%
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ You must load the color package with the command\MessageBreak
+ \space\space\protect\usepackage{color}\MessageBreak
+ in order to use the command \protect\shadedsolutions
+ \MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ This command makes use of the package color.sty,\MessageBreak
+ and so you have to load color.sty before your\MessageBreak
+ \protect\begin{document} command.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \definecolor{SolutionColor}{gray}{0.8}
+ \@shadedsolutionstrue
+ \@framedsolutionsfalse
+ }%
+}
+\def\unframedsolutions{\@framedsolutionsfalse\@shadedsolutionsfalse}
+
+
+% The solutionbox environment is different from the other solution
+% environments (solution, solutionorbox, solutionorlines,
+% solutionordottedlines, and solutionorgrid), in that
+%
+% (1) The box is always printed, whether answers are being printed
+% or not.
+%
+% (2) The argument giving the size of the box is a required
+% argument, not an optional argument, and so it should be enclosed
+% in braces, not in brackets. It can be either a length or
+% \stretch{number}.
+%
+% (3) We make no use of the TheSolution environment; the solutionbox
+% environment is completely freestanding.
+%
+% If answers are not being printed then only the box is printed, with
+% nothing in it. If answers are being printed, then the solution is
+% printed inside of the box.
+%
+% Note: It's the user's responsibility to be sure that the box is
+% large enough to hold the solution! If the solution takes up too
+% much vertical space, then it will spill out of the bottom of the
+% box, overwriting whatever follows the box.
+
+% 2016/02/08: The solutionbox frame can now be printed in color, as
+% long as you load color.sty in the preamble.
+%
+% Usage: Say
+%
+% \usepackage{color}
+%
+% in the preamble, and then give the command
+%
+% \colorsolutionboxes
+%
+% to have the frame around a solutionbox in color. The default color
+% was created by the command
+%
+% \definecolor{SolutionBoxColor}{gray}{0.8}
+%
+% and you can change the color by giving a new \definecolor command
+% (which must be done *after* the \colorsolutionboxes command).
+%
+% To cancel color solutionbox frames and return to black, give the
+% command
+%
+% \nocolorsolutionboxes
+
+\newif\if@colorsolutionboxes
+\@colorsolutionboxesfalse
+\def\colorsolutionboxes{%
+ \@ifundefined{definecolor}
+ {%
+ \ClassError{exam}{%
+ You must load the color package with the command\MessageBreak
+ \space\space\protect\usepackage{color}\MessageBreak
+ in order to use the command \protect\colorsolutionboxes
+ \MessageBreak
+ }{%
+ This command makes use of the package color.sty,\MessageBreak
+ and so you have to load color.sty before your\MessageBreak
+ \protect\begin{document} command.\MessageBreak
+ }%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \definecolor{SolutionBoxColor}{gray}{0.8}
+ \@colorsolutionboxestrue
+ }%
+}
+\def\nocolorsolutionboxes{\@colorsolutionboxesfalse}
+
+\newbox\exam@box
+\newenvironment{solutionbox}[1]{%
+ \@insolutiontrue % cancelled by the end of the environment
+ \@addpointsfalse % cancelled by the end of the environment
+ \def\solutionbox@size{#1}% saved for end of environment
+% Change, 2016/02/08: So that the solutionbox environment will work
+% correctly inside of a tabular environment, we use \hsize instead of
+% \textwidth:
+% \@tempdima=\textwidth
+ \@tempdima=\hsize
+ \advance\@tempdima -\@totalleftmargin
+ \advance\@tempdima -6\fboxsep
+ \advance\@tempdima -2\fboxrule
+ % Confine the \Solution@Emphasis, as well as anything the user puts
+ % into the solution (e.g., \color{red}, or whatever); don't say
+ % \endgroup until after using \box\exam@box:
+ \begingroup
+ \Solution@Emphasis
+ % We save the solution in a box of the proper width. We'll either
+ % print it (if we're printing solutions) or throw it away by just
+ % not using it before the environment ends:
+ \setbox\exam@box=\vtop\bgroup
+ \hsize=\@tempdima
+ \leftskip=0pt
+ \rightskip=0pt
+ \vskip 2\fboxsep
+% Change, 2016/05/09: We change \@totalleftmargin and \linewidth in
+% case there are enumerate, itemize, or description environments
+% inside the solution:
+ \@totalleftmargin=0pt
+ \linewidth=\hsize
+ \solutiontitle
+ \ignorespaces
+ }%
+ {%
+ \unskip
+ \egroup
+ % OK, the solution is now inside \box\exam@box.
+ % Set the height and depth to 0pt, so that if we use it we won't
+ % be advancing our position on the page:
+ \ht\exam@box=0pt
+ \dp\exam@box=0pt
+ \par
+ \vspace{\parskip}
+ \ifprintanswers
+ % We enclose the \vtop in an \hbox to avoid having the
+ % indentation of the enclosing list environment (implemented via
+ % \parshape) shift us to the right when we enter horizontal
+ % mode. If we don't use this \hbox, then we'd have to comment
+ % out the \hskip \@totalleftmargin:
+ % 2016/02/08: Changed \textwidth to \hsize:
+ \hbox to \hsize{%
+ \noindent
+ \hskip\@totalleftmargin
+ \hskip3\fboxsep\hskip\fboxrule
+ \box\exam@box\hfill
+ }%
+ \par\nointerlineskip
+ \fi
+ \endgroup % Finish confining the \Solution@Emphasis
+% Starting in version 2.502, 2016/03/23,the decision of whether to
+% color the box is made in the \makeemptybox command:
+ \makeemptybox{\solutionbox@size}
+ }% End of the second argument of \newenvironment{solutionbox}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Added in version 2.502: 2016/03/23, \colorfbox
+
+% The \colorfbox command is used in our modification of framed.sty
+% that allows us to print the frame around the solution in color when
+% the user has given the command \colorsolutionboxes. It takes two
+% arguments, the first being the color for the frame, and the second
+% being the stuff to be framed.
+
+% If we had assumed that xcolor.sty was used (instead of just
+% color.sty), then the line that saves the current color in
+% saved@color could have been just
+
+% \colorlet{saved@color}{.}
+
+% but we wanted to make this work even if color.sty is being used.
+
+% When you define a color mycolor using either color.sty or
+% xcolor.sty, a macro \csname\string\color@ mycolor\endcsname is
+% defined (i.e., the macro name is \\color@mycolor).
+\newcommand{\colorfbox}[2]{%
+ % Save the current color in saved@color:
+ \expandafter\let\csname\string\color@saved@color\endcsname\current@color
+ % Create the box in color #1, with the text in saved@color
+ % (the braces are to confine the color change commands):
+ {\color{#1}\fbox{\color{saved@color}#2}}%
+}% colorfbox
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+% The following stuff is lifted from:
+%
+% framed.sty v 0.8a 21-Jul-2003
+% Copyright (C) 1992-2003 by Donald Arseneau
+% These macros may be freely transmitted, reproduced, or modified
+% provided that this notice is left intact.
+%
+% The modifications I made are marked with ``psh'' in a comment:
+%
+% Further modifications, 2017-09-21
+% I changed the names of many commands by prepending ``exam@'', so
+% that the user can use the framed.sty package with exam.cls and not
+% have conflicts. (I also renamed the framed, shaded, and leftbar
+% environments to examframed, examshaded, and examleftbar.) I didn't
+% mark these name changes.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Create framed or shaded regions that can break across pages using
+% \begin{examframed} ... \end{examframed} -- ordinary frame box
+% (box at margin)
+% \begin{examshaded} ... \end{examshaded} -- shaded background
+% (into margin)
+% ... examleftbar ... -- line on left side
+% \begin{MakeFramed}{settings} ... \end{MakeFramed}
+% -- generic frame (for new environments)
+%
+% The "examframed" environment puts the text into "\fbox" with the
+% settings "\fboxrule=\exam@FrameRule" and "\fboxsep=\exam@FrameSep".
+% You can change these lengths (using "\setlength") and you
+% can even change the definition of "\exam@FrameCommand" to use
+% much fancier boxes.
+%
+% In fact, the "shaded" environment just redefines "\exam@FrameCommand"
+% to use "\colorbox{shadecolor}" (and you have to define the
+% color "shadecolor": \newcolor{shadecolor}...).
+%
+% A page break is allowed, and even encouraged, before the framed
+% environment. If you want to attach some text (a box title) to the
+% frame, then the text should be inserted by \exam@FrameCommand
+%
+% The contents of the framed regions are restricted:
+% Floats, footnotes, marginpars and head-line entries will be lost.
+% (Some of these may be handled in a later version.)
+% This package will not work with the page breaking of multicol.sty,
+% or other systems that perform column-balancing.
+%
+% The MakeFramed environment does the work. Its "settings" argument
+% should contain any adjustments to the text width (applied to \hsize,
+% and using the "\exam@width" of the frame itself) as well as a `restore'
+% command -- \@parboxrestore or \exam@FrameRestore or something similar.
+%
+% Expert commands:
+% \exam@MakeFramed, \endexam@MakeFramed: the "MakeFramed" environment
+% \exam@FrameCommand: command to draw the frame around its argument
+% \exam@FrameRestore: restore some text settings, but fewer than
+% \@parboxrestore
+% \exam@FrameRule: length register; \fboxrule for default "framed".
+% \exam@FrameSep: length register; \fboxsep for default "framed".
+% \exam@frameHeightAdjust: macro; height of frame above baseline at
+% top of page
+%
+% This is still a `pre-production' version because I can think of many
+% features/improvements that should be made. Nevertheless, starting
+% with version 0.5 it should be bug-free.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%psh: Commented out \ProvidesPackage:
+%\ProvidesPackage{framed}[2003/07/21 v 0.8a:
+% framed or shaded text with page breaks]
+
+%psh: Created \saved@totalleftmargin and \@sollistdepth:
+\newdimen\saved@totalleftmargin
+\newcount\@sollistdepth
+
+\newenvironment{examframed}% using default \exam@FrameCommand
+ {\exam@MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\exam@width \exam@FrameRestore}}%
+ {\endexam@MakeFramed}
+
+\newenvironment{examshaded}{%
+ \def\exam@FrameCommand{\colorbox{shadecolor}}%
+ \exam@MakeFramed {\exam@FrameRestore}}%
+ {\endexam@MakeFramed}
+
+\newenvironment{examleftbar}{%
+ \def\exam@FrameCommand{\vrule width 3pt \hspace{10pt}}%
+ \exam@MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\exam@width \exam@FrameRestore}}%
+ {\endexam@MakeFramed}
+
+\chardef\exam@FrameRestore=\catcode`\| % for debug
+\catcode`\|=\catcode`\% % (debug: insert space after backslash)
+
+\def\exam@MakeFramed#1{\par
+ % measure added width and height; call result \exam@width and \exam@height
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\vskip-1in \hbox{\hskip-1in
+ \exam@FrameCommand{\hbox{\vrule \@height .7in \@depth.3in \@width 1in}}}%
+ \vskip\z@skip}%
+ \def\exam@width{\wd\z@}\def\exam@height{\ht\z@}%
+ \edef\exam@fb@frw{\the\exam@width}\edef\exam@fb@frh{\the\exam@height}%
+ % insert pre-penalties and skips
+ \begingroup
+ \skip@\lastskip
+ \if@nobreak\else
+ \penalty9999 % updates \page parameters
+ \ifdim\pagefilstretch=\z@ \ifdim\pagefillstretch=\z@
+ \edef\@tempa{\the\skip@}%
+ \ifx\@tempa\exam@zero@glue \penalty-30
+ \else \vskip-\skip@ \penalty-30 \vskip\skip@
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ \penalty\z@
+ % Give a stretchy breakpoint that will always be taken in preference
+ % to the \penalty 9999 used to update page parameters. The cube root
+ % of 10000/100 indicates a multiplier of 0.21545, but the maximum
+ % calculated badness is really 8192, not 10000, so the multiplier
+ % is 0.2301.
+ \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.5\baselineskip
+ \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\exam@height
+ \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\skip@
+ \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\topsep
+ \vskip-\skip@ \penalty 1800 \vskip\skip@
+ \fi
+ \addvspace{\topsep}%
+ \endgroup
+ % clear out pending page break
+ \penalty\@M \vskip 2\baselineskip \vskip\exam@height
+ \penalty9999 \vskip -2\baselineskip \vskip-\exam@height
+ \penalty9999 % updates \pagetotal
+|\message{After clearout, \pagetotal=\the\pagetotal, \pagegoal=\the\pagegoal. }%
+ \exam@fb@adjheight
+%psh: Added commands:
+ \advance\hsize-\@totalleftmargin
+ \saved@totalleftmargin=\@totalleftmargin
+ \@totalleftmargin=0pt
+ \parshape 0
+ \let\@listdepth=\@sollistdepth
+ \@sollistdepth=0
+ \leftmargin=0pt
+%psh: end of added commands
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
+ #1% Modifications to \hsize (can use \exam@width and \exam@height)
+ \textwidth\hsize \columnwidth\hsize
+%psh: added one line:
+ \linewidth=\hsize
+}
+
+\def\endexam@MakeFramed{\par
+ \kern\z@ \penalty-100 % put depth into height
+ \egroup
+ \begingroup \exam@put@frame \endgroup
+%psh: Added one line:
+ \@totalleftmargin=\saved@totalleftmargin
+}
+
+% \exam@put@frame takes the contents of \@tempboxa and puts all, or a
+% piece, of it on the page with a frame (\exam@FrameCommand). It
+% recurses until all of \@tempboxa has been used up. (\@tempboxa must
+% have zero depth.)
+
+\def\exam@put@frame{\relax
+ \ifdim\pagegoal=\maxdimen \pagegoal\vsize \fi
+| \message{=============== Entering putframe ====================^^J
+| \pagegoal=\the\pagegoal, \pagetotal=\the\pagetotal. }%
+ \ifinner \else
+ \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % natural space left on page
+ \ifdim\dimen@<2\baselineskip
+| \message{Page has only \the\dimen@\space room left; eject. }%
+ \eject \exam@fb@adjheight \exam@put@frame
+ \else % there's appreciable room left on the page
+| \message{\string\pagetotal=\the\pagetotal,
+| \string\pagegoal=\the\pagegoal,
+| \string\pagestretch=\the\pagestretch,
+| \string\pageshrink=\the\pageshrink,
+| \string\exam@fb@frh=\exam@fb@frh. \space}
+| \message{Box of size \the\ht\@tempboxa\space + \exam@fb@frh}%
+ \begingroup % temporarily set \dimen@ to be...
+ \advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink % maximum space available on page
+ \advance\dimen@-\exam@fb@frh\relax % space available for frame's contents
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ % restore \dimen@ to real room left on page
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\ht\@tempboxa % whole box does fit
+| \message{fits in \the\dimen@. }%
+ \else % box must be split
+| \message{must be split to fit in \the\dimen@. }%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{% simulate frame and flexiblity of the page:
+ \vskip \exam@fb@frh \@plus\pagestretch \@minus.8\pageshrink
+ \kern137sp\kern-137sp\penalty-30
+ \unvbox\@tempboxa}%
+ \edef\exam@fb@resto@set{\boxmaxdepth\the\boxmaxdepth
+ \splittopskip\the\splittopskip}%
+ \boxmaxdepth\z@ \splittopskip\z@
+ \setbox\tw@\vsplit\@tempboxa to\dimen@
+ \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}% natural-sized
+| \message{Box of size \the\ht\@tempboxa\space split to \the\dimen@.
+| Natural height of split box is \the\ht\tw@. }%
+ % If the split-to size > (\vsize-\topskip), then set box to full size
+ \begingroup
+ \advance\dimen@\topskip
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\pagegoal
+| \message{Frame is big -- Use up the full column. }%
+ \dimen@ii\pagegoal
+ \advance\dimen@ii -\topskip
+ \advance\dimen@ii \exam@frameHeightAdjust\relax
+ \else % suspect this is wrong:
+ % If the split-to size > feasible room_on_page, rebox it smaller.
+ \advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink
+ \ifdim\ht\tw@>\dimen@
+| \message{Box too tall; rebox it to \the\dimen@. }%
+ \dimen@ii\dimen@
+ \else % use natural size
+ \dimen@ii\ht\tw@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ % Re-box contents to desired size \dimen@ii
+ \advance\dimen@ii -\exam@fb@frh
+ \setbox\tw@\vbox to\dimen@ii \bgroup
+ % remove simulated frame and page flexibility:
+ \vskip -\exam@fb@frh \@plus-\pagestretch \@minus-.8\pageshrink
+ \unvbox\tw@ \unpenalty\unpenalty
+ \ifdim\lastkern=-137sp % whole box went to next page
+| \message{box split at beginning! }%
+ \egroup \exam@fb@resto@set \eject % (\vskip for frame size
+ % was discarded)
+ \exam@fb@adjheight
+ \else %
+ \egroup \exam@fb@resto@set
+ \ifvoid\@tempboxa % it all fit after all
+| \message{box split at end! }%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\box\tw@
+ \else % it really did split
+| \message{box split as expected. Its reboxed height is \the\ht\tw@. }%
+ \ifdim\wd\tw@>\z@
+%psh: Changed the command that inserts the box:
+% Instead of \centerline, we shift right by \saved@totalleftmargin:
+% \centerline{\exam@FrameCommand{\box\tw@}}% ??? \centerline bad idea
+ \hbox{\hskip \saved@totalleftmargin\exam@FrameCommand{\box\tw@}}%
+ \else
+| \message{Zero width means likely blank. Don't frame it (guess)}%
+ \box\tw@
+ \fi
+ \hrule \@height\z@
+ \eject
+ \exam@fb@adjheight
+ \exam@put@frame
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+ \ifvoid\@tempboxa\else
+%psh: Changed the command that inserts the box:
+% Instead of \centerline, we shift right by \saved@totalleftmargin:
+% \centerline{\exam@FrameCommand{\box\@tempboxa}}%
+ \hbox{\hskip\saved@totalleftmargin\exam@FrameCommand{\box\@tempboxa}}%
+ \nointerlineskip \null %{\showoutput \showlists}
+ \penalty-30 \vskip\topsep
+ \fi}
+
+\def\exam@fb@adjheight{%
+ \vbox to\exam@frameHeightAdjust{}% get proper baseline skip from above.
+ \penalty\@M \nointerlineskip
+ \vskip-\exam@frameHeightAdjust
+ \penalty\@M} % useful for tops of pages
+
+\edef\exam@zero@glue{\the\z@skip}
+
+\catcode`\|=\exam@FrameRestore
+
+% Provide configuration commands:
+%psh: Version 2.502, 2016/03/23, changed \exam@FrameCommand so that the
+% frame is printed in color if the user has said
+% \colorsolutionboxes:
+%\providecommand\exam@FrameCommand{\fboxrule=\exam@FrameRule
+%\fboxsep=\exam@FrameSep \fbox}
+\def\exam@FrameCommand{\fboxrule=\exam@FrameRule \fboxsep=\exam@FrameSep
+ \if@colorsolutionboxes
+ \def\box@it{\colorfbox{SolutionBoxColor}}%
+ \else
+ \def\box@it{\fbox}%
+ \fi
+ \box@it
+}% \exam@FrameCommand
+
+\@ifundefined{FrameRule}{\newdimen\exam@FrameRule \exam@FrameRule=\fboxrule}{}
+\@ifundefined{FrameSep} {\newdimen\exam@FrameSep \exam@FrameSep =3\fboxsep}{}
+
+% Height of frame above first baseline when frame starts a page:
+\providecommand\exam@frameHeightAdjust{6pt}
+
+% \exam@FrameRestore has parts of \@parboxrestore. See how it is used in the
+% "settings" argument of \MakeFrame. Previous behavior can be restored by
+% using \@parboxrestore there, or redefining:
+% \makeatletter \renewcommand\exam@FrameRestore{\@parboxrestore} \makeatother
+\def\exam@FrameRestore{%
+ \let\if@nobreak\iffalse
+ \let\if@noskipsec\iffalse
+% \let\par\@@par ??
+ \let\-\@dischyph
+ \let\'\@acci\let\`\@accii\let\=\@acciii
+% \parindent\z@ \parskip\z@skip Definitely omit!
+% \everypar{}% ??
+ \linewidth\hsize
+% \@totalleftmargin\z@
+% \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip \@rightskip\z@skip
+% \parfillskip\@flushglue \lineskip\normallineskip
+% \baselineskip\normalbaselineskip
+ \sloppy
+% \let\\\@normalcr
+}
+
+% Compatibility with previous versions (temporary!):
+% psh: we'll remove this 2017-09-21
+%\let\fram@d=\MakeFramed \let\endfram@d=\endMakeFramed
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% This ends the stuff that's lifted from:
+% % framed.sty v 0.8a 21-Jul-2003
+% % Copyright (C) 1992-2003 by Donald Arseneau
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\endinput
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/exam/exam.md5 b/macros/latex/contrib/exam/exam.md5
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..38fd1b65a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/exam/exam.md5
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+08a9755a8f51d31edf6b4124c9b710f9 exam.cls
+a9273b3443c367000e4a71b572c58a62 examdoc.pdf
+a9a481f4f36ec3dbf90ffe63f57ce803 examdoc.tex
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/exam/examdoc.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/exam/examdoc.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9386d25eac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/exam/examdoc.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/exam/examdoc.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/exam/examdoc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cbcfb377a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/exam/examdoc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,8770 @@
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+% examdoc.tex
+%
+% This is the user's guide for the exam documentclass,
+% by Philip Hirschhorn.
+%
+% The exam documentclass itself is in the file exam.cls.
+
+
+%%% Copyright (c) 1997, 2000, 2004, 2008, 2011, 2015, 2017
+% Philip S. Hirschhorn
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work consists of the files exam.cls and examdoc.tex
+
+% The user's guide for exam.cls is in the file examdoc.tex.
+
+
+%%% Philip Hirschhorn
+%%% Department of Mathematics
+%%% Wellesley College
+%%% Wellesley, MA 02481
+%%% psh@math.mit.edu
+
+% The newest version of this documentclass should always be available
+% from my web page: http://www-math.mit.edu/~psh/
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\documentclass[12pt]{exam}
+\usepackage{amssymb}
+
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+
+\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
+
+% In case we're not using hyperref.sty:
+\providecommand{\texorpdfstring}[2]{#1}
+% The following can be used in \section commands
+% without generating pdf warnings:
+\newcommand{\bs}{\texorpdfstring{\char`\\}{}}
+
+\newcommand{\docversion}{2.6}
+\newcommand{\docdate}{November 5, 2017}
+%\newcommand{\docdate}{Draft: \today}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% Changes since version 2.4 are described in the comments
+% near the beginning of the file exam.cls.
+%
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\makeindex
+
+\newcommand{\indc}[1]{\index{#1@\texttt{\char`\\#1}}}
+\newcommand{\indcsub}[2]{\index{#1@\texttt{\char`\\#1}!#2}}
+\newcommand{\indcstart}[1]{\index{#1@\texttt{\char`\\#1}|(}}
+\newcommand{\indcstop}[1]{\index{#1@\texttt{\char`\\#1}|)}}
+
+\newcommand{\indt}[1]{\index{#1@\texttt{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\indtsub}[2]{\index{#1@\texttt{#1}!#2}}
+\newcommand{\indtstart}[1]{\index{#1@\texttt{#1}|(}}
+\newcommand{\indtstop}[1]{\index{#1@\texttt{#1}|)}}
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\newenvironment{example}%
+ {\bigskip\filbreak
+ \subsubsection{Example:}
+ }%
+ {}
+
+\def\samplehead#1#2#3#4{%
+ \begin{trivlist}
+ \item[]
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox to \textwidth{%
+ \rlap{\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\raggedright#1\strut}}%
+ \hfil\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\centering#2\strut}\hfil
+ \llap{\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\raggedleft#3\strut}}%
+ }% hbox
+ #4
+ \end{trivlist}
+}
+
+\def\samplefoot#1#2#3#4{%
+ \begin{trivlist}
+ \item[]
+ \leavevmode
+ #1
+ \vskip 3pt
+
+ \hbox to \textwidth{%
+ \rlap{\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\raggedright#2}}%
+ \hfil\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\centering#3}\hfil
+ \llap{\parbox[t]{\textwidth}{\raggedleft#4}}%
+ }% hbox
+ \end{trivlist}
+}
+
+% \makeatletter
+% \@ifundefined{AmS}{\def\AmS{{\protect\the\textfont\tw@
+% A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}}}
+% {}
+% \makeatother
+
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Using the exam document class}
+
+\author{Philip Hirschhorn\\
+ Department of Mathematics\\
+ Wellesley College\\
+ Wellesley, MA 02481\\
+ psh@math.mit.edu\\[\bigskipamount]
+ Copyright \copyright~1994, 1997, 2000, 2004, 2008, 2011, 2015, 2017\\
+ Philip Hirschhorn\\
+ All rights reserved}
+
+\date{\docdate}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{center}
+ \small
+ This is the user's guide for version~\docversion{} of the
+ \verb"exam" document class.
+\end{center}
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\section{Introduction}
+
+The file \verb"exam.cls" provides the \verb"exam" document class,
+which attempts to make it easy for even a \LaTeX{} novice to prepare
+exams. Specifically, \verb"exam.cls" sets the page layout so that
+there are one inch margins\index{margins} all around (no matter what
+size paper you're using) and provides commands that make it easy to
+format questions, create flexible headers and footers, change the
+margins, and create grading tables. In more detail:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item The class will automatically format and number the questions,
+ parts of questions, subparts of parts, and subsubparts of subparts
+ (see sections \ref{sec:Questions} and~\ref{sec:parts}).
+\item You can include the point value\index{points} of each question
+ (or part, or subpart, or subsubpart), with your choice of having the
+ point values printed at the beginning of the text of the question,
+ opposite that in the left margin, opposite that in the right margin,
+ or in the right margin opposite the end of the question (see
+ section~\ref{sec:points}).
+\item The class will add up the total points for each question (and
+ all of its parts, subparts, and subsubparts) and the total
+ points\index{points!total} on each page, and make those totals
+ available in macros (see sections \ref{sec:addup},
+ \ref{sec:pointsofq} and~\ref{sec:pointsonp}).
+\item You can have the class print a grading table, indexed either by
+ question number or by page number (see
+ section~\ref{sec:GradeTables}).
+\item You specify the header in three parts: One part to be left
+ justified, one part to be centered, and one part to be right
+ justified, and one or all of these can be omitted (see
+ section~\ref{sec:header}).
+\item The footer is also specified in three parts: Left justified,
+ centered, and right justified (see section~\ref{sec:footer}).
+\item The header and footer for the first page can be different from
+ the ones used on other pages (see sections \ref{sec:runningheader},
+ \ref{sec:lhead}, \ref{sec:runningfooter}, and \ref{sec:lfoot}).
+\item Both headers and footers can contain more than one line. To
+ accommodate headers and footers with several lines, simple commands
+ are provided to enlarge the part of the page devoted to the header
+ and/or footer, and these commands can give one amount of space on
+ the first page and a different amount of space on all other pages
+ (see section~\ref{sec:extra-room}).
+\item Macros are defined to enable you to state the total number of
+ pages in the exam (see section~\ref{sec:numpages}) and to change the
+ header and/or footer that appears on the last page of the exam (see
+ section~\ref{sec:lastpage}).
+\item Macros are defined so that the headers and footers can vary
+ depending on whether the current page begins a new question or
+ continues a question that started on an earlier page (and, if one
+ continues onto the current page, to say what the number of that
+ question is). Macros are also defined so that the headers and
+ footers can vary depending on whether a question is complete on the
+ current page or continues on to the next page (and, if one
+ continues, to say what the number of that question is) (see
+ section~\ref{sec:QuesSpan}).
+\item You can have a horizontal rule at the base of the header and/or
+ at the top of the footer (see section~\ref{sec:rules}).
+\item The exam can begin with one or more cover pages, which are
+ numbered separately from the main pages of the exam and which can
+ have headers and footers different from the ones in the main pages
+ of the exam (see section~\ref{sec:coverpages}).
+\item You can include solutions in your \LaTeX{} file and have these
+ solutions either printed or ignored (or replaced automatically by
+ space in which the students can write their answers) depending on a
+ single command (see section~\ref{sec:solutions},
+ section~\ref{sec:CorrectChoice}, and section~\ref{sec:AnsShortAns}).
+\end{itemize}
+
+The latest version of \verb"exam.cls" (possibly a
+%
+beta\index{beta test} test version) should always be available at
+\verb"http://www-math.mit.edu/~psh/"\index{web page}.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{License}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+ %
+ \index{Latex Project Public License@\LaTeX{} Project Public License}
+ %
+ conditions of the \LaTeX{} Project Public
+ License\index{license},\index{LPPL} either version~1.3 of this
+ license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
+ of this license is in \verb"http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt"
+ and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of \LaTeX{}
+ version 2003/12/01 or later.
+\item This work has the LPPL maintenance status ``author-maintained''.
+\item This work consists of the files \verb"exam.cls" and
+ \verb"examdoc.tex".
+\end{itemize}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\section{Simple instructions for a basic exam}
+\label{sec:Basic}
+
+Producing a basic exam with the \texttt{exam} document class is fairly
+easy. After you learn to do that, you can read the parts of this
+user's guide that describe how to customize whatever you want to
+change.
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{The \texttt{\bs documentclass} command}
+\label{sec:BasicDocumentclass}
+
+To use the \texttt{exam} document class, your \verb"\documentclass"
+command should be\indc{documentclass}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\documentclass[addpoints]{exam}"
+\end{center}
+or, if you want to use 12~point type,
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\documentclass[addpoints,12pt]{exam}"
+\end{center}
+There are other options; for the full story, see
+section~\ref{sec:Documentclass}.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Asking for the student's name}
+\label{sec:BasicName}
+
+If you'll be leaving space for the answers on the question pages (see
+sections~\ref{sec:BasicSpace} and \ref{sec:LeaveSpace}), then you'll
+probably also want to leave space for the student's name%
+\index{name}\index{student's name}. If you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \fbox{\fbox{\parbox{5.5in}{\centering
+ Answer the questions in the spaces provided on the
+ question sheets. If you run out of room for an answer,
+ continue on the back of the page.}}}
+\end{center}
+
+\vspace{0.1in}
+
+\makebox[\textwidth]{Name and section:\enspace\hrulefill}
+
+\vspace{0.2in}
+
+\makebox[\textwidth]{Instructor's name:\enspace\hrulefill}
+\end{verbatim}
+after the \verb"\begin{document}" command and before the
+\verb"\begin{questions}" command (see section~\ref{sec:Questions}),
+then you'll get\\
+\noindent
+\parbox{\textwidth}{
+\begin{center}
+ \fbox{\fbox{\parbox{5.5in}{\centering
+ Answer the questions in the spaces provided on the
+ question sheets. If you run out of room for an answer,
+ continue on the back of the page.}}}
+\end{center}
+
+\vspace{0.1in}
+
+\makebox[\textwidth]{Name and section:\enspace\hrulefill}
+
+\vspace{0.2in}
+
+\makebox[\textwidth]{Instructor's name:\enspace\hrulefill}
+}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Asking questions}
+\label{sec:BasicQuestions}
+
+Once you've typed \verb"\begin{document}" and (if the students will be
+writing their answers on the question pages) asked for the student's
+name (see section~\ref{sec:BasicName}), you can list the questions
+on the exam in a \texttt{questions} environment. You begin each
+question with a \verb"\question"\indc{question} command, which is
+optionally followed by a number of points inside of square brackets.
+For example, if you type
+%
+\index{questions environment}\index{environment!questions}
+\indt{questions}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+
+\question[10]
+Why is there air?
+
+\question[15]
+
+How much wood would a woodchuck chuck if a woodchuck could chuck
+wood?
+
+\question[10] Compute $\displaystyle\int_0^1 x^2 \, dx$.
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+
+\question[10]
+Why is there air?
+
+\question[15]
+
+How much wood would a woodchuck chuck if a woodchuck could chuck
+wood?
+
+\question[10] Compute $\displaystyle\int_0^1 x^2 \, dx$.
+\end{questions}
+
+\bigskip
+
+As the above example illustrates, you can leave blank lines
+%
+\index{blank lines} between the \verb"\question" command and the
+actual beginning of the question, or before the first \verb"\question"
+command in the environment, and they will be ignored. The point
+values are entirely optional; if you omit the point values, you should
+also omit the square brackets containing them.
+
+If you give the command \verb"\marksnotpoints"\indc{marksnotpoints},
+then the words ``point'' and ``points'' will be replaced by the words
+``mark'' and ``marks''. There are many other customizations possible
+for the points, including using a different language, changing the way
+the points are printed, and by having them printed in one of the
+margins. For the full story, see section~\ref{sec:points}.
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Questions with parts, and subparts, and subsubparts}
+\label{sec:BasicParts}
+
+If you want to create a question with parts, you use a
+\texttt{parts}\indt{parts} environment and begin each part with the
+command \verb"\part"\indc{part}. The \texttt{parts} environment can
+be at the beginning of a question or after some text that begins the
+question. (There are also \texttt{subparts} and \texttt{subsubparts}
+environments; for the full details, see section~\ref{sec:parts}.) For
+example, if you type
+%
+\index{parts environment}\index{environment!parts}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+\question[10]
+Why is there air?
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part[5]
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+
+\part[5]
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\end{parts}
+
+\question[20]
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+Define the universe. Give three examples.
+
+\part
+If the universe were to end, how would you know?
+
+\end{parts}
+
+
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\question[10]
+Why is there air?
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part[5]
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+
+\part[5]
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\end{parts}
+
+\question[20]
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+Define the universe. Give three examples.
+
+\part
+If the universe were to end, how would you know?
+
+\end{parts}
+
+
+\end{questions}
+
+\bigskip
+
+The above example illustrates several things:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Parts of a question should be put into a
+ \verb"parts"\indt{parts}\index{parts environment}%
+ \index{environment!parts} environment.
+\item If a question begins with a \verb"parts" environment, then the
+ first part will appear on the same line with the question number.
+\item You can leave blank
+ %
+ lines\index{blank lines} before and after the \verb"\part" command,
+ and they will be ignored.
+\item You can assign points either to the question or to the parts of
+ a question.
+\end{itemize}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Leaving space for the answers}
+\label{sec:BasicSpace}
+\index{space!for answers}
+\index{answer space}
+
+To leave blank space after a question you use the \verb"\vspace"
+command, and you end a page with the \verb"\newpage" command. For
+example, if you wanted to leave 3~inches of space after the first
+question and 2~inches of space after each of the parts of the second
+question, your \texttt{questions} environment would contain the
+following:
+%
+\index{blank space}\index{space!blank}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\question[10]
+Why is there air?
+
+\vspace{3in}
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part[5]
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+\vspace{2in}
+
+\part[5]
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\vspace{2in}
+\end{parts}
+\newpage
+\end{verbatim}
+If you want to equally distribute the space on a page among several
+questions (or parts, or subparts, or subsubparts), you should
+type\indc{stretch}\index{space!allocating}
+%
+\index{allocating space}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\vspace{\stretch{1}}"
+\end{center}
+after each of the questions (or parts, etc.\@) and end the page with
+\verb"\newpage". If you'd like one of those questions to receive
+twice as much space as each of the others, then follow that one
+question with \verb"\vspace{\stretch{2}}" and follow each of the
+others with \verb"\vspace{\stretch{1}}". (You can use any decimal
+number for the \verb"\stretch" value. For example,
+\verb"\vspace{\stretch{1.5}}" will allocate 1.5 times the amount of
+space allocated by \verb"\vspace{\stretch{1}}".)
+
+In addition to leaving blank space, it's also possible to leave lined
+space, dotted lined space, space printed with a grid, or an empty box.
+For the full story, see section~\ref{sec:LeaveSpace}.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Headers and footers}
+\label{sec:BasicHeadFoot}
+\index{header|(}
+\index{footer|(}
+
+To produce headers and footers, you give the command\indc{pagestyle}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pagestyle{headandfoot}"
+\end{center}
+in the preamble (i.e., after the \verb"\documentclass" command and
+before the \verb"\begin{document}" command), followed by the commands
+that say what will be in the headers and footers. Headers and
+footers each have three parts: One part on the left, one centered
+part, and one part on the right, and any of these can be empty.
+
+The headers and footers are determined by the commands%
+\indc{firstpageheader}\indc{firstpagefooter}\indc{firstpageheadrule}%
+\indc{firstpagefootrule}\indc{runningheader}\indc{runningfooter}%
+\indc{runningheadrule}\indc{runningfootrule}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l}
+ \verb"\firstpageheader"& for the header on the first page,\\
+ \verb"\firstpagefooter"& for the footer on the first page,\\
+ \verb"\firstpageheadrule"& to put a horizontal rule in the head of
+ the first page,\\
+ \verb"\firstpagefootrule"& to put a horizontal rule in the foot of
+ the first page,\\[0.5ex]
+ \verb"\runningheader"& for the header after the first page,\\
+ \verb"\runningfooter"& for the footer after the first page\\
+ \verb"\runningheadrule"& to put a horizontal rule in the head
+ after the first page, and\\
+ \verb"\runningfootrule"& to put a horizontal rule in the foot
+ after the first page.\\
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+For example, to have the header
+%
+\samplehead{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+%
+on the first page, the header
+%
+\samplehead{Math 115}{First Exam, Page 2 of 5}{July 4, 1776}{\hrule}
+%
+on all pages after the first, and no footer on any page, give the
+commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\runningheadrule
+\firstpageheader{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}
+\runningheader{Math 115}
+ {First Exam, Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+ {July 4, 1776}
+\firstpagefooter{}{}{}
+\runningfooter{}{}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+For another example, to have the header
+%
+\samplehead{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+%
+on the first page, no header on the pages after the first, no footer
+on the first page, and the footer
+%
+\samplefoot{\hrule}{Math 115}{First Exam}{Page 2 of 5}
+%
+on all pages after the first, give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\firstpageheader{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}
+\runningheader{}{}{}
+\firstpagefooter{}{}{}
+\runningfooter{Math 115}{First Exam}{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\runningfootrule
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Sections~\ref{sec:beginexamples} through \ref{sec:endexamples} contain
+many other examples of headers and footers, and the full explanation
+of the commands for headers and footers is in
+sections~\ref{sec:pagestyle}--\ref{sec:QuesSpan}.
+
+\index{header|)}
+\index{footer|)}
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\section{The \texttt{\bs documentclass} command}
+\label{sec:Documentclass}
+
+To use the \verb"exam" document class, you should specify \verb"exam"
+as the required argument to your
+\verb"\documentclass"\indc{documentclass}
+command, as in
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\documentclass{exam}"
+\end{center}
+or, e.g., if you want to use 12~point type,
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\documentclass[12pt]{exam}"
+\end{center}
+There are two possible optional arguments that are specific to the
+\verb"exam" document class:
+\verb"addpoints"\indcsub{documentclass}{options} and \verb"solutions".
+Most documents that use the \verb"exam" document class should use the
+option \verb"addpoints" (see section~\ref{sec:addpoints}); the option
+\verb"answers" is used when you want to print solutions to the
+questions (see section~\ref{sec:answers}).
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{The option \texttt{addpoints}}
+\label{sec:addpoints}
+
+The \verb"\documentclass" option
+\verb"addpoints"\indt{addpoints}\indcsub{documentclass}{options}, used
+as in
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\documentclass[addpoints]{exam}"
+\end{center}
+or
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\documentclass[12pt,addpoints]{exam}"
+\end{center}
+enables the commands that add up the points (see sections
+\ref{sec:addup}, \ref{sec:Count}, \ref{sec:pointsofq},
+and~\ref{sec:pointsonp}) and that produce grading tables and point
+tables (see sections \ref{sec:GradeTables} and~\ref{sec:PointTables}).
+This is an option, rather than the default, mainly for the sake of
+maintaining backward compatibility; most documents that use the
+\verb"exam" document class should use this option. The only reason
+\emph{not} to use the \verb"addpoints" option is that this option
+creates an error if you include any words in an argument that assigns
+points to a question (see section~\ref{sec:points}). If
+\verb"addpoints" is not in effect you can put whatever you want in the
+argument for the points, but if \verb"addpoints" \emph{is} in effect
+then the argument that contains the points must contain only digits
+and the command \verb"\half" (see section~\ref{sec:Half}).
+
+You can also turn \verb"addpoints" on and off wherever you like in the
+exam by using the commands\indc{addpoints}\indc{noaddpoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\addpoints"\\
+ \verb"\noaddpoints"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Using the document class option \verb"addpoints" is equivalent to
+giving the command \verb"\addpoints" at the beginning of the exam.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{The option \texttt{answers}}
+\label{sec:answers}
+
+If you will be typing solutions into the exam (see sections
+\ref{sec:solutions}, \ref{sec:CorrectChoice},
+and~\ref{sec:AnsShortAns}) and you'd like the solutions to be printed
+on the next run of \LaTeX, you should include the document class
+option \verb"answers"\indt{answers}\indcsub{documentclass}{options},
+as in
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\documentclass[answers]{exam}"
+\end{center}
+or
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\documentclass[answers,12pt]{exam}"
+\end{center}
+or
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\documentclass[12pt,addpoints,answers]{exam}"
+\end{center}
+Using the document class option \verb"answers" is equivalent to giving
+the command \verb"\printanswers"\indc{printanswers} at the beginning
+of the exam (see section~\ref{sec:solutions}). The effect of this is
+that
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the contents of the environments
+ %
+ \index{solution environment@\texttt{solution} environment}%
+ %
+ \indt{solutionorbox}%
+ \indt{solutionorlines}\indt{solutionordottedlines}%
+ \indt{solutionorgrid}\indt{solutionbox}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"solution",\\
+ \verb"solutionorbox",\\
+ \verb"solutionorlines",\\
+ \verb"solutionordottedlines",\\
+ \verb"solutionorgrid", and\\
+ \verb"solutionbox"
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+ (see section~\ref{sec:solutions}) will be printed,
+\item any choices of a \texttt{choices}\indt{choices},
+ \texttt{oneparchoices}\indt{oneparchoices},
+ \texttt{checkboxes}\indt{checkboxes}, or
+ \texttt{oneparcheckboxes}\indt{oneparcheckboxes} environment (see
+ section~\ref{sec:MulChc}) that are created using a
+ \verb"\CorrectChoice"\indc{CorrectChoice} command (see
+ section~\ref{sec:CorrectChoice}) instead of a
+ \verb"\choice"\indc{choice} command will be printed with emphasis as
+ determined by the argument of the most recent
+ \verb"\CorrectChoiceEmphasis"\indc{CorrectChoiceEmphasis} command
+ (which by default is \verb"\bfseries"), and
+\item any \verb"\answerline"\indc{answerline} commands (see
+ section~\ref{sec:ShortAns})\indcsub{answerline}{optional~argument}
+ that include an optional argument containing the answer (see
+ section~\ref{sec:AnsShortAns}) will have the answer printed on the
+ answer line.
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\section{Questions and points}
+\label{sec:QuestionsPoints}
+
+To create questions, you use a \verb"questions"\indt{questions}
+%
+environment\index{questions environment}\index{environment!questions}
+(see section~\ref{sec:Questions}); each question is begun with a
+\verb"\question"\indc{question} command, which takes an optional
+argument to assign some number of points\index{points} to the question
+(see section~\ref{sec:points}). The questions are numbered
+automatically. Point values can include half points (see
+section~\ref{sec:Half}).
+
+If you want a question to have several parts, you use a
+%
+\verb"parts"\indt{parts}%
+\index{parts environment}\index{environment!parts} environment (see
+section~\ref{sec:parts}); each part is begun with a
+\verb"\part"\indc{part} command, which takes an optional argument to
+assign some number of points to the part (see
+section~\ref{sec:points}). The parts are numbered automatically.
+Similarly, parts can have subparts, and subparts can have subsubparts
+(see section~\ref{sec:parts}).
+
+The points for a question (or part, or subpart, or subsubpart) appear
+by default at the beginning of the question (or part, etc.), but there
+are commands to have the points appear instead in either the left
+margin or in the right margin (see section~\ref{sec:whereprint} and
+section~\ref{sec:DrpPts}). The formatting of the points can also be
+customized (see sections \ref{sec:Boxed}, \ref{sec:pointname},
+\ref{sec:margins}, and~\ref{sec:pointformat}). It's also possible to
+have questions (or parts, etc.) that are worth ``bonus points'', which
+are added up separately from the non-bonus points (see
+section~\ref{sec:Bonus}).
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Questions}
+\label{sec:Questions}
+
+To type the questions on the exam you use the
+%
+\verb"questions"\indt{questions}\index{questions environment}%
+\index{environment!questions} environment. Each question is then
+begun with the command \verb"\question"\indc{question}, and the
+questions are numbered automatically.
+
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+
+\question
+Why is there air?
+
+\question
+
+How much wood would a woodchuck chuck if a woodchuck could chuck
+wood?
+
+\question Compute $\displaystyle\int_0^1 x^2 \, dx$.
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+
+\question
+Why is there air?
+
+\question
+
+How much wood would a woodchuck chuck if a woodchuck could chuck
+wood?
+
+\question Compute $\displaystyle\int_0^1 x^2 \, dx$.
+\end{questions}
+
+\bigskip
+
+As the above example illustrates, you can leave blank lines
+%
+\index{blank lines} between the \verb"\question" command and the
+actual beginning of the question, or before the first \verb"\question"
+command in the environment, and they will be ignored.
+
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Questions with parts and subparts (and subsubparts)}
+\label{sec:parts}
+
+If you want a question to have several parts, then you use the
+%
+\verb"parts"\indt{parts}\index{parts environment}%
+\index{environment!parts} environment. For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+Why is there air?
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+
+\part
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\end{parts}
+
+\question
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+Define the universe. Give three examples.
+
+\part
+If the universe were to end, how would you know?
+
+\end{parts}
+
+
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+Why is there air?
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+
+\part
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\end{parts}
+
+\question
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+Define the universe. Give three examples.
+
+\part
+If the universe were to end, how would you know?
+
+\end{parts}
+
+
+\end{questions}
+
+\bigskip
+
+The above example illustrates several things:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Parts of a question should be put into a
+ \verb"parts"\indt{parts}\index{parts environment}%
+ \index{environment!parts} environment.
+\item If a question begins with a \verb"parts" environment, then the
+ first part will appear on the same line with the question number.
+\item You can leave blank
+ %
+ lines\index{blank lines} before and after the \verb"\part" command,
+ and they will be ignored.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\bigskip
+
+There is also a \verb"subparts"\indt{subparts}%
+\index{subparts environment}\index{environment!subparts} environment,
+and even a \verb"subsubparts"\indt{subsubparts}%
+\index{subsubparts environment}\index{environment!subsubparts}
+environment, and they work just as you would expect. For example, if
+you type\indc{subpart}\indc{subsubpart}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+What do you do with a drunken sailor?
+
+\part
+Is your answer different if it is before noon?
+
+\end{parts}
+
+\question
+This is the second question.
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+This is a part.
+
+\part
+This is also a part.
+
+\begin{subparts}
+\subpart
+This is a subpart.
+
+\subpart
+This is a periscope.
+
+\subpart
+This is a pair of diving planes.
+
+\subpart
+\begin{subsubparts}
+\subsubpart
+This is a subsubpart.
+
+\subsubpart
+The lower surface of a diving plane?
+
+\subsubpart
+The ocean floor, perhaps?
+
+\end{subsubparts}
+\end{subparts}
+
+\part
+It's sad to be apart.
+
+\end{parts}
+
+\question
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+\begin{subparts}
+\subpart
+This is a subpart.
+
+\subpart
+This is another subpart.
+\end{subparts}
+\part
+This is another part.
+
+\end{parts}
+
+
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+What do you do with a drunken sailor?
+
+\part
+Is your answer different if it is before noon?
+
+\end{parts}
+
+\question
+This is the second question.
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+This is a part.
+
+\part
+This is also a part.
+
+\begin{subparts}
+\subpart
+This is a subpart.
+
+\subpart
+This is a periscope.
+
+\subpart
+This is a pair of diving planes.
+
+\subpart
+\begin{subsubparts}
+\subsubpart
+This is a subsubpart.
+
+\subsubpart
+The lower surface of a diving plane?
+
+\subsubpart
+The ocean floor, perhaps?
+
+\end{subsubparts}
+\end{subparts}
+
+\part
+It's sad to be apart.
+
+\end{parts}
+
+\question
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+\begin{subparts}
+\subpart
+This is a subpart.
+
+\subpart
+This is another subpart.
+\end{subparts}
+\part
+This is another part.
+
+\end{parts}
+
+
+\end{questions}
+
+The numbers and letters used to number questions, parts, subparts, and
+subsubparts can be customized; see section~\ref{sec:CustNumb}.
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Point values for the questions}
+\label{sec:points}
+\indcsub{question}{optional argument}
+\indcsub{part}{optional argument}
+\indcsub{subpart}{optional argument}
+\indcsub{subsubpart}{optional argument}
+\index{points|(}
+
+Each of the commands \verb"\question", \verb"\part", \verb"\subpart",
+and \verb"\subsubpart" takes an optional argument, which is the number
+of points for that question, part, subpart, or subsubpart. The
+default setup is that
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the point value is printed at the beginning of the question (or
+ part, or subpart, or subsubpart) (this can be changed to printing in
+ either the left or right margins on the first line of the question
+ or in the right margin at the end of the question; see
+ section~\ref{sec:whereprint} and section~\ref{sec:DrpPts}), and
+\item the point value is enclosed in parentheses (this can be changed
+ to either square brackets or a box; see section~\ref{sec:Boxed}).
+\end{itemize}
+Both of these things can be further customized; see
+section~\ref{sec:qformat} and section~\ref{sec:pointformat}.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Where the points will be printed}
+\label{sec:whereprint}
+\index{points!where printed|(}
+
+The default is that the point value will be inserted at the beginning
+of the question (or part, or subpart, or subsubpart) in parentheses,
+but
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the command \verb"\pointsinmargin"\indc{pointsinmargin} (or,
+ equivalently, the command
+ \verb"\pointsinleftmargin"\indc{pointsinleftmargin}) will cause the
+ point values to be set in the left margin,
+\item the command
+ \verb"\pointsinrightmargin"\indc{pointsinrightmargin} will cause the
+ point values to be set in the right margin,
+\item the command
+ \verb"\pointstwosided"\indc{pointstwosided} will cause the
+ point values to be set
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item in the right margin on odd numbered pages and
+ \item in the left margin on even numbered pages,
+ \end{itemize}
+\item the command
+ \verb"\pointstwosidedreversed"\indc{pointstwosidedreversed} will
+ cause the point values to be set
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item in the left margin on odd numbered pages and
+ \item in the right margin on even numbered pages, and
+ \end{itemize}
+\item the commands \verb"\nopointsinmargin"\indc{nopointsinmargin} and
+ \verb"\nopointsinrightmargin"\indc{nopointsinrightmargin} are
+ equivalent, and either of them will revert to the default situation.
+\end{itemize}
+All of these print the point values on the first line of the question
+(or part, or subpart, or subsubpart). There is also a way to print
+the point values on the \emph{last} line of the question (or part,
+etc.); for this, see section~\ref{sec:DrpPts}.
+
+\medbreak
+
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+\question[20]
+Why is there air?
+
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\end{parts}
+
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then, with the default setup, you'll get
+\nopointsinmargin
+\begin{questions}
+\question[20]
+Why is there air?
+
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\end{parts}
+
+\end{questions}
+(To change the word ``points'', see the commands described in
+section~\ref{sec:pointname}.)
+
+\bigskip If you give the command
+\verb"\pointsinmargin"\indc{pointsinmargin} (or, equivalently,
+\verb"\pointsinleftmargin"\indc{pointsinleftmargin}), then the above input
+will produce instead \pointsinmargin
+\begin{questions}
+\question[20]
+Why is there air?
+
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\end{parts}
+
+\end{questions}
+(To have a word (e.g., ``points'', or ``\%'') inside the parentheses
+with the point values, see the
+\verb"\marginpointname"\indc{marginpointname} command in
+section~\ref{sec:pointname}.)
+
+
+\bigskip
+
+If you give the command
+\verb"\pointsinrightmargin"\indc{pointsinrightmargin}, then the above
+input will produce instead
+%
+\pointsinrightmargin
+\begin{questions}
+\question[20]
+Why is there air?
+
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\end{parts}
+
+\end{questions}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Printing the points at the end of the question}
+\label{sec:DrpPts}
+\index{points!at the end of the question|(}
+\indcstart{pointsdroppedatright}
+\indcstart{droppoints}
+
+
+Instead of having the point value of a question (or part, or subpart,
+or subsubpart) printed on the first line of a question, you can have
+it printed in the right margin opposite the \emph{last} line, or even
+opposite a blank line following the paragraph. This is done with the
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pointsdroppedatright"
+ \quad and \quad
+ \verb"\droppoints"
+\end{center}
+commands.
+
+If you give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pointsdroppedatright"
+\end{center}
+then point values are not printed until you give the command
+\verb"\droppoints" (and they're not printed at all if you don't give
+the command \verb"\droppoints"). The only exception to this rule is
+that if you've given a \verb"\qformat"\indc{qformat} command (see
+section~\ref{sec:qformat}), then question number lines are printed as
+specified by the argument to the \verb"\qformat" command even if you
+have given the command
+\verb"\pointsdroppedatright"
+
+The command \verb"\droppoints" should be given only at the end of a
+paragraph or between paragraphs; if you give it within a paragraph, it
+causes the paragraph to end. \verb"\droppoints" prints the point
+value in the right margin, formatted as it is when you give the
+command \verb"\pointsinrightmargin"\indc{pointsinrightmargin}, except
+that the points appear opposite the last line of the paragraph (or, if
+the command \verb"\droppoints" is given between paragraphs, then
+additional vertical space is left between the paragraphs and the
+points are printed opposite the blank space). The formatting can be
+changed by giving the commands
+\verb"\bracketedpoints"\indc{bracketedpoints},
+\verb"\boxedpoints"\indc{boxedpoints}, or
+\verb"\marginpointname"\indc{marginpointname} (see
+section~\ref{sec:pointname}) just as if \verb"\pointsinrightmargin"
+were in effect. The command \verb"\droppoints" actually works this
+way even if one of the commands
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\nopointsinmargin",\quad \verb"\pointsinmargin",\quad or\quad
+ \verb"\pointsinrightmargin"
+\end{center}
+is in effect, but if you use it that way the points will appear twice
+on the page, which is probably not what you want.
+
+
+For example, if you give the command \verb"\pointsdroppedatright" and
+then type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+\question[10]
+Describe the implications of the Michelson-Morley ink drop experiment
+for the use of punctuation marks such as colons and semicolons that
+require multiple drops of ink.
+\droppoints
+
+\question[10]
+Prove that the second dual of a finite dimensional real vector space
+is naturally isomorphic to the given vector space, except when the
+weapon chosen is a single shot pistol.\droppoints
+
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\pointsdroppedatright
+\begin{questions}
+\question[10]
+Describe the implications of the Michelson-Morley ink drop experiment
+for the use of punctuation marks such as colons and semicolons that
+require multiple drops of ink.
+\droppoints
+
+\question[10]
+Prove that the second dual of a finite dimensional real vector space
+is naturally isomorphic to the given vector space, except when the
+weapon chosen is a single shot pistol.\droppoints
+
+\end{questions}
+and if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+\question[10]
+Describe the implications of the Michelson-Morley ink drop experiment
+for the use of punctuation marks such as colons and semicolons that
+require multiple drops of ink.
+
+\droppoints
+
+\question[10]
+Prove that the second dual of a finite dimensional real vector space
+is naturally isomorphic to the given vector space, except when the
+weapon chosen is a single shot pistol.
+
+\droppoints
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\question[10]
+Describe the implications of the Michelson-Morley ink drop experiment
+for the use of punctuation marks such as colons and semicolons that
+require multiple drops of ink.
+
+\droppoints
+
+\question[10]
+Prove that the second dual of a finite dimensional real vector space
+is naturally isomorphic to the given vector space, except when the
+weapon chosen is a single shot pistol.
+
+\droppoints
+\end{questions}
+\nopointsinmargin
+
+\indcstop{droppoints}
+\indcstop{pointsdroppedatright}
+\index{points!at the end of the question|)}
+\index{points!where printed|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Half points}
+\label{sec:Half}
+\index{points!half|(}
+\index{half points|(}
+
+The point values of questions, parts, subparts, and subsubparts can
+include half points. To specify half points, you either
+type\indc{half}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\half"
+\end{center}
+immediately following the integer part of the point value or just type
+\verb"\half" as the entire point value. That is, the valid point
+values and their (default) printed appearances are:\indc{half}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{@{\extracolsep{0.1in}}rccccccc}
+ Typed:& \verb"0"& \verb"\half"& \verb"1"& \verb"1\half"& \verb"2"&
+ \verb"2\half"& $\cdots$\\[1ex]
+ Printed:& 0& \half& 1& 1\half& 2& 2\half& $\cdots$
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+If you prefer, you can cause the fraction \half{} to be printed as
+\makeatletter
+\horiz@half.
+\makeatother
+To do this, you give the
+command\indc{usehorizontalhalf}%
+\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\half}}%
+\indcsub{half}{customization}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\usehorizontalhalf"
+\end{center}
+after which the printed appearance of point values will be
+\usehorizontalhalf
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{@{\extracolsep{0.1in}}rccccccc}
+ Typed:& \verb"0"& \verb"\half"& \verb"1"& \verb"1\half"& \verb"2"&
+ \verb"2\half"& $\cdots$\\[1ex]
+ Printed:& 0& \half& 1& 1\half& 2& 2\half& $\cdots$
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+If you want to return to using the default appearance, you can do that
+by giving the command\indc{useslantedhalf}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\useslantedhalf"
+\end{center}
+\useslantedhalf
+
+\index{half points|)}
+\index{points!half|)}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Surrounding the points: Parentheses, brackets, or a box}
+\label{sec:Boxed}
+\index{customization!points|(}
+\index{points!customization|(}
+
+If you prefer having the points enclosed in brackets instead of in
+parentheses, give the command\indc{bracketedpoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\bracketedpoints"
+\end{center}
+For example, if you give the command \verb"\bracketedpoints", then the
+questions typed above will produce
+\nopointsinmargin
+\bracketedpoints
+\begin{questions}
+\question[20]
+Why is there air?
+
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\end{parts}
+
+\end{questions}
+
+
+If you prefer having the points enclosed in a box instead of in
+parentheses, give the command\indc{boxedpoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\boxedpoints"
+\end{center}
+For example, if you give the command \verb"\boxedpoints", then the
+questions typed above will produce
+\nopointsinmargin
+\boxedpoints
+\begin{questions}
+\question[20]
+Why is there air?
+
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\end{parts}
+
+\end{questions}
+If you give the commands \verb"\boxedpoints"\indc{boxedpoints} and
+\verb"\pointsinmargin"\indc{pointsinmargin}, then the above questions
+will produce
+%
+\boxedpoints \pointsinmargin
+\begin{questions}
+\question[20]
+Why is there air?
+
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\end{parts}
+
+\end{questions}
+If you give the commands \verb"\bracketedpoints"\indc{bracketedpoints}
+and \verb"\pointsinrightmargin"\indc{pointsinrightmargin}, then the
+above questions will produce
+%
+\bracketedpoints
+\pointsinrightmargin
+\begin{questions}
+\question[20]
+Why is there air?
+
+
+\question
+What if there were no air?
+
+\begin{parts}
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the balloon industry.
+
+\part[10]
+Describe the effect on the aircraft industry.
+\end{parts}
+
+\end{questions}
+Other combinations of these commands will produce similar effects.
+
+If you want to switch back and forth between formats during the exam,
+you can do so by giving one of the
+commands\indc{boxedpoints}\indc{bracketedpoints}\indc{noboxedpoints}
+\indc{nobracketedpoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\boxedpoints"\\
+ \verb"\bracketedpoints"\\
+ \verb"\noboxedpoints"\\
+ \verb"\nobracketedpoints"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+whenever you want to switch. (The commands
+\verb"\nobracketedpoints" and \verb"\noboxedpoints" are equivalent;
+they both return to the default of putting parentheses around the
+points.)
+
+If you want some text (e.g., `` points'', or ``\%'') automatically
+inserted along with the point values when using either
+\verb"\pointsinmargin", \verb"\pointsinrightmargin",
+\verb"\pointstwosided", or \verb"\pointstwosidedreversed", see the
+command \verb"\marginpointname" in section~\ref{sec:pointname}.
+
+
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Using a substitute for the word ``points''}
+\label{sec:pointname}
+\index{points!substitute words|(}
+\index{points!language|(}
+
+With the default setup, the number of points is inserted before the
+text of the question followed by a single space and the word ``point''
+if the number of points is either \half{} or 1 and by the word
+``points'' otherwise. That is, the default is
+\verb"\nopointsinmargin"\indc{nopointsinmargin} and
+\verb"\noboxedpoints"\indc{noboxedpoints} (see sections
+\ref{sec:whereprint} and \ref{sec:Boxed}), and if you type
+%
+\nopointsinmargin
+\noboxedpoints
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question[1]
+ This is a short question.
+
+ \question[5]
+ This is a longer question, requiring more thought.
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question[1]
+ This is a short question.
+
+ \question[5]
+ This is a longer question, requiring more thought.
+\end{questions}
+The way this is achieved is:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item There is a command\indc{points}
+ \begin{center}
+ \verb"\points"
+ \end{center}
+ whose default definition expands to the word `point' if the number
+ of points is either \half{} or 1 and to `points' otherwise. (This
+ behavior can be modified by the command
+ \verb"\pointpoints"\indc{pointpoints}; see below.)
+\item There is a command\indc{pointname}
+ \begin{center}
+ \verb"\pointname{Text}"
+ \end{center}
+ that causes `Text' to be inserted following the number of points of
+ a question, part, subpart, or subsubpart. The default setup is the
+ result of the command\indc{pointname}\indc{points}
+ \begin{center}
+ \verb"\pointname{ \points}"
+ \end{center}
+ (Note the single space before the command \verb"\points".)
+\end{itemize}
+
+There is also a command\indc{pointpoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pointpoints{SingularText}{PluralText}"
+\end{center}
+that changes the behavior of the \verb"\points" command so that it
+expands to `SingularText' if the number of points is \half{} or 1 and
+to `PluralText' otherwise. (The default is the result of the command
+\verb"\pointpoints{point}{points}"\indc{pointpoints}.) Thus, if you
+give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pointpoints{Punkt}{Punkte}"
+\end{center}
+then typing the questions above would result in
+\pointpoints{Punkt}{Punkte}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question[1]
+ This is a short question.
+
+ \question[5]
+ This is a longer question, requiring more thought.
+\end{questions}
+There is also a command\indc{marksnotpoints}\index{marks}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\marksnotpoints"
+\end{center}
+that is equivalent to the two
+commands\indc{pointpoints}\indc{bonuspointpoints}\index{marks}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\pointpoints{mark}{marks}"\\
+ \verb"\bonuspointpoints{mark (bonus)}{marks (bonus)}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+(the command \verb"\bonuspointpoints" is described in
+section~\ref{sec:Bonus}). That command would cause the above
+questions to be printed as
+%
+\pointpoints{mark}{marks}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question[1]
+ This is a short question.
+
+ \question[5]
+ This is a longer question, requiring more thought.
+\end{questions}
+
+\bigskip
+
+For another example, if you give the command\indc{pointname}
+\begin{center}
+\verb"\pointname{\%}"
+\end{center}
+then the above questions would be printed as
+%
+\pointname{\%}
+\nopointsinmargin
+\noboxedpoints
+\begin{questions}
+ \question[1]
+ This is a short question.
+
+ \question[5]
+ This is a longer question, requiring more thought.
+\end{questions}
+\pointname{ \points}
+
+
+\subsubsection*{Using \texttt{\char`\\marginpointname}}
+
+Similarly, the command \verb"\marginpointname"\indc{marginpointname}
+can be used to affect the text set with the number of points when
+\verb"\pointsinmargin"\indc{pointsinmargin} or
+\verb"\pointsinrightmargin"\indc{pointsinrightmargin} is in effect.
+For example, if you give the commands
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\pointsinmargin"\\
+ \verb"\marginpointname{\%}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+and then type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\question[25]
+Where, oh where, has my little dog gone?
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\pointsinmargin
+\noboxedpoints
+\marginpointname{\%}
+\begin{questions}
+\question[25]
+Where, oh where, has my little dog gone?
+\end{questions}
+unless, e.g., you've also given the command
+\verb"\boxedpoints"\indc{boxedpoints} (see section~\ref{sec:Boxed}),
+in which case you'll get
+%
+\pointsinmargin
+\boxedpoints
+\marginpointname{\%}
+\begin{questions}
+\question[25]
+Where, oh where, has my little dog gone?
+\end{questions}
+If you give the commands
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\marksnotpoints"\\
+ \verb"\marginpointname{ \points}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+then the above will print
+\noboxedpoints
+\marginpointname{ \points}
+\marksnotpoints
+\begin{questions}
+\question[25]
+Where, oh where, has my little dog gone?
+\end{questions}
+\nopointsinmargin
+\marginpointname{}
+\pointpoints{point}{points}
+\bonuspointpoints{point (bonus)}{points (bonus)}
+
+Using the default is equivalent to giving the
+command\indc{marginpointname}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\marginpointname{}"
+\end{center}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Using \texttt{\bs marginpointname} and enlarging the
+ margins}
+\label{sec:margins}
+
+The default margins are not very large, and so if you use
+\verb"\marginpointname"\indc{marginpointname} (see
+section~\ref{sec:pointname}) to place any words along with the point
+values in the margin, you may run out of room. The solution to this
+problem is to enlarge the margins\index{margins!enlarge} by using the
+\verb"\extrawidth"\indc{extrawidth} command with a negative argument
+to \emph{decrease} the width of the text area, and thus
+\emph{increase} the width of the margins. For example, the commands
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \verb"\extrawidth{-1in}"\\
+ \verb"\marginpointname{ \points}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+will increase each of the left and right margins by one half inch,
+which will easily leave room for the word ``points''. (See
+section~\ref{sec:pagesize} for a discussion of the \verb"\extrawidth"
+command.)
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Completely customizing the points}
+\label{sec:pointformat}
+
+If the customizations described in section~\ref{sec:Boxed} and
+section~\ref{sec:pointname} (using \verb"\bracketedpoints",
+\verb"\boxedpoints", \verb"\pointpoints", \verb"\pointname", and
+\verb"\marginpointname") aren't sufficient, and you don't want to use
+the \verb"\qformat" command to create a customized question number
+line (see section~\ref{sec:qformat}), you can completely customize the
+way the points are printed by using the
+commands\indc{pointformat}\indc{bonuspointformat}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\pointformat"\\
+ \verb"\bonuspointformat"
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+The \verb"\pointformat" command controls the printing of ``regular''
+points (i.e., non-bonus points) and the \verb"\bonuspointformat"
+command controls the printing of bonus points (see
+section~\ref{sec:Bonus}).
+
+Each of the commands \verb"\pointformat" and \verb"\bonuspointformat"
+takes one argument, and that argument is what actually appears on the
+page whether the points are being printed at the beginning of the
+question (the default), in the left margin (because of
+\verb"\pointsinmargin"), in the right margin (because of
+\verb"\pointsinrightmargin"), or dropped in the right margin at the
+end of the question (because of \verb"\pointsdroppedatright"). The
+arguments to \verb"\pointformat" and \verb"\bonuspointformat" should
+contain either the command\indc{thepoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\thepoints"
+\end{center}
+(which for non-bonus points prints the number of points followed by
+the argument to the last \verb"\pointname"\indc{pointname} command and
+for bonus points prints the number of bonus points followed by the
+argument to the last \verb"\bonuspointname"\indc{bonuspointname}
+command; see section~\ref{sec:pointname}) or the
+command\indc{themarginpoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\themarginpoints"
+\end{center}
+(which for non-bonus points prints the number of points followed by
+the argument to the last \verb"\marginpointname"\indc{marginpointname}
+command and for bonus points prints the number of bonus points
+followed by the argument to the last
+\verb"\marginbonuspointname"\indc{marginbonuspointname} command; see
+section~\ref{sec:pointname}). If the argument doesn't contain either
+\verb"\thepoints" or \verb"\themarginpoints", then the number of
+points will not appear.
+
+For example, the command \verb"\bracketedpoints" is equivalent to
+either\indc{bracketedpoints}\indc{pointformat}%
+\indc{bonuspointformat}\indc{thepoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\pointformat{[\thepoints]}"\\
+ \verb"\bonuspointformat{[\thepoints]}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+if the points are being printed at the beginning of the question, or
+\indc{pointformat}\indc{bonuspointformat}\indc{themarginpoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\pointformat{[\themarginpoints]}"\\
+ \verb"\bonuspointformat{[\themarginpoints]}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+if the points are being printed in one of the margins.
+
+For another example, the command \verb"\boxedpoints" is equivalent to
+either\indc{pointformat}\indc{bonuspointformat}\indc{thepoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\pointformat{\fbox{\thepoints}}"\\
+ \verb"\bonuspointformat{\fbox{\thepoints}}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+if the points are being printed at the beginning of the question, or
+\indc{pointformat}\indc{bonuspointformat}\indc{themarginpoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\pointformat{\fbox{\themarginpoints}}"\\
+ \verb"\bonuspointformat{\fbox{\themarginpoints}}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+if the points are being printed in one of the margins.
+
+For another example, the
+commands\indc{marginpointname}\indc{pointsinmargin}\indc{pointformat}%
+\indc{pointsinmargin}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \pointsinmargin
+ \marginpointname{\%}
+ \pointformat{\slshape (\themarginpoints)}
+ \question[3] What is the point?
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce
+\begin{questions}
+ \pointsinmargin
+ \marginpointname{\%}
+ \pointformat{\slshape (\themarginpoints)}
+ \question[3] What is the point?
+\end{questions}
+
+For another example, the
+commands\indc{marginpointname}\indc{pointsinmargin}\indc{pointformat}%
+\indc{pointsinrightmargin}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \pointsinrightmargin
+ \marginpointname{\%}
+ \pointformat{\fbox{\bfseries\boldmath\themarginpoints}}
+ \question[3\half] What is the point?
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce
+\begin{questions}
+ \pointsinrightmargin
+ \marginpointname{\%}
+ \pointformat{\fbox{\bfseries\boldmath\themarginpoints}}
+ \question[3\half] What is the point?
+\end{questions}
+\nopointsinmargin (Note: The commands \verb"\bfseries" and
+\verb"\boldmath"\indc{boldmath} are both needed here because the
+\half{} printed when you use half points is printed in math mode while
+the rest of the points are printed in text mode.)
+
+For another example, the commands\indc{pointformat}\indc{boldmath}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \pointname{}
+ \pointformat{\bfseries\boldmath(Points for this problem: \thepoints)}
+ \question[3\half] What is the point?
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce
+\begin{questions}
+ \pointname{}
+ \pointformat{\bfseries\boldmath(Points for this problem: \thepoints)}
+ \question[3\half] What is the point?
+\end{questions}
+% Put things back to the default situation, so we don't mess up
+% later examples:
+\noboxedpoints
+\nopointsinmargin
+\pointname{ \points}
+
+\index{points!language|)}
+\index{points!substitute words|)}
+\index{points!customization|)}
+\index{customization!points|)}
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Questions that begin with a parts environment}
+\index{questions!that begin with a parts environment}
+\index{points!for both question and part}
+
+If a question begins with a parts environment, then the question
+number and the number of the first part in the parts environment will
+be printed on the same line (see section~\ref{sec:parts}). Thus, if
+points are assigned to both the question and to the first part, both
+of those point values will be printed on the same line. (Note: This
+was not true in versions of the \verb"exam" document class earlier
+than 2.3. In those versions, only the later of the two point values
+would actually be printed.) If \verb"\pointsinmargin" or
+\verb"\pointsinrightmargin" are in effect (see
+section~\ref{sec:whereprint}), then the two point values will be
+printed on top of each other, which is probably not what you want.
+The same problem arises if a part begins with a subparts environment
+or if a subpart begins with a subsubparts environment.
+
+If you want to assign points to both a question and to each part of a
+parts environment, and if the first part will begin on the same line
+as the question, the solution is to either use the default location
+(i.e., \verb"\nopointsinmargin") or to put some of the points in the
+margin and others not. For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \pointsinmargin
+ \noaddpoints
+ \question[10]
+ \begin{parts}
+ \nopointsinmargin
+ \addpoints
+ \part[5] Who put the ``bop'' in the ``bop, sh-bop, sh-bop''?
+ \part[5] Who put the ``ram'' in the ``rama, rama ding-dong''?
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \pointsinmargin
+ \noaddpoints
+ \question[10]
+ \begin{parts}
+ \nopointsinmargin
+ \addpoints
+ \part[5] Who put the ``bop'' in the ``bop, sh-bop, sh-bop''?
+ \part[5] Who put the ``ram'' in the ``rama, rama ding-dong''?
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+
+
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Adding up the points for a question}
+\label{sec:addup}
+\indt{addpoints}
+\indc{addpoints}
+
+If you use the document class option \verb"addpoints" (as in
+\verb"\documentclass[addpoints]{exam}") or give the command
+\verb"\addpoints" (see section~\ref{sec:addpoints}), then you can use
+the command\indc{droptotalpoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\droptotalpoints"
+\end{center}
+to put into the right margin the total number of points for the
+current question (including the points for all parts, subparts, and
+subsubparts). (Section~\ref{sec:adding} describes a different way to
+print the total number of points for a question.) The command
+\verb"\droptotalpoints" should be used only at the end of a paragraph
+or between paragraphs; if you use it within a paragraph, it causes the
+paragraph to end. \verb"\droptotalpoints" prints the total points for
+the current question in the right margin, formatted by default as:
+%
+\par\nobreak\medskip
+\makeatletter
+\leavevmode\nobreak\hfill
+\rlap{%\hskip\rightmargin % Defined by the list environment
+ \hskip\@rightmargin % Defined by exam.cls
+ \hskip-\rightpointsmargin
+ \llap{Total for Question 2: 25}%
+}% rlap
+\makeatother
+\par\medskip\noindent
+%
+(Note: The number of points is followed by the argument to the most
+recently executed \verb"\marginpointname"\indc{marginpointname}
+command (see section~\ref{sec:pointname}), which by default is empty.)
+
+If the current question is worth any bonus points (see
+section~\ref{sec:Bonus}), then those bonus points will not be counted
+by the \verb"\droptotalpoints" command, but they will be counted by
+the\indc{droptotalbonuspoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\droptotalbonuspoints"
+\end{center}
+command, which puts into the right margin the total number of bonus
+points for the current question, formatted by default as:
+\par\nobreak\medskip
+\makeatletter
+\leavevmode\nobreak\hfill
+\rlap{%\hskip\rightmargin % Defined by the list environment
+ \hskip\@rightmargin % Defined by exam.cls
+ \hskip-\rightpointsmargin
+ \llap{Total for Question 2: 10 (bonus)}%
+}% rlap
+\makeatother
+\par\medskip\noindent
+(Note: The number of bonus points is followed by the argument to the
+most recently executed
+\verb"\marginbonuspointname"\indc{marginbonuspointname} command (see
+section~\ref{sec:Bonus}), which by default is `` (bonus)''.)
+
+You can change the format used by the
+\verb"\droptotalpoints"\indc{droptotalpoints} command with
+the\indc{totalformat}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\totalformat"
+\end{center}
+command. It takes one argument, and that argument becomes the command
+to print the total points, right justified a distance of
+\verb"\rightpointsmargin"\indc{rightpointsmargin} from the right edge
+of the paper. The argument can contain the
+command\indc{totalpoints}\indc{thequestion}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \verb"\totalpoints"& to print the number of points, and\\
+ \verb"\thequestion"& to print the question number.
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+(\verb"\totalpoints" expands to
+\verb"\pointsofquestion{\arabic{question}}"\indc{pointsofquestion};
+see section~\ref{sec:pointsofq} for a discussion of the
+\verb"\pointsofquestion" command.) For example, if you give the
+command\indc{totalformat}\indc{thequestion}\indc{totalpoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\totalformat{Question \thequestion: \totalpoints}"
+\end{center}
+then the total number of points will be printed in the format
+%
+\par\nobreak\medskip
+\makeatletter
+\leavevmode\nobreak\hfill
+\rlap{%\hskip\rightmargin % Defined by the list environment
+ \hskip\@rightmargin % Defined by exam.cls
+ \hskip-\rightpointsmargin
+ \llap{Question 2: 25}%
+}% rlap
+\makeatother
+\par\medskip\noindent
+%
+and if you give the command\indc{totalformat}\indc{totalpoints}
+\begin{center}
+\verb"\totalformat{\fbox{Total: \totalpoints}}"
+\end{center}
+then the total number of points will be printed as
+%
+\par\nobreak\medskip
+\makeatletter
+\leavevmode\nobreak\hfill
+\rlap{%\hskip\rightmargin % Defined by the list environment
+ \hskip\@rightmargin % Defined by exam.cls
+ \hskip-\rightpointsmargin
+ \llap{\fbox{Total: 25}}%
+}% rlap
+\makeatother
+\par\medskip\noindent
+
+Thus, if you've given the
+commands\indc{addpoints}\indc{bracketedpoints}\indc{pointsdroppedatright}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\addpoints"\\
+ \verb"\bracketedpoints"\\
+ \verb"\pointsdroppedatright"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+and you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\question
+\begin{parts}
+\part[10]
+In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+\droppoints
+\part[10]
+What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to
+make the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+\droppoints
+\end{parts}
+\droptotalpoints
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\addpoints
+\pointsdroppedatright
+\bracketedpoints
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+\begin{parts}
+\part[10]
+In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+\droppoints
+\part[10]
+What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to
+make the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+\droppoints
+\end{parts}
+ \leavevmode\unskip\nobreak\hfill
+\makeatletter
+ \rlap{\hskip\rightmargin % Defined by the list environment
+ \hskip\@rightmargin % Defined by exam.cls
+ \hskip-\rightpointsmargin
+ \llap{Total for Question 1: 20}%
+ }% rlap
+\makeatother
+ \par
+%\droptotalpoints
+\end{questions}
+\noaddpoints \nopointsinmargin \nobracketedpoints If you've also given
+the command\indc{totalformat}\indc{totalpoints}\indc{thequestion}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\totalformat{Total for Question \thequestion: [\totalpoints]}"
+\end{center}
+then you'll get
+\addpoints
+\pointsdroppedatright
+\bracketedpoints
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+\begin{parts}
+\part[10]
+In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+\droppoints
+\part[10]
+What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to
+make the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+\droppoints
+\end{parts}
+%\droptotalpoints
+ \leavevmode\unskip\nobreak\hfill
+\makeatletter
+ \rlap{\hskip\rightmargin % Defined by the list environment
+ \hskip\@rightmargin % Defined by exam.cls
+ \hskip-\rightpointsmargin
+ \llap{Total for Question 1: [20]}%
+ }% rlap
+\makeatother
+ \par
+\end{questions}
+\noaddpoints
+\nopointsinmargin
+\nobracketedpoints
+
+To change the format used by the
+\verb"\droptotalbonuspoints"\indc{droptotalbonuspoints} command, you
+use the command\indc{bonustotalformat}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\bonustotalformat"
+\end{center}
+which is analogous to the \verb"\totalformat" command. The argument
+to \verb"\bonustotalformat" can contain the
+command\indc{totalbonuspoints}\indc{thequestion}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \verb"\totalbonuspoints"& to print the number of bonus points, and\\
+ \verb"\thequestion"& to print the question number.
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+(\verb"\totalbonuspoints" expands to
+\verb"\bonuspointsofquestion{\arabic{question}}"; see
+section~\ref{sec:BonusTables} for a discussion of the
+\verb"\bonuspointsofquestion"\indc{bonuspointsofquestion} command.)
+
+\index{points|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Margin sizes when using \texttt{\bs pointsinmargin} and
+ \texttt{\bs pointsinrightmargin}}
+\index{margins!enlarge|(}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item If you give the command
+ \verb"\pointsinmargin"\indc{pointsinmargin}, then the points are
+ printed right justified in the left margin, with the right edge a
+ distance of \verb"\marginpointssep"\indc{marginpointssep} from the
+ left edge of the text area. The default value of
+ \verb"\marginpointssep" is the result of the command
+ \begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength{\marginpointssep}{5pt}"
+ \end{center}
+ and you can change it by giving a new \verb"\setlength" command.
+
+\item If you give the command
+ \verb"\pointsinrightmargin"\indc{pointsinrightmargin}, then the
+ points are printed right justified in the right margin, with the
+ right edge a distance of
+ \verb"\rightpointsmargin"\indc{rightpointsmargin} from the right
+ edge of the paper. The default value of \verb"\rightpointsmargin"
+ is the result of the command
+ \begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength{\rightpointsmargin}{1cm}"
+ \end{center}
+ and you can change it by giving a new \verb"\setlength" command.
+\end{itemize}
+
+You can change the width of the text area (and, thus, change the width
+of the margins) with the \verb"\extrawidth"\indc{extrawidth} command
+(see section~\ref{sec:margins}).
+
+\index{margins!enlarge|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Custom question number lines: The \texttt{\bs qformat}
+ command}
+\label{sec:qformat}
+\indc{qformat}
+\index{questions!customization|(}
+
+The default setup is for the question number to appear in the left
+margin and for the text of the question to begin on that line. It's
+possible to change this so that the text of the question starts on the
+line following the question number, and the format of the line
+containing the question number is determined by the user. This is
+done using the \verb"\qformat" command. There is also a
+\verb"\noqformat"\indc{noqformat} command, which reverts to the
+default setup.
+
+To use the \verb"\qformat"\indc{qformat} command, you give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\qformat{Format specification}"
+\end{center}
+where \texttt{Format specification} must contain some stretchability
+(e.g., at least one \verb"\hfill" or \verb"\dotfill" or
+\verb"\hrulefill" or \ldots) and can contain the commands
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \verb"\thequestion"\indc{thequestion}, which expands to the
+ question number,
+\item \verb"\thequestiontitle"\indc{thequestiontitle} (see
+ section~\ref{sec:questiontitle}), which expands to
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item the title of the question, if this question was defined using
+ a \verb"\titledquestion"\indc{titledquestion} command (see
+ section~\ref{sec:TitledQues}) instead of a \verb"\question"
+ command, or
+ \item the number of the question, if this question was defined using
+ a \verb"\question" command,
+ \end{itemize}
+\item \verb"\thepoints"\indc{thepoints}, which expands to
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item the number of points followed by the argument to the last
+ \verb"\pointname"\indc{pointname} command, if there were points
+ specified for the question, or
+ \item nothing, if no points were specified for the question
+ \end{itemize}
+ (see section~\ref{sec:pointname} for a discussion of the
+ \verb"\pointname" command), and
+\item \verb"\totalpoints"\indc{totalpoints}, which expands to the
+ total number of points specified for the question and all of its
+ parts, subparts, and subsubparts (see section~\ref{sec:addup}). The
+ command \verb"\totalpoints" expands to
+ \verb"\pointsofquestion{\arabic{question}}"\indc{pointsofquestion}
+ (see section~\ref{sec:pointsofq}).
+\end{itemize}
+For example, if you give the
+commands\indc{pointpoints}\indc{points}\indc{thepoints}\indc{thequestion}
+%
+\pointname{ \points}
+\pointpoints{point}{points}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\qformat{Question \thequestion \dotfill \thepoints}
+\begin{questions}
+\question[10]
+What did Billy Joe MacAllister throw off the Tallahatchie Bridge?
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\qformat{Question \thequestion \dotfill \thepoints}
+\begin{questions}
+\question[10]
+What did Billy Joe MacAllister throw off the Tallahatchie Bridge?
+\end{questions}
+%
+\medskip
+If you instead use the command
+\begin{verbatim}
+\qformat{\textbf{Question \thequestion}\quad (\thepoints)\hfill}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\qformat{\textbf{Question \thequestion}\quad (\thepoints)\hfill}
+\question[10]
+What did Billy Joe MacAllister throw off the Tallahatchie Bridge?
+\end{questions}
+%
+\medskip If you instead use the
+command\indc{qformat}\indc{thequestion}\indc{thepoints}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\qformat{\hfill Question \thequestion\hfill (\thepoints)}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\qformat{\hfill Question \thequestion\hfill (\thepoints)}
+\question[10]
+What did Billy Joe MacAllister throw off the Tallahatchie Bridge?
+\end{questions}
+\noqformat
+
+If you use a \verb"\qformat"\indc{qformat} (and, if there are any
+bonus questions, also a \verb"\bonusqformat"\indc{bonusqformat}; see
+section~\ref{sec:Bonus}), so that there are no labels on any of the
+questions, and you'd like to remove the
+indentation\index{indentation!remove} of the questions, you should
+give the command
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\questionshook}{%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\labelwidth}{-\labelsep}%
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+(see section~\ref{sec:CustList}) before the \texttt{questions}
+environment.
+
+\index{questions!customization|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Adding up the points for a question}
+\label{sec:adding}
+\index{points!adding}
+
+You can combine \verb"\qformat"\indc{qformat} with the
+\verb"\totalpoints"\indc{totalpoints} command (see
+section~\ref{sec:addup}): If you assign points only to parts,
+subparts, and subsubparts of questions, but none to the questions
+themselves, and you give the
+command\indc{thequestion}\indc{totalpoints}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\qformat{Question \thequestion\dotfill \emph{\totalpoints\ points}}
+\end{verbatim}
+(you must have used the document class option
+\verb"addpoints"\indt{addpoints} or given the command
+\verb"\addpoints"\indc{addpoints} in order to use the
+\verb"\totalpoints" command; see section~\ref{sec:addpoints}), then
+you can type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part[10]
+ In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+ \part[10]
+ What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to make
+ the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+and you'll get
+%
+\nopointsinmargin
+\qformat{Question \thequestion\dotfill \emph{20 points}}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part[10]
+ In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+ \part[10]
+ What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to make
+ the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+\noqformat
+
+For another method of printing the total points for a question, see
+the \verb"\droptotalpoints" command in section~\ref{sec:addup}.
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Titled questions}
+\label{sec:Titled}
+
+The \verb"\titledquestion"\indc{titledquestion} command (see
+section~\ref{sec:TitledQues}) allows you to assign a \emph{title} to a
+question, and to have the question title replace the question number
+in a grading table or point table indexed by question number (see
+sections \ref{sec:GradeTables} and~\ref{sec:PointTables}). If you use
+a \verb"\qformat"\indc{qformat} (see section~\ref{sec:qformat}) then
+you can include the question title in the question by using the
+\verb"\thequestiontitle"\indc{thequestiontitle} command (see the
+example in section~\ref{sec:questiontitle}).
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{\texttt{\bs titledquestion}}
+\label{sec:TitledQues}
+
+The command \verb"\titledquestion"\indc{titledquestion} is a
+replacement for \verb"\question"\indc{question}; it takes one required
+argument, the title, and one optional argument, the point value, as in
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\titledquestion{Question \thequestion: Concepts}"
+\end{center}
+which sets the question title to ``Question 2: Concepts'' (if this is
+the second question) and doesn't set any point values, or
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\titledquestion{Design}[10]"
+\end{center}
+which sets the question title to ``Design'' and sets the point value
+to ``10''. Note that the question title doesn't include the number of
+the question unless you put it there using the
+\verb"\thequestion"\indc{thequestion} command.
+
+Using \verb"\titledquestion"\indc{titledquestion} instead of
+\verb"\question" doesn't change the appearance of the question (unless
+you use \verb"\thequestiontitle"\indc{thequestiontitle} in the
+argument of a \verb"\qformat"\indc{qformat} command; see
+section~\ref{sec:questiontitle}). The only direct effect of using
+\verb"\titledquestion" instead of \verb"\question" is that if you
+print a grading table or point table indexed by question number (see
+section~\ref{sec:GradeTables}), then the title of the question will
+replace the number of the question in the table. To have the title of
+the question appear in the question itself, see the example in
+section~\ref{sec:questiontitle}.
+
+If you create a grading table or point table indexed by question
+number and you create a question using the
+\verb"\titledquestion"\indc{titledquestion} command, then the number
+of the
+%
+question\index{question number} won't appear in the table unless you
+include \verb"\thequestion"\indc{thequestion} in the title of the
+question.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{\texttt{\bs thequestiontitle}}
+\label{sec:questiontitle}
+
+The command \verb"\thequestiontitle"\indc{thequestiontitle} expands to
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the title of the question (if the question was defined using a
+ \verb"\titledquestion"\indc{titledquestion} command) or
+\item the number of the
+%
+ question\index{question number} (if the question was defined using a
+ \verb"\question"\indc{question} command).
+\end{itemize}
+This is for use in the argument of a \verb"\qformat"\indc{qformat}
+command (see section~\ref{sec:qformat}), so that you can have the
+question title appear in the question itself, and not just in a
+grading table or point table.
+
+The contents of \verb"\thequestiontitle"\indc{thequestiontitle} don't
+appear anywhere in the question itself unless you do something to make
+them appear. For example, if you give the command
+\begin{center}
+\verb"\qformat{Question \thequestion: \thequestiontitle\dotfill\thepoints}"
+\end{center}
+and then type\indc{titledquestion}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \titledquestion{History of Empirical Aerodynamics}[10]
+ What did Billy Joe MacAllister throw off the Tallahatchie Bridge?
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \qformat{Question \thequestion: \thequestiontitle\dotfill\thepoints}
+ \titledquestion{History of Empirical Aerodynamics}[10]
+ What did Billy Joe MacAllister throw off the Tallahatchie Bridge?
+\end{questions}
+\noqformat
+
+If the command \verb"\thequestiontitle" is never used, then the only
+effect of using the command \verb"\titledquestion" instead of the
+command \verb"\question" is that, in a grading table or point table
+indexed by question number, this question will be indexed by the title
+of the question rather than by the question number, and the title of
+the question will never appear except in the table.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Bonus points}
+\label{sec:Bonus}
+\index{bonus points|(}
+\index{points!bonus|(}
+
+It's possible to create questions, parts, subparts, or subsubparts
+that are worth \emph{bonus points}, instead of regular points. To do
+this, you use the
+command\indc{bonusquestion}\indc{bonustitledquestion}%
+\indc{bonuspart}\indc{bonussubpart}\indc{bonussubsubpart}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad instead of\qquad}l}
+ \verb"\bonusquestion"& \verb"\question",\\
+ \verb"\bonustitledquestion"& \verb"\titledquestion",\\
+ \verb"\bonuspart"& \verb"\part",\\
+ \verb"\bonussubpart"& \verb"\subpart", and\\
+ \verb"\bonussubsubpart"& \verb"\subsubpart".
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+There is also a \verb"\bonusqformat"\indc{bonusqformat} command that
+affects the \verb"\bonusquestion"\indc{bonusquestion} command in the
+same way that the \verb"\qformat"\indc{qformat} command affects the
+\verb"\question" command (see section~\ref{sec:qformat}), and a
+\verb"\nobonusqformat"\indc{nobonusqformat} command that cancels the
+effect of \verb"\bonusqformat" in the same way that
+\verb"\noqformat"\indc{noqformat} cancels the effect of
+\verb"\qformat". Note that the command
+\verb"\thepoints"\indc{thepoints} is defined so that it works equally
+well in \verb"\qformat" and \verb"\bonusqformat"\indc{bonusqformat}
+commands (see section~\ref{sec:qformat}).
+
+If \indc{bonusquestion}\indc{bonustitledquestion}%
+\indc{bonuspart}\indc{bonussubpart}\indc{bonussubsubpart}%
+you don't assign any points to a \verb"\bonusquestion",
+\verb"\bonuspart", \verb"\bonussubpart", or \verb"\bonussubsubpart"
+then, aside from the fact that \verb"\bonusqformat" alters
+\verb"\bonusquestion" while \verb"\qformat" alters \verb"\question",
+then they're printed in the same way that they would be printed if you
+had used the corresponding non-bonus command. However, if you assign
+points, then
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the points are typeset differently (see below),
+\item {\sloppy the points are not counted by the
+ \verb"\gradetable"\indc{gradetable}\indc{pointtable}%
+ \indc{bonusgradetable}\indc{bonuspointtable}%
+ \indc{combinedgradetable}\indc{combinedpointtable}%
+ or \verb"\pointtable" commands (see sections \ref{sec:GradeTables}
+ and~\ref{sec:PointTables}) or their partial variants (see
+ section~\ref{sec:PartialTable}), though they \emph{are} counted by
+ the \verb"\bonusgradetable", \verb"\bonuspointtable",
+ \verb"\combinedgradetable", and \verb"\combinedpointtable"
+ commands and their partial variants (see
+ sections~\ref{sec:BonusTables} and \ref{sec:CombinedTables}),\par}
+\item the points are not counted by the
+ \verb"\droptotalpoints"\indc{droptotalpoints} command (see
+ section~\ref{sec:addup}), though they are counted by the
+ \verb"\droptotalbonuspoints"\indc{droptotalbonuspoints} command (see
+ below),
+\item the points are not counted by the
+ \verb"\pointsofquestion"\indc{pointsofquestion} (see
+ section~\ref{sec:pointsofq}) or
+ \verb"\pointsonpage"\indc{pointsonpage} (see
+ section~\ref{sec:pointsonp}) commands, though they \emph{are}
+ counted by the
+ \verb"\bonuspointsofquestion"\indc{bonuspointsofquestion} and
+ \verb"\bonuspointsonpage"\indc{bonuspointsonpage} (see
+ section~\ref{sec:BonusTables}) commands, and
+\item the points are not counted by the
+ \verb"\numpoints"\indc{numpoints} command (see
+ section~\ref{sec:Count}), though they \emph{are} counted by the
+ \verb"\numbonuspoints"\indc{numbonuspoints} command (see
+ section~\ref{sec:Count}).
+\end{itemize}
+
+The default setup is that if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question[10] Who discovered America?
+ \bonusquestion[1] On what day of the week did he do it?
+ \bonusquestion[2] What color shirt was he wearing?
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question[10] Who discovered America?
+ \bonusquestion[1] On what day of the week did he do it?
+ \bonusquestion[2] What color shirt was he wearing?
+\end{questions}
+
+There is also a command
+\verb"\bonuspointpoints"\indc{bonuspointpoints} that is analogous to
+\verb"\pointpoints" (see section~\ref{sec:pointname}); the default
+setup was created by the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\bonuspointpoints{point (bonus)}{points (bonus)}"
+\end{center}
+and if you give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\bonuspointpoints{bonus point}{bonus points}"
+\end{center}
+then typing the above would produce\indc{bonuspointpoints}
+\begin{questions}
+ \bonuspointpoints{bonus point}{bonus points}
+ \question[10] Who discovered America?
+ \bonusquestion[1] On what day of the week did he do it?
+ \bonusquestion[2] What color shirt was he wearing?
+\end{questions}
+There are also
+commands\indc{bonuspointname}\indc{marginbonuspointname}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\bonuspointname" and\\
+ \verb"\marginbonuspointname"
+ \end{tabular}
+ \qquad that are analogous to\qquad
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\pointname" and\\
+ \verb"\marginpointname"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+(see section~\ref{sec:pointname}), and
+commands\indc{droptotalpoints}\indc{bonustotalformat}%
+\indc{totalbonuspoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\droptotalbonuspoints",\\
+ \verb"\bonustotalformat", and\\
+ \verb"\totalbonuspoints"
+ \end{tabular}
+ \qquad that are analogous to\qquad
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\droptotalpoints",\\
+ \verb"\totalformat", and\\
+ \verb"\totalpoints"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+(see section~\ref{sec:addup}).
+
+\index{points!bonus|)}
+\index{bonus points|)}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Counting the questions and adding up the points}
+\label{sec:Count}
+\index{questions!counting|(}
+
+
+The \verb"exam" document class automatically counts the numbers of
+questions, parts, and subparts, and makes these numbers available as
+the macros\indc{numquestions}\indc{numparts}\indc{numsubparts}%
+\indc{numsubsubparts}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\numquestions"\\
+ \verb"\numparts"\\
+ \verb"\numsubparts"\\
+ \verb"\numsubsubparts"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+These numbers are also printed on the screen when you run \LaTeX{} and
+they are placed into the \verb".log" file as well. If you have more
+than one \verb"questions" environment (for example, if your exam has
+several parts, with the questions in each part numbered beginning with
+``1''), then \verb"\numquestions" will hold the total number of
+questions on the exam. If you do have more than one \verb"questions"
+environment, though, you won't be able to use the
+\verb"\gradetable"\indc{gradetable} or
+\verb"\pointtable"\indc{pointtable} commands (see
+section~\ref{sec:Tables}).
+
+If you use the document class option \verb"addpoints"\indt{addpoints}
+or give the command \verb"\addpoints"\indc{addpoints} (see
+section~\ref{sec:addpoints}), then the class will add the total number
+of points and the total number of bonus points (see
+section~\ref{sec:Bonus}) that you've given to all of the questions,
+parts, subparts, and subsubparts of the exam, and make those totals
+available in the macros\indc{numpoints}\indc{numbonuspoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\numpoints"\\
+ \verb"\numbonuspoints"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+as well as displaying those totals on the screen when you run \LaTeX{}
+and placing them into the \texttt{.log} file. You can then type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ This exam has \numquestions\ questions, for a total of \numpoints\
+ points and \numbonuspoints\ bonus points.
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+and you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ This exam has 8 questions, for a total of 120 points and 10 bonus
+ points.
+\end{center}
+
+\emph{Warning}: If \verb"addpoints"\indt{addpoints} is in effect, your
+point values for questions, parts, subparts, and subsubparts must not
+contain anything other than digits and the command \verb"\half" (see
+section~\ref{sec:Half}). For example, if you \emph{don't} give the
+command \verb"\addpoints", then you can
+%
+type\index{points!acceptable entries}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\question[10\%]"
+\end{center}
+with no problems, but this will cause errors if you've given the
+command \verb"\addpoints"\indc{addpoints}. The correct way to
+accomplish what you want is to give the command
+\verb"\marginpointname{\%}"\indc{marginpointname} or
+\verb"\pointname{\%}"\indc{pointname} and then type
+\verb"\question[10]" (see section~\ref{sec:pointname}).
+
+If you want to temporarily turn off the adding of points (for example,
+if you list both the total points for each question and the points for
+each part, but you don't want to count the points twice), you can give
+the command\indc{noaddpoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\noaddpoints"
+\end{center}
+to turn off the adding of points and the command \verb"\addpoints" to
+turn it back on.
+
+If \verb"addpoints"\indc{addpoints} is in effect, then you can create
+grading tables (see section~\ref{sec:GradeTables}) and point tables
+(see section~\ref{sec:PointTables}) and use the commands
+\verb"\pointsofquestion" (see section~\ref{sec:pointsofq}) and
+\verb"\pointsonpage" (see section~\ref{sec:pointsonp}).
+
+\index{questions!counting|)}
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Referring to specific questions by number (cross
+ references)}
+\index{cross references|(}
+
+You can use the standard \LaTeX{} commands \verb"\label" and
+\verb"\ref" to refer to questions (or parts, or subparts, or
+subsubparts) by number. For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+The first question is question number~\ref{ques:first}.
+Question number~\ref{ques:second} has both a good part
+(part~\ref{part:good}) and a bad part (part~\ref{part:bad}).
+
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+\label{ques:first}
+This is the first question.
+
+\question
+\label{ques:second}
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+\label{part:good}
+This is the good part.
+
+\part
+\label{part:bad}
+This is the \emph{bad} part.
+\end{parts}
+
+\question
+Is there a question?
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get:
+
+\medskip
+
+The first question is question number~\ref{ques:first}.
+Question number~\ref{ques:second} has both a good part
+(part~\ref{part:good}) and a bad part (part~\ref{part:bad}).
+
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+\label{ques:first}
+This is the first question.
+
+\question
+\label{ques:second}
+\begin{parts}
+\part
+\label{part:good}
+This is the good part.
+
+\part
+\label{part:bad}
+This is the \emph{bad} part.
+\end{parts}
+
+\question
+Is there a question?
+\end{questions}
+
+
+
+\bigskip
+
+As with all other cross references in \LaTeX, you'll have to run your
+file through \LaTeX{} \emph{twice} to be sure that all the cross
+references are correct.
+
+\index{cross references|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Customizing the numbers}
+\label{sec:CustNumb}
+\index{customization!question numbers|(}
+
+
+The default setup is that:
+\begin{questions}
+ \question Question numbers are arabic, and are followed by a period.
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part Part numbers are lower case letters, and are enclosed in
+ parentheses.
+ \begin{subparts}
+ \subpart Subpart numbers are lower case roman, and are followed
+ by a period.
+ \begin{subsubparts}
+ \subsubpart Subsubpart numbers are greek, and are followed by
+ a right parenthesis.
+ \begin{choices}
+ \choice Choices are upper case letters, and are followed by
+ a period.
+ \end{choices}
+ \end{subsubparts}
+ \end{subparts}
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+All of this can be changed.
+
+\bigskip
+
+To change the type of numbering, you would redefine the
+commands\indc{thequestion}\indc{thepartno}\indc{thesubpart}%
+\indc{thesubsubpart}\indc{thechoice}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\thequestion"\\
+ \verb"\thepartno"\\
+ \verb"\thesubpart"\\
+ \verb"\thesubsubpart"\\
+ \verb"\thechoice"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+(Note: The second one listed there is \verb"\thepartno", \emph{not}
+\verb"\thepart". The command \verb"\thepart" refers to the counter
+used in the article document class standard sectioning command
+\verb"\part".) The numbering commands available
+are\indc{arabic}\indc{alph}\indc{Alph}\indc{roman}%
+\indc{Roman}\indc{greeknum}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \verb"\arabic"& Regular arabic integers\\
+ \verb"\alph"& Lower case letters\\
+ \verb"\Alph"& Upper case letters\\
+ \verb"\roman"& Lower case roman numbers\\
+ \verb"\Roman"& Upper case roman numbers\\
+ \verb"\greeknum"& Greek letters
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+and any of these can be applied to the
+counters\index{question counter}\index{part counter}%
+\index{subpart counter}\index{subsubpart counter}%
+\index{choice counter}%
+\verb"question"\indt{question}, \verb"partno"\indt{partno},
+\verb"subpart"\indt{subpart}, \verb"subsubpart"\indt{subsubpart}, and
+\verb"choice"\indt{choice}. (The \verb"\greeknum"\indc{greeknum}
+command is defined by the exam document class, but all of the others
+are standard \LaTeX{} commands.)
+
+For example, to have questions numbered using upper case roman numbers
+and parts numbered using upper case letters, you would give the
+commands\indc{thequestion}\indc{thepartno}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\renewcommand{\thequestion}{\Roman{question}}"\\
+ \verb"\renewcommand{\thepartno}{\Alph{partno}}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\bigskip
+
+
+The ``decorations'' around the numbers (i.e., the periods, or
+parentheses, or \ldots) are determined by the
+commands\indc{questionlabel}\indc{partlabel}\indc{subpartlabel}%
+\indc{subsubpartlabel}\indc{choicelabel}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\questionlabel"\\
+ \verb"\partlabel"\\
+ \verb"\subpartlabel"\\
+ \verb"\subsubpartlabel"\\
+ \verb"\choicelabel"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+the default definitions of which are:
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\newcommand{\questionlabel}{\thequestion.}"\\
+ \verb"\newcommand{\partlabel}{(\thepartno)}"\\
+ \verb"\newcommand{\subpartlabel}{\thesubpart.}"\\
+ \verb"\newcommand{\subsubpartlabel}{\thesubsubpart)}"\\
+ \verb"\newcommand{\choicelabel}{\thechoice.}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+You can change any of these by giving \verb"\renewcommand" commands to
+redefine them. This can, of course, be used to change the
+``decorations'' around the numbers, but there are other uses as well.
+For example, if you use the Fourier project's Utopia
+font\index{Utopia~font} by including the commands
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}"\\
+ \verb"\usepackage{fourier}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+after your \verb"\documentclass" command, then you'll see that the
+kerning\index{kerning} makes ``\verb"F."" look so much like
+``\verb"E"" that a student could confuse the two. You can turn off
+the kerning with the command
+\verb"\renewcommand{\choicelabel}{\thechoice{}.}"\indc{choicelabel}.
+
+\index{customization!question numbers|)}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Customizing the list parameters}
+\label{sec:CustList}
+\index{list environment|(}
+\index{environment!list|(}
+\index{customization!list parameters|(}
+
+The environments \texttt{questions}, \texttt{parts},
+\texttt{subparts}, \texttt{subsubparts}, \texttt{choices}, and
+\texttt{checkboxes} are all implemented as \LaTeX{} \texttt{list}
+environments. This section describes commands for advanced users who
+want to customize the list parameters (\verb"\topsep"\indc{topsep},
+\verb"\partopsep"\indc{partopsep}, \verb"\itemsep"\indc{itemsep},
+\verb"\parsep"\indc{parsep}, etc.) for the lists that those
+environments create.
+
+The \verb"exam" document class includes the expansion
+of\indc{questionshook}\indc{partshook}\indc{subpartshook}%
+\indc{subsubpartshook}\indc{choiceshook}\indc{checkboxeshook}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad when creating a\qquad}l@{\qquad}l}
+ \verb"\questionshook"&\verb"questions"&environment,\\
+ \verb"\partshook"&\verb"parts"&environment,\\
+ \verb"\subpartshook"&\verb"subparts"&environment,\\
+ \verb"\subsubpartshook"&\verb"subsubparts"&environment,\\
+ \verb"\choiceshook"&\verb"choices"&environment, and\\
+ \verb"\checkboxeshook"&\verb"checkboxes"&environment.
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+The \verb"exam" document class defines these as follows:
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \verb"\newcommand{\questionshook}{}"\\
+ \verb"\newcommand{\partshook}{}"\\
+ \verb"\newcommand{\subpartshook}{}"\\
+ \verb"\newcommand{\subsubpartshook}{}"\\
+ \verb"\newcommand{\choiceshook}{}"\\
+ \verb"\newcommand{\checkboxeshook}{}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Thus, the default is that these commands have no effect, but you can
+change any of them with a \verb"\renewcommand" command. Thus, if you
+redefine, e.g., \verb"\questionshook" to expand to commands that set
+values for some of the list parameters, then those values will be used
+in the \verb"questions" environment.
+
+For example, if you give the command\indc{questionshook}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\renewcommand{\questionshook}{\setlength{\itemsep}{1in}}"
+\end{center}
+then there will be an additional one inch of blank space inserted
+between questions (since the questions are the items in a
+\verb"questions" environment). For another example, if you give the
+command\indc{partshook}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\renewcommand{\partshook}{\setlength{\topsep}{0.5in}}"
+\end{center}
+then each parts environment will have an additional one half inch of
+space before and after the environment.
+
+For another example, if you're using a \verb"\qformat"\indc{qformat}
+(see section~\ref{sec:qformat}) (and, if there are any bonus
+questions, also a \verb"\bonusqformat"\indc{bonusqformat}; see
+section~\ref{sec:Bonus}), so that there are no labels on any of the
+questions, and you'd like to remove the indentation of the questions,
+give the
+command\index{indentation!remove}\indc{leftmargin}\indc{labelsep}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\questionshook}{%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\labelwidth}{-\labelsep}%
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\index{customization!list parameters|)}
+\index{environment!list|)}
+\index{list environment|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\section{Multiple choice and fill in the blank questions}
+\label{sec:MulChc}
+\index{multiple choice}
+
+There are four environments for listing the possible answers to a
+multiple choice question: two of them label the choices, and the other
+two print checkboxes in front of the choices for the student to place
+checks next to the chosen answers.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item The first two environments use upper case letters (i.e., ``A'',
+ ``B'', ``C'', \ldots) to label the choices. (To change the
+ appearance of the labels, see section~\ref{sec:CustNumb}.)
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item The \verb"choices"\indt{choices}\index{choices environment}%
+ \index{environment!choices} environment creates a list environment
+ with the choices as the items in the list (see
+ section~\ref{sec:choices}).
+ \item The \verb"oneparchoices"\indt{oneparchoices}%
+ \index{oneparchoices environment}%
+ \index{environment!oneparchoices} environment lists all of the
+ choices in a single paragraph which is a continuation of the
+ paragraph preceding the environment unless you leave a blank line
+ before beginning the environment (see
+ section~\ref{sec:oneparchoices}).
+ \end{itemize}
+ If you don't want the students to just circle the correct choices,
+ you can use the \verb"\answerline"\indc{answerline} command to print
+ a line on which the answer should be written (see
+ section~\ref{sec:ShortAns}). The
+ \verb"\anwerline"\indcsub{answerline}{optional~argument}
+ command allows you to include as an optional argument the answer to
+ the question, and the answer will be printed on the line when
+ solutions are bing printed (see section~\ref{sec:AnsShortAns}).
+\item The last two environments print checkboxes in front of the
+ choices for the students to use to place checks next to the chosen
+ answers.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item The \verb"checkboxes"\indt{checkboxes}%
+ \index{checkboxes environment}%
+ \index{environment!checkboxes} environment creates a list
+ environment with the choices as the items in the list (see
+ section~\ref{sec:checkboxes}).
+ \item The \verb"oneparcheckboxes"\indt{oneparcheckboxes}%
+ \index{oneparcheckboxes environment}%
+ \index{environment!oneparcheckboxes} environment lists all of the
+ choices in a single paragraph which is a continuation of the
+ paragraph preceding the environment unless you leave a blank line
+ before beginning the environment (see
+ section~\ref{sec:oneparcheckboxes}).
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+All of those environments allow you to designate one or more choices
+as correct choices and to have the correct choices printed with
+emphasis when solutions are being printed (see
+section~\ref{sec:CorrectChoice}).
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{The \texttt{choices} environment}
+\label{sec:choices}
+\indt{choices}
+\indc{choice}
+\index{choices environment}
+\index{environment!choices}
+
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+One of these things is not like the others; one of these things is not
+the same. Which one is different?
+\begin{choices}
+\choice John
+\choice Paul
+
+\choice
+
+George
+
+\choice Ringo
+
+\choice Socrates
+
+\end{choices}
+
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+Then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+One of these things is not like the others; one of these things is not
+the same. Which one is different?
+\begin{choices}
+\choice John
+\choice Paul
+
+\choice
+
+George
+
+\choice Ringo
+
+\choice Socrates
+
+\end{choices}
+
+\end{questions}
+As that example illustrates, you can leave blank lines between the
+\verb"\choice" command and the text of the choice, or between the
+various choices, and those blank lines will be ignored.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{The \texttt{oneparchoices} environment}
+\label{sec:oneparchoices}
+\indt{oneparchoices}
+\indc{choice}
+\index{oneparchoices environment}
+\index{environment!oneparchoices}
+
+If you use a \verb"oneparchoices" environment instead of the
+\verb"choices" environment in the example of
+section~\ref{sec:choices}, then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+One of these things is not like the others; one of these things is not
+the same. Which one is different?
+\begin{oneparchoices}
+\choice John
+\choice Paul
+
+\choice
+
+George
+
+\choice Ringo
+
+\choice Socrates
+
+\end{oneparchoices}
+
+\end{questions}
+
+If you insert a blank line before the \verb"\begin{oneparchoices}",
+ then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+One of these things is not like the others; one of these things is not
+the same. Which one is different?
+
+\begin{oneparchoices}
+\choice John
+\choice Paul
+
+\choice
+
+George
+
+\choice Ringo
+
+\choice Socrates
+
+\end{oneparchoices}
+
+\end{questions}
+
+
+If you insert a blank line before the \verb"\begin{oneparchoices}" and
+ \verb"\answerline" after the \verb"\end{oneparchoices}" (see
+section~\ref{sec:ShortAns} for a description of the
+\verb"\answerline"\indc{answerline} command), then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+One of these things is not like the others; one of these things is not
+the same. Which one is different?
+
+\begin{oneparchoices}
+\choice John
+\choice Paul
+
+\choice
+
+George
+
+\choice Ringo
+
+\choice Socrates
+
+\end{oneparchoices}
+\answerline
+
+\end{questions}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{The \texttt{checkboxes} environment}
+\label{sec:checkboxes}
+\indt{checkboxes}
+\indc{choice}
+\index{checkboxes environment}
+\index{environment!checkboxes}
+
+If you use a \texttt{checkboxes} environment instead of the
+\texttt{choices} environment in the example of
+section~\ref{sec:choices}, then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+One of these things is not like the others; one of these things is not
+the same. Which one is different?
+\begin{checkboxes}
+\choice John
+\choice Paul
+
+\choice
+
+George
+
+\choice Ringo
+
+\choice Socrates
+
+\end{checkboxes}
+
+\end{questions}
+The appearance of the checkbox can be customized (see
+section~\ref{sec:MulChceCust}).
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{The \texttt{oneparcheckboxes} environment}
+\label{sec:oneparcheckboxes}
+\indt{oneparcheckboxes}
+\indc{choice}
+\index{oneparcheckboxes environment}
+\index{environment!oneparcheckboxes}
+
+If you use a \verb"oneparcheckboxes" environment instead of the
+\verb"choices" environment in the example of
+section~\ref{sec:choices}, then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+One of these things is not like the others; one of these things is not
+the same. Which one is different?
+\begin{oneparcheckboxes}
+\choice John
+\choice Paul
+
+\choice
+
+George
+
+\choice Ringo
+
+\choice Socrates
+
+\end{oneparcheckboxes}
+
+\end{questions}
+
+If you insert a blank line before the \verb"\begin{oneparcheckboxes}",
+ then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+\question
+One of these things is not like the others; one of these things is not
+the same. Which one is different?
+
+\begin{oneparcheckboxes}
+\choice John
+\choice Paul
+
+\choice
+
+George
+
+\choice Ringo
+
+\choice Socrates
+
+\end{oneparcheckboxes}
+
+\end{questions}
+The appearance of the checkbox can be customized (see
+section~\ref{sec:MulChceCust}).
+
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Solutions to multiple choice questions}
+\label{sec:CorrectChoice}
+\index{solutions}
+\index{choices environment!correct choice}
+\index{environment!choices!correct choice}
+\index{oneparchoices environment!correct choice}
+\index{environment!oneparchoices!correct choice}
+\index{checkboxes environment!correct choice}
+\index{environment!checkboxes!correct choice}
+\index{oneparcheckboxes environment!correct choice}
+\index{environment!oneparcheckboxes!correct choice}
+
+
+The \verb"exam" document class defines several environments for
+solutions (see section~\ref{sec:solutions}), the contents of which
+will be printed only if you use the document class option
+\verb"answers"\indt{answers} (as in
+\verb"\documentclass[answers]{exam}") or give the command
+\verb"\printanswers"\indc{printanswers} (see
+section~\ref{sec:answers}). Each of the environments for multiple
+choice questions (see
+sections~\ref{sec:choices}--\ref{sec:oneparcheckboxes}) allows you to
+designate one or more of the choices as \emph{correct choices}, and to
+have the correct choices printed with emphasis when solutions are
+being printed.
+
+The command to define a correct choice is
+\verb"\CorrectChoice"\indc{CorrectChoice}, which is used in place of
+the command \verb"\choice"\indc{choice}. (To avoid confusion,
+\verb"\correctchoice"\indc{correctchoice} is defined to be a synonym
+for \verb"\CorrectChoice".) When solutions are not being printed,
+\verb"\CorrectChoice" is equivalent to \verb"\choice". When solutions
+are being printed, though, any choices that were created with
+\verb"\CorrectChoice" (rather than with \verb"\choice") will be
+printed in bold. (This can be changed; see
+section~\ref{sec:MulChceCust}.) In addition, in the
+\texttt{checkboxes}\indt{checkboxes} and
+\texttt{oneparcheckboxes}\indt{oneparcheckboxes} environments, each
+correct choice will have its checkbox replaced by a check.
+
+For example, if \verb"\printanswers"\indc{printanswers} is in effect
+and you type\indc{CorrectChoice}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question One of these things is not like the others; one of these
+ things is not the same. Which one is different?
+ \begin{oneparchoices}
+ \choice John
+ \choice Paul
+ \choice George
+ \choice Ringo
+ \CorrectChoice Socrates
+ \end{oneparchoices}
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\printanswers
+\begin{questions}
+ \question One of these things is not like the others; one of these
+ things is not the same. Which one is different?
+ \begin{oneparchoices}
+ \choice John
+ \choice Paul
+ \choice George
+ \choice Ringo
+ \CorrectChoice Socrates
+ \end{oneparchoices}
+\end{questions}
+\noprintanswers
+%
+If you use a \texttt{oneparcheckboxes}\indt{oneparcheckboxes}
+environment instead of the \texttt{oneparchoices}\indt{oneparchoices}
+environment in that example, then you'll get\indc{printanswers}
+%
+\printanswers
+\begin{questions}
+ \question One of these things is not like the others; one of these
+ things is not the same. Which one is different?
+ \begin{oneparcheckboxes}
+ \choice John
+ \choice Paul
+ \choice George
+ \choice Ringo
+ \CorrectChoice Socrates
+ \end{oneparcheckboxes}
+\end{questions}
+\noprintanswers
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Fill in the blank questions}
+\label{sec:Fillin}
+
+\indcstart{fillin}
+\index{fill in the blank|(}
+
+There is a \verb"\fillin" command that prints underlined empty space
+for creating ``fill in the blank'' questions. The \verb"\fillin"
+command can take two optional arguments:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the first optional argument is the answer to the question, which
+ will be printed above the line when answers are being printed, and
+\item the second optional argument is the length of line to be
+ printed, if you want some length other than the default.
+\end{itemize}
+If answers are being printed and you supply the answer as the first
+(and possibly only) optional argument, then the answer is printed
+subject to the declarations in the argument of the most recent
+\verb"\CorrectChoiceEmphasis" command. It is centered on the line
+unless it is too long, in which case it extends to the right of the
+line. The default length of the line and the distance down from the
+baseline of the text to the empty line can both be customized (see
+section~\ref{sec:CustFillin}).
+
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question \fillin is the color of my true love's hair.
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question \fillin is the color of my true love's hair.
+\end{questions}
+If, instead, you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question \fillin[Black] is the color of my true love's hair.
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then if answers are not being printed you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question \fillin[Black] is the color of my true love's hair.
+\end{questions}
+and if answers are being printed you'll get
+\printanswers
+\begin{questions}
+ \question \fillin[Black] is the color of my true love's hair.
+\end{questions}
+\noprintanswers
+
+For another example, if answers are being printed and you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question The magic word is \fillin[prestidigitator].
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\printanswers
+\begin{questions}
+ \question The magic word is \fillin[prestidigitator].
+\end{questions}
+\noprintanswers
+which shows what happens when the answer is too long for the fillin
+line. If, however, you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question The magic word is \fillin[prestidigitator][2in].
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\printanswers
+\begin{questions}
+ \question The magic word is \fillin[prestidigitator][2in].
+\end{questions}
+\noprintanswers
+
+\verb"\fillin" eats (and ignores) space characters appearing before
+the first optional argument. It also eats (and ignores) space
+characters appearing after the first optional argument and before the
+second optional argument. However, if exactly one optional argument
+appears, and if there are one or more space characters following that
+one optional argument, then those spaces are replaced by a single
+space character, but not eaten.
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{True/False questions}
+\label{sec:truefalse}
+
+\index{true/false questions|(}
+The \verb"\fillin" command can also be used to create True/False
+questions. If you give the command
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\tf}[1][{}]{%
+ \fillin[#1][0.25in]%
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you can type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question \tf[T] The world is all that is the case.
+ \question \tf[F] My favorite color is blue.
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\tf}[1][{}]{%
+ \fillin[#1][0.25in]%
+}
+and if answers are not being printed you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question \tf[T] The world is all that is the case.
+ \question \tf[F] My favorite color is blue.
+\end{questions}
+but if answers are being printed then you'll get
+\printanswers
+\begin{questions}
+ \question \tf[T] The world is all that is the case.
+ \question \tf[F] My favorite color is blue.
+\end{questions}
+\noprintanswers
+
+\index{true/false questions|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Customizing the \texttt{\bs fillin} command}
+\label{sec:CustFillin}
+\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\fillin}|(}
+
+You can customize the \verb"\fillin" command by changing
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the default length of the underlined space,
+\item the distance below the text baseline that the line is printed, and
+\item the emphasis applied to the answer (when answers are being
+ printed).
+\end{itemize}
+The default length of the underlined space is called
+\verb"\fillinlinelength"\indc{fillinlinelength}, and its value was set
+by the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength\fillinlinelength{1in}"
+\end{center}
+You can change this by giving a new \verb"\setlength" command.
+
+The line is printed a distance of
+\verb"\answerclearance"\indc{answerclearance} below the baseline, and
+its value was set by the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength\answerclearance{0.2ex}"
+\end{center}
+You can change this by giving a new \verb"\setlength" command. Note:
+\verb"\answerclearance" is also used by the \verb"\answerline" command
+(see section~\ref{sec:ShortAns}).
+
+When answers are being printed and you include the optional argument
+containing the answer, then the answer is printed subject to the
+declarations in the argument of the most recent
+\verb"\CorrectChoiceEmphasis"\indc{CorrectChoiceEmphasis} command.
+The default situation was created by the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\CorrectChoiceEmphasis{\bfseries}"
+\end{center}
+and you can change this by giving a new \verb"\CorrectChoiceEmphasis"
+command (see section~\ref{sec:MulChceCust}).
+
+\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\fillin}|)}
+\index{fill in the blank|)}
+\indcstop{fillin}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Customizing the multiple choice environments}
+\label{sec:MulChceCust}
+\index{customization!multiple choice questions|(}
+
+When solutions are being printed, the correct choices in any of the
+environments \texttt{choices}\indt{choices},
+\texttt{oneparchoices}\indt{oneparchoices},
+\texttt{checkboxes}\indt{checkboxes}, and
+\texttt{oneparcheckboxes}\indt{oneparcheckboxes} will be printed
+subject to the declarations in the argument of the most
+recent\indc{CorrectChoiceEmphasis}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\CorrectChoiceEmphasis"
+\end{center}
+command. The default situation is created by the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\CorrectChoiceEmphasis{\bfseries}"
+\end{center}
+and so when solutions are being printed the correct choices are
+printed in boldface by default. You can change this, for example, by
+giving the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\CorrectChoiceEmphasis{\itshape}"
+\end{center}
+which would cause correct choices to be printed in italics when
+solutions are being printed.
+
+For another example, if you give the command
+\verb"\usepackage{color}"\indt{color} in the preamble\index{preamble}
+of your document (i.e., after the \verb"\documentclass" command and
+before the \verb"\begin{document}"), and then give the
+ command\indc{CorrectChoiceEmphasis}\indc{color}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\CorrectChoiceEmphasis{\color{red}}"
+\end{center}
+then when solutions are being printed the correct choices will be
+printed in red (assuming your printer can produce that color).
+
+For another example, if you give the command
+\verb"\usepackage{color}"\indt{color} in the preamble of your document
+(i.e., after the \verb"\documentclass" command and before the
+\verb"\begin{document}" command) and then give the command\indc{color}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\CorrectChoiceEmphasis{\color{red}\bfseries}"
+\end{center}
+then the correct choices will be printed in boldface red (again
+assuming that your printer can produce that color).
+
+{\sloppy To avoid confusion,
+ \verb"\correctchoiceemphasis"\indc{correctchoiceemphasis} is defined
+ to be a synonym for
+ \verb"\CorrectChoiceEmphasis"\indc{CorrectChoiceEmphasis}.\par}
+
+\bigskip
+
+The \texttt{checkboxes}\indt{checkboxes} and
+\texttt{oneparcheckboxes}\indt{oneparcheckboxes} environments also
+allow customization of the characters used for checkboxes and checks:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item The checkbox\index{checkbox} that is printed in the
+ \texttt{checkboxes} and \texttt{oneparcheckboxes} environments is
+ the argument of the most recent
+ \verb"\checkboxchar"\indc{checkboxchar} command. The default is
+ created by the command
+ \begin{center}
+ \verb"\checkboxchar{$\bigcirc$}"
+ \end{center}
+ For example, if you give the command
+ \verb"\usepackage{amssymb}"\indt{amssymb} in the
+ preamble\index{preamble} of your document (i.e., after the
+ \verb"\documentclass" command and before the
+ \verb"\begin{document}"), then the command\indc{Box}
+ \begin{center}
+ \verb"\checkboxchar{$\Box$}"
+ \end{center}
+ will cause squares to be printed instead of circles.
+
+ \item The check that is printed for correct choices in the
+ \texttt{checkboxes}\indt{checkboxes} and
+ \texttt{oneparcheckboxes}\indt{oneparcheckboxes} environments
+ when solutions are being printed is the argument of the most
+ recent \verb"\checkedchar"\indc{checkedchar} command. The
+ default is created by the command\indc{surd}
+ \begin{center}
+ \verb"\checkedchar{$\surd$}"
+ \end{center}
+\end{itemize}
+
+For example, if you've given the command
+\verb"\usepackage{amssymb}"\indt{amssymb} in the
+preamble\index{preamble} of your document (i.e., after the
+\verb"\documentclass" command and before the \verb"\begin{document}"),
+ then the commands\indc{Box}\indc{blacksquare}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\checkboxchar{$\Box$}"\\
+ \verb"\checkedchar{$\blacksquare$}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+will cause the example in section~\ref{sec:CorrectChoice} to appear as
+%
+\printanswers
+\checkboxchar{$\Box$}
+\checkedchar{$\blacksquare$}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question One of these things is not like the others; one of
+ these things is not the same. Which one is different?
+ \begin{oneparcheckboxes}
+ \choice John
+ \choice Paul
+ \choice George
+ \choice Ringo
+ \CorrectChoice Socrates
+ \end{oneparcheckboxes}
+\end{questions}
+\noprintanswers
+
+\index{customization!multiple choice questions|)}
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\section{Escaping the indentation: \texttt{\bs uplevel} and
+ \texttt{\bs fullwidth}}
+\label{sec:uplevel}
+\index{indentation|(}
+
+There are two commands provided for printing text with a left margin
+smaller than the one currently in effect:
+\verb"\uplevel"\indc{uplevel} and \verb"\fullwidth"\indc{fullwidth}.
+Each of these commands takes one argument and typesets the argument
+with an altered left margin.
+
+The \verb"\fullwidth" command prints its argument using the full width
+of the printed region, temporarily canceling the indentation created
+by the \texttt{questions} environment (and the \texttt{parts},
+\texttt{subparts}, and \texttt{subsubparts} environments, if you're
+inside any of those). The \verb"\uplevel" command prints its argument
+using the indentation in effect before you entered the current
+innermost environment.
+
+There are also two environments,
+\texttt{EnvUplevel}\indt{EnvUplevel}\index{environment!EnvUplevel}%
+\index{EnvUplevel environment} and
+\texttt{EnvFullwidth}\indt{EnvFullwidth}\index{environment!EnvFullwidth}%
+\index{EnvFullwidth environment}. The \texttt{EnvUplevel} environment
+is similar to the \verb"\uplevel" command and the
+\texttt{EnvFullwidth} environment is similar to the \verb"\fullwidth"
+command. The environments have the advantage that you can have
+verbatim material inside of the environment, while there cannot be any
+verbatim material in the argument of \verb"\uplevel" or
+\verb"\fullwidth".
+
+The main uses for these commands are including instructions for a
+group of questions (see section~\ref{sec:Instructions}) and naming the
+parts of a long exam (see section~\ref{sec:Naming}), but you can use
+them however you like.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Including instructions for a group of questions}
+\label{sec:Instructions}
+\index{instructions|(}
+\indcstart{uplevel}
+\indtstart{EnvUplevel}
+\index{EnvUplevel environment|(}
+\index{environment!EnvUplevel|(}
+
+
+If you are inside of a parts environment and you want to give
+directions for the next few parts, then those directions should be
+indented to the level of the question of which they are parts, i.e.,
+up one level. If you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ Why did you come to Casablanca?
+
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ Why, Oh why, Oh why, Oh; why did I ever leave Ohio?
+
+ \uplevel{The following two parts should be answered in classical
+ Greek:}
+ \part
+ Why do birds sing?
+
+ \part
+ Why do fools fall in love?
+
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ Why did you come to Casablanca?
+
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ Why, Oh why, Oh why, Oh; why did I ever leave Ohio?
+
+ \uplevel{The following two parts should be answered in classical
+ Greek:}
+ \part
+ Why do birds sing?
+
+ \part
+ Why do fools fall in love?
+
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+You can accomplish exactly the same thing by replacing
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \uplevel{The following two parts should be answered in classical
+ Greek:}
+\end{verbatim}
+by
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \begin{EnvUplevel}
+ The following two parts should be answered in classical Greek:
+ \end{EnvUplevel}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+If you want to give instructions for a group of questions, then the
+indenting for those instructions should be to the outer left margin,
+i.e., up one level. For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ Approximate $\displaystyle \int_0^1 \sin x^2 \, dx$ within $.001$ of
+ its true value.
+
+ \uplevel{Questions \ref{exact-start} through~\ref{exact-end} should
+ be evaluated completely, not just approximated.}
+
+ \question
+ \label{exact-start}
+ $\displaystyle \int_0^1 \frac{x^2 \, dx}{\sqrt{1-x^2}}$
+
+ \question
+ $\displaystyle \int_0^1 \frac{1}{1+x^2}\, dx$
+
+ \question
+ \label{exact-end}
+ $\displaystyle \int_0^{\frac{\pi}{2}} \sin^3 x \cos x \, dx$
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ Approximate $\displaystyle \int_0^1 \sin x^2 \, dx$ within $.001$ of
+ its true value.
+
+ \uplevel{Questions \ref{exact-start} through~\ref{exact-end} should
+ be evaluated completely, not just approximated.}
+
+ \question
+ \label{exact-start}
+ $\displaystyle \int_0^1 \frac{x^2 \, dx}{\sqrt{1-x^2}}$
+
+ \question
+ $\displaystyle \int_0^1 \frac{1}{1+x^2}\, dx$
+
+ \question
+ \label{exact-end}
+ $\displaystyle \int_0^{\frac{\pi}{2}} \sin^3 x \cos x \, dx$
+\end{questions}
+You can accomplish exactly the same thing by replacing
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \uplevel{Questions \ref{exact-start} through~\ref{exact-end} should
+ be evaluated completely, not just approximated.}
+\end{verbatim}
+by
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \begin{EnvUplevel}
+ Questions \ref{exact-start} through~\ref{exact-end} should be
+ evaluated completely, not just approximated.
+ \end{EnvUplevel}
+\end{verbatim}
+\indcstop{uplevel}
+\indtstop{EnvUplevel}
+\index{EnvUplevel environment|)}
+\index{environment!EnvUplevel|)}
+
+\indcstart{fullwidth}
+\indtstart{EnvFullwidth}
+\index{EnvFullwidth environment|(}
+\index{environment!EnvFullwidth|(}
+If you want to give instructions that use the full width of the page
+(rather than just going up one level of indentation), then use the
+\verb"\fullwidth" command. For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ This is the first question.
+
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ This is the first part.
+
+ \part
+ This is the second part.
+ \begin{subparts}
+ \subpart
+ This is a subpart.
+
+ \fullwidth{When you finish this exam, you should go back and
+ reexamine your work, both on this exam and in your life up
+ until the day of this exam, for any errors that you may have
+ made.}
+
+ \subpart
+ This is another subpart.
+ \end{subparts}
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ This is the first question.
+
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ This is the first part.
+
+ \part
+ This is the second part.
+ \begin{subparts}
+ \subpart
+ This is a subpart.
+
+ \fullwidth{When you finish this exam, you should go back and
+ reexamine your work, both on this exam and in your life up
+ until the day of this exam, for any errors that you may have
+ made.}
+
+ \subpart
+ This is another subpart.
+ \end{subparts}
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+You can accomplish exactly the same thing by replacing
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \fullwidth{When you finish this exam, you should go back and
+ reexamine your work, both on this exam and in your life up
+ until the day of this exam, for any errors that you may have
+ made.}
+\end{verbatim}
+by
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \begin{EnvFullwidth}
+ When you finish this exam, you should go back and
+ reexamine your work, both on this exam and in your life up
+ until the day of this exam, for any errors that you may have
+ made.
+ \end{EnvFullwidth}
+\end{verbatim}
+\indcstop{fullwidth}
+\indtstop{EnvFullwidth}
+\index{EnvFullwidth environment|)}
+\index{environment!EnvFullwidth|)}
+
+\index{instructions|)}
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Naming the parts of a long exam}
+\label{sec:Naming}
+\index{naming parts of the exam|(}
+
+There are two ways of naming the parts of a long exam. The first way
+uses the \verb"\fullwidth"\indc{fullwidth} and
+\verb"\uplevel"\indc{uplevel} commands (see
+section~\ref{sec:Namefullwidth}), and the other way uses the standard
+%
+\verb"\part"\indcsub{part}{standard sectioning command}
+%
+and \verb"\section"\indc{section} commands (see
+section~\ref{sec:NameSection}).
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Using \texttt{\bs uplevel} and \texttt{\bs fullwidth}}
+\label{sec:Namefullwidth}
+\indcstart{uplevel}
+\indcstart{fullwidth}
+\indtstart{EnvFullwidth}
+\index{EnvFullwidth environment|(}
+\index{environment!EnvFullwidth|(}
+
+To place a section name in the exam, just use a \verb"\fullwidth"
+command (see section~\ref{sec:uplevel}) and include whatever font
+changing commands that you want to use. For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ Is there, is there balm in Gilead?
+
+ \fullwidth{\Large \textbf{Essay questions}}
+
+ \question
+ Explain how the cooling of matter in the centuries following the big
+ bang has influenced the British parliamentary system of government.
+
+ \fullwidth{\Large \textbf{Laboratory questions}}
+
+ \question
+ In the cabinet below your laboratory bench you will find a single
+ edged razor blade, several C-clamps, and a bottle of whiskey.
+ Remove your appendix. Do not suture until your work has been
+ inspected.
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ Is there, is there balm in Gilead?
+
+ \fullwidth{\Large \textbf{Essay questions}}
+
+ \question
+ Explain how the cooling of matter in the centuries following the big
+ bang has influenced the British parliamentary system of government.
+
+ \fullwidth{\Large \textbf{Laboratory questions}}
+
+ \question
+ In the cabinet below your laboratory bench you will find a single
+ edged razor blade, several C-clamps, and a bottle of whiskey.
+ Remove your appendix. Do not suture until your work has been
+ inspected.
+\end{questions}
+You can accomplish exactly the same thing by replacing
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \fullwidth{\Large \textbf{Essay questions}}
+\end{verbatim}
+by
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \begin{EnvFullwidth}
+ \Large \textbf{Essay questions}
+ \end{EnvFullwidth}
+\end{verbatim}
+and replacing
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \fullwidth{\Large \textbf{Laboratory questions}}
+\end{verbatim}
+by
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \begin{EnvFullwidth}
+ \Large \textbf{Laboratory questions}
+ \end{EnvFullwidth}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\indcstop{fullwidth}
+\indtstop{EnvFullwidth}
+\index{EnvFullwidth environment|)}
+\index{environment!EnvFullwidth|)}
+\indcstop{uplevel}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Using the standard sectioning commands}
+\label{sec:NameSection}
+
+The exam document class is built upon the standard article document
+class, and so the sectioning commands used with the article document
+class can be used here as well. In particular, you can give the
+commands \verb"\part",
+%
+\verb"\part"\indcsub{part}{standard sectioning command}
+%
+\verb"\part*", \verb"\section"\indc{section}, and \verb"\section*".
+The definitions made in \verb"exam.cls" ensure that if a \verb"\part"
+command appears \emph{outside of a parts environment} it will be
+interpreted as a sectioning command, while if it appears \emph{inside
+ of a parts environment} it will be interpreted as beginning a new
+part of a question.
+
+You can give these commands in the middle of a questions environment
+so as not to interrupt the numbering of the questions, or you can end
+a questions environment, give a sectioning command, and then start a
+new questions environment (which would reset the question counter to
+start again with number~1). If you have more than one questions
+environment, though, then you will be unable to use any of the
+commands that create grading\indc{gradetable} tables or
+point\indc{pointtable} tables (see section~\ref{sec:Tables}) or the
+commands that change the headers and footers depending on whether or
+not a question spans multiple pages (see
+section~\ref{sec:QuesSpan}).\indc{ifincomplete}\indc{ifcontinuation}
+
+If you give any of these commands while inside of a questions
+environment, then the section titles will be indented to the same
+extent that questions are indented unless they are given as the
+argument of a \verb"\fullwidth"\indc{fullwidth} or
+\verb"\uplevel"\indc{uplevel} command. These commands have the
+advantage, however, that the unstarred versions provide automatic
+numbering of the parts or sections.
+
+
+\index{naming parts of the exam|)}
+\index{indentation|)}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\section{Leaving space for the answers}
+\label{sec:LeaveSpace}
+\index{space!for answers|(}
+\index{answer space|(}
+
+There are five different kinds of space that you can create:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Blank space (see section~\ref{sec:BlankSpace}),
+\item an empty box (see section~\ref{sec:EmptyBox}),
+\item space filled with lines (see section~\ref{sec:FillLines}),
+\item space filled with dotted lines (see
+ section~\ref{sec:FillDotLines}), and
+\item space filled with a grid (see section~\ref{sec:FillGrid}).
+\end{itemize}
+You can also create answer lines for short answer questions (see
+section~\ref{sec:ShortAns}).
+In section~\ref{sec:solutions} we describe five environments for
+typing solutions to questions:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \texttt{solution},
+\item \texttt{solutionorbox},
+\item \texttt{solutionorlines},
+\item \texttt{solutionordottedlines}, and
+\item \texttt{solutionorgrid}.
+\end{itemize}
+Each of those environments can take an optional argument specifying an
+amount of space to be created when solutions are not being printed;
+see section~\ref{sec:SolSpace}.
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Leaving blank space}
+\label{sec:BlankSpace}
+\index{blank space|(}
+\index{space!blank|(}
+
+To leave blank space on the page for the answer to a question, you
+should use the \verb"\vspace*"\indc{vspace*} command. For example,
+the command \verb"\vspace*{1in}" inserts one inch of vertical space
+after the line in which it appears. (If it appears in between
+paragraphs, then it inserts the space right there.) You can also use
+the \verb"\vspace"\indc{vspace} command, the difference being that
+space inserted by \verb"\vspace" will be deleted if it occurs at the
+top of a new page, whereas space inserted by \verb"\vspace*" will
+never be deleted.
+
+If you want to leave all the remaining space on the page blank, you
+should give the commands\indc{stretch}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\vspace*{\stretch{1}}"\\
+ \verb"\newpage"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+If you want to equally distribute the blank space among several
+questions on the page, then just put
+\verb"\vspace*{\stretch{1}}"\index{space!allocating} after each of the
+questions and use \verb"\newpage"\indc{newpage} to end the page. You
+can also distribute the available space in some other ratio. For
+example, to give one of the questions on the page twice as much space
+as any of the others, put \verb"\vspace*{\stretch{2}}" after that
+question and \verb"\vspace*{\stretch{1}}" after each of the others.
+
+You can also leave blank space when solutions are not being printed by
+using an optional argument with a \verb"solution" environment; see
+section~\ref{sec:SolSpace}.
+
+\index{space!blank|)}
+\index{blank space|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Printing an empty box}
+\label{sec:EmptyBox}
+\index{space!empty box|(}
+\index{empty box|(}
+\indcstart{makeemptybox}
+
+You can print an empty box with the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\makeemptybox{length}"
+\end{center}
+which prints an empty box of height \verb"length" whose width equals
+that of the current line. That is, the left edge is at the current
+left margin (which depends on whether we're in a question, part,
+subpart, or subsubpart) and the right edge is at the right margin.
+(The box printed by the \verb"\makeemptybox" command can be printed in
+color; for that, see section~\ref{sec:colorboxes}.)
+
+
+\medskip
+
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+
+ \makeemptybox{1in}
+
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to make
+ the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+
+ \makeemptybox{1in}
+
+ \part
+ Where should the field generator be constructed if you want one of
+ the vertices to be located at the Royal Observatory at Greenwich?
+
+ \makeemptybox{1in}
+
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+
+ \makeemptybox{1in}
+
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to make
+ the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+
+ \makeemptybox{1in}
+
+ \part
+ Where should the field generator be constructed if you want one of
+ the vertices to be located at the Royal Observatory at Greenwich?
+
+ \makeemptybox{1in}
+
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+
+\medskip
+
+If you want to fill the remaining space on the page with an empty box,
+you should give the commands\indc{stretch}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\makeemptybox{\stretch{1}}"\\
+ \verb"\newpage"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+If you want to equally distribute the space for the answers among
+several questions on the page, then just put
+\verb"\makeemptybox{\stretch{1}}"\index{space!allocating} after each
+of those questions and use \verb"\newpage"\indc{newpage} to end the
+page. You can also distribute the available space in some other
+ratio. For example, to give one of the questions on the page twice as
+much space as any of the others, put \verb"\makeemptybox{\stretch{2}}"
+after that question, \verb"\makeemptybox{\stretch{1}}" after each of
+the others, and use \verb"\newpage" to end the page.
+
+You can also insert an empty box when solutions are not being printed
+by including an optional argument with the \verb"solutionoremptybox"
+environment; see section~\ref{sec:SolSpace}.
+
+
+\indcstop{makeemptybox}
+\index{empty box|)}
+\index{space!empty box|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Printing lined space}
+\label{sec:FillLines}
+\index{space!lined|(}
+\index{lined space|(}
+\indcstart{fillwithlines}
+
+
+You can fill space with lines with the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\fillwithlines{length}"
+\end{center}
+which fills vertical space of height \verb"length" with horizontal
+lines that run the length of the current line. That is, they extend
+from the current left margin (which depends on whether we're in a
+question, part, subpart, or subsubpart) to the right margin.
+
+By default, the lines are in black. However, if you give the
+commands\indc{colorfillwithlines}\index{color package}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\usepackage{color}"\\
+ \verb"\colorfillwithlines"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+then the lines will be in color, by default a light gray. That
+default color was defined by the
+command\indc{definecolor}\indt{FillWithLinesColor}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\definecolor{FillWithLinesColor}{gray}{0.8}"
+\end{center}
+\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\fillwithlines}} You can change
+the color by giving a new \verb"\definecolor" command to redefine the
+color \texttt{FillWithLinesColor}.
+
+\medskip
+
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+
+ \fillwithlines{1in}
+
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to make
+ the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+
+ \fillwithlines{1in}
+
+ \part
+ Where should the field generator be constructed if you want one of
+ the vertices to be located at the Royal Observatory at Greenwich?
+
+ \fillwithlines{1in}
+
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+
+ \fillwithlines{1in}
+
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to make
+ the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+
+ \fillwithlines{1in}
+
+ \part
+ Where should the field generator be constructed if you want one of
+ the vertices to be located at the Royal Observatory at Greenwich?
+
+ \fillwithlines{1in}
+
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+
+\medskip The distance between the lines is
+\verb"\linefillheight"\indc{linefillheight}, the default value of
+which is set with the
+command\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\fillwithlines}}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength\linefillheight{.25in}"
+\end{center}
+That value can be changed by giving a new \verb"\setlength" command.
+The thickness of the lines is
+\verb"\linefillthickness"\indc{linefillthickness}, the default value
+of which is set with the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength\linefillthickness{0.1pt}"
+\end{center}
+and that value can also be changed by giving a new \verb"\setlength"
+command.
+
+If you want to fill the remaining space on the page with lines, you
+should give the commands\indc{stretch}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\fillwithlines{\stretch{1}}"\\
+ \verb"\newpage"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+If you want to equally distribute the space for the answers among
+several questions on the page, then just put
+\verb"\fillwithlines{\stretch{1}}"\index{space!allocating} after each
+of those questions and use \verb"\newpage" to end the page. You can
+also distribute the available space in some other ratio. For example,
+to give one of the questions on the page twice as much space as any of
+the others, put \verb"\fillwithlines{\stretch{2}}" after that
+question, \verb"\fillwithlines{\stretch{1}}" after each of the others,
+and use \verb"\newpage" to end the page.
+
+You can also insert lined space when solutions are not being printed
+by including an optional argument with the \verb"solutionorlines"
+environment; see section~\ref{sec:SolSpace}.
+
+\indcstop{fillwithlines}
+\index{lined space|)}
+\index{space!lined|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Printing dotted lined space}
+\label{sec:FillDotLines}
+\index{space!dotted lined|(}
+\index{dotted lined space|(}
+\indcstart{fillwithdottedlines}
+
+
+You can fill space with dotted lines with the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\fillwithdottedlines{length}"
+\end{center}
+which fills vertical space of height \verb"length" with dotted
+horizontal lines that run the length of the current line. That is,
+they extend from the current left margin (which depends on whether
+we're in a question, part, subpart, or subsubpart) to the right
+margin. The command \verb"\fillwithdottedlines" is almost identical
+to the \verb"\fillwithlines" command (see
+section~\ref{sec:FillLines}), except that the lines created are dotted
+and the distance between the lines is
+\verb"\dottedlinefillheight"\indc{dottedlinefillheight}. The default
+value of \verb"\dottedlinefillheight" is set by the
+command\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\fillwithdottedlines}}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength\dottedlinefillheight{.25in}"
+\end{center}
+and that value can be changed by giving a new \verb"\setlength"
+command.
+
+By default, the dotted lines are in black. However, if you give the
+commands\indc{colorfillwithdottedlines}\index{color package}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\usepackage{color}"\\
+ \verb"\colorfillwithdottedlines"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+then the dotted lines will be in color, by default a light gray. That
+default color was defined by the
+command\indc{definecolor}\indt{FillWithDottedLinesColor}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\definecolor{FillWithDottedLinesColor}{gray}{0.8}"
+\end{center}
+\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\fillwithdottedlines}} You can
+change the color by giving a new \verb"\definecolor" command to
+redefine the color \texttt{FillWithDottedLinesColor}.
+
+\medskip
+
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+
+ \fillwithdottedlines{1in}
+
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to make
+ the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+
+ \fillwithdottedlines{1in}
+
+ \part
+ Where should the field generator be constructed if you want one of
+ the vertices to be located at the Royal Observatory at Greenwich?
+
+ \fillwithdottedlines{1in}
+
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+
+ \fillwithdottedlines{1in}
+
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to make
+ the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+
+ \fillwithdottedlines{1in}
+
+ \part
+ Where should the field generator be constructed if you want one of
+ the vertices to be located at the Royal Observatory at Greenwich?
+
+ \fillwithdottedlines{1in}
+
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+
+If you want to fill the remaining space on the page with dotted lines,
+you should give the commands\indc{stretch}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\fillwithdottedlines{\stretch{1}}"\\
+ \verb"\newpage"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+If you want to equally distribute the space for the answers among
+several questions on the page, then just put
+\verb"\fillwithdottedlines{\stretch{1}}"\index{space!allocating} after
+each question on the page and use \verb"\newpage" to end the page.
+You can also distribute the available space in some other ratio. For
+example, to give one of the questions on the page twice as much space
+as any of the others, put \verb"\fillwithdottedlines{\stretch{2}}"
+after that question, \verb"\fillwithdottedlines{\stretch{1}}" after
+each of the others, and use \verb"\newpage" to end the page.
+
+You can also insert dotted lined space when solutions are not being
+printed by including an optional argument with the
+\verb"solutionordottedlines" environment; see
+section~\ref{sec:SolSpace}.
+
+\indcstop{fillwithdottedlines}
+\index{dotted lined space|)}
+\index{space!dotted lined|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Printing space filled with a grid}
+\label{sec:FillGrid}
+\index{space!grid|(}
+\index{grid space|(}
+\indcstart{fillwithgrid}
+
+
+You can fill space with a grid with the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\fillwithgrid{length}"
+\end{center}
+which fills vertical space of height \texttt{length} with a grid that
+runs the length of the current line. That is, it extends from the
+current left margin (which depends on whether we're in a question,
+part, subpart, or subsubpart) to the right margin.
+The default grid size and grid line thickness were set by the
+commands
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\setlength{\gridsize}{5mm}"\\
+ \verb"\setlength{\gridlinewidth}{0.1pt}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\fillwithgrid}} You can change
+either or both of those by giving new \verb"\setlength" commands. The
+period of the grid is \verb"\gridsize" (both horizontally and
+vertically). That is, the horizontal distance from the left edge of
+one vertical line to the left edge of the next vertical line is
+\verb"\gridsize", as is the vertical distance from the top edge of one
+horizontal line to the top edge of the next horizontal line. Thus,
+each square has outer side length equal to
+\verb"\gridsize+\gridlinewidth".
+
+By default, the created grids are in black. However, if you give the
+commands\indc{colorgrids}\index{color package}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\usepackage{color}"\\
+ \verb"\colorgrids"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+then the grids will be in color, by default a light gray. That
+default color was defined by the
+command\indc{definecolor}\indt{GridColor}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\definecolor{GridColor}{gray}{0.8}"
+\end{center}
+\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\fillwithgrid}} You can change the
+color by giving a new \verb"\definecolor" command to redefine the
+color \texttt{GridColor}.
+
+
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+
+ \smallskip\fillwithgrid{1in}
+
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to make
+ the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+
+ \smallskip\fillwithgrid{1in}
+
+ \part
+ Where should the field generator be constructed if you want one of
+ the vertices to be located at the Royal Observatory at Greenwich?
+
+ \smallskip\fillwithgrid{1in}
+
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ In no more than one paragraph, explain why the earth is round.
+
+ \smallskip\fillwithgrid{1in}
+
+ \question
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ What changes to the van Allen radiation belt are needed to make
+ the earth into a regular icosahedron?
+
+ \smallskip\fillwithgrid{1in}
+
+ \part
+ Where should the field generator be constructed if you want one of
+ the vertices to be located at the Royal Observatory at Greenwich?
+
+ \smallskip\fillwithgrid{1in}
+
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+
+If you want to fill the remaining space on the page with a grid, you
+should give the commands\indc{stretch}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\fillwithgrid{\stretch{1}}"\\
+ \verb"\newpage"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+If you want to equally distribute the space for the answers among
+several questions on the page, then just put
+\verb"\fillwithgrid{\stretch{1}}"\index{space!allocating} after each
+question on the page and use \verb"\newpage" to end the page. You can
+also distribute the available space in some other ratio. For example,
+to give one of the questions on the page twice as much space as any of
+the others, put \verb"\fillwithgrid{\stretch{2}}" after that question,
+\verb"\fillwithgrid{\stretch{1}}" after each of the others, and use
+\verb"\newpage" to end the page.
+
+You can also insert a grid only when solutions are not being
+printed by including an optional argument with the
+\verb"solutionorgrid" environment; see
+section~\ref{sec:SolSpace}.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Covering every page with a grid}
+\label{sec:CoverWGrid}
+\index{grid!covering every page}
+
+If you'd like \emph{every} page to be completely covered by a grid,
+with the exam printed right on top of that grid, you can do that by
+using a \verb"\fillwithgrid" command in the footer. For this, make
+sure you're using either \verb"\pagestyle{headandfoot}" (the default)
+or \verb"\pagestyle{foot}" (see section~\ref{sec:pagestyle}), and put
+the following into your preamble (i.e., after the
+\verb"\documentclass" command and before the \verb"\begin{document}"
+ command):\index{color package}\indc{gridfromfoot}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{color}
+\colorgrids
+\newlength{\scratchlength}
+\newcommand{\gridfromfoot}{%
+ \setlength{\scratchlength}{\textheight}%
+ \addtolength{\scratchlength}{\baselineskip}%
+ \leavevmode\rlap{\vbox to 0pt{%
+ \vss
+ \fillwithgrid{\scratchlength}%
+ \vspace*{\footskip}%
+ }% vbox
+ }% rlap
+}% gridfromfoot
+
+\footer{\gridfromfoot Math 115}
+ {}
+ {Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Printing graph paper}
+\label{sec:GraphPaper}
+
+You can also use the \verb"\fillwithgrid" command to print graph
+paper:\index{graph paper}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{exam}
+\pagestyle{empty}
+\begin{document}
+
+\fillwithgrid{\stretch{1}}
+
+\newpage
+
+\fillwithgrid{\stretch{1}}
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+
+\indcstop{fillwithgrid}
+\index{grid space|)}
+\index{space!grid|)}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Short answer questions}
+\label{sec:ShortAns}
+\indcstart{answerline}
+\index{short answers|(}
+
+The exam class can print answer lines for short answer questions. The
+command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\answerline"
+\end{center}
+leaves blank vertical space of length
+\verb"\answerskip"\indc{answerskip} and then inserts a horizontal line
+of length \verb"\answerlinelength"\indc{answerlinelength}%
+\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\answerline}} at the right margin,
+preceded by the number of the current question, part, subpart, or
+subsubpart. The default values of \verb"\answerskip" and
+\verb"\answerlinelength" are set by the
+commands\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\answerline}}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\setlength\answerskip{2ex}"\\
+ \verb"\setlength\answerlinelength{1in}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+and these can be changed by giving new \verb"\setlength" commands.
+If you use the command \verb"\answerline" outside of a
+\verb"questions" environment, then the number before the line will be
+omitted.
+
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ Who's buried in Grant's tomb?
+ \answerline
+
+ \question
+ What was the color of George Washington's white horse?
+ \answerline
+
+ \question
+ Which is heavier: A pound of feathers, or a pound of lead?
+ \answerline
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ Who's buried in Grant's tomb?
+ \answerline
+
+ \question
+ What was the color of George Washington's white horse?
+ \answerline
+
+ \question
+ Which is heavier: A pound of feathers, or a pound of lead?
+ \answerline
+\end{questions}
+and if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ Answer the following questions on the lines at the right:
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ Who's buried in Grant's tomb? \answerline
+
+ \part
+ \begin{subparts}
+ \subpart
+ What light through yonder window breaks? \answerline
+
+ \subpart
+ To be, or not to be; that is the question? \answerline
+ \end{subparts}
+
+ \part
+ What was the color of George Washington's white horse? \answerline
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question
+ Answer the following questions on the lines at the right:
+ \begin{parts}
+ \part
+ Who's buried in Grant's tomb? \answerline
+
+ \part
+ \begin{subparts}
+ \subpart
+ What light through yonder window breaks? \answerline
+
+ \subpart
+ To be, or not to be; that is the question? \answerline
+ \end{subparts}
+
+ \part
+ What was the color of George Washington's white horse? \answerline
+ \end{parts}
+\end{questions}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Printing the answers to short answer questions}
+\label{sec:AnsShortAns}
+\index{short answers!answers to|(}
+\index{answers!to short answers|(}
+
+The \verb"\answerline"\indcsub{answerline}{optional~argument} command
+can take an optional argument so that you can have the answer to the
+question printed on the answer line when answers are being printed
+(see section~\ref{sec:answers}). When answers are not being printed,
+the optional argument is ignored.
+
+When answers are being printed, the optional argument is printed
+subject to the declarations in the argument of the last
+\verb"\CorrectChoiceEmphasis"\indc{CorrectChoiceEmphasis} command
+(which by default is
+\verb"\bfseries"\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\CorrectChoice}};
+see section~\ref{sec:CorrectChoice}), and it is printed a distance of
+\verb"\answerclearance"\indc{answerclearance}%
+\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\answerline}} above the line. The
+default value of \verb"\answerclearance" is set with the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength\answerclearance{0.2ex}"
+\end{center}
+and it can be changed with a \verb"\setlength" command. The optional
+argument is centered on the answer line unless it is longer than the
+line, in which case it extends to the right of the line.
+
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question Who was the fifth Beatle? \answerline[Murray the K]
+ \question What is the answer to the ultimate question of life, the
+ universe, and everything? \answerline[42]
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+and if \verb"\noprintanswers" (the default) is in effect, you'll get
+\begin{questions}
+ \question Who was the fifth Beatle? \answerline[Murray the K]
+ \question What is the answer to the ultimate question of life, the
+ universe, and everything? \answerline[42]
+\end{questions}
+while if \verb"\printanswers" is in effect, you'll get \printanswers
+\begin{questions}
+ \question Who was the fifth Beatle? \answerline[Murray the K]
+ \question What is the answer to the ultimate question of life, the
+ universe, and everything? \answerline[42]
+\end{questions}
+\noprintanswers
+
+\index{answers!to short answers|)}
+\index{short answers!answers to|)}
+
+\index{short answers|)}
+\indcstop{answerline}
+
+\index{answer space|)}
+\index{space!for answers|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\section{Solutions}
+\label{sec:solutions}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Solution environments}
+\label{sec:SolEnv}
+\index{solutions|(}
+\index{solution environment@\texttt{solution} environment|(}
+\index{answers|(}
+\index{environment!solution@\texttt{solution}|(}
+\index{environment!solutionorbox@\texttt{solutionorbox}|(}
+\index{environment!solutionorlines@\texttt{solutionorlines}|(}
+\index{environment!solutionordottedlines@\texttt{solutionordottedlines}|(}
+\index{environment!solutionorgrid@\texttt{solutionorgrid}|(}
+\index{solutionorbox environment|(}
+\index{solutionorlines environment|(}
+\index{solutionordottedlines environment|(}
+
+
+There are six environments for typing solutions to the problems.
+These environments all allow you to either print the solutions or omit
+them with a single command. Whether or not solutions are
+printed is controlled by the two
+commands\indc{printanswers}\indc{noprintanswers}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\printanswers"\\
+ \verb"\noprintanswers"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Using these commands to turn printing of solutions on and off, you can
+print the solutions for the entire exam or for only certain parts of
+it. The default is that solutions are \emph{not} printed. There is
+also an \verb"answers"\indt{answers}\indcsub{documentclass}{options}
+option to the \verb"exam" document class, used as in
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\documentclass[answers]{exam}"
+\end{center}
+that is equivalent to giving the command
+\verb"\printanswers"\indc{printanswers} at the beginning of the
+document (see section~\ref{sec:answers}).
+
+The six environments for solutions are divided into two types.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item The \texttt{solutionbox} environment (see
+ section~\ref{sec:solutionbox}) always prints a box, of whatever size
+ you choose, and if solutions are being printed it prints the
+ solution inside of the box.
+\item Each of the remaining five (see section~\ref{sec:SolSpace}),
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{rll}
+ the& \verb"solution"& environment,\\
+ the& \verb"solutionorbox"& environment,\\
+ the& \verb"solutionorlines"& environment,\\
+ the& \verb"solutionordottedlines"& environment, and\\
+ the& \verb"solutionorgrid"& environment,
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+ by default prints either the solution or nothing at all. However,
+ they all can take one optional argument, which is an amount of space
+ to be left when solutions are not being printed. If you use these
+ environments without any optional arguments, then they are
+ identical: They print either the solution or nothing at all. They
+ differ only in the type of space they leave when you do include the
+ optional argument and solutions are not being printed.
+
+ The differences between these five environments are that if the
+ optional argument is used and solutions are not being printed, then
+ %
+ \index{solution environment@\texttt{solution} environment!optional argument}
+ %
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item the \verb"solution" enviroment inserts that amount of blank
+ space, as if you had given a \verb"\vspace*"\indc{vspace*} command
+ (see section~\ref{sec:BlankSpace}),
+ \item the \verb"solutionorbox" environment inserts an empty box of
+ that height, as if you had given a
+ \verb"\makeemptybox"\indc{makeemptybox} command (see
+ section~\ref{sec:EmptyBox}),
+ \item the \verb"solutionorlines" environment inserts that amount of
+ space with ruled lines, as if you had given a
+ \verb"\fillwithlines"\indc{fillwithlines} command (see
+ section~\ref{sec:FillLines}),
+ \item the \verb"solutionordottedlines" environment inserts that
+ amount of space with dotted lines, as if you had given a
+ \verb"\fillwithdottedlines"\indc{fillwithdottedlines} command (see
+ section~\ref{sec:FillDotLines}), and
+ \item the \verb"solutionorgrid" environment inserts that amount of
+ space filled with a grid, as if you had given a
+ \verb"\fillwithgrid"\indc{fillwithgrid} command (see
+ section~\ref{sec:FillGrid}).
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+
+You can use a parts, subparts, or subsubparts environment inside any
+of the solution environments without having their points (if any)
+counted as actual points on the exam. If there are points assigned to
+any of these commands inside any of the solution environments, those
+points are not added to the points of the question or the points on
+the page, and do not affect any gradetables or pointtables.
+
+
+\index{solutionorbox environment|)}
+\index{solutionorlines environment|)}
+\index{solutionordottedlines environment|)}
+\index{environment!solution@\texttt{solution}|)}
+\index{environment!solutionorbox@\texttt{solutionorbox}|)}
+\index{environment!solutionorlines@\texttt{solutionorlines}|)}
+\index{environment!solutionordottedlines@\texttt{solutionordottedlines}|)}
+\index{environment!solutionorgrid@\texttt{solutionorgrid}|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{The appearance of the solution}
+\label{sec:SolAppear}
+\index{solution!appearance|(}
+
+The solutions printed by the
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"solution",\\
+ \verb"solutionorbox",\\
+ \verb"solutionorlines",\\
+ \verb"solutionordottedlines", and\\
+ \verb"solutionorgrid"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+environments can be printed either
+\begin{itemize}
+\item in a box (i.e., an \verb"\fbox") (see section~\ref{sec:SolBox};
+ this is the default),
+\item on a shaded background (see section~\ref{sec:shaded}), or
+\item with no framing or shading (see section~\ref{sec:SolPlain}).
+\end{itemize}
+In all of these cases, solutions can be broken across pages, and the
+part on each page will be boxed or shaded as appropriate. In
+addition, the \verb"\SolutionEmphasis" command can be used to
+highlight the text of the solution (using, e.g., boldface, or italics,
+or color); see section~\ref{sec:SolEmph}.
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Printing the solution in a box}
+\label{sec:SolBox}
+\index{solution!in a box|(}
+
+By default, the solution is printed inside of a box (i.e., an
+\verb"\fbox"\indc{fbox}), and if the solution is broken across pages,
+then each piece is enclosed in a box. (The box can be printed in
+color; for that, see section~\ref{sec:colorboxes}.) There is also a
+\verb"\shadedsolutions"\indc{shadedsolutions} command to instead have
+the solution printed in a \verb"\colorbox"\indc{colorbox} (i.e.,
+printed on a shaded background); for this, you must load the
+%
+\verb"color"\index{color package} package and your printer must be
+capable of printing color, or at least grayscale (see
+section~\ref{sec:shaded}).
+
+\medskip
+
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question Did you mutter something?
+
+ \begin{solution}
+ Once upon a midnight dreary, while I pondered, weak and weary,
+ Over many a quaint and curious volume of forgotten lore--- While I
+ nodded, nearly napping, suddenly there came a tapping, As of some
+ one gently rapping, rapping at my chamber door. ``\,'Tis some
+ visitor,'' I muttered, ``tapping at my chamber door--- Only this
+ and nothing more.''
+ \end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+and you've given the command \verb"\printanswers"\indc{printanswers}
+or used the document class option \verb"answers"\indt{answers} (see
+section~\ref{sec:answers}), then you'll get \bigskip
+\begin{questions}
+ \question Did you mutter something?
+
+ \begin{TheSolution}
+ Once upon a midnight dreary, while I pondered, weak and weary,
+ Over many a quaint and curious volume of forgotten lore--- While I
+ nodded, nearly napping, suddenly there came a tapping, As of some
+ one gently rapping, rapping at my chamber door. ``\,'Tis some
+ visitor,'' I muttered, ``tapping at my chamber door--- Only this
+ and nothing more.''
+ \end{TheSolution}
+\end{questions}
+The result would be exactly the same if that \texttt{solution}
+environment were replaced by a \texttt{solutionorbox},
+\texttt{solutionorlines}, \texttt{solutionordottedlines}, or
+\texttt{solutionorgrid} environment.
+
+By default, the solution is printed in a box whose width equals that
+of the text of the current question (or part, or subpart, or
+subsubpart). That is, the indentation at the left of the solution
+equals the current level of indentation. You can change this by
+enclosing the \texttt{solution}, \texttt{solutionorbox},
+\texttt{solutionorlines}, \texttt{solutionordottedlines}, or
+\texttt{solutionorgrid} environment in the argument of a
+\verb"\fullwidth"\indc{fullwidth} or \verb"\uplevel"\indc{uplevel}
+command, or inside of a \texttt{EnvFullwidth}\indt{EnvFullwidth}%
+\index{EnvFullwidth environment}\index{environment!EnvFullwidth} or
+%
+\texttt{EnvUplevel}\indt{EnvUplevel}\index{EnvUplevel environment}%
+\index{environment!EnvUplevel}%
+environment (see section~\ref{sec:uplevel}). For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{questions}
+ \question Did you mutter something?
+
+ \begin{EnvFullwidth}
+ \begin{TheSolution}
+ Once upon a midnight dreary, while I pondered, weak and weary,
+ Over many a quaint and curious volume of forgotten lore--- While
+ I nodded, nearly napping, suddenly there came a tapping, As of
+ some one gently rapping, rapping at my chamber door. ``\,'Tis
+ some visitor,'' I muttered, ``tapping at my chamber door--- Only
+ this and nothing more.''
+ \end{TheSolution}
+ \end{EnvFullwidth}
+\end{questions}
+\end{verbatim}
+and you've given the command \verb"\printanswers"\indc{printanswers}
+or used the document class option \verb"answers"\indt{answers}, then
+you'll get \bigskip
+\begin{questions}
+ \question Did you mutter something?
+
+ \begin{EnvFullwidth}
+ \begin{TheSolution}
+ Once upon a midnight dreary, while I pondered, weak and weary,
+ Over many a quaint and curious volume of forgotten lore--- While
+ I nodded, nearly napping, suddenly there came a tapping, As of
+ some one gently rapping, rapping at my chamber door. ``\,'Tis
+ some visitor,'' I muttered, ``tapping at my chamber door--- Only
+ this and nothing more.''
+ \end{TheSolution}
+ \end{EnvFullwidth}
+\end{questions}
+
+With all of these environments, if solutions are not being printed
+then the contents of the environment are ignored. If, however, you
+include the optional argument (see section~\ref{sec:SolSpace}), then
+the requested amount of space (blank, lined, or dotted lined) will be
+inserted when the solution isn't printed.
+
+\index{solution!in a box|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Printing the solution on a shaded background}
+\label{sec:shaded}
+\index{solution!shaded|(}
+
+If you load the \verb"color" package with the
+command\index{color package}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\usepackage{color}"
+\end{center}
+in the preamble of your document (i.e., after the
+\verb"\documentclass" command and before the \verb"\begin{document}"
+ command), then you can give the command\indc{shadedsolutions}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\shadedsolutions"
+\end{center}
+This will cause solutions to be printed on a shaded background, which
+by default is a light gray. (Most laser printers can at least print
+grayscale when printing with the correct driver.) If you want to
+change the color of the shading, you can do so by redefining the color
+\verb"SolutionColor"\indc{SolutionColor}. For example, if you give
+the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\definecolor{SolutionColor}{rgb}{0.8,0.9,1}"
+\end{center}
+then the solutions will be printed on a light blue background
+(assuming that your printer is capable of producing that color).
+
+If you want to switch back to printing solutions inside of an
+\verb"\fbox"\indc{fbox}, you can do so by giving the
+command\indc{framedsolutions}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\framedsolutions"
+\end{center}
+which returns you to the default situation.
+
+\index{solution!shaded|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Printing the solution with no framing or shading}
+\label{sec:SolPlain}
+\index{solution!no framing or shading|(}
+
+If you give the command\indc{unframedsolutions}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\unframedsolutions"
+\end{center}
+then solutions will be printed as normal text, with no framing or
+shading. If you use this option, you'll almost certainly want to use
+the command \verb"\SolutionEmphasis"\indc{SolutionEmphasis} (see
+section~\ref{sec:SolEmph}) to distinguish the solution from the
+surrounding text.
+
+If you want to switch back to printing solutions inside of an
+\verb"\fbox", you can do so by giving the
+command\indc{framedsolutions}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\framedsolutions"
+\end{center}
+which returns you to the default situation.
+
+\index{solution!no framing or shading|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Imported graphics in solutions}
+\label{sec:graphics}
+\index{graphics|(}
+\indc{includegraphics}
+
+Graphics can be included inside solution environments using the
+\verb"\includegraphics" command, as long as you've given the command
+\verb"\usepackage{graphicx}" in the preamble (i.e., after the
+\verb"\documentclass" command and before the \verb"\begin{document}"
+ command).
+
+A problem sometimes arises because many \LaTeX{} manuals say that you
+should put an \verb"\includegraphics" command inside of a
+\texttt{figure} environment, so that it will float to a convenient
+place on a page. The problem with this is that floating environments
+can't appear inside of a solution environment.
+
+There are (at least) two solutions to this problem, depending on
+whether you really want the graphic to float away from the location at
+which you've typed it.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item If you want the graphic to float, put the \texttt{figure}
+ environment \emph{outside} of the solution environment, using
+ \verb"\ifprintanswers" to ensure that it's printed only when
+ solutions are being printed, as in
+\begin{verbatim}
+\ifprintanswers
+ \begin{figure}
+ \includegraphics[width=7cm]{myfigure.pdf}
+ \caption{This is a lovely figure}
+ \label{fig:lovely}
+ \end{figure}
+\fi
+\end{verbatim}
+\item If you \emph{don't} want the graphic to float, then omit the
+ \texttt{figure} environment and just put the \verb"\includegraphics"
+ command wherever you want the graphic to appear. If you want the
+ graphic to have a caption, then put the command
+ \verb"\usepackage{caption}" in your preamble and then use the
+ \verb"\captionof" command, as in
+\begin{verbatim}
+\includegraphics[width=7cm]{myfigure.pdf}
+\captionof{figure}{This is a lovely figure}
+\label{fig:lovely}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\index{graphics|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Customizing the solution}
+\label{sec:SolCust}
+\index{customization!solution|(}
+\index{solution!customizing|(}
+
+The solutions printed by any of the solution environments (see
+section~\ref{sec:SolEnv}) can be customized:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the title (by default, ``\textbf{Solution:}'') can be changed
+ (see section~\ref{sec:SolTitle}),
+\item emphasis can be applied to the solution to distinguish it from
+ the surrounding text (see section~\ref{sec:SolEmph}), and
+\item advanced users can entirely change the appearance of the
+ solutions by defining a \LaTeX{} environment (see
+ section~\ref{sec:AdvCust}).
+\end{itemize}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{The title}
+\label{sec:SolTitle}
+
+The word ``\textbf{Solution:}'' that you see at the beginning of the
+solutions printed by the \texttt{solution}, \texttt{solutionorbox},
+\texttt{solutionorlines}, and \texttt{solutionordottedlines}
+environments can be changed by redefining the command
+\verb"\solutiontitle"\indc{solutiontitle}. The default value was
+created by the command
+\begin{center}
+\verb"\newcommand{\solutiontitle}{\noindent\textbf{Solution:}\enspace}"
+\end{center}
+If, for example, you give the command
+\begin{center}
+\verb"\renewcommand{\solutiontitle}{\noindent\textbf{Solution:}\par\noindent}"
+\end{center}
+then the \verb"solution" environment above would print
+\renewcommand{\solutiontitle}{\noindent\textbf{Solution:}\par\noindent}
+\par\bigskip
+\begin{questions}
+\question Did you mutter something?
+
+\begin{TheSolution}
+ Once upon a midnight dreary, while I pondered, weak and weary, Over
+ many a quaint and curious volume of forgotten lore--- While I
+ nodded, nearly napping, suddenly there came a tapping, As of some
+ one gently rapping, rapping at my chamber door. ``\,'Tis some
+ visitor,'' I muttered, ``tapping at my chamber door--- Only this and
+ nothing more.''
+\end{TheSolution}
+\end{questions}
+\renewcommand{\solutiontitle}{\noindent\textbf{Solution:}\enspace}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Solution emphasis}
+\label{sec:SolEmph}
+
+You can change the appearance of the text of the solution with the
+\verb"\SolutionEmphasis"\indc{SolutionEmphasis} command. The contents
+of the solution are enclosed in a group, and that group is begun with
+the argument of the most recent
+\verb"\SolutionEmphasis"\indc{SolutionEmphasis} command. The default
+was created by the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\SolutionEmphasis{}"
+\end{center}
+That is, the default is not to add any emphasis at all. If, for
+example, you give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\SolutionEmphasis{\itshape\small}"
+\end{center}
+then the solutions will be set in italics, in small type. For another
+example, if you've given the command \verb"\usepackage{color}" in the
+preamble of your document (i.e., after the \verb"\documentclass"
+command and before the \verb"\begin{document}") and you give the
+command\indc{SolutionEmphasis}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\SolutionEmphasis{\color{red}}"
+\end{center}
+then the solutions will be printed in red (assuming your printer is
+capable of producing that color).
+
+\textbf{Note:} If you've given the command
+\verb"\unframedsolutions"\indc{unframedsolutions} (see
+section~\ref{sec:SolPlain}), so that solutions are printed as normal
+text with no framing or shading, then you'll almost certainly want to
+use the \verb"\SolutionEmphasis"\indc{SolutionEmphasis} command to
+create some visible difference between the solutions and the
+surrounding text.
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Advanced customizations}
+\label{sec:AdvCust}
+\index{TheSolution environment}
+\index{environment!TheSolution}
+
+The appearance of all of these solution environments can actually be
+totally customized, if you're up to defining a \LaTeX{} environment.
+The appearance of the solution typed into any of these environments is
+defined by an environment called \verb"TheSolution"\indt{TheSolution},
+and you can change the definition of \verb"TheSolution" with a
+\verb"\renewenvironment" command. That is, the \verb"solution"
+environment decides whether the command \verb"\printanswers" has been
+given and, if so, it feeds the contents of the \verb"solution"
+environment into a \verb"TheSolution" environment. (The behavior of a
+\texttt{solutionorbox}, \texttt{solutionorlines} or
+\texttt{solutionordottedlines} environment is similar.) If you use
+\verb"\renewenvironment" to change the definition of the
+\verb"TheSolution" environment, you'll be changing the way the
+solution is printed. For the default definition of the
+\verb"TheSolution" environment, see the file \verb"exam.cls".
+
+\index{solution!customizing|)}
+\index{customization!solution|)}
+
+\index{solution!appearance|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Leaving space for the answers when solutions aren't
+ printed}
+\label{sec:SolSpace}
+\index{space!for answers|(}
+\index{answer space|(}
+\index{solution environment@\texttt{solution} environment!optional argument|(}
+
+Each of the \texttt{solution}, \texttt{solutionorbox},
+\texttt{solutionorlines}, \texttt{solutionordottedlines}, and
+\texttt{solutionorgrid} environments takes an optional argument:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item In a
+ %
+ \verb"solution"
+ %
+ \index{solution environment@\texttt{solution} environment!optional argument}
+ %
+ environment this is an amount of blank space to be left (just as if
+ you had used a \verb"\vspace*"\indc{vspace*} command; see
+ section~\ref{sec:BlankSpace}) when solutions are not being printed,
+\item in a
+ %
+ \verb"solutionorbox"\indtsub{solutionorbox}{optional argument}
+ %
+ environment this is the height of an empty box to be drawn (just as
+ if you had used a \verb"\makeemptybox"\indc{makeemptybox} command;
+ see section~\ref{sec:EmptyBox}) when solutions are not being
+ printed,
+\item in a
+ %
+ \verb"solutionorlines"\indtsub{solutionorlines}{optional argument}
+ %
+ environment this is an amount of lined space to be left (just as if
+ you had used a \verb"\fillwithlines"\indc{fillwithlines} command;
+ see section~\ref{sec:FillLines}) when solutions are not being
+ printed,
+\item in a\indtsub{solutionordottedlines}{optional argument}
+ \verb"solutionordottedlines" environment this is an amount of dotted
+ lined space to be left (just as if you had used a
+ \verb"\fillwithdottedlines"\indc{fillwithdottedlines} command; see
+ section~\ref{sec:FillDotLines}) when solutions are not being
+ printed.
+\item in a\indtsub{solutionorgrid}{optional argument}
+ \verb"solutionorgrid" environment this is an amount of space to be
+ filled with a grid (just as if you had used a
+ \verb"\fillwithgrid"\indc{fillwithgrid} command; see
+ section~\ref{sec:FillGrid}) when solutions are not being
+ printed.
+\end{itemize}
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{solution}[2in]
+ Once upon a midnight dreary, while I pondered, weak and weary, Over
+ many a quaint and curious volume of forgotten lore--- While I
+ nodded, nearly napping, suddenly there came a tapping, As of some
+ one gently rapping, rapping at my chamber door. ``\,'Tis some
+ visitor,'' I muttered, ``tapping at my chamber door--- Only this and
+ nothing more.''
+\end{solution}
+\end{verbatim}
+then there will be 2 inches of blank space inserted (as if you had
+given the command \verb"\vspace*{2in}"; see
+section~\ref{sec:BlankSpace}) when solutions are not being printed, if
+you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{solutionorbox}[2in]
+ Once upon a midnight dreary, while I pondered, weak and weary, Over
+ many a quaint and curious volume of forgotten lore--- While I
+ nodded, nearly napping, suddenly there came a tapping, As of some
+ one gently rapping, rapping at my chamber door. ``\,'Tis some
+ visitor,'' I muttered, ``tapping at my chamber door--- Only this and
+ nothing more.''
+\end{solutionorbox}
+\end{verbatim}
+then there will be an empty box 2 inches tall inserted (as if you had
+given the command \verb"\makeemptybox{2in}"; see
+section~\ref{sec:EmptyBox}) when solutions are not being printed, if
+you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{solutionorlines}[2in]
+ Once upon a midnight dreary, while I pondered, weak and weary, Over
+ many a quaint and curious volume of forgotten lore--- While I
+ nodded, nearly napping, suddenly there came a tapping, As of some
+ one gently rapping, rapping at my chamber door. ``\,'Tis some
+ visitor,'' I muttered, ``tapping at my chamber door--- Only this and
+ nothing more.''
+\end{solutionorlines}
+\end{verbatim}
+then there will be 2 inches of lined space inserted (as if you had
+given the command \verb"\fillwithlines{2in}"; see
+section~\ref{sec:FillLines}) when solutions are not being printed, if
+you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{solutionordottedlines}[2in]
+ Once upon a midnight dreary, while I pondered, weak and weary, Over
+ many a quaint and curious volume of forgotten lore--- While I
+ nodded, nearly napping, suddenly there came a tapping, As of some
+ one gently rapping, rapping at my chamber door. ``\,'Tis some
+ visitor,'' I muttered, ``tapping at my chamber door--- Only this and
+ nothing more.''
+\end{solutionordottedlines}
+\end{verbatim}
+then there will be 2 inches of dotted lined space inserted (as if you
+had given the command \verb"\fillwithdottedlines{2in}"; see
+section~\ref{sec:FillDotLines}) when solutions are not being printed.
+and if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{solutionorgrid}[2in]
+ Once upon a midnight dreary, while I pondered, weak and weary, Over
+ many a quaint and curious volume of forgotten lore--- While I
+ nodded, nearly napping, suddenly there came a tapping, As of some
+ one gently rapping, rapping at my chamber door. ``\,'Tis some
+ visitor,'' I muttered, ``tapping at my chamber door--- Only this and
+ nothing more.''
+\end{solutionordottedlines}
+\end{verbatim}
+then there will be 2 inches of grid inserted (as if you had given the
+command \verb"\fillwithgrid{2in}"; see section~\ref{sec:FillGrid})
+when solutions are not being printed.
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Cancelling the space from the optional arguments}
+\label{sec:cancelspace}
+\indcstart{cancelspace}
+\indcstart{nocancelspace}
+
+If you've typed any of the environments \texttt{solution},
+\texttt{solutionorbox}, \texttt{solutionorlines},
+\texttt{solutionordottedlines}, or \texttt{solutionorgrid} (see
+section~\ref{sec:SolEnv}), and you've
+\begin{itemize}
+\item included an optional argument to leave space for answers when
+ solutions are not being printed, but
+\item you would now like to print the exam \emph{without} printing the
+ solutions and \emph{without} leaving space for the answers,
+\end{itemize}
+then you can cancel the space that would be created by the optional
+arguments by using the
+\texttt{cancelspace}\indt{cancelspace}\indcsub{documentclass}{options}
+document class option. That is, if you use the \verb"\documentclass"
+command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\documentclass[cancelspace]{exam}"
+\end{center}
+then optional arguments to any of the four solution environments will
+be ignored. There are also commands \verb"\cancelspace" and
+\verb"\nocancelspace"; using the document class option
+\texttt{cancelspace} is equivalent to giving the command
+\verb"\cancelspace" at the beginning of the file. The command
+\verb"\nocancelspace" reverts to the default situation (in which the
+optional arguments are not ignored).
+
+The document class option \texttt{cancelspace} has no effect at all if
+solutions are being printed.
+
+\emph{Note:} The document class option \texttt{cancelspace} and the
+command \verb"\cancelspace" only affect the optional arguments of of
+the five solution environments \texttt{solution},
+\texttt{solutionorbox}, \texttt{solutionorlines},
+\texttt{solutionordottedlines}, and \texttt{solutionorgrid}; they do
+\emph{not} affect any \verb"\vspace" commands that you put into the
+file.
+
+\indcstop{nocancelspace}
+\indcstop{cancelspace}
+
+\index{solution environment@\texttt{solution} environment!optional argument|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{The solutionbox environment}
+\label{sec:solutionbox}
+\indt{solutionbox}
+\index{solution!in a box}
+
+The solutionbox environment is different from the other solution
+environments (\texttt{solution}, \texttt{solutionorbox},
+\texttt{solutionorlines}, \texttt{solutionordottedlines}, and
+\texttt{solutionorgrid}), in that
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item The box is always printed, whether answers are being printed or
+ not.
+\item The argument giving the size of the box is a required argument,
+ not an optional argument, and so it should be enclosed in braces,
+ not in brackets. It can be either a length or
+ \verb"\stretch{number}". Note: \emph{It is the user's
+ responsibility to be sure that the box is large enough to hold the
+ solution!} If the solution takes up too much vertical space, then
+ it will spill out of the bottom of the box, overwriting whatever
+ follows the box.
+\item The \texttt{solutionbox} environment makes no use of the
+ \texttt{TheSolution} environment; the \texttt{solutionbox}
+ environment is completely freestanding.
+\end{enumerate}
+If answers are not being printed then only the box is printed, with
+nothing in it. If answers are being printed, then the solution is
+printed inside of the box. (The box printed by the
+\texttt{solutionbox} environment can be printed in color; for that,
+see section~\ref{sec:colorboxes}.)
+
+
+
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{solutionbox}{2in}
+ Once upon a midnight dreary, while I pondered, weak and weary, Over
+ many a quaint and curious volume of forgotten lore--- While I
+ nodded, nearly napping, suddenly there came a tapping, As of some
+ one gently rapping, rapping at my chamber door. ``\,'Tis some
+ visitor,'' I muttered, ``tapping at my chamber door--- Only this and
+ nothing more.''
+\end{solutionbox}
+\end{verbatim}
+(note that the amount of space is required, and is typed as
+``\verb"{2in}"'', rather than ``\verb"[2in]"'') and solutions are not
+being printed, then you'll get
+\begin{solutionbox}{2in}
+ Once upon a midnight dreary, while I pondered, weak and weary, Over
+ many a quaint and curious volume of forgotten lore--- While I
+ nodded, nearly napping, suddenly there came a tapping, As of some
+ one gently rapping, rapping at my chamber door. ``\,'Tis some
+ visitor,'' I muttered, ``tapping at my chamber door--- Only this and
+ nothing more.''
+\end{solutionbox}
+If solutions \emph{are} being printed, then the exact same box would
+be printed, but it would have the solution printed inside of it.
+
+\index{answer space|)}
+\index{space!for answers|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Solution box frames in color}
+\label{sec:colorboxes}
+
+The frames that are printed by the commands that create solution boxes
+can be printed in color. (By ``frame'' we mean the four lines that
+constitute the box, not any solution that may appear inside that box.)
+This includes
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the box printed by the \texttt{solutionbox}
+ environment\index{customization!\texttt{solutionbox}}
+ (see section~\ref{sec:solutionbox}),
+\item the box printed by the \verb"\makeemptybox"
+ command\index{customization!\texttt{\char`\\makeemptybox}}
+ (see section~\ref{sec:EmptyBox}),
+\item the box printed by the optional argument of the
+ \texttt{solutionorbox}
+ environment\index{customization!\texttt{solutionorbox}} (see
+ section~\ref{sec:SolEnv}), and
+\item the box printed around the solution by
+ the\index{customization!\texttt{solution} environments}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{solution},
+ \item \texttt{solutionorbox},
+ \item \texttt{solutionorlines},
+ \item \texttt{solutionordottedlines}, and
+ \item \texttt{solutionorgrid}
+ \end{itemize}
+ environments when solutions are being printed and the default
+ solution appearance (\verb"\framedsolutions") is being used (see
+ section~\ref{sec:SolBox}).
+\end{itemize}
+
+If you've given the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\usepackage{color}"\index{color package}
+\end{center}
+in the preamble of your document (i.e., after the
+\verb"\documentclass" command and before the \verb"\begin{document}"
+command), then you can give the command\indc{colorsolutionboxes}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\colorsolutionboxes"
+\end{center}
+to have the frame printed in color. The color of the frame will be
+\texttt{SolutionBoxColor}, the default value of which was created by
+the command\indc{definecolor}\indt{SolutionBoxColor}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\definecolor{SolutionBoxColor}{gray}{0.8}"
+\end{center}
+You can change the color by giving a new \verb"\definecolor" command,
+but you must do this \emph{after} the \verb"\colorsolutionboxes"
+command.
+
+To cancel color \texttt{solutionbox} frames and return to black, give
+the command\indc{nocolorsolutionboxes}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\nocolorsolutionboxes"
+\end{center}
+
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Changes depending on whether or not solutions are
+ being printed}
+\label{sec:ifprintanswers}
+\indcstart{ifprintanswers}
+
+The command \verb"\ifprintanswers" is provided in case you want to
+vary what appears on the exam in ways other than those provided by the
+solution environments (see section~\ref{sec:solutions}), the
+\verb"\CorrectChoice" command in multiple choice environments (see
+section~\ref{sec:CorrectChoice}), and the optional argument to the
+\verb"\answerline" command (see section~\ref{sec:AnsShortAns}). You
+use this command by typing
+\begin{verbatim}
+\ifprintanswers
+ Stuff to appear only when answers are being printed.
+\else
+ Stuff to appear only when answers are not being printed.
+\fi
+\end{verbatim}
+The \verb"\else" clause is optional; you can also type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\ifprintanswers
+ Stuff to appear only when answers are being printed.
+\fi
+\end{verbatim}
+If you want something printed only when answers are not being printed,
+you can type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\ifprintanswers
+\else
+ Stuff to appear only when answers are not being printed.
+\fi
+\end{verbatim}
+Since the \verb"exam" document class automatically loads the
+\verb"ifthen" package, you can accomplish the same things using the
+\verb"\ifthenelse" command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{printanswers}}
+ {Stuff to appear only when answers are being printed.}
+ {Stuff to appear only when answers are not being printed.}
+\end{verbatim}
+If you use \verb"\ifthenelse", then \verb"both" cases must be present,
+even if you leave one of them empty. Thus, e.g., if you want to print
+something only when answers are not being printed, you'd type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{printanswers}}
+ {}
+ {Stuff to appear only when answers are not being printed.}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Printing only selected solutions}
+\label{sec:selectedsolutions}
+\index{selected solution}
+\index{solution!selected}
+
+The \verb"\ifprintanswers" command can be used to print only certain
+of the solutions in an exam. To do that, you'd put the lines
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newif\ifprintselected
+\printselectedtrue
+%\printselectedfalse
+
+\newenvironment{select}
+{\ifprintselected
+ \printanswers
+ \fi
+}
+{}
+\end{verbatim}
+into your preamble (i.e., after the \verb"\documentclass" command and
+before the \verb"\begin{document}" command). That defines a
+ \texttt{select} environment, in which you can wrap any of the
+ solution environments, as in
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{select}
+ \begin{solutionorlines}[1in]
+ Only when the number is two.
+ \end{solutionorlines}
+\end{select}
+\end{verbatim}
+As long as you leave the command \verb"\printselectedtrue"
+uncommented, then everything wrapped in a \texttt{select} environment
+will be printed. If you comment out \verb"\printselectedtrue" and
+uncomment \verb"\printselectedfalse", then the \texttt{select}
+environment will have no effect.
+
+\indcstop{ifprintanswers}
+
+\index{answers|)}
+\index{solution environment@\texttt{solution} environment|)}
+\index{solutions|)}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\section{Grading tables and point tables}
+\label{sec:Tables}
+\index{grading table|(}
+\index{point table|(}
+\indcstart{gradetable}
+\indcstart{pointtable}
+
+\newlength\cwidth
+
+The \verb"exam" document class can print either
+\begin{itemize}
+\item a grading table, indexed either by question number or by page
+ number, which lists the points possible and leaves space for you to
+ fill in (by hand) the points earned (see
+ section~\ref{sec:GradeTables}), or
+\item a point table, indexed either by question number or by page
+ number, which lists the points possible but does not leave space for
+ you to fill in the points earned (see
+ section~\ref{sec:PointTables}).
+\end{itemize}
+It's also possible to print either a grading table or point table to
+cover only part of the exam (see section~\ref{sec:PartialTable}).
+
+If the exam has any bonus points (see section~\ref{sec:Bonus}), then
+the bonus points will be ignored by the tables described in sections
+\ref{sec:GradeTables}, \ref{sec:PointTables},
+and~\ref{sec:PartialTable}, but it's possible to print bonus grading
+tables and bonus point tables that list the bonus points and ignore
+the non-bonus points (see section~\ref{sec:BonusTables}) or combined
+grading tables and combined point tables that list both regular points
+and bonus points (see section~\ref{sec:CombinedTables}).
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Grading tables indexed by question number or by page
+ number}
+\label{sec:GradeTables}
+\index{grading table!by question number or page number|(}
+
+The \verb"exam" document class can print a grading table, indexed
+either by question number or by page number. That is, you can print
+\begin{itemize}
+\item a table listing the question numbers (or question titles for
+ questions created using the \verb"\titledquestion" command instead
+ of the \verb"\question" command; see section~\ref{sec:Titled}) and
+ the total points possible for each question (including all of its
+ parts, subparts, and subsubparts) and leaving space for you to fill
+ in (by hand) the points earned on each question, or
+\item a table listing each page that has at least one question, part,
+ subpart, or subsubpart with points assigned to it, the total number
+ of points possible on that page, and leaving space for you to fill
+ in (by hand) the points earned on that page.
+\end{itemize}
+In order to use this feature you must either include the optional
+argument
+\verb"addpoints"\indt{addpoints}\indcsub{documentclass}{options} in
+your \verb"\documentclass" command (as in
+\verb"\documentclass[addpoints]{exam}") or give the command
+\verb"\addpoints"\indc{addpoints} (see section~\ref{sec:addpoints}),
+and there must be only one \verb"questions"
+%
+environment\index{questions environment!only one} in the entire exam.
+In addition, you must run \LaTeX{} twice after making any changes to
+the file in order to make sure that the point values are correct on a
+grading table indexed by question number and at least three times for
+a grading table indexed by page number. (Since the table appears on
+the third run of \LaTeX{}, and the space it occupies can change the
+page on which each question falls, it may take a fourth run of
+\LaTeX{} for the table to have the points per page correct.)
+
+The command to create a grading table is
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\gradetable"
+\end{center}
+and it takes two optional
+arguments:\indc{gradetable[v]}\indc{gradetable[h]}
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item The first optional argument can be either \verb"[v]" or
+ \verb"[h]", to choose between a vertically oriented table and a
+ horizontally oriented table, and
+\item the second optional argument can be either \verb"[questions]" or
+ \verb"[pages]", to choose between a table indexed by question number
+ and a table indexed by page number.
+\end{enumerate}
+That is,\indc{gradetable[v][questions]}\indc{gradetable[v][pages]}%
+\indc{gradetable[h][questions]}\indc{gradetable[h][pages]}
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \verb"\gradetable[v][questions]" prints a vertically oriented
+ table indexed by question number,
+\item \verb"\gradetable[h][questions]" prints a horizontally oriented
+ table indexed by question number,
+\item \verb"\gradetable[v][pages]" prints a vertically oriented table
+ indexed by page number, and
+\item \verb"\gradetable[h][pages]" prints a horizontally oriented
+ table indexed by page number.
+\end{itemize}
+If you leave out the optional arguments (i.e., if you give the command
+as ``\verb"\gradetable"'') you'll get a vertically oriented table
+indexed by question number.
+
+For example, if the exam has 8 questions, each worth a total of 15
+points, and you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \gradetable[v][questions]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Question& Points& Score\\
+ \hline
+ 1& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \hline
+ 2& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \hline
+ 3& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \hline
+ 4& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \hline
+ 5& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \hline
+ 6& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \hline
+ 7& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \hline
+ 8& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \hline
+ Total:& 120&\\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+and if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \gradetable[h][questions]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Question:& 1& 2& 3& 4& 5& 6& 7& 8& Total\\
+ \hline
+ Points:&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 120\\
+ \hline
+ Score:&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+The number of points listed for a question is the sum of the point
+values for that question and all of its parts, subparts, and
+subsubparts.
+
+If those 8 questions are distributed two to a page on each of pages 2
+through 5 and if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \gradetable[v][pages]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Page& Points& Score\\
+ \hline
+ 2& 30& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \hline
+ 3& 30& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \hline
+ 4& 30& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \hline
+ 5& 30& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \hline
+ Total:& 120&\\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+and if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \gradetable[h][pages]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Page:& 2& 3& 4& 5& Total\\
+ \hline
+ Points:&
+ 30&
+ 30&
+ 30&
+ 30&
+ 120\\
+ \hline
+ Score:&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}
+ \\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\emph{Warning:} If you have a large number of questions on
+the exam, then these tables can easily become too large to fit on the
+page. If this becomes a problem, then you can either
+\begin{itemize}
+\item create grading ranges (see section~\ref{sec:PartialTable}) and
+ print several partial grading tables, making each one small enough
+ to fit on the page, or
+\item use the \verb"\multirowgradetable" or
+ \verb"\multicolumngradetable" command (see section~\ref{sec:MulRows}
+ and section~\ref{sec:MulCols}) to create a grading table with
+ multiple rows or multiple columns.
+\end{itemize}
+\index{grading table!by question number or page number|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Grading tables with multiple rows}
+\label{sec:MulRows}
+
+If you want to print a horizontal grading table but the table would be
+too large for the page, you can print a grading table with multiple
+rows by giving the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multirowgradetable{numrows}[questions or pages]"
+\end{center}
+\indc{multirowgradetable}Note that the first argument
+(\texttt{numrows}) is \emph{required}, and so it is enclosed in
+braces, but the second argument (\texttt{questions} or \texttt{pages})
+is optional, and is enclosed in square brackets, just as in the
+\verb"\gradetable" command (see section~\ref{sec:GradeTables}). For
+example, to print a grading table with 3 rows indexed by questions,
+you would give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multirowgradetable{3}[questions]"
+\end{center}
+The command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\gradetable[h][questions]"
+\end{center}
+is equivalent to
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multirowgradetable{1}[questions]"
+\end{center}
+
+The distance between the rows of a multirow table is
+\verb"\doublerulesep", the default value of which is 2.0pt. You can
+change that using a \verb"\setlength" command, as in
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength{\doublerulesep}{0.5in}"
+\end{center}
+(see section~\ref{sec:CustTable}).
+
+For example, if an exam has 16 questions, each worth a total of 15
+points, and you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \setlength{\doublerulesep}{0.25in}
+ \multirowgradetable{2}[questions]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \setlength{\doublerulesep}{0.25in}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Question:& 1& 2& 3& 4& 5& 6& 7& 8& 9\\
+ \hline
+ Points:&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15\\
+ \hline
+ Score:&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \\
+ \hline
+ \hline
+ Question:& 10& 11& 12& 13& 14& 15& 16&& Total\\
+ \hline
+ Points:&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ &
+ 240\\
+ \hline
+ Score:&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Grading tables with multiple columns}
+\label{sec:MulCols}
+
+If you want to print a vertical grading table but the table would be
+too large for the page, you can print a grading table with multiple
+columns by giving the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multicolumngradetable{numcols}[questions or pages]"
+\end{center}
+\indc{multicolumngradetable}Note that the first argument
+(\texttt{numcols}) is \emph{required}, and so it is enclosed in
+braces, but the second argument (\texttt{questions} or \texttt{pages})
+is optional, and is enclosed in square brackets, just as in the
+\verb"\gradetable" command (see section~\ref{sec:GradeTables}). For
+example, to print a grading table with 3 columns indexed by questions,
+you would give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multicolumngradetable{3}[questions]"
+\end{center}
+The command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\gradetable[v][questions]"
+\end{center}
+is equivalent to
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multicolumngradetable{1}[questions]"
+\end{center}
+
+The distance between the columns of a multicolumn table is
+\verb"\doublerulesep", the default value of which is 2.0pt. You can
+change that using a \verb"\setlength" command, as in
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength{\doublerulesep}{0.5in}"
+\end{center}
+(see section~\ref{sec:CustTable}).
+
+For example, if an exam has 10 questions, each worth a total of 15
+points, and you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \setlength{\doublerulesep}{0.5in}
+ \multicolumngradetable{2}[questions]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \setlength{\doublerulesep}{0.5in}
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
+ \cline{1-3}\cline{5-7}
+ Question& Points& Score&
+ \hspace*{-\arrayrulewidth}\hspace*{\doublerulesep}&
+ Question& Points& Score\\
+ \cline{1-3}\cline{5-7}
+ 1& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&&7& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \cline{1-3}\cline{5-7}
+ 2& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&&8& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \cline{1-3}\cline{5-7}
+ 3& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&&9& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \cline{1-3}\cline{5-7}
+ 4& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&&10& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \cline{1-3}\cline{5-7}
+ 5& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&& & & \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \cline{1-3}\cline{5-7}
+ 6& 15& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&&Total:& 150& \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}\\
+ \cline{1-3}\cline{5-7}
+
+ \cline{1-3}\cline{5-7}
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Point tables indexed by question number or by page
+ number}
+\label{sec:PointTables}
+\index{point table!by question number or page number|(}
+
+Point tables are similar to grading tables (see
+section~\ref{sec:GradeTables}), except that there is no place in the
+table to fill in the points earned.
+
+The command to create a point table is
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pointtable"
+\end{center}
+and it takes two optional
+arguments:\indc{pointtable[v]}\indc{pointtable[h]}
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item The first optional argument can be either \verb"[v]" or
+ \verb"[h]", to choose between a vertically oriented table and a
+ horizontally oriented table, and
+\item the second optional argument can be either \verb"[questions]" or
+ \verb"[pages]", to choose between a table indexed by question number
+ and a table indexed by page number.
+\end{enumerate}
+That is,\indc{pointtable[v][questions]}\indc{pointtable[v][pages]}%
+\indc{pointtable[h][questions]}\indc{pointtable[h][pages]}
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \verb"\pointtable[v][questions]" prints a vertically oriented
+ table indexed by question number,
+\item \verb"\pointtable[h][questions]" prints a horizontally oriented
+ table indexed by question number,
+\item \verb"\pointtable[v][pages]" prints a vertically oriented table
+ indexed by page number, and
+\item \verb"\pointtable[h][pages]" prints a horizontally oriented
+ table indexed by page number.
+\end{itemize}
+If you leave out the optional arguments (i.e., if you give the command
+as ``\verb"\pointtable"'') you'll get a vertically oriented table
+indexed by question number.
+
+For example, if the exam has 8 questions, each worth a total of 15
+points, and you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \pointtable[v][questions]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Question& Points\\
+ \hline
+ 1& 15\\
+ \hline
+ 2& 15\\
+ \hline
+ 3& 15\\
+ \hline
+ 4& 15\\
+ \hline
+ 5& 15\\
+ \hline
+ 6& 15\\
+ \hline
+ 7& 15\\
+ \hline
+ 8& 15\\
+ \hline
+ Total:& 120\\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+and if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \pointtable[h][questions]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Question:& 1& 2& 3& 4& 5& 6& 7& 8& Total\\
+ \hline
+ Points:&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 120\\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+The number of points listed for a question is the sum of the point
+values for that question and all of its parts, subparts, and
+subsubparts.
+
+If those 8 questions are distributed two to a page on each of pages 2
+through 5 and if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \pointtable[v][pages]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Page& Points\\
+ \hline
+ 2& 30\\
+ \hline
+ 3& 30\\
+ \hline
+ 4& 30\\
+ \hline
+ 5& 30\\
+ \hline
+ Total:& 120\\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+and if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \pointtable[h][pages]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Page:& 2& 3& 4& 5& Total\\
+ \hline
+ Points:&
+ 30&
+ 30&
+ 30&
+ 30&
+ 120\\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\emph{Warning:} If you have a large number of questions on
+the exam, then these tables can easily become too large to fit on the
+page. If this becomes a problem, then you can either
+\begin{itemize}
+\item create grading ranges (see section~\ref{sec:PartialTable}) and
+ print several partial point tables, making each one small enough
+ to fit on the page, or
+\item use the \verb"\multirowpointtable" or
+ \verb"\multicolumnpointtable" command (see
+ section~\ref{sec:PtMulRows} and section~\ref{sec:PtMulCols}) to
+ create a point table with multiple rows or multiple columns.
+\end{itemize}
+\index{point table!by question number or page number|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Point tables with multiple rows}
+\label{sec:PtMulRows}
+
+If you want to print a horizontal point table but the table would be
+too large for the page, you can print a point table with multiple
+rows by giving the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multirowpointtable{numrows}[questions or pages]"
+\end{center}
+\indc{multirowpointtable}Note that the first argument
+(\texttt{numrows}) is \emph{required}, and so it is enclosed in
+braces, but the second argument (\texttt{questions} or \texttt{pages})
+is optional, and is enclosed in square brackets, just as in the
+\verb"\pointtable" command (see section~\ref{sec:PointTables}). For
+example, to print a point table with 3 rows indexed by questions, you
+would give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multirowpointtable{3}[questions]"
+\end{center}
+The command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pointtable[h][questions]"
+\end{center}
+is equivalent to
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multirowpointtable{1}[questions]"
+\end{center}
+
+The distance between the rows of a multirow table is
+\verb"\doublerulesep", the default value of which is 2.0pt. You can
+change that using a \verb"\setlength" command, as in
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength{\doublerulesep}{0.5in}"
+\end{center}
+(see section~\ref{sec:CustTable}).
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Point tables with multiple columns}
+\label{sec:PtMulCols}
+
+If you want to print a vertical point table but the table would be
+too large for the page, you can print a point table with multiple
+columns by giving the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multicolumnpointtable{numcols}[questions or pages]"
+\end{center}
+\indc{multicolumnpointtable}Note that the first argument
+(\texttt{numcols}) is \emph{required}, and so it is enclosed in
+braces, but the second argument (\texttt{questions} or \texttt{pages})
+is optional, and is enclosed in square brackets, just as in the
+\verb"\pointtable" command (see section~\ref{sec:PointTables}). For
+example, to print a point table with 3 columns indexed by questions,
+you would give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multicolumnpointtable{3}[questions]"
+\end{center}
+The command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pointtable[v][questions]"
+\end{center}
+is equivalent to
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multicolumnpointtable{1}[questions]"
+\end{center}
+
+The distance between the columns of a multicolumn table is
+\verb"\doublerulesep", the default value of which is 2.0pt. You can
+change that using a \verb"\setlength" command, as in
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength{\doublerulesep}{0.5in}"
+\end{center}
+(see section~\ref{sec:CustTable}).
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Table entries as clickable links}
+\label{sec:Clickable}
+\index{grading table!clickable links}
+\index{point table!clickable links}
+\index{clickable links}
+
+If you put the command\indc{usepackage\{hyperref\}}\indt{hyperref}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\usepackage{hyperref}"
+\end{center}
+into the preamble of your document (i.e., after the
+\verb"\documentclass" command and before the \verb"\begin{document}"
+command) and then produce a pdf file (either using dvipdf or
+directly by using pdflatex), then
+\begin{itemize}
+\item in a grading table or point table indexed by question number the
+ question numbers in the table will be clickable links that take you
+ to the corresponding question, and
+\item in a grading table or point table indexed by page number the
+ page numbers in the table will be clickable links that take you to
+ the corresponding page.
+\end{itemize}
+If you create questions using the \verb"\titledquestion" command
+instead of the \verb"\question" command (see
+section~\ref{sec:Titled}), then a grading table or point table indexed
+by question number will show the \emph{titles} of those questions
+instead of the numbers of those questions, and those question titles
+will be clickable links that take you to the corresponding question.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Grading ranges, partial grading tables, and partial point
+ tables}
+\label{sec:PartialTable}
+\index{grading range|(}
+\indcstart{begingradingrange}
+\indcstart{endgradingrange}
+\index{range!grading|(}
+
+It is possible to define one or more ``grading ranges'', and then to
+count the points in a range and create grading tables and point tables
+that cover only that range.
+
+In more detail: You can define a grading range by choosing a name with
+which to label the range, e.g., ``myrange'', and then putting the
+command
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[] \verb"\begingradingrange{myrange}" at the start of the range
+ and the command
+\item[] \verb"\endgradingrange{myrange}" at the end of the range.
+\end{itemize}
+You can then use the commands
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \verb"\pointsinrange{myrange}"\indc{pointsinrange}, which will
+ expand to the number of points in the range,
+\item \verb"\firstqinrange{myrange}"\indc{firstqinrange}, which will
+ expand to the number of the first question in the range,
+\item \verb"\lastqinrange{myrange}"\indc{lastqinrange}, which will
+ expand to the number of the last question in the range, and
+\item \verb"\numqinrange{myrange}"\indc{numqinrange}, which will
+ expand to the number of questions in the range.
+\end{itemize}
+You can define as many grading ranges as you like, wherever you like.
+That is, grading ranges do \emph{not} need to be nested; you can begin
+the range \texttt{otherrange} somewhere in the middle of the range
+\texttt{myrange} and then end the range \texttt{otherrange} after the
+end of \texttt{myrange}.
+
+You can create a grading table or point table that covers only the
+questions in a range by using the
+\verb"\partialgradetable"\indc{partialgradetable} or
+\verb"\partialpointtable"\indc{partialpointtable} command. These are
+similar to the \verb"\gradetable" and \verb"\pointtable" commands,
+except that they each have one required argument (the name of the
+grading range) before the two optional arguments (the first of which
+must be either \verb"[v]" or \verb"[h]" and the second of which must
+be either \verb"[questions]" or \verb"[pages]"). For example, the
+command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\partialgradetable{myrange}[v][questions]"
+\end{center}
+would create a vertically grading oriented table indexed by the
+questions in the range, and the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\partialgradetable{myrange}[v][pages]"
+\end{center}
+would create a vertically oriented grading table indexed by all pages
+with points starting with the page containing the command
+\verb"\begingradingrange{myrange}" and ending with the page containing
+the command \verb"\endgradingrange{myrange}"
+
+If the exam has any bonus points (see section~\ref{sec:Bonus}), then
+the bonus points will be ignored by the \verb"\pointsinrange",
+\verb"\partialgradetable", and \verb"\partialpointtable" commands, but
+they will be counted by the \verb"\bonuspointsinrange" command (see
+section~\ref{sec:BonusTables}) and tabulated by the
+\verb"\partialbonusgradetable", \verb"\partialbonuspointtable",
+\verb"\partialcombinedgradetable", and
+\verb"\partialcombinedponttable" commands (see
+section~\ref{sec:BonusTables} and section~\ref{sec:CombinedTables}).
+
+\index{range!grading|)}
+\indcstop{endgradingrange}
+\indcstop{begingradingrange}
+\index{grading range|)}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Partial grading tables and partial point tables with
+ multiple rows}
+\label{sec:PartMulRows}
+
+If you want to print a horizontal partial grading table or partial
+point table but the table would be too large for the page, you can
+print a partial grading table or partial point table with multiple
+rows by giving the one of the commands
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multirowpartialgradetable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]"
+ \verb"\multirowpartialpointtable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]"
+\end{center}
+\indc{multirowpartialgradetable}\indc{multirowpartialpointtable}Note
+that the first two arguments (\texttt{numrows} and \texttt{rangename})
+are \emph{required}, and so they are enclosed in braces, but the third
+argument (\texttt{questions} or \texttt{pages}) is optional, and is
+enclosed in square brackets, just as in the \verb"\partialgradetable"
+and \verb"\partialpointtable" commands (see
+section~\ref{sec:PartialTable}). For example, to print a partial
+grading table with 3 rows covering the range \texttt{myrange} indexed
+by questions, you would give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multirowpartialgradetable{3}{myrange}[questions]"
+\end{center}
+The command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\partialgradetable{myrange}[h][questions]"
+\end{center}
+is equivalent to
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multirowpartialgradetable{1}{myrange}[questions]"
+\end{center}
+
+The distance between the rows of a multirow table is
+\verb"\doublerulesep", the default value of which is 2.0pt. You can
+change that using a \verb"\setlength" command, as in
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength{\doublerulesep}{0.5in}"
+\end{center}
+(see section~\ref{sec:CustTable}).
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Partial grading tables and partial point tables with
+ multiple columns}
+\label{sec:PartMulCols}
+
+If you want to print a vertical partial grading table or partial point
+table but the table would be too large for the page, you can print a
+partial grading table or partial point table with multiple columns by
+giving one of the commands
+\begin{center}
+\verb"\multicolumnpartialgradetable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]"\\
+\verb"\multicolumnpartialpointtable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]"
+\end{center}
+\indc{multicolumnpartialgradetable}\indc{multicolumnpartialpointtable}Note
+that the first two arguments (\texttt{numcols} and
+\texttt{rangename}) are \emph{required}, and so they are enclosed in
+braces, but the third argument (\texttt{questions} or \texttt{pages})
+is optional, and is enclosed in square brackets, just as in the
+\verb"\partialgradetable" and \verb"\partialpointtable" commands (see
+section~\ref{sec:PartialTable}). For example, to print a partial
+grading table with 3 columns covering the range \texttt{myrange}
+indexed by questions, you would give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multicolumnpartialgradetable{3}{myrange}[questions]"
+\end{center}
+The command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\partialgradetable{myrange}[v][questions]"
+\end{center}
+is equivalent to
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\multicolumnpartialgradetable{1}{myrange}[questions]"
+\end{center}
+
+The distance between the columns of a multicolumn table is
+\verb"\doublerulesep", the default value of which is 2.0pt. You can
+change that using a \verb"\setlength" command, as in
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength{\doublerulesep}{0.5in}"
+\end{center}
+(see section~\ref{sec:CustTable}).
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{\texttt{\bs pointsofquestion}}
+\label{sec:pointsofq}
+
+If you use the document class option \verb"addpoints"\indt{addpoints}
+(as in
+\verb"\documentclass[addpoints]{exam}"\indcsub{documentclass}{options})
+or give the command \verb"\addpoints"\indc{addpoints} (see
+section~\ref{sec:addpoints}), then you can use
+the\indc{pointsofquestion}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pointsofquestion"
+\end{center}
+command. This command takes one argument, which must be the number of
+a question on the exam, and it prints the total number of points for
+that question. That is:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \verb"\pointsofquestion{1}" prints the sum of the point values
+ for question 1 and all of its parts, subparts, and subsubparts.
+\item \verb"\pointsofquestion{2}" prints the sum of the point values
+ for question 2 and all of its parts, subparts, and subsubparts.
+\item Etc.
+\end{itemize}
+The \verb"\pointsofquestion" command is used by the \verb"\gradetable"
+and \verb"\pointtable" commands (see section~\ref{sec:Tables}),
+and it can be used to create a table using \LaTeX's \verb"tabular"
+environment when the tables produced using the \verb"\gradetable" and
+\verb"\pointtable" commands either don't fit on the page or are
+unsuitable for some other reason. It can also be used in a
+\verb"\qformat" command to list the total number of points of all
+parts, subparts, and subsubparts of a question on the line with the
+question number (see section~\ref{sec:adding}).
+
+The \verb"\pointsofquestion"\indc{pointsofquestion} command ignores
+any bonus points that you may have created (see
+section~\ref{sec:Bonus}). The \verb"\bonuspointsofquestion" command,
+however, counts the bonus points (see section~\ref{sec:BonusTables}).
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{\texttt{\bs pointsonpage}}
+\label{sec:pointsonp}
+
+If you use the document class option \verb"addpoints"\indt{addpoints}
+(as in
+\verb"\documentclass[addpoints]{exam}"\indcsub{documentclass}{options})
+or give the command \verb"\addpoints"\indc{addpoints} (see
+section~\ref{sec:addpoints}), then you can use the
+\verb"\pointsonpage"\indc{pointsonpage} command. This command takes
+one argument, which must be the number of a page of the exam, and it
+prints the total number of points for all the questions, parts,
+subparts, and subsubparts on that page. That is:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \verb"\pointsonpage{1}" prints the sum of the point values for
+ all questions, etc., on page 1,
+\item \verb"\pointsonpage{2}" prints the sum of the point values for
+ all questions, etc., on page 2,
+\item Etc.
+\end{itemize}
+This command can be used to create a table using \LaTeX's
+\verb"tabular" environment when the tables produced using the
+\verb"\gradetable" and \verb"\pointtable" commands either don't fit on
+the page or are unsuitable for some other reason. It can also be used
+in headers and footers to print on each page the total number of
+points available on that page; for example, the command
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \runningfooter{}
+ {}
+ {Points earned: \makebox[1in]{\hrulefill}
+ out of a possible \pointsonpage{\thepage} points}
+\end{verbatim}
+\indcsub{pointsonpage}{in footer} (see
+section~\ref{sec:runningfooter}) will produce the footer
+\samplefoot{}{}{}{Points earned: \makebox[1in]{\hrulefill} out of a
+ possible 20 points} on all pages after the first. (For another
+example, see section~\ref{sec:PtsPgEx})
+
+\textbf{Caution:} The command \verb"\pointsonpage{\thepage}" will work
+reliably only in headers and footers, since the command
+%
+\verb"\thepage"\indcsub{thepage}{reliable only in headers and footers}
+will work reliably only in headers and footers.
+
+The \verb"\pointsonpage" command ignores any bonus points that you may
+have created (see section~\ref{sec:Bonus}). The
+\verb"\bonuspointsonpage" command, however, counts the bonus points
+(see section~\ref{sec:BonusTables}).
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Bonus grading tables and bonus point tables}
+\label{sec:BonusTables}
+\index{grading table!bonus|(}
+\index{point table!bonus|(}
+
+If your exam contains any bonus
+%
+points\index{bonus points}\index{points!bonus} (see
+section~\ref{sec:Bonus}), then those bonus points will be ignored by
+the grading table and point table commands described in sections
+\ref{sec:GradeTables}, \ref{sec:PointTables},
+and~\ref{sec:PartialTable} and by the
+\verb"\pointsofquestion"\indc{pointsofquestion} (see
+section~\ref{sec:pointsofq}) and
+\verb"\pointsonpage"\indc{pointsonpage} (see
+section~\ref{sec:pointsonp}) commands. There are, however, analogous
+commands that count only the bonus points and ignore the non-bonus
+points. (There are also commands that create tables listing both
+non-bonus and bonus points; see section~\ref{sec:CombinedTables}.)
+These commands, and the non-bonus commands to which they correspond,
+are as follows:
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad\qquad}l}
+ Bonus points& Non-bonus points\\[\bigskipamount]
+ \verb"\bonusgradetable"& \verb"\gradetable"\\
+ \verb"\multirowbonusgradetable"& \verb"\multirowgradetable"\\
+ \verb"\multicolumnbonusgradetable"& \verb"\multicolumngradetable"\\
+ \verb"\bonuspointtable"& \verb"\pointtable"\\
+ \verb"\multirowbonuspointtable"& \verb"\multirowpointtable"\\
+ \verb"\multicolumnbonuspointtable"&
+ \verb"\multicolumnpointtable"\\[\medskipamount]
+ \verb"\partialbonusgradetable"& \verb"\partialgradetable"\\
+ \verb"\multirowpartialbonusgradetable"&
+ \verb"\multirowpartialgradetable"\\
+ \verb"\multicolumnpartialbonusgradetable"&
+ \verb"\multicolumnpartialgradetable"\\
+ \verb"\partialbonuspointtable"&
+ \verb"\partialpointtable"\\
+ \verb"\multirowpartialbonuspointtable"&
+ \verb"\multirowpartialpointtable"\\
+ \verb"\multicolumnpartialbonuspointtable"&
+ \verb"\multicolumnpartialpointtable"\\[\medskipamount]
+ \verb"\bonuspointsinrange"& \verb"\pointsinrange"\\
+ \verb"\bonuspointsofquestion"& \verb"\pointsofquestion"\\
+ \verb"\bonuspointsonpage"& \verb"\pointsonpage"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\indc{bonusgradetable}\indc{bonuspointtable}%
+\indc{bonuspointsinrange}\indc{partialbonusgradetable}%
+\indc{partialbonuspointtable}\indc{bonuspointsofquestion}%
+\indc{bonuspointsonpage}%
+\indc{multirowbonusgradetable}%
+\indc{multicolumnbonusgradetable}%
+\indc{multirowbonuspointtable}%
+\indc{multicolumnbonuspointtable}%
+\indc{multirowpartialbonusgradetable}%
+\indc{multicolumnpartialbonusgradetable}%
+\indc{multirowpartialbonuspointtable}%
+\indc{multicolumnpartialbonuspointtable}%
+All of the the commands in the first column count bonus points and
+ignore non-bonus points, while all of the commands in the second
+column count non-bonus points and ignore bonus points. The commands
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\partialbonusgradetable",\\
+ \verb"\multirowpartialbonusgradetable",\\
+ \verb"\multicolumnpartialbonusgradetable",\\
+ \verb"\partialbonuspointtable",\\
+ \verb"\multirowpartialbonuspointtable", and\\
+ \verb"\multicolumnpartialbonuspointtable"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+use the same \verb"\begingradingrange"\indc{begingradingrange} and
+\verb"\endgradingrange"\indc{endgradingrange} commands that are used
+by the corresponding non-bonus versions (see
+section~\ref{sec:PartialTable}). Just as is described in
+section~\ref{sec:Clickable} for their non-bonus counterparts, if you
+put the command\indc{usepackage\{hyperref\}}\indt{hyperref}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\usepackage{hyperref}"
+\end{center}
+into the preamble of your document (i.e., after the
+\verb"\documentclass" command and before the \verb"\begin{document}"
+command) and then produce a pdf file (either using dvipdf or
+directly by using pdflatex),
+%
+then\index{clickable links}
+\begin{itemize}
+\item in a bonus grading table or bonus point table indexed by
+ question number, the question numbers (or question titles, if you
+ used \verb"\bonustitledquestion"; see section~\ref{sec:Bonus}) in
+ the table will be clickable links that take you to the corresponding
+ question, and
+\item in a bonus grading table or bonus point table indexed by page
+ number the page numbers in the table will be clickable links that
+ take you to the corresponding page.
+\end{itemize}
+
+For example, if the exam has 8 questions, with each odd numbered
+question worth a total of 10 regular points and each even numbered
+question worth a total of 5 bonus points, and you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \bonusgradetable[h][questions]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Question:& 1& 2& 3& 4& 5& 6& 7& 8& Total\\
+ \hline
+ Bonus Points:&
+ 0&
+ 5&
+ 0&
+ 5&
+ 0&
+ 5&
+ 0&
+ 5&
+ 20\\
+ \hline
+ Score:&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&\\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\index{point table!bonus|)}
+\index{grading table!bonus|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Combined grading tables and combined point tables}
+\label{sec:CombinedTables}
+\index{grading table!combined|(}
+\index{point table!combined|(}
+
+
+There are commands for producing \emph{combined} grading and point
+tables, both partial and full, that tabulate both regular points and
+bonus points (see section~\ref{sec:Bonus}). The single-row and
+single-column versions of these commands, and the
+non-bonus and bonus commands to which they correspond, are
+\indc{combinedgradetable}\indc{combinedpointtable}%
+\indc{partialcombinedgradetable}\indc{partialcombinedpointtable}%
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\enskip}l@{\enskip}l}
+ Non-Bonus points only& \multicolumn{1}{c}{Bonus points only}&
+ \multicolumn{1}{c}{Combined}\\[\medskipamount]
+ \verb"\gradetable"& \verb"\bonusgradetable"&
+ \verb"\combinedgradetable"\\
+ \verb"\pointtable"& \verb"\bonuspointtable"&
+ \verb"\combinedpointtable"\\
+ \verb"\partialgradetable"& \verb"\partialbonusgradetable"&
+ \verb"\partialcombinedgradetable"\\
+ \verb"\partialpointtable"& \verb"\partialbonuspointtable"&
+ \verb"\partialcombinedpointtable"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+The first two commands in each column take two optional arguments, the
+first being either \verb"[v]" or \verb"[h]" and the second being
+either \verb"[questions]" or \verb"[pages]". The last two commands in
+each column take one required argument, the name of the grading range
+(defined using the \verb"\begingradingrange" and
+\verb"\endgradingrange" commands; see section~\ref{sec:PartialTable}),
+and then the same two optional arguments as the other commands (the
+first being either \verb"[v]" or \verb"[h]" and the second being
+either \verb"[questions]" or \verb"[pages]").
+
+The multirow and multicolumn versions of combined grading tables and
+combined point tables are produced by the commands
+\indc{multirowcombinedgradetable}%
+\indc{multirowcombinedpointtable}%
+\indc{multirowpartialcombinedgradetable}%
+\indc{multirowpartialcombinedpointtable}%
+\indc{multicolumncombinedgradetable}%
+\indc{multicolumncombinedpointtable}%
+\indc{multicolumnpartialcombinedgradetable}%
+\indc{multicolumnpartialcombinedpointtable}%
+\begin{verbatim}
+\multirowcombinedgradetable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+\multirowcombinedpointtable{numrows}[questions or pages]
+\multirowpartialcombinedgradetable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+\multirowpartialcombinedpointtable{numrows}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+\multicolumncombinedgradetable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+\multicolumncombinedpointtable{numcols}[questions or pages]
+\multicolumnpartialcombinedgradetable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+\multicolumnpartialcombinedpointtable{numcols}{rangename}[questions or pages]
+\end{verbatim}
+The distance between the rows of a multirow table and between the
+columns of a multicolumn table is \verb"\doublerulesep", the default
+value of which is 2.0pt. You can change that using a
+\verb"\setlength" command, as in
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\setlength{\doublerulesep}{0.5in}"
+\end{center}
+(see section~\ref{sec:CustTable}).
+
+
+
+Just as is described in section~\ref{sec:Clickable} for their regular
+points and section~\ref{sec:BonusTables} for bonus points, if you put
+the
+%
+command\index{clickable links}\indc{usepackage\{hyperref\}}%
+\indt{hyperref}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\usepackage{hyperref}"
+\end{center}
+into the preamble of your document (i.e., after the
+\verb"\documentclass" command and before the \verb"\begin{document}"
+command) and then produce a pdf file (either using dvipdf or
+directly by using pdflatex), then
+\begin{itemize}
+\item in a combined grading table or combined point table indexed by
+ question number, the question numbers (or question titles, if you
+ used either \verb"\titledquestion" (see section~\ref{sec:Titled}) or
+ \verb"\bonustitledquestion" (see section~\ref{sec:Bonus})) in the
+ table will be clickable links that take you to the corresponding
+ question, and
+\item in a combined grading table or combined point table indexed by
+ page number the page numbers in the table will be clickable links
+ that take you to the corresponding page.
+\end{itemize}
+
+For example, if the exam has 8 questions, with each odd numbered
+question worth a total of 10 regular points and each even numbered
+question worth a total of 5 bonus points, and you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \combinedgradetable[h][questions]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Question:& 1& 2& 3& 4& 5& 6& 7& 8& Total\\
+ \hline
+ Points:&
+ 10&
+ 0&
+ 10&
+ 0&
+ 10&
+ 0&
+ 10&
+ 0&
+ 40\\
+ \hline
+ Bonus Points:&
+ 0&
+ 5&
+ 0&
+ 5&
+ 0&
+ 5&
+ 0&
+ 5&
+ 20\\
+ \hline
+ Score:&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&\\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\index{point table!combined|)}
+\index{grading table!combined|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Changing the total points in a table}
+\label{sec:Totalpoints}
+\index{grading table!changing total points|(}
+\index{point table!changing total points|(}
+
+
+There are commands for changing the total points and total bonus
+points in grading and point tables, so that the stated point total
+will not equal the sum of the point values in the table. These
+commands are intended for exams in which the students are required to
+do some subset of the problems, but not all of them, and so the total
+number of points possible on the exam is less than the sum of the
+points for all of the questions. The commands
+are\indc{settabletotalpoints}\indc{settabletotalbonuspoints}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \verb"\settabletotalpoints"\\
+ \verb"\settabletotalbonuspoints"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+Each of those commands takes one argument. After giving the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\settabletotalpoints{number}"
+\end{center}
+any grading or point table (regular or combined, partial or full) will
+list the total points as \texttt{number} instead of the actual total
+number of points in the table. After giving the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\settabletotalbonuspoints{number}"
+\end{center}
+any grading or point table (bonus or combined, partial or full) will
+list the total bonus points as \texttt{number} instead of the actual
+total number of bonus points in the table.
+
+To have these commands affect only a single table, confine the command
+and the command to create the table inside of a group (possibly by
+just placing those commands inside of a \texttt{center} environment).
+For example, if an exam has 8 questions, each worth 10 points, and the
+students are required to do any 6 of the 8, then the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \settabletotalpoints{60}
+ \gradetable[h][questions]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Question:& 1& 2& 3& 4& 5& 6& 7& 8& Total\\
+ \hline
+ Points:&
+ 10&
+ 10&
+ 10&
+ 10&
+ 10&
+ 10&
+ 10&
+ 10&
+ 60\\
+ \hline
+ Score:&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&\\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+and no other tables will be affected by that
+\verb"\settabletotalpoints" command.
+
+\index{point table!changing total points|)}
+\index{grading table!changing total points|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Customizing the tables}
+\label{sec:CustTable}
+\index{customization!grading table|(}
+\index{customization!point table|(}
+\index{grade table!customization|(}
+\index{point table!customization|(}
+
+There are four ways in which you can customize the appearance of
+grading tables and point tables:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item You can change the words (and the fonts) that appear in the
+ table.
+\item You can change the minimum width of the blank cells into which
+ you will write the scores.
+\item You can change the value of
+ \verb"\baselinestretch"\indc{baselinestretch} used for the table.
+\item You can change the distance between the rows in a multirow table
+ and the distance between the columns in a multicolumn table.
+\end{itemize}
+For all grading and point tables:\indc{gradetablestretch}\indc{cellwidth}
+\indc{doublerulesep}%
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}p{3in}}
+ \verb"\cellwidth{length}"& sets the minimum width of the blank cells to
+ \verb"length"\\[\medskipamount]
+ \verb"\gradetablestretch{number}"& uses \verb"number" as the
+ \verb"\baselinestretch"\\[\medskipamount]
+ \verb"\setlength{\doublerulesep}{length}"& sets the distance
+ between the columns of a multicolumn table and the distance
+ between the rows of a multirow table to \verb"length".
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+For vertical non-bonus tables:
+% (i.e., tables created by
+% \verb"\gradetable[v]", \verb"\multicolumngradetable",
+% \verb"\pointtable[v]", \verb"\multicolumnpointtable",
+% \verb"\partialgradetable{rangename}[v]",
+% \verb"\multicolumnpartialgradetable",
+% \verb"\partialpointtable{rangename}[v]", or
+% \verb"\multicolumnpartialpointtable"):%
+\indc{vqword}\indc{vpgword}\indc{vpword}\indc{vsword}\indc{vtword}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l}
+ Command& \multicolumn{1}{c}{Effect}\\[\medskipamount]
+ \verb"\vqword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Question''\\
+ \verb"\vpgword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Page''\\
+ \verb"\vpword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Points''\\
+ \verb"\vsword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Score''\\
+ \verb"\vtword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Total:''
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+For horizontal non-bonus tables:
+% (i.e., tables created by
+% \verb"\gradetable[h]", \verb"\pointtable[h]",
+% \verb"\partialgradetable{rangename}[h]", or
+% \verb"\partialpointtable{rangename}[h]"):%
+\indc{hqword}\indc{hpgword}\indc{hpword}\indc{hsword}\indc{htword}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l}
+ Command& \multicolumn{1}{c}{Effect}\\[\medskipamount]
+ \verb"\hqword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Question:''\\
+ \verb"\hpgword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Page:''\\
+ \verb"\hpword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Points:''\\
+ \verb"\hsword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Score:''\\
+ \verb"\htword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Total''
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+For vertical bonus tables:
+% (i.e., tables created by
+% \verb"\bonusgradetable[v]", \verb"\bonuspointtable[v]",
+% \verb"\partialbonusgradetable{rangename}[v]", or
+% \verb"\partialbonuspointtable{rangename}[v]"):
+\indc{bvqword}\indc{bvpgword}\indc{bvpword}\indc{bvsword}%
+\indc{bvtword}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l}
+ Command& \multicolumn{1}{c}{Effect}\\[\medskipamount]
+ \verb"\bvqword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Question''\\
+ \verb"\bvpgword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Page''\\
+ \verb"\bvpword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Bonus Points''\\
+ \verb"\bvsword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Score''\\
+ \verb"\bvtword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Total:''
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+For horizontal bonus tables:
+% (i.e., tables created by
+% \verb"\bonusgradetable[h]", \\
+% \verb"\bonuspointtable[h]",
+% \verb"\partialbonusgradetable{rangename}[h]", or\\
+% \verb"\partialbonuspointtable{rangename}[h]"):
+\indc{bhqword}%
+\indc{bhpgword}\indc{bhpword}\indc{bhsword}\indc{bhtword}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l}
+ Command& \multicolumn{1}{c}{Effect}\\[\medskipamount]
+ \verb"\bhqword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Question:''\\
+ \verb"\bhpgword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Page:''\\
+ \verb"\bhpword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Bonus Points:''\\
+ \verb"\bhsword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Score:''\\
+ \verb"\bhtword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Total''
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+For vertical combined tables:
+% (i.e., tables created by
+% \verb"\combinedgradetable[v]",\\
+% \verb"\combinedpointtable[v]",
+% \verb"\partialcombinedgradetable{rangename}[v]", or\\
+% \verb"\partialcombinedpointtable{rangename}[v]"):
+\indc{cvqword}%
+\indc{cvpgword}\indc{cvpword}\indc{cvbpword}\indc{cvsword}%
+\indc{cvtword}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l}
+ Command& \multicolumn{1}{c}{Effect}\\[\medskipamount]
+ \verb"\cvqword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Question''\\
+ \verb"\cvpgword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Page''\\
+ \verb"\cvpword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Points''\\
+ \verb"\cvbpword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Bonus Points''\\
+ \verb"\cvsword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Score''\\
+ \verb"\cvtword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Total:''
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+For horizontal combined tables:
+% (i.e., tables created by
+% \verb"\combinedgradetable[h]", \\
+% \verb"\combinedpointtable[h]",
+% \verb"\partialcombinedgradetable{rangename}[h]", or\\
+% \verb"\partialcombinedpointtable{rangename}[h]"):
+\indc{chqword}%
+\indc{chpgword}\indc{chpword}\indc{chbpword}\indc{chsword}%
+\indc{chtword}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l}
+ Command& \multicolumn{1}{c}{Effect}\\[\medskipamount]
+ \verb"\chqword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Question:''\\
+ \verb"\chpgword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Page:''\\
+ \verb"\chpword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Points:''\\
+ \verb"\chbpword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Bonus Points:''\\
+ \verb"\chsword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Score:''\\
+ \verb"\chtword{text}"& substitutes \verb"text" for ``Total''
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+If you don't use any of these commands then you get the default
+values, which are defined by the commands in the following
+table:\indc{doublerulesep}\indc{gradetablestretch}\indc{cellwidth}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}l}
+ \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bfseries Defaults for grading and point
+ tables}\\*[\bigskipamount]
+ \verb"\hqword{Question:}"& \verb"\vqword{Question}"\\
+ \verb"\hpgword{Page:}"& \verb"\vpgword{Page}"\\
+ \verb"\hpword{Points:}"& \verb"\vpword{Points}"\\
+ \verb"\hsword{Score:}"& \verb"\vsword{Score}"\\
+ \verb"\htword{Total}"& \verb"\vtword{Total:}"\\[\medskipamount]
+%
+ \verb"\bhqword{Question:}"& \verb"\bvqword{Question}"\\
+ \verb"\bhpgword{Page:}"& \verb"\bvpgword{Page}"\\
+ \verb"\bhpword{Bonus Points:}"& \verb"\bvpword{Bonus Points}"\\
+ \verb"\bhsword{Score:}"& \verb"\bvsword{Score}"\\
+ \verb"\bhtword{Total}"& \verb"\bvtword{Total:}"\\[\medskipamount]
+%
+ \verb"\chqword{Question:}"& \verb"\cvqword{Question}"\\
+ \verb"\chpgword{Page:}"& \verb"\cvpgword{Page}"\\
+ \verb"\chpword{Points:}"& \verb"\cvpword{Points}"\\
+ \verb"\chbpword{Bonus Points:}"& \verb"\cvbpword{Bonus Points}"\\
+ \verb"\chsword{Score:}"& \verb"\cvsword{Score}"\\
+ \verb"\chtword{Total}"& \verb"\cvtword{Total:}"\\[\medskipamount]
+ \verb"\cellwidth{2em}"\\
+ \verb"\gradetablestretch{1.5}"\\
+ \verb"\setlength{\doublerulesep}{2.0pt}"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\bigskip
+For example, if you type
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+ \hqword{Aufgabe Nr.:}
+ \hpword{Punktzahl:}
+ \htword{\textbf{Summe}}
+ \hsword{Davon erreicht:}
+ \cellwidth{2.2em}
+ \gradetable[h][questions]
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+then you'll get
+\begin{center}
+ \cwidth=2.2em
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
+ \hline
+ Aufgabe Nr.:& 1& 2& 3& 4& 5& 6& 7& 8& \textbf{Summe}\\
+ \hline
+ Punktzahl:&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 15&
+ 120\\
+ \hline
+ Davon erreicht:&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \hbox to \cwidth{\hfill}&
+ \\
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\index{point table!customization|)}
+\index{grade table!customization|)}
+\index{customization!point table|)}
+\index{customization!grading table|)}
+
+
+\indcstop{pointtable}
+\indcstop{gradetable}
+\index{point table|)}
+\index{grading table|)}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\section{Changing the page margins}
+\label{sec:pagesize}
+\index{margins|(}
+\index{customization!margins|(}
+
+The exam document class arranges things so that you get one inch
+margins at the top, bottom, and sides no matter what size paper you
+use, as long as you use the corresponding document class option
+(\verb"a4paper", \verb"a5paper", \verb"b5paper", \verb"letterpaper",
+\verb"legalpaper", \verb"executivepaper", or \verb"landscape"). You
+can change the sizes of these margins by using the commands that
+change the size of the printed area.
+
+To change the width of the printed area, you would use the
+\verb"\extrawidth"\indc{extrawidth} command. The \verb"\extrawidth"
+command takes one argument, and enlarges the width of the printed area
+by the amount of the argument. It keeps the printed area centered as
+it changes its width. If the argument is negative, then the width of
+the printed area is decreased.
+
+For example, to enlarge the left and right margins by one half inch
+each, you would use the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\extrawidth{-1in}"
+\end{center}
+since the printed region must shrink by one inch to allow an
+additional one half inch on both sides. To decrease the left and
+right margins to three quarters of an inch each, you would use the
+command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\extrawidth{.5in}"
+\end{center}
+since the printed region must grow by one half inch to decrease both
+margins by one quarter of an inch.
+
+To change the height of the printed area, you must choose whether the
+top or the bottom of the printed area (or possibly both) should move.
+The commands for this are principally intended to allow additional
+room for large headers and footers, and so they are called
+\verb"\extraheadheight"\indc{extraheadheight} and
+\verb"\extrafootheight"\indc{extrafootheight}. For a full description
+of these commands, see section~\ref{sec:extra-room}.
+
+To move the top of the printed region (and any header that's present)
+downwards, you use the command \verb"\extraheadheight". This command
+takes one argument, and moves the top of the text and the header down
+by this amount (keeping the distance between the header and the text
+constant). Thus, to increase the top margin by three quarters of an
+inch, you would give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\extraheadheight{.75in}"
+\end{center}
+To decrease the top margin by one half inch, you would give the
+command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\extraheadheight{-.5in}"
+\end{center}
+The
+%
+\verb"\extraheadheight"\indcsub{extraheadheight}{optional argument}%
+\index{head height!first page different} command takes an optional
+argument to provide a top margin on the first page that's different
+from that on all other pages. For an explanation of this, see
+section~\ref{sec:extra-room}.
+
+To move the bottom of the printed region (and any footer that's
+present) upwards, you use the command
+\verb"\extrafootheight"\indc{extrafootheight}. This command takes one
+argument, and moves the bottom of the text and the footer up by this
+amount (keeping the distance between the footer and the text
+constant). Thus, to increase the bottom margin by three quarters of
+an inch, you would give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\extrafootheight{.75in}"
+\end{center}
+To decrease the bottom margin by one half inch, you would give the
+command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\extrafootheight{-.5in}"
+\end{center}
+The
+%
+\verb"\extrafootheight"\indcsub{extrafootheight}{optional argument}%
+\index{foot height!first page different} command takes an optional
+argument to provide a bottom margin on the first page that's different
+from that on all other pages. For an explanation of this, see
+section~\ref{sec:extra-room}.
+
+\index{customization!margins|)}
+\index{margins|)}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\section{Headers and footers}
+\label{sec:headfoot}
+\index{header|(}
+\index{footer|(}
+
+The following sections explain all of the commands that deal with
+headers and footers. There are a number of things to explain here,
+and so you may find it easier to skip these sections and instead look
+at the examples in sections~\ref{sec:beginexamples}
+through~\ref{sec:endexamples} (on pages~\pageref{sec:beginexamples}
+through~\pageref{sec:endexamples}). You can then refer back to these
+sections for the full story on whatever isn't clear from the examples.
+All of the commands described in these sections should be given in the
+preamble, i.e., after the \verb"\documentclass" command and before the
+\verb"\begin{document}" command.
+
+It's also important to remember that if you use a \verb"coverpages"
+environment (described in section~\ref{sec:coverpages}), then the
+commands described here affect only the pages in the main section of
+the exam, and not the pages of the \verb"coverpages" environment.
+There are commands for headers and footers in the cover pages that are
+analogous to the commands described in this section; for that, see
+section~\ref{sec:Coverhdft}.
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Page styles: Headers and/or footers}
+\label{sec:pagestyle}
+\indcstart{pagestyle}
+\index{header!on or off}
+\index{footer!on or off}
+
+It's the \verb"\pagestyle" command that determines whether the exam
+will have headers, footers, both, or neither. The contents of the
+header and footer are specified using the commands described in
+sections~\ref{sec:header} through~\ref{sec:rules}, but it's the
+\verb"\pagestyle" command that determines whether the header and
+footer that you construct will actually be placed onto the page. The
+\verb"\pagestyle" command should be given in the preamble, i.e., after
+the \verb"\documentclass" command and before the
+\verb"\begin{document}" command.
+
+To have both a header and a footer, give the
+command\indt{headandfoot}\indc{pagestyle\{headandfoot\}}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pagestyle{headandfoot}"
+\end{center}
+If you want every page to have a header but no footer, give the
+command\indt{head}\indc{pagestyle\{head\}}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pagestyle{head}"
+\end{center}
+To give every page a footer but no header, give the
+command\indt{foot}\indc{pagestyle\{foot\}}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pagestyle{foot}"
+\end{center}
+Finally, to omit both the header and the footer from the page, give
+the command\indt{empty}\indc{pagestyle\{empty\}}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\pagestyle{empty}"
+\end{center}
+
+
+As is true for all \LaTeX{} document classes, you can change the page
+style used on a single page by giving the command\indc{thispagestyle}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\thispagestyle{somestyle}"
+\end{center}
+somewhere on that page (where \verb"somestyle" is the style that you
+want to use on that page). This is most often needed if you use the
+\verb"\maketitle"\indc{maketitle}\indcsub{maketitle}{overriding}
+command, since that command inserts a \verb"\thispagestyle{plain}"
+immediately following the title. If you use the \verb"\maketitle"
+command and you want the entire document to use
+\verb"\pagestyle{headandfoot}", then you'll need to put the command
+\verb"\thispagestyle{headandfoot}"\indc{thispagestyle\{headandfoot\}}
+immediately after the \verb"\maketitle" command to override the
+\verb"\thispagestyle{plain}" that is inserted by \verb"\maketitle".
+
+The default page style is
+\verb"headandfoot"\indcsub{pagestyle}{default}. That is, if you don't
+give any \verb"\pagestyle" commands, then the header and footer will
+appear on every page. The default header is empty, and the default
+footer consists of ``Page $n$'' centered in the footer (where $n$ is
+the page number).
+
+\indcstop{pagestyle}
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{The three parts of the header}
+\label{sec:header}
+\index{header!three parts|(}
+
+The header is specified in three parts:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item One part to be left justified.
+\item One part to be centered.
+\item One part to be right justified.
+\end{itemize}
+There are two different ways in which you can specify the three parts
+of the header. The first uses the single command \verb"\header" to
+specify all three parts of the header, or the commands
+\verb"\firstpageheader" and \verb"\runningheader" to specify a
+different header for the first page (see
+section~\ref{sec:runningheader}). The second uses the commands
+\verb"\lhead", \verb"\chead", and \verb"\rhead", each of which can
+have an optional argument to specify a different header for the first
+page (see section~\ref{sec:lhead}). All of these commands should be
+given in the preamble, i.e., after the \verb"\documentclass" command
+and before the \verb"\begin{document}" command.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Using \texttt{\bs header}, \texttt{\bs firstpageheader} and
+ \texttt{\bs runningheader}}
+\label{sec:runningheader}
+\indcstart{header}
+\indcstart{firstpageheader}
+\indcstart{runningheader}
+
+The command \verb"\header{Text 1}{Text 2}{Text 3}" puts ``Text~1''
+into the left justified header, ``Text~2'' into the centered header,
+and ``Text~3'' into the right justified header on every page. If you
+want the header on the first page to be different from that on the
+other pages, then you should use the commands \verb"\firstpageheader"
+and
+%
+\verb"\runningheader"\index{header!different on first page}, which
+also take three arguments and affect either the first page or all
+pages except the first.
+
+
+For example, to put the header
+\samplehead{Math 115}{Second Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+on every page of the exam, you would give the command
+\begin{verbatim}
+\header{Math 115}{Second Exam}{July 4, 1776}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+If you want to use a header on the first page that's different from
+the header used on all other pages, you would use the commands
+\verb"\firstpageheader" and \verb"\runningheader" instead of
+\verb"\header". For example, if you want the above header for the
+first page, but on all pages after the first you want to have the
+header \samplehead{Math 115}{Second Exam (Continued)}{July 4, 1776}{}
+then you would give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\firstpageheader{Math 115}{Second Exam}{July 4, 1776}
+\runningheader{Math 115}{Second Exam (Continued)}{July 4, 1776}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+You can leave one or more of the three parts empty. To have the
+header
+\samplehead{Math 115}{Second Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+on the first page, with the header
+\samplehead{Math 115}{}{Second Exam (Continued)}{}
+on all other pages, you would give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\firstpageheader{Math 115}{Second Exam}{July 4, 1776}
+\runningheader{Math 115}{}{Second Exam (Continued)}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Any of the three parts of the header can have multiple lines. To
+specify where the line breaks should go, you just type \verb"\\".
+Thus, to have the header
+\samplehead{\bfseries\large Math 115\\Professor Hilbert}{}
+ {\bfseries\large First Exam\\July 4, 1776}{}
+appear on every page, you would give the command
+\begin{verbatim}
+\header{\bfseries\large Math 115\\Professor Hilbert}
+ {}
+ {\bfseries\large First Exam\\July 4, 1776}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\indcstop{header}
+\indcstop{firstpageheader}
+\indcstop{runningheader}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Using \texttt{\bs lhead}, \texttt{\bs chead} and
+ \texttt{\bs rhead}}
+\label{sec:lhead}
+\indcstart{lhead}
+\indcstart{chead}
+\indcstart{rhead}
+
+
+The command \verb"\lhead{Text}" puts ``Text'' into the left justified
+part of the header on every page. The command
+\index{header!different on first page}%
+\indcsub{lhead}{optional argument}%
+\indcsub{chead}{optional argument}%
+\indcsub{rhead}{optional argument}%
+\indcsub{lhead}{different on first page}%
+\indcsub{chead}{different on first page}%
+\indcsub{rhead}{different on first page}%
+\verb"\lhead[Text 1]{Text 2}" puts ``Text~1'' into the left justified
+header on the first page and ``Text~2'' into the left justified header
+on all other pages. The commands \verb"\chead" and \verb"\rhead" have
+similar effects on the centered and right justified parts of the
+header.
+
+
+For example, to put the header
+\samplehead{Math 115}{Second Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+on every page of the exam, you would give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\lhead{Math 115}
+\chead{Second Exam}
+\rhead{July 4, 1776}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+If you want any of the three parts to have a special version to be
+used only on the first page, then you just include that special
+version as an optional argument (enclosed in square brackets) to the
+command. For example, if you want the above header for the first
+page, but on all pages after the first you want to have the header
+\samplehead{Math 115}{Second Exam (Continued)}{July 4, 1776}{}
+then you would give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\lhead{Math 115}
+\chead[Second Exam]{Second Exam (Continued)}
+\rhead{July 4, 1776}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+You can leave one or more of the three parts empty. To have the
+header
+\samplehead{Math 115}{Second Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+on the first page, with the header
+\samplehead{Math 115}{}{Second Exam (Continued)}{}
+on all other pages, you would give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\lhead{Math 115}
+\chead[Second Exam]{}
+\rhead[July 4, 1776]{Second Exam Continued)}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Any of the three parts of the header can have multiple lines. To
+specify where the line breaks should go, you just type \verb"\\".
+Thus, to have the
+%
+header\index{header!multiple lines}
+\samplehead{\bfseries\large Math 115\\Professor Hilbert}{}
+ {\bfseries\large First Exam\\July 4, 1776}{}
+appear on every page, you would give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\lhead{\bfseries\large Math 115\\Professor Hilbert}
+\chead{}
+\rhead{\bfseries\large First Exam\\July 4, 1776}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\indcstop{lhead}
+\indcstop{chead}
+\indcstop{rhead}
+
+\index{header!three parts|)}
+
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection*{Leaving extra room for multiple line headers}
+
+See section~\ref{sec:extra-room} for a description of the
+%
+\verb"\extraheadheight"\index{header!multiple lines} command.
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{The three parts of the footer}
+\label{sec:footer}
+\index{footer!three parts|(}
+
+The footer is composed of three parts, the whole setup being similar
+to that for the header (see section~\ref{sec:header}). There are two
+different ways in which you can specify the three parts of the footer.
+The first uses the single command \verb"\footer" to specify all three
+parts of the footer, or the commands \verb"\firstpagefooter" and
+\verb"\runningfooter" to specify a different footer for the first page
+(see section~\ref{sec:runningfooter}). The second uses the commands
+\verb"\lfoot", \verb"\cfoot", and \verb"\rfoot", each of which can
+have an optional argument to specify a different footer for the first
+page (see section~\ref{sec:lfoot}). All of these commands should be
+given in the preamble, i.e., after the \verb"\documentclass" command
+and before the \verb"\begin{document}" command.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Using \texttt{\bs footer}, \texttt{\bs firstpagefooter}
+ and \texttt{\bs runningfooter}}
+\label{sec:runningfooter}
+\indcstart{footer}
+\indcstart{firstpagefooter}
+\indcstart{runningfooter}
+
+The command \verb"\footer{Text 1}{Text 2}{Text 3}" puts ``Text~1''
+into the left justified footer, ``Text~2'' into the centered footer
+and ``Text~3'' into the right justified footer on every page. If you
+want the footer on the first page to be different from that on the
+other pages, then you should use the commands \verb"\firstpagefooter"
+and \verb"\runningfooter", which also take three arguments and affect
+either the first page or all pages except the first.
+
+For example, to have an empty footer on the first page and the footer
+\samplefoot{}{}{Page 3 of 5}{}
+on all pages after the first, you would give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\firstpagefooter{}{}{}
+\runningfooter{}{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+(For an explanation of the \verb"\numpages" command, see
+section~\ref{sec:numpages}.)
+
+\indcstop{footer}
+\indcstop{firstpagefooter}
+\indcstop{runningfooter}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Using \texttt{\bs lfoot}, \texttt{\bs cfoot}, and
+ \texttt{\bs rfoot}}
+\label{sec:lfoot}
+\indcstart{lfoot}
+\indcstart{cfoot}
+\indcstart{rfoot}
+
+
+The command \verb"\lfoot{Text}" puts ``Text'' into the left justified
+part of the footer on every page. The command
+\verb"\lfoot[Text 1]{Text 2}" puts ``Text~1'' into the left justified
+footer on the first page and ``Text~2'' into the left justified footer
+on all other pages. The commands \verb"\cfoot" and \verb"\rfoot" have
+similar effects on the centered and right justified parts of the
+footer.
+
+For example, to have an empty footer on the first page and the footer
+\samplefoot{}{}{Page 3 of 5}{}
+on all pages after the first, you would give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\lfoot{}
+\cfoot{}
+\rfoot[]{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\end{verbatim}
+(For an explanation of the \verb"\numpages" command, see
+section~\ref{sec:numpages}.)
+
+\indcstop{lfoot}
+\indcstop{cfoot}
+\indcstop{rfoot}
+
+\index{footer!three parts|)}
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection*{Leaving extra room for multiple line footers}
+
+See section~\ref{sec:extra-room} for a description of the
+\verb"\extrafootheight" command.
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Leaving extra room for multiple line headers and footers}
+\label{sec:extra-room}
+
+\subsubsection*{Headers}
+\index{header!with multiple lines|(}
+
+If you specify more than one or two lines for any part of the header,
+then you may want to move the header down slightly so that it doesn't
+run off of the top of the paper. The command for this is
+\verb"\extraheadheight"\indc{extraheadheight}. You can also use the
+\verb"\extraheadheight" command to adjust the size of the text area.
+The \verb"\extraheadheight" command never changes the distance between
+the header and the text.
+
+For example, to move the header and the text an additional half inch
+down from the top of the page, you would give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\extraheadheight{.5in}"
+\end{center}
+You can also specify a negative distance to \verb"\extraheadheight" to
+move the header up closer to the top of the paper. For example, the
+command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\extraheadheight{-.25in}"
+\end{center}
+moves the header one quarter inch closer to the top of the paper.
+
+If you want to have a different value for \verb"\extraheadheight" on
+the first page from that on the pages after the first, then use the
+same syntax as in the \verb"\lhead", \verb"\chead", and \verb"\rhead"
+commands (see section~\ref{sec:lhead}): Include an optional argument
+giving the extra head height for the first page, and the required
+argument will apply only to those pages after the first. For example,
+the
+%
+command\indcsub{extraheadheight}{different on first page}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\extraheadheight[.5in]{.25in}"
+\end{center}
+gives a half inch of extra head height on the first page and a
+quarter inch of extra head height on all pages after the first.
+
+If you give an \verb"\extraheadheight"\indc{extraheadheight} command,
+it should be in the preamble, i.e., after the \verb"\documentclass"
+command and before the \verb"\begin{document}" command. The
+ \verb"\extraheadheight" command can also be used to change the size
+ of the text region (see section~\ref{sec:pagesize}).
+
+\index{header!with multiple lines|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection*{Footers}
+\index{footer!with multiple lines|(}
+
+
+To leave extra room for multiple line footers, you use the command
+\verb"\extrafootheight". To move the footer one half inch higher up
+on the paper, you would give the command\indc{extrafootheight}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\extrafootheight{.5in}"
+\end{center}
+If you wanted to move the footer an eighth of an inch lower down on
+the paper, you would give the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\extrafootheight{-.125in}"
+\end{center}
+
+If you want to have a different value for \verb"\extrafootheight" on
+the first page from that on the pages after the first, then use the
+same syntax as in the \verb"\lfoot", \verb"\cfoot", and \verb"\rfoot"
+commands (see section~\ref{sec:lfoot}): Include an optional argument
+giving the extra foot height for the first page, and the required
+argument will apply only to those pages after the first. For example,
+the
+%
+command\indcsub{extrafootheight}{different on first page}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\extrafootheight[.5in]{.25in}"
+\end{center}
+gives a half inch of extra foot height on the first page and a
+quarter inch of extra foot height on all pages after the first.
+
+If you give an \verb"\extrafootheight"\indc{extrafootheight} command,
+it should be in the preamble, i.e., after the \verb"\documentclass"
+command and before the \verb"\begin{document}" command. The
+ \verb"\extrafootheight" command can also be used to change the size
+ of the text region (see section~\ref{sec:pagesize}).
+
+\index{footer!with multiple lines|)}
+
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Horizontal rules}
+\label{sec:rules}
+\index{rule!in header or footer|(}
+\index{header!rule|(}
+\index{footer!rule|(}
+
+The \verb"exam" document class make it easy to put a horizontal rule
+under the header and one above the footer. It is also easy to do
+this for the pages after the first page without affecting the first
+page.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item The command \verb"\runningheadrule"\indc{runningheadrule} puts a
+ horizontal rule below the header on all pages after the first.
+\item The command \verb"\firstpageheadrule"\indc{firstpageheadrule}
+ puts a rule under the header of only the first page.
+\item The command \verb"\headrule"\indc{headrule} is equivalent to the
+ two commands \verb"\firstpageheadrule" and \verb"\runningheadrule".
+\item The command \verb"\runningfootrule"\indc{runningfootrule} puts a
+ horizontal rule above the footer on all pages after the first.
+\item The command \verb"\firstpagefootrule"\indc{firstpagefootrule}
+ puts a rule above the footer of only the first page.
+\item The command \verb"\footrule"\indc{footrule} is equivalent to the
+ two commands \verb"\firstpagefootrule" and \verb"\runningfootrule".
+\end{itemize}
+For example, to have the header
+\samplehead{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+on the first page, with the header
+\samplehead{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}{\hrule}
+on all pages after the first, give either the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\runningheadrule
+\header{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}
+\end{verbatim}
+or the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\runningheadrule
+\lhead{Math 115}
+\chead{First Exam}
+\rhead{July 4, 1776}
+\end{verbatim}
+For a description of the command \verb"\header" see
+section~\ref{sec:runningheader}; for a description of the commands
+\verb"\lhead", \verb"\chead", and \verb"\rhead", see
+section~\ref{sec:lhead}.
+
+\bigskip
+
+To have no footer on the first page, and the footer
+\samplefoot{\hrule}{}{Page 3 of 5}{}
+on all pages after the first, give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\runningfootrule
+\lfoot{}
+\cfoot[]{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\rfoot{}
+\end{verbatim}
+(For an explanation of the \verb"\numpages" command, see
+section~\ref{sec:numpages}.)
+
+\index{rule!in header or footer|)}
+\index{header!rule|)}
+\index{footer!rule|)}
+
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Listing the number of pages in the exam}
+\label{sec:numpages}
+
+The \verb"exam" document class defines the command
+\verb"\numpages"\indc{numpages} so that it will expand to the number
+of pages in the exam. Thus, to have the footer
+%
+\samplefoot{}{}{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}{}
+%
+you should either give the command
+\begin{verbatim}
+\footer{}{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+or the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\lfoot{}
+\cfoot{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\rfoot{}
+\end{verbatim}
+For a description of the command \verb"\footer" see
+section~\ref{sec:runningfooter}; for a description of the commands
+\verb"\lfoot", \verb"\cfoot", and \verb"\rfoot", see
+section~\ref{sec:lfoot}.
+
+Note that if your document has a \texttt{coverpages} environment (see
+section~\ref{sec:coverpages}), then those pages will not be counted in
+%
+\verb"\numpages"\indcsub{numpages}{doesn't count cover pages}; the
+\texttt{exam} document class defines the command
+\verb"\numcoverpages"\indc{numcoverpages} so that it will expand to
+the number of cover pages in the exam. If there is no
+\texttt{coverpages}\indt{coverpages}\index{environment!coverpages}
+environment, then \verb"\numcoverpages" expands to 0. The
+\texttt{exam} class also defines the command
+\verb"\totalnumpages"\indc{totalnumpages}, which expands to the sum of
+\verb"\numpages" and \verb"\numcoverpages". Note that if there are
+pages preceding a \texttt{coverpages} environment, then those pages
+will not be counted by \verb"\totalnumpages".
+
+As with all other cross referencing commands in \LaTeX, you'll have to
+run the file through \LaTeX{} \emph{twice} to be sure that
+\verb"\numpages", \verb"\numcoverpages", and \verb"\totalnumpages" are
+correct.
+
+
+
+%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Treating the last page differently}
+\label{sec:lastpage}
+\index{last page|(}
+
+If you want to vary the text that appears in the header or footer on
+the last page of the exam, you should use the command
+\verb"\iflastpage"\indc{iflastpage}. The command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\iflastpage{Text 1}{Text 2}"
+\end{center}
+expands to `Text~1' on the last page and to `Text~2' on all pages
+before the last. Thus, to have the footer
+%
+\samplefoot{}{}{Please go on to the next page\ldots}{}
+%
+on all pages before the last page and the footer
+%
+\samplefoot{}{}{End of exam}{}
+%
+on the last page, you should give the command
+\begin{verbatim}
+\footer{}
+ {\iflastpage{End of exam}{Please go on to the next page\ldots}}
+ {}
+\end{verbatim}
+or the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\lfoot{}
+\cfoot{\iflastpage{End of exam}{Please go on to the next page\ldots}}
+\rfoot{}
+\end{verbatim}
+For a description of the command \verb"\footer" see
+section~\ref{sec:runningfooter}; for a description of the commands
+\verb"\lfoot", \verb"\cfoot", and \verb"\rfoot", see
+section~\ref{sec:lfoot}.
+
+As with all other cross referencing commands in \LaTeX, you'll have to
+run the file through \LaTeX{} \emph{twice} to be sure that
+\verb"\iflastpage"\indc{iflastpage} correctly detects the last page.
+
+\index{last page|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Treating odd and even numbered pages differently}
+\index{odd pages!different from even pages|(}
+\index{even pages!different from odd pages|(}
+
+If you'd like odd and even numbered pages to be treated differently
+(perhaps because you'll be printing onto both sides of the paper), you
+should use the \verb"\oddeven"\indc{oddeven} command. The command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\oddeven{Text 1}{Text 2}"
+\end{center}
+expands to `Text~1' on odd numbered pages and to `Text~2' on even
+numbered pages.
+
+For example, to have the page number printed in the right head on odd
+numbered pages and in the left head on even numbered pages, you should
+give the command\indc{oddeven}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\header{\oddeven{}{\thepage}}%
+ {}%
+ {\oddeven{\thepage}{}}
+\end{verbatim}
+or the commands
+\begin{center}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\lhead{\oddeven{}{\thepage}}
+\rhead{\oddeven{\thepage}{}}
+\chead{}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{center}
+If you want the footer of the even numbered pages to be empty and the
+footer of the odd numbered pages to contain the centered message
+``Please continue\dots'', except that the last page of the exam should
+have an empty footer whether its page number is even or odd, then you
+should give the command\indc{iflastpage}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\footer{}
+ {\oddeven{\iflastpage{}{Please continue\ldots}}{}}
+ {}
+\end{verbatim}
+or the commands
+\begin{center}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\lfoot{}
+\rfoot{}
+\cfoot{\oddeven{\iflastpage{}{Please continue\dots}}{}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{center}
+(see section~\ref{sec:lastpage} for an explanation of
+\verb"\iflastpage").
+
+The \verb"\oddeven"\indcsub{oddeven}{only in headers and footers}
+command can be used reliably only in headers and footers. This is
+because \LaTeX{} generally processes more text than can fit on the
+current page before chooses a page break it outputs a page. When the
+\verb"\oddeven" command is encountered it will act as though it will
+appear on the current page whether it will actually be printed on that
+page or on the following page; in headers and footers this never
+creates a problem.
+
+\index{odd pages!different from even pages|)}
+\index{even pages!different from odd pages|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Questions that span multiple pages}
+\label{sec:QuesSpan}
+\index{questions!that span multiple pages|(}
+
+The exam document class provides the commands
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \verb"\ifcontinuation"\indc{ifcontinuation} and
+ \verb"\ContinuedQuestion"\indc{ContinuedQuestion} to enable headers
+ and footers that announce whether the current page is continuing a
+ question begun on an earlier page and, if so, the number of that
+ question (see section~\ref{sec:ifcontin}), and
+\item \verb"\ifincomplete"\indc{ifincomplete} and
+ \verb"\IncompleteQuestion"\indc{IncompleteQuestion} to enable
+ headers and footers that announce whether the question at the bottom
+ of the current page continues onto the next page and, if so, the
+ number of that question (see section~\ref{sec:ifincomp}).
+\end{itemize}
+\emph{These commands are only guaranteed to work reliably in headers
+ and footers.}%
+\indcsub{ifcontinuation}{reliable only in headers and footers}%
+\indcsub{ContinuedQuestion}{reliable only in headers and footers}%
+\indcsub{ifincomplete}{reliable only in headers and footers}%
+\indcsub{IncompleteQuestion}{reliable only in headers and footers} If
+you use any of them elsewhere, they may be fooled by \LaTeX's practice
+of typesetting a bit too much material to fit on a page before it
+chooses a page break and ships out the page. They also assume that
+there is only one \verb"questions" environment in the entire exam.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Questions continuing from the previous page}
+\label{sec:ifcontin}
+
+Headers and footers can announce whether the current page continues a
+question begun on an earlier page. The command\indc{ifcontinuation}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\ifcontinuation{Text 1}{Text 2}"
+\end{center}
+expands to `Text 1' if the current page begins with a continuation of
+a question begun on an earlier page, and to `Text 2' otherwise. If
+the current page does continue a question begun on an earlier page,
+then the command\indc{ContinuedQuestion}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\ContinuedQuestion"
+\end{center}
+expands to the number of that question.
+
+For example, to have the header
+\samplehead{}{First Exam}{Page 4}{}
+%
+on all pages that begin a new question and the header
+\samplehead{Question 6 continues\ldots}{First Exam}{Page 4}{}
+%
+on all pages that continue a question begun on a previous page, you
+would give the commands\indc{ContinuedQuestion}\indc{ifcontinuation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\lhead{\ifcontinuation{Question \ContinuedQuestion\ continues\ldots}{}}
+\chead{First Exam}
+\rhead{Page \thepage}
+\end{verbatim}
+(See section~\ref{sec:lhead} for an explanation of \verb"\lhead",
+\verb"\chead" and \verb"\rhead".)
+
+
+
+
+
+The \verb"\ifcontinuation" command figures out which text to use by
+checking whether there is a \verb"\question" command appearing on the
+page before any of the commands \verb"\part", \verb"\subpart",
+\verb"\subsubpart", \verb"\choice", or \verb"\CorrectChoice", and this
+works well for most pages. However, the \verb"\ifcontinuation"
+command can make mistakes on pages on which none of those commands
+appear. The default is to assume that a page with none of those
+commands continues a question begun on an earlier page, but there are
+two commands you can use to tell the \verb"\ifcontinuation" command
+that it should \emph{not} assume that:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the \verb"\nomorequestions"\indc{nomorequestions} command can be
+ used to mark the point at which the last question ends. This can be
+ useful if you want to include supplementary material (e.g., tables
+ or figures) at the end of the exam but you don't want that material
+ to be described as continuing the last question. The
+ \verb"\nomorequestions" command also tells the \verb"\ifincomplete"
+ command (see section~\ref{sec:ifincomp}) that all questions are now
+ complete.
+\item The \verb"\noquestionsonthispage" command tells the
+ \verb"\ifcontinuation" command (and the \verb"\ifincomplete"
+ command; see section~\ref{sec:ifincomp}) that this page does not
+ continue a question begun on an earlier page. This is similar to
+ the job done by the \verb"\nomorequestions" command for the pages
+ that follow the end of all of the questions. Note that if you're
+ tempted to use this command on a page that follows the end of all of
+ the questions, then you should probably use the command
+ \verb"\nomorequestions" instead.
+\end{itemize}
+
+Thus, in more detail, the command
+\verb"\ifcontinuation{Text 1}{Text 2}"
+\begin{itemize}
+\item expands to `Text 2' if
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item a \verb"\question" appears on this page before any
+ \verb"\part", \verb"\subpart", \verb"\subsubpart", \verb"\choice",
+ or \verb"\CorrectChoice", or
+ \item the command \verb"\noquestionsonthispage" has been given on
+ this page, or
+ \item the current page is before the page containing question number
+ 1, or
+ \item the current page is later than a page with the
+ \verb"\nomorequestions" command,
+ \end{itemize}
+\item and otherwise it expands to `Text 1'.
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsubsection{Questions that continue onto a later page}
+\label{sec:ifincomp}
+\indcstart{ifincomplete}
+
+Headers and footers can announce whether a question on the current
+page continues onto a later page. The command\indc{ifincomplete}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\ifincomplete{Text 1}{Text 2}"
+\end{center}
+expands to `Text 1' if the last question begun on or before the
+current page continues onto a page after this one, and to `Text~2'
+otherwise. If the last question begun on or before the current page
+does continue onto a later page, then the
+command\indc{IncompleteQuestion}
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\IncompleteQuestion"
+\end{center}
+expands to the number of that question.
+
+For example, to have the footer
+\samplefoot{\hrule}{}{Question 3 continues\ldots}{}
+%
+on all pages that end with a question that will be continued onto the
+next page, the footer
+\samplefoot{\hrule}{}{End of Exam}{}
+%
+on the last page, and the footer
+\samplefoot{\hrule}{}{Exam continues\ldots}{}
+%
+on all other pages, you would give the
+commands\indc{ifincomplete}\indc{IncompleteQuestion}\indc{iflastpage}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\footrule
+\lfoot{}
+\newcommand{\continues}{\ifincomplete
+ {Question \IncompleteQuestion\ continues\ldots}
+ {Exam continues\ldots}}
+\cfoot{\iflastpage{End of Exam}{\continues}}
+\rfoot{}
+\end{verbatim}
+(See section~\ref{sec:lfoot} for an explanation of \verb"\lfoot",
+\verb"\cfoot" and \verb"\rfoot", and section~\ref{sec:lastpage} for an
+explanation of \verb"\iflastpage").
+
+There are two situations in which you may have to give an additional
+command for the \verb"\ifincomplete" command to correctly decide if
+the current question is incomplete:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item The \verb"\ifincomplete" command expands to `Text~2' if there is
+ a \verb"\part", \verb"\subpart", \verb"\subsubpart", \verb"\choice",
+ or \verb"\CorrectChoice" command belonging to this question on the
+ following page. For those situations in which the current question
+ flows onto the next page, but there is no \verb"\part",
+ \verb"\subpart", \verb"\subsubpart", \verb"\choice", or
+ \verb"\CorrectChoice" belonging to this question on that page, you
+ should give the command\indc{addquestionobject}
+ \begin{center}
+ \verb"\addquestionobject"
+ \end{center}
+ at the end of the text of the question to inform the
+ \verb"\ifincomplete" command that some portion of the question
+ appears on that following page.
+
+\item If there are pages on which none of those commands appear, the
+ default is to assume that that page continues a question begun on an
+ earlier page. There are two commands that you can use to tell the
+ \verb"\ifincomplete" command that it should \emph{not} assume that:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item the \verb"\nomorequestions"\indc{nomorequestions} command can
+ be used to mark the point at which the last question ends. This
+ can be useful if you want to include supplementary material (e.g.,
+ tables or figures) at the end of the exam but you don't want the
+ last question on the exam to be described as incomplete. The
+ \verb"\nomorequestions" command also tells the
+ \verb"\ifcontinuation" command (see section~\ref{sec:ifcontin})
+ that all questions are now complete.
+ \item The \verb"\noquestionsonthispage"\indc{noquestionsonthispage}
+ command tells the \verb"\ifincomplete" command (and the
+ \verb"\ifcontinuation" command; see section~\ref{sec:ifcontin})
+ that this page does not contain any incomplete questions, and does
+ not continue a question begun on an earlier page. This is similar
+ to the job done by the \verb"\nomorequestions" command for the
+ pages that follow the end of all of the questions. Note that if
+ you're tempted to use this command on a page that follows the end
+ of all of the questions, then you should probably use the command
+ \verb"\nomorequestions" instead.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{enumerate}
+If you give the command
+\verb"\noquestionsonthispage"\indc{noquestionsonthispage} on a page,
+then
+\begin{itemize}
+\item an \verb"\ifcontinuation"\indc{ifcontinuation} command on that
+ page will expand to its second argument,
+\item an \verb"\ifincomplete" on that page will expand to its second
+ argument, and
+\item an \verb"\ifincomplete" command on an earlier page will not
+ assume that a question from that earlier page continues onto this
+ page.
+\end{itemize}
+The way that this command affects the \verb"\ifincomplete" command on
+earlier pages is as follows: If there is a page with no
+\verb"\question", \verb"\part", \verb"\subpart", \verb"\subsubparts",
+\verb"\choice", \verb"\CorrectChoice", or
+\verb"\addquestionobject"\indc{addquestionobject} commands, then the
+last page before that with a \verb"\question" (or \verb"\part", etc.)
+would normally be deemed to have an incomplete question; if, however,
+the page with no \verb"\question" (or \verb"\part", etc.) (along with
+all adjacent pages with no \verb"\question" or \verb"\part" etc.) has
+a \verb"\noquestionsonthispage" command, then that last page with a
+\verb"\question" (or \verb"\part", etc.) will not be deemed
+incomplete.
+
+
+\indcstop{ifincomplete}
+
+\index{questions!that span multiple pages|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Examples}
+\indcstart{lhead}
+\indcstart{chead}
+\indcstart{rhead}
+\indcstart{lfoot}
+\indcstart{cfoot}
+\indcstart{rfoot}
+
+\begin{example}
+ \label{sec:beginexamples}
+ To have the header
+ \samplehead{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+ on the first page, the header
+ \samplehead{Math 115}{First Exam, Page 2 of 5}{July 4, 1776}{\hrule}
+ on all pages after the first, and no footer on any page, give the
+ commands\indc{firstpageheader}\indc{runningheader}%
+ \indc{runningheadrule}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{head}
+\runningheadrule
+\firstpageheader{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}
+\runningheader{Math 115}
+ {First Exam, Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+ {July 4, 1776}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Alternatively, you could give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{head}
+\runningheadrule
+\lhead{Math 115}
+\chead[First Exam]{First Exam, Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\rhead{July 4, 1776}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{example}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\begin{example}
+ To have the header
+ \samplehead{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+ on the first page, no header on the pages after the first, no footer
+ on the first page, and the footer
+ \samplefoot{\hrule}{Math 115}{First Exam}{Page 2 of 5}
+ on all pages after the first, give the
+ commands\indc{runningfootrule}\indc{firstpageheader}%
+ \indc{runningheader}\indc{firstpagefooter}\indc{runningfooter}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\runningfootrule
+\firstpageheader{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}
+\runningheader{}{}{}
+\firstpagefooter{}{}{}
+\runningfooter{Math 115}{First Exam}{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Alternatively, you could give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\runningfootrule
+\lhead[Math 115]{}
+\chead[First Exam]{}
+\rhead[July 4, 1776]{}
+\lfoot[]{Math 115}
+\cfoot[]{First Exam}
+\rfoot[]{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{example}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\begin{example}
+ To have the header
+ \samplehead{\large\bfseries Mathematics 115\\
+ First Exam, July 4, 1776}%
+ {}{\large\bfseries Name:\enspace\makebox[2in]{\hrulefill}}{}
+ on the first page, the header
+ \samplehead{\large\bfseries Mathematics 115\\
+ First Exam, July 4, 1776}%
+ {}{}{}
+ on all pages after the first, an empty footer on the first page, and
+ the footer
+ \samplefoot{}{}{Page 2}{}
+ on all pages after the first, give the
+ commands\indc{firstpageheader}\indc{runningheader}%
+ \indc{firstpagefooter}\indc{runningfooter}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\firstpageheader{\large\bfseries Mathematics 115\\
+ First Exam, July 4, 1776}
+ {}
+ {\large\bfseries Name:\enspace\makebox[2in]{\hrulefill}}
+\runningheader{\large\bfseries Mathematics 115\\
+ First Exam, July 4, 1776}{}{}
+\firstpagefooter{}{}{}
+\runningfooter{}{Page \thepage}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Alternatively, you could give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\lhead{\large\bfseries Mathematics 115\\ First Exam, July 4, 1776}
+\chead{}
+\rhead[\large\bfseries Name:\enspace\makebox[2in]{\hrulefill}]{}
+\lfoot{}
+\cfoot[]{Page \thepage}
+\rfoot{}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{example}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\begin{example}
+ To have the header
+ \samplehead{}
+ {Wellesley College\\
+ Second Semester Final Examination, Spring 1993\\
+ Mathematics 115}
+ {}
+ {}
+ on the first page, the header
+ \samplehead{}
+ {Wellesley College\\
+ Second Semester Final Examination, Spring 1993\\
+ Mathematics 115 (Continued)}
+ {}
+ {}
+ on all pages after the first, the footer
+ \samplefoot{}{}{Page 3 of 10}{Please go on to the next page\ldots}
+ on all pages \emph{except the last} page, and the footer
+ \samplefoot{}{}{Page 10 of 10}{End of exam.}
+ on the last page, give the
+ commands\indc{extraheadheight}\indc{firstpageheader}%
+ \indc{runningheader}\indc{footer}\indc{numpages}\indc{thepage}%
+ \indc{iflastpage}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\extraheadheight{.25in}
+\firstpageheader{}
+ {Wellesley College\\
+ Second Semester Final Examination, Spring 1993\\
+ Mathematics 115}
+ {}
+\runningheader{}
+ {Wellesley College\\
+ Second Semester Final Examination, Spring 1993\\
+ Mathematics 115 (Continued)}
+ {}
+\footer{}
+ {Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+ {\iflastpage{End of exam.}{Please go on to the next page\ldots}}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Alternatively, you could give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\extraheadheight{.25in}
+\lhead{}
+\chead[Wellesley College\\
+ Second Semester Final Examination, Spring 1993\\
+ Mathematics 115]
+ {Wellesley College\\
+ Second Semester Final Examination, Spring 1993\\
+ Mathematics 115 (Continued)}
+\rhead{}
+\lfoot{}
+\cfoot{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\rfoot{\iflastpage{End of exam.}{Please go on to the next page\ldots}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{example}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\begin{example}
+ To have the header
+ \samplehead{}
+ {Wellesley College\\
+ Second Semester Final Examination, Spring 1993\\
+ Mathematics 115}
+ {}
+ {}
+ on the first page, the header
+ \samplehead{Mathematics 115 (Continued)}{}{Spring, 1993}{}
+ on all pages after the first, the footer
+ \samplefoot{}{}{Page 3 of 10}{Please go on to the next page\ldots}
+ on all pages \emph{except the last} page, and the footer
+ \samplefoot{}{}{Page 10 of 10}{End of exam.}
+ on the last page, give the commands\indc{extraheadheight}%
+ \indc{firstpageheader}\indc{runningheader}\indc{footer}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\extraheadheight[.25in]{}
+\firstpageheader{}
+ {Wellesley College\\
+ Second Semester Final Examination, Spring 1993\\
+ Mathematics 115}
+ {}
+\runningheader{Mathematics 115 (Continued)}{}{Spring, 1993}
+\footer{}
+ {Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+ {\iflastpage{End of exam.}{Please go on to the next page\ldots}}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Alternatively, you could give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\extraheadheight[.25in]{}
+\lhead[]{Mathematics 115 (Continued)}
+\chead[Wellesley College\\
+ Second Semester Final Examination, Spring 1993\\
+ Mathematics 115]
+ {}
+\rhead[]{Spring, 1993}
+\lfoot{}
+\cfoot{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\rfoot{\iflastpage{End of exam.}{Please go on to the next page\ldots}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{example}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\begin{example}
+ To have the header
+%
+ \samplehead{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+ on the first page, the header
+%
+ \samplehead{Question 3 continues\ldots}{First Exam}{Page 3 of 10}{\hrule}
+%
+ on all pages after the first that continue a question begun on an
+ earlier page, the header
+%
+ \samplehead{}{First Exam}{Page 3 of 10}{\hrule}
+ on all pages after the first that don't continue a question begun on
+ an earlier page, the footer
+%
+ \samplefoot{}{}{}{Question 6 continues on the next page\ldots}
+%
+ on all pages whose last question continues onto the following page,
+ and no footer on pages that don't have a question that continues
+ onto the following page, give the
+ commands\indc{runningheadrule}\indc{ifcontinuation}%
+ \indc{ContinuedQuestion}\indc{firstpageheader}\indc{runningheader}%
+ \indc{footer}\indc{thepage}\indc{numpages}\indc{ifincomplete}%
+ \indc{IncompleteQuestion}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\runningheadrule
+\newcommand{\continuedmessage}{%
+ \ifcontinuation{Question \ContinuedQuestion\ continues\ldots}{}%
+}
+\firstpageheader{Math 115}{First Exam}{July 4, 1776}
+\runningheader{\continuedmessage}
+ {First Exam}
+ {Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\footer{}
+ {}
+ {\ifincomplete{Question \IncompleteQuestion\ continues
+ on the next page\ldots}{}}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Alternatively, you could give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\runningheadrule
+\newcommand{\continuedmessage}{%
+ \ifcontinuation{Question \ContinuedQuestion\ continues\ldots}{}%
+}
+\lhead[Math 115]{\continuedmessage}
+\chead[First Exam]{First Exam}
+\rhead[July 4, 1776]{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\lfoot{}
+\cfoot{}
+\rfoot{\ifincomplete{Question \IncompleteQuestion\ continues
+ on the next page\ldots}{}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{example}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\begin{example}
+ \label{sec:PtsPgEx}
+ To have the header
+%
+ \samplehead{Math 115}{Second Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+%
+ on the first page, the header
+%
+ \samplehead{Second Exam}{}{July 4, 1776}{}
+%
+ on all pages after the first, no footer on the first page, and the
+ footer
+%
+ \samplefoot{}{Page 3 of 5}{}{Points earned: \makebox[.5in]{\hrulefill}\\
+ out of a possible 20 points}
+%
+ on all pages after the first, give the commands\indc{firstpageheader}%
+ \indc{runningheader}\indc{runningfooter}\indc{pointsonpage}%
+ \indc{thepage}\indc{numpages}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\firstpageheader{Math 115}{Second Exam}{July 4, 1776}
+\runningheader{Second Exam}{}{July 4, 1776}
+\runningfooter{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+ {}
+ {Points earned: \makebox[.5in]{\hrulefill}\\
+ out of a possible \pointsonpage{\thepage} points}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Alternatively, you could give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\lhead[Math 115]{Second Exam}
+\chead[Second Exam]{}
+\rhead{July 4, 1776}
+\lfoot[]{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+\cfoot{}
+\rfoot[]{Points earned: \makebox[.5in]{\hrulefill}\\
+ out of a possible \pointsonpage{\thepage} points}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{example}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\begin{example}
+ \label{sec:endexamples}
+ To have the header
+%
+ \samplehead{Math 115}{Second Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+%
+ on the first page, the header
+%
+ \samplehead{}{Second Exam}{July 4, 1776}{}
+%
+ on all odd numbered pages after the first, the header
+%
+ \samplehead{Question 3 continues\ldots}{Math 115}{}{}
+%
+ on all even numbered pages that continue a question begun on an
+ earlier page, the header
+%
+ \samplehead{}{Math 115}{}{}
+%
+ on all even numbered pages that don't continue a question begun on
+ an earlier page, the footer
+%
+ \samplefoot{}{}{}{Page 5 of 10\\Question 6 continues\ldots}
+%
+ on all odd numbered pages that have a question that continues onto
+ the following page, the footer
+%
+ \samplefoot{}{}{}{Page 5 of 10}
+%
+ on all odd numbered pages that don't have a question that continues
+ onto the following page, and the footer
+%
+ \samplefoot{}{Page 4 of 10}{}{}
+%
+ on all even numbered pages, give the commands\indc{ifcontinuation}%
+ \indc{thepage}\indc{numpages}\indc{IncompleteQuestion}%
+ \indc{firstpageheader}\indc{runningheader}\indc{oddeven}%
+ \indc{footer}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\newcommand{\continuedmessage}{%
+ \ifcontinuation{Question \ContinuedQuestion\ continues\ldots}{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\oddrightfoot}{%
+ \ifincomplete{Page \thepage\ of \numpages\\
+ Question \IncompleteQuestion\ continues\ldots}%
+ {Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+}
+\firstpageheader{Math 115}{Second Exam}{July 4, 1776}
+\runningheader{\oddeven{}{\continuedmessage}}
+ {\oddeven{Second Exam}{Math 115}}
+ {\oddeven{July 4, 1776}{}}
+\footer{\oddeven{}{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}}
+ {}
+ {\oddeven{\oddrightfoot}{}}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Alternatively, you could give the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pagestyle{headandfoot}
+\newcommand{\continuedmessage}{%
+ \ifcontinuation{Question \ContinuedQuestion\ continues\ldots}{}%
+}
+\newcommand{\oddrightfoot}{%
+ \ifincomplete{Page \thepage\ of \numpages\\
+ Question \IncompleteQuestion\ continues\ldots}%
+ {Page \thepage\ of \numpages}
+}
+\lhead[Math 115]{\oddeven{}{\continuedmessage}}
+\chead{\oddeven{Second Exam}{Math 115}}
+\rhead{\oddeven{July 4, 1776}{}}
+\lfoot{\oddeven{}{Page \thepage\ of \numpages}}
+\cfoot{}
+\rfoot{\oddeven{\oddrightfoot}{}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{example}
+
+
+\indcstop{lhead}
+\indcstop{chead}
+\indcstop{rhead}
+\indcstop{lfoot}
+\indcstop{cfoot}
+\indcstop{rfoot}
+\index{footer|)}
+\index{header|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\section{Cover pages}
+\label{sec:coverpages}
+\index{cover pages|(}
+\index{environment!coverpages|(}
+\indtstart{coverpages}
+
+There is a \verb"coverpages" environment that allows you to have one
+or more pages before page~1 of the exam. By default, there are no
+headers or footers printed on the cover pages, but if you put the page
+number into the headers and/or footers (using the commands described
+in section~\ref{sec:Coverhdft}), the page numbers of cover pages are
+printed in roman numerals.
+
+The \verb"coverpages" environment must begin and end \emph{before} the
+beginning of the \verb"questions" environment. You begin the
+environment with the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\begin{coverpages}"
+\end{center}
+and you end it with the command
+\begin{center}
+ \verb"\end{coverpages}"
+\end{center}
+In between those two commands you can put whatever you want, except
+that you are not allowed to begin the \verb"questions" environment
+until you've ended the \verb"coverpages" environment. The command
+\verb"\begin{coverpages}" sets the page number to 1 and causes any
+page numbers printed (using the commands described in
+section~\ref{sec:Coverhdft}) to appear as roman numerals. The command
+\verb"\end{coverpages}" causes the current page to end, sets the page
+number of the following page to 1, and changes page numbering back to
+arabic numerals.
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Headers and footers}
+\label{sec:Coverhdft}
+\index{header!on cover pages|(}
+\index{footer!on cover pages|(}
+
+By default, the headers and footers on the cover pages are empty. If
+you'd like to have headers and/or footers on the cover pages, there
+are commands to create them that are completely analogous to the
+commands described in section~\ref{sec:headfoot} for headers and
+footers in the main part of the document. The commands for headers
+and footers in cover pages and the corresponding commands for the main
+exam pages are:\indc{coverheader}\indc{coverrunningheader}%
+\indc{coverfirstpageheader}\indc{coverlhead}\indc{coverchead}%
+\indc{coverrhead}\indc{coverfooter}\indc{coverrunningfooter}%
+\indc{coverfirstpagefooter}\indc{coverlfoot}\indc{covercfoot}%
+\indc{coverrfoot}\indc{coverextraheadheight}%
+\indc{coverextrafootheight}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad\qquad}l}
+Cover Pages Commands& Main Pages Commands\\[\medskipamount]
+\verb"\coverheader"&\verb"\header"\\
+\verb"\coverrunningheader"&\verb"\runningheader"\\
+\verb"\coverfirstpageheader"&\verb"\firstpageheader"\\[\medskipamount]
+
+\verb"\coverlhead"&\verb"\lhead"\\
+\verb"\coverchead"&\verb"\chead"\\
+\verb"\coverrhead"&\verb"\rhead"\\[\medskipamount]
+
+\verb"\coverfooter"&\verb"\footer"\\
+\verb"\coverrunningfooter"&\verb"\runningheader"\\
+\verb"\coverfirstpagefooter"&\verb"\firstpageheader"\\[\medskipamount]
+
+\verb"\coverlfoot"&\verb"\lfoot"\\
+\verb"\covercfoot"&\verb"\cfoot"\\
+\verb"\coverrfoot"&\verb"\rfoot"\\[\medskipamount]
+
+\verb"\coverextraheadheight"&\verb"\extraheadheight"\\
+\verb"\coverextrafootheight"&\verb"\extrafootheight"
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+The commands \verb"\coverlhead", \verb"\coverchead",
+\verb"\coverrhead", \verb"\coverlfoot", \verb"\covercfoot",
+\verb"\coverrfoot", \verb"\coverextraheadheight", and
+\verb"\coverextrafootheight" all all take the same optional arguments
+(for special treatment of page number 1) as the corresponding commands
+for the main pages. For an explanation of these commands, see
+section~\ref{sec:headfoot}.
+
+\index{header!on cover pages|)}
+\index{footer!on cover pages|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\subsection{Listing the number of cover pages}
+\label{sec:NumCvrpgs}
+\index{cover pages!counting|(}
+\indcstart{numcoverpages}
+\indcstart{totalnumpages}
+
+The \texttt{exam} document class defines the command
+\verb"\numcoverpages" so that it will expand to the number of cover
+pages in the exam. If there is no \texttt{coverpages} environment,
+then \verb"\numcoverpages" expands to 0. The \texttt{exam} class also
+defines the command \verb"\totalnumpages", which expands to the sum of
+\verb"\numpages" and \verb"\numcoverpages".
+\emph{Note:} if there are pages preceding a \texttt{coverpages}
+environment, then those pages will not be counted by
+\verb"\totalnumpages".
+
+For an example, to have the footer
+%
+\samplefoot{}{}{Page ii of iv}{}
+on all cover pages you should either give the
+command\indc{romannumeral}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\coverfooter{}{Page \thepage\ of \romannumeral\numcoverpages}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+or the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\coverlfoot{}
+\covercfoot{Page \thepage\ of \romannumeral\numcoverpages}
+\coverrfoot{}
+\end{verbatim}
+As with all other cross referencing commands in \LaTeX, you'll have to
+run the file through \LaTeX{} \emph{twice} to be sure that
+\verb"\numpages", \verb"\numcoverpages", and \verb"\totalnumpages" are
+correct.
+
+\index{cover pages!counting|)}
+\indcstop{numcoverpages}
+\indcstop{totalnumpages}
+
+\indtstop{coverpages}
+\index{environment!coverpages|)}
+\index{cover pages|)}
+
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\clearpage
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}
+\printindex
+
+% The following is necessary to avoid warnings, since we have multiple
+% questions environments in this documentation file:
+\makeatletter
+\@pointschangedfalse
+\makeatother
+
+
+
+
+\end{document}
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
generated by cgit v1.2.3 (git 2.39.1) at 2024-12-27 16:23:26 +0000